LIS2 - 0705 - en 2

Lists 07/2005 Edition
SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/810D/840Di

SIMODRIVE 611 digital/SINAMICS
Lists (2nd Book)
Variables 1
Interface Signals sl 2
SINUMERIK 840D sl/ Interface Signals pl 3

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
SIMODRIVE 611 digital/Sinamics
PLC Blocks 4
Lists (2nd Book)
Appendix: References A
Index I
Valid for
Controls Software version

SINUMERIK 840D sl/840DE sl 1.2
SINUMERIK 840D powerline 7.3
SINUMERIK 840DE powerline (Export variant) 7.3
SINUMERIK 840Di 2.3
SINUMERIK 840DiE (Export variant) 2.3
SINUMERIK 810D powerline 7.3
SINUMERIK 810DE powerline (Export variant) 7.3
SINAMICS 2.3
07.05 Edition
SINUMERIK®-Dokumentation
Printing history
Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.
The status of each edition is shown by the code in the "Remarks" column.
Status codes in the "Remarks" column.
A .... New documentation.

B .... Unrevised reprint with new Order No.
C .... Revised edition with new status.
If factual changes have been made on a page since the last edition, this is indicated by a new edition
coding in the header on that page.
Edition Order No. Remarks
07.05 6FC5 397-3CP10-0BA0 A
Trademarks
SIMATIC©, SIMATIC HMI©, SIMATIC NET©, SIROTEC©, SINUMERIK© and SIMODRIVE© are trademarks of
SIEMENS. Other product names used in this documentation may be trademarks which, if used by third parties,
could infringe the rights of their owners.
Other functions not described in this documentation might be

Further information is available on the Internet under: executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when
servicing.
We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the

hardware and software described. Nonetheless, differences might
exist. The information contained in this document is, however,
reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the
next edition. We welcome suggestions for improvement.
Copyright © Siemens AG 2005. Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No. 6FC5 397-3CP10-0BA0 Siemens-Aktiengesellschaft.

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
07.05 Preface
Preface
With the present edition, the previous Lists with order number 6FC5 297-
7AB70-.... will be subdivided into Lists (Volume 1) and Lists (Volume 2).
Volume 1 contains:
• Overview of functions
• Maschine data (Drive 611D, Hydraulics module, HMI, NCK, SD)
• Sinamics Parameters
The table of contents refers to the present Volume 2.
SINUMERIK
Documentation
The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in three parts:

• General Documentation
• User Documentation
• Manufacturer / service documentation
Please contact your local Siemens office for more detailed information about
other SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D publications and publications that
apply to all SINUMERIK controls (e.g. universal interface, measuring cycles
etc.).
An overview of publications which is updated each month and shows the
languages available is provided on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol.
Click the menu items in the following order: "Support" "Technical
Documentation" "Overview of Publications".
The Internet edition of DOConCD – DOConWEB - can be found at:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb
Target Group
This document is designed for machine tool manufacturers with SINUMERIK
840D sl/840D/840Di/810D controls and SIMODRIVE 611D or SINAMICS.
Standard Scope
This Programming Guide describes the functionality afforded by standard
functions. Extensions or changes made by the machine tool manufacturer are
documented by the machine tool manufacturer.
Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the
control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such
functions with a new control or when servicing.
Copyright © Siemens AG 2005

SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D SIMODRIVE 611 digital/Sinamics Lists (LIS2) - 07.05 Edition v
Preface 07.05
Hotline
If you have any questions, please get in touch with our hotline:
A&D Technical Support
Tel.: +49 (0) 180 / 5050 - 222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 / 5050 - 223
E-Mail: mailto:adsupport@siemens.com
Internet: http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request
Please send any queries about the documentation (suggestions or corrections)
to the following fax number or e-mail address:
Fax: +49 (0) 9131 / 98 - 63315
E-Mail: motioncontrol.docu@siemens.com
Fax form: See the reply form at the end of the document.
Internet Address
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol

vi SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D SIMODRIVE 611 digital/Sinamics Lists (LIS2) - 07.05 Edition
07.05 Preface
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your
personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring
to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol,
notices referring to property damage only have no safety alert symbol. These
notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger.
Danger
! indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions
are not taken.
Warning
! indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions
are not taken.
Caution
! with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if
proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if
proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding
information is not taken into account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing
the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons
with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this
documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be
performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes in this
documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to
commission, ground and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with
established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
! This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or
the technical description and only in connection with devices or components
from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by
Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport,
storage, positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and
maintenance.

SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D SIMODRIVE 611 digital/Sinamics Lists (LIS2) - 07.05 Edition vii
Preface 07.05
Trademarks IBM® is a registered trademark of the International Business Corporation. MS-

DOS® and WINDOWS are registered trademarks of the Microsoft
TM
Corporation.

viii SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D SIMODRIVE 611 digital/Sinamics Lists (LIS2) - 07.05 Edition
07.05 Contents
Contents
1 Variables..................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................... 1-16

1.1.2 Module types........................................................................................... 1-18
1.1.3 Variable types ......................................................................................... 1-20
1.1.4 Data types............................................................................................... 1-22
1.2 System data .................................................................................................. 1-24

1.2.1 Area N, Mod. Y: Global system data.......................................................... 1-24
1.2.2 Area C, Mod. Y: Channel-specific system data ......................................... 1-33
1.2.3 Area N, Mod. PA: Global protection zones ................................................ 1-37
1.2.4 Area C, Mod. PA: Channel-specific protection zones................................ 1-44
1.2.5 Area N, Mod. YNCFL: NCK instruction groups.......................................... 1-51
1.3 State data of system ..................................................................................... 1-52

1.3.1 Area N, Mod. S: Global state data ............................................................. 1-52
1.3.2 Area N, Mod. SALA: Alarms: List organized according to time,
oldest alarm appears first ....................................................................... 1-71
1.3.3 Area N, Mod. SALAP: Alarms: List organized according to priority........... 1-73
1.3.4 Area N, Mod. SALAL: Alarms: Liste organized according to time,
most recent alarm appears first .............................................................. 1-75
1.3.5 Area N, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes .......................................... 1-77
1.3.6 Area N, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes (extension of SMA) ........ 1-79
1.3.7 Area N, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle ..................................................... 1-100
1.3.8 Area N, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle ................................................... 1-103
1.3.9 Area N, Mod. FA: Active NCU global frames ............................................. 1-106
1.3.10 Area N, Mod. FB: NCU global base frames ............................................. 1-107
1.3.11 Area N, Mod. FU: NCU global settable frames........................................ 1-108
1.3.12 Area N, Mod. YFAFL: NCK instruction groups (Fanuc) ........................... 1-109
1.3.13 Area B, Mod. S: Mode-group-specific state data ..................................... 1-110
1.4 State data of channel .................................................................................... 1-111

1.4.1 Area C, Mod. M: Channel-specific machine data ...................................... 1-111
1.4.2 Area C, Mod. S: Channel-specific status data ........................................... 1-112
1.4.3 Area C, Mod. SINF: Part-program-specific status data ............................. 1-143
1.4.4 Area C, Mod. SPARP: Part program information....................................... 1-146
1.4.5 Area C, Mod. SPARPP: Program pointer in automatic operation.............. 1-151
1.4.6 Area C, Mod. SPARPI: Program pointer on interruption............................ 1-153
1.4.7 Area C, Mod. SPARPF: Program pointers for block search and stop run . 1-155
1.4.8 Area C, Mod. SSYNAC: Synchronous actions .......................................... 1-158
1.4.9 Area C, Mod. SYNACT: Channel-specific synchronous actions ............... 1-161
1.4.10 Area C, Mod. SNCF: Active G functions .................................................. 1-162
1.4.11 Area C, Mod. NIB: State data: Nibbling ................................................... 1-164
1.4.12 Area C, Mod. FB: Channel-specific base frames..................................... 1-166
1.4.13 Area C, Mod. FS: Channel-specific system frames ................................. 1-167
1.4.14 Area C, Mod. AUXFU: Auxiliary functions................................................ 1-168
1.5 State data of axes ......................................................................................... 1-169

1.5.1 Area C, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes .......................................... 1-169

SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D SIMODRIVE 611 digital/Sinamics Lists (LIS2) - 07.05 Edition ix
Contents 07.05
1.5.2 Area C, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes (extension of SMA) ........ 1-171
1.5.3 Area C, Mod. SGA: State data: Geometry axes in tool offset memory...... 1-192
1.5.4 Area C, Mod. SEGA: State data: Geometry axes in tool offset memory
(extension of SGA) ................................................................................. 1-195
1.5.5 Area C, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle ..................................................... 1-201
1.5.6 Area C, Mod. FU: Channel-specific settable frames.................................. 1-205
1.5.7 Area C, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle ................................................... 1-206
1.5.8 Area C, Mod. FA: Active channel-specific frames ..................................... 1-209
1.5.9 Area C, Mod. FE: Channel-specific external frame ................................... 1-210
1.6 State data of drives ....................................................................................... 1-211

1.6.1 Area H, Mod. S: Drive-specific state data (MSD) ...................................... 1-211
1.6.2 Area V, Mod. S: Drive-specific status data (FDD) ..................................... 1-214
1.7 Tool and magazine data ............................................................................... 1-216

1.7.1 Area T, Mod. TO: Tool edge data: Offset data .......................................... 1-216
1.7.2 Area T, Mod. TD: Tool data: General data ................................................ 1-219
1.7.3 Area T, Mod. TS: Tool edge data: Monitoring data.................................... 1-222
1.7.4 Area T, Mod. TU: Tool data: User-defined data......................................... 1-223
1.7.5 Area T, Mod. TUE: Tool edge data: User-defined data ............................. 1-224
1.7.6 Area T, Mod. TG: Tool data: Grinding-specific data .................................. 1-225
1.7.7 Area T, Mod. TMC: Magazine data: Configuration data ............................ 1-227
1.7.8 Area T, Mod. TMV: Magazine data: Directory ........................................... 1-229
1.7.9 Area T, Mod. TM: Magazine data: General data ....................................... 1-230
1.7.10 Area T, Mod. TP: Magazine data: Location data ..................................... 1-233
1.7.11 Area T, Mod. TPM: Magazine data: Multiple assignment
of location data........................................................................................ 1-235
1.7.12 Area T, Mod. TT: Magazine data: Location types.................................... 1-236
1.7.13 Area T, Mod. TV: Tool data: Directory ..................................................... 1-237
1.7.14 Area T, Mod. TF: Parametrizing, return parameters
of _N_TMGETT, _N_TSEARC ............................................................... 1-239
1.7.15 Area T, Mod. TUM: Tool data: user magazine data................................. 1-247
1.7.16 Area T, Mod. TUP: Tool data: user magatine place data ........................ 1-248
1.7.17 Area T, Mod. TUS: Tool data: user monitoring data ................................ 1-249
1.7.18 Area T, Mod. AD: Adapter data................................................................ 1-250
1.7.19 Area T, Mod. AEV: Working offsets: Directory......................................... 1-251
1.7.20 Area T, Mod. TC: Toolholder parameters ................................................ 1-254
1.7.21 Area T, Mod. TOE: Edge-related coarse total offsets, setup offsets ....... 1-261
1.7.22 Area T, Mod. TOET: Edge-related coarse total offsets,
transformed setup offsets ....................................................................... 1-262
1.7.23 Area T, Mod. TOS: Edge-related location-dependent fine total offsets ... 1-263
1.7.24 Area T, Mod. TOST: Edge-related location-dependent fine total
offsets, transformed ................................................................................ 1-266
1.7.25 Area T, Mod. TOT: Edge data: Transformed offset data ......................... 1-267
1.7.26 Area T, Mod. TAD: Application-specific data ........................................... 1-269
1.7.27 Area T, Mod. TAM: Application-specific magazine data .......................... 1-270
1.7.28 Area T, Mod. TAO: Application-specific cutting edge data ...................... 1-271
1.7.29 Area T, Mod. TAP: Application-specific magazine location data ............. 1-272
1.7.30 Area T, Mod. TAS: Application-specific monitoring data ......................... 1-273
1.8 Machine and setting data .............................................................................. 1-274

1.8.1 Area N, Mod. M: Global machine data....................................................... 1-274
1.8.2 Area A, Mod. M: Axis-specific machine data ............................................. 1-276
1.8.3 Area N, Mod. SE: Global setting data ........................................................ 1-277
1.8.4 Area C, Mod. SE: Channel-specific setting data........................................ 1-278

x SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D SIMODRIVE 611 digital/Sinamics Lists (LIS2) - 07.05 Edition
07.05 Contents
1.8.5 Area A, Mod. SE: Axis-specific setting data .............................................. 1-279
1.9 Parameters.................................................................................................... 1-281

1.9.1 Area C, Mod. RP: Arithmetic parameters................................................... 1-281
1.9.2 Area C, Mod. VSYN: Channel-specific user variables
for synchronous actions.......................................................................... 1-282
1.10 Servo ........................................................................................................... 1-283

1.10.1 Area N, Mod. SD: Servo data .................................................................. 1-283
1.11 Diagnosis data ............................................................................................ 1-285

1.11.1 Area N, Mod. DIAGN: Global diagnostic data.......................................... 1-285
1.11.2 Area C, Mod. DIAGN: Channel-specific diagnosis data .......................... 1-298
1.11.3 Area N, Mod. ETPD: Data lists for protocolling........................................ 1-301
1.11.4 Area C, Mod. ETP: Types of events ....................................................... 1-302
1.12 HMI / MMC State data................................................................................. 1-307

1.12.1 Area M, Mod. S: Internal status data MMC.............................................. 1-307
2 Interface Signals solution line ................................................................................. 2-309
2.1 Data modules (DB) of the PLC application interface ..................................... 2-310
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface.......................................... 2-311

2.2.1 Signals from/to machine control panel, M version.................................. 2-312
2.2.2 Signals from/to machine control panel, T version................................... 2-314
2.2.3 Signals from/to slimline machine control panel ...................................... 2-315
2.2.4 Signals from/to handheld unit (HHU)...................................................... 2-316
2.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HT6)................................. 2-318
2.2.6 PLC messages (DB 2) ............................................................................ 2-319
2.2.7 Signals to NC (DB 10) ............................................................................ 2-323
2.2.8 Signals from/to NCK/HMI (DB 10) .......................................................... 2-324
2.2.9 Signals from/to mode group (DB 11) ...................................................... 2-334
2.2.10 Signals for Safety SPL (safe programmable logic) (DB 18) ................... 2-336
2.2.11 Signals from/to operator panel (DB 19) .................................................. 2-339
2.2.12 PLC machine data (DB 20)..................................................................... 2-344
2.2.13 Signals from/to NCK channel (DB 21–30) .............................................. 2-345
2.2.14 Signals from/to axis/spindle (PLC→NCK) (DB 31–DB 61)..................... 2-363
2.2.15 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (DB 71) ................................. 2-372
2.2.16 Interface for spindle as change position (DB 72).................................... 2-373
2.2.17 Interface for circular magazine (DB 73).................................................. 2-375
2.2.18 Signals to and from the machine control panel and HHU
(840Di with MCI2 only) (DB 77) .............................................................. 2-376
3 Interface Signals power line..................................................................................... 3-379

3.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HPU)................................ 3-388
3.2.6 PLC messages (DB 2) ............................................................................ 3-389

SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D SIMODRIVE 611 digital/Sinamics Lists (LIS2) - 07.05 Edition xi
Contents 07.05
3.2.7 Signals to NC (DB 10) ............................................................................ 3-393

3.2.8 Signals from/to NCK/MMC (DB 10) ........................................................ 3-398
3.2.19 Signals to/from ManualTurn, ShopMill, ShopTurn (DB 82) .................... 3-447
4 PLC-Blocks ................................................................................................................ 4-449
4.1 Overview of organization blocks ................................................................... 4-450
4.2 Overview of function blocks .......................................................................... 4-451
4.3 Assignment of data blocks ............................................................................ 4-453
4.4 Assigned timers............................................................................................. 4-454
A Appendix.................................................................................................................... A-455
I Index ............................................................................................................................ I-457
I.1 Index...............................................................................................................I-457

xii SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D SIMODRIVE 611 digital/Sinamics Lists (LIS2) - 07.05 Edition
07.05 1 Variables
1.1 Introduction
1 Variables
1
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................... 1-16
1.1.1 General information ................................................................................ 1-17
1.1.2 Module types........................................................................................... 1-18
1.1.3 Variable types ......................................................................................... 1-20
1.1.4 Data types............................................................................................... 1-22
1.2 System data .................................................................................................. 1-24

1.2.1 Area N, Mod. Y: Global system data.......................................................... 1-24
1.2.2 Area C, Mod. Y: Channel-specific system data ......................................... 1-33
1.2.3 Area N, Mod. PA: Global protection zones ................................................ 1-37
1.2.4 Area C, Mod. PA: Channel-specific protection zones................................ 1-44
1.2.5 Area N, Mod. YNCFL: NCK instruction groups.......................................... 1-51
1.3 State data of system ..................................................................................... 1-52

1.3.1 Area N, Mod. S: Global state data ............................................................. 1-52
1.3.2 Area N, Mod. SALA: Alarms: List organized according to time,
oldest alarm appears first ....................................................................... 1-71
1.3.3 Area N, Mod. SALAP: Alarms: List organized according to priority........... 1-73
most recent alarm appears first .............................................................. 1-75
1.3.5 Area N, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes .......................................... 1-77
1.3.6 Area N, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes (extension of SMA) ........ 1-79
1.3.7 Area N, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle ..................................................... 1-100
1.3.8 Area N, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle ................................................... 1-103
1.3.9 Area N, Mod. FA: Active NCU global frames ............................................. 1-106
1.3.10 Area N, Mod. FB: NCU global base frames ............................................. 1-107
1.3.11 Area N, Mod. FU: NCU global settable frames........................................ 1-108
1.3.12 Area N, Mod. YFAFL: NCK instruction groups (Fanuc) ........................... 1-109
1.3.13 Area B, Mod. S: Mode-group-specific state data ..................................... 1-110
1.4 State data of channel .................................................................................... 1-111

1.4.1 Area C, Mod. M: Channel-specific machine data ...................................... 1-111
1.4.2 Area C, Mod. S: Channel-specific status data ........................................... 1-112
1.4.3 Area C, Mod. SINF: Part-program-specific status data ............................. 1-143
1.4.4 Area C, Mod. SPARP: Part program information....................................... 1-146
1.4.5 Area C, Mod. SPARPP: Program pointer in automatic operation.............. 1-151
1.4.6 Area C, Mod. SPARPI: Program pointer on interruption............................ 1-153
1.4.7 Area C, Mod. SPARPF: Program pointers for block search and stop run . 1-155
1.4.8 Area C, Mod. SSYNAC: Synchronous actions .......................................... 1-158
1.4.9 Area C, Mod. SYNACT: Channel-specific synchronous actions ............... 1-161
1.4.10 Area C, Mod. SNCF: Active G functions .................................................. 1-162
1.4.11 Area C, Mod. NIB: State data: Nibbling ................................................... 1-164

SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D SIMODRIVE 611 digital/Sinamics Lists (LIS2) - 07.05 Edition 1-13
1 Variables 07.05
1.1 Introduction
1.4.12 Area C, Mod. FB: Channel-specific base frames..................................... 1-166

1.4.13 Area C, Mod. FS: Channel-specific system frames ................................. 1-167
1.4.14 Area C, Mod. AUXFU: Auxiliary functions................................................ 1-168
1.5 State data of axes ......................................................................................... 1-169

1.5.1 Area C, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes .......................................... 1-169
1.5.2 Area C, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes (extension of SMA) ........ 1-171
1.5.3 Area C, Mod. SGA: State data: Geometry axes in tool offset memory...... 1-192
1.5.4 Area C, Mod. SEGA: State data: Geometry axes in tool offset memory
(extension of SGA) ................................................................................. 1-195
1.5.5 Area C, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle ..................................................... 1-201
1.5.6 Area C, Mod. FU: Channel-specific settable frames.................................. 1-205
1.5.7 Area C, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle ................................................... 1-206
1.5.8 Area C, Mod. FA: Active channel-specific frames ..................................... 1-209
1.5.9 Area C, Mod. FE: Channel-specific external frame ................................... 1-210
1.6 State data of drives ....................................................................................... 1-211

1.6.1 Area H, Mod. S: Drive-specific state data (MSD) ...................................... 1-211
1.6.2 Area V, Mod. S: Drive-specific status data (FDD) ..................................... 1-214
1.7 Tool and magazine data ............................................................................... 1-216

1.7.1 Area T, Mod. TO: Tool edge data: Offset data .......................................... 1-216
1.7.2 Area T, Mod. TD: Tool data: General data ................................................ 1-219
1.7.3 Area T, Mod. TS: Tool edge data: Monitoring data.................................... 1-222
1.7.4 Area T, Mod. TU: Tool data: User-defined data......................................... 1-223
1.7.5 Area T, Mod. TUE: Tool edge data: User-defined data ............................. 1-224
1.7.6 Area T, Mod. TG: Tool data: Grinding-specific data .................................. 1-225
1.7.7 Area T, Mod. TMC: Magazine data: Configuration data ............................ 1-227
1.7.8 Area T, Mod. TMV: Magazine data: Directory ........................................... 1-229
1.7.9 Area T, Mod. TM: Magazine data: General data ....................................... 1-230
1.7.10 Area T, Mod. TP: Magazine data: Location data ..................................... 1-233
1.7.11 Area T, Mod. TPM: Magazine data: Multiple assignment
of location data........................................................................................ 1-235
1.7.12 Area T, Mod. TT: Magazine data: Location types.................................... 1-236
1.7.13 Area T, Mod. TV: Tool data: Directory ..................................................... 1-237
1.7.14 Area T, Mod. TF: Parametrizing, return parameters
of _N_TMGETT, _N_TSEARC ............................................................... 1-239
1.7.15 Area T, Mod. TUM: Tool data: user magazine data................................. 1-247
1.7.16 Area T, Mod. TUP: Tool data: user magatine place data ........................ 1-248
1.7.17 Area T, Mod. TUS: Tool data: user monitoring data ................................ 1-249
1.7.18 Area T, Mod. AD: Adapter data................................................................ 1-250
1.7.19 Area T, Mod. AEV: Working offsets: Directory......................................... 1-251
1.7.20 Area T, Mod. TC: Toolholder parameters ................................................ 1-254
1.7.21 Area T, Mod. TOE: Edge-related coarse total offsets, setup offsets ....... 1-261
1.7.22 Area T, Mod. TOET: Edge-related coarse total offsets,
transformed setup offsets ....................................................................... 1-262
1.7.23 Area T, Mod. TOS: Edge-related location-dependent fine total offsets ... 1-263
1.7.24 Area T, Mod. TOST: Edge-related location-dependent fine
total offsets, transformed ........................................................................ 1-266
1.7.25 Area T, Mod. TOT: Edge data: Transformed offset data ......................... 1-267
1.7.26 Area T, Mod. TAD: Application-specific data ........................................... 1-269
1.7.27 Area T, Mod. TAM: Application-specific magazine data .......................... 1-270
1.7.28 Area T, Mod. TAO: Application-specific cutting edge data ...................... 1-271
1.7.29 Area T, Mod. TAP: Application-specific magazine location data ............. 1-272
1.7.30 Area T, Mod. TAS: Application-specific monitoring data ......................... 1-273

1-14 SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D SIMODRIVE 611 digital/Sinamics Lists (LIS2) - 07.05 Edition
07.05 1 Variables
1.1 Introduction
1.8 Machine and setting data .............................................................................. 1-274

1.8.1 Area N, Mod. M: Global machine data....................................................... 1-274
1.8.2 Area A, Mod. M: Axis-specific machine data ............................................. 1-276
1.8.3 Area N, Mod. SE: Global setting data ........................................................ 1-277
1.8.4 Area C, Mod. SE: Channel-specific setting data........................................ 1-278
1.8.5 Area A, Mod. SE: Axis-specific setting data .............................................. 1-279
1.9 Parameters.................................................................................................... 1-281

1.9.1 Area C, Mod. RP: Arithmetic parameters................................................... 1-281
1.9.2 Area C, Mod. VSYN: Channel-specific user variables
for synchronous actions.......................................................................... 1-282
1.10 Servo ........................................................................................................... 1-283

1.10.1 Area N, Mod. SD: Servo data .................................................................. 1-283
1.11 Diagnosis data ............................................................................................ 1-285

1.11.1 Area N, Mod. DIAGN: Global diagnostic data.......................................... 1-285
1.11.2 Area C, Mod. DIAGN: Channel-specific diagnosis data .......................... 1-298
1.11.3 Area N, Mod. ETPD: Data lists for protocolling........................................ 1-301
1.11.4 Area C, Mod. ETP: Types of events ....................................................... 1-302
1.12 HMI / MMC State data................................................................................. 1-307

1.12.1 Area M, Mod. S: Internal status data MMC.............................................. 1-307

1 Variables 07.05
1.1 Introduction
1.1 Introduction
This section describes the NCK variables that an MMC or the PLC can access
via the operator panel interface. (Access is read and for some variables write
also). The access methods of the various components are described in the
following user documentation:
References: /FBO/, Configuring the OP030 Operator Interface
/PK/, Configuring kit MMC 100/Unit Operator Panel
Description of PLC access method in:
References: /FB/, P3, "Basic PLC Program"
Description of the OEM-MMC access method in "OEM-MMC Description of
Functions".
OEM-MMC
OPI
MPI
NCK
OP 030 NCU 57x
NC data
block
PLC
The components shown on the left-hand side of the diagram each have their
own development environment which defines the syntax to be used. A variable
is always addressed according to a defined pattern. All the information required
for addressing the variables irrespective of the programming language chosen
is summed up in the following lists.

07.05 1 Variables
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 General information
The NCK variables are stored in data modules that are assigned to the
individual areas of the NCK as the figure below shows:
Mode group 1
Channel n
Channel 2
Channel 1
Axis n
Axis 2
Axis 1
Variable areas of SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC
A distinction is made between the following areas:

• NCK (N)
• Mode group (B)
• Channel (C)
• Tool (T)
• Axis (A)
• Feed/main drive (V/H)

1 Variables 07.05
1.1 Introduction
NCK Contains all the variables such as system data (Y), protection zones (PA), G
groups (YNCFL) etc. that apply to the entire NCK.
Mode group Contains variables such as the status data (S) that apply to the mode group.
Channel Contains variables such as the system data (Y), protection zones (PA), global
status data (S) etc. that apply to each channel.
Tool Contains variables such as the tool offset data (TO), general tool data (TD), tool
monitoring data (TS) etc. that apply to the tools on the machine. Each tool area
T is assigned to a channel.
Axis Contains the setting data and machine data that apply to each axis or spindle.
For a description see Section "Axis-specific machine data".
Feed / main drive Contains machine data and machine data as the service values that apply to
each drive. For a description see Section "Drive machine data".
1.1.2 Module types
The following table provides an overview of the modules for the variables of the
NCK and how they are assigned to the individual areas.
Only the data modules whose variables can be read or written with direct
access are contained in the list. Data modules whose variables can be defined
by the programmer (e.g. global user data) are read by the MMC or PLC using
other mechanisms. The documentation listed below describes the modules to
which these mechanisms are applied:
References: /FBO/, Configuring the OP030 Operator Interface,

/FB/, P3, "Basic PLC Program" and
"OEM-MMC Description of Functions"
Module Area
A B C H N T V
ETP 1
ETPD 1
DIAGN 1
FA 1 1
FB 1 1
FE 1
FU 1 1
M 1 1
NIB 1
PA 1 1
RP 1

07.05 1 Variables
1.1 Introduction
Module Area
continued A B C H N T V
S 1 1 1 1 1
SALA 1
SALAL 1
SALAP 1
SE 1 1 1
SEGA 1
SEMA 1 1
SGA 1
SINF 1
SMA 1 1
SNCF 1
SPARP 1
SPARPF 1
SPARPI 1
SPARPP 1
SSP 1 1
SSP2 1 1
SSYNAC 1
SYNACT 1
TD 1
TF 1
TG 1
TM 1
TMC 1
TMV 1
TO 1
TP 1
TPM 1
TS 1
TT 1
TU 1
TUE 1
TUM 1
TUP 1
TUS 1
TV 1
AD 1
AEV 1
TC 1
TOE 1
TOET 1
TOS 1
TOST 1
TOT 1
VSYN 1
Y 1 1
YNCFL 1

1 Variables 07.05
1.1 Introduction
1.1.3 Variable types
Within each area the variables are generally stored in the form of structures or
in arrays of structures (tables). The following information must therefore be
contained in an address when accessing a variable:
• Area + area number
• Module
• Variable name (or column number)
• Line number
It is generally possible to distinguish between three different variable types:

1. Variables that consist of 1 line
2. Variables that consist of several lines
3. Variables that consist of several columns and lines
Single-line variables Each of these variables consists of a single value. The following information is
required when accessing a variable of this type:
1. Area (and possibly area number)
2. Module
3. Variable name
numMachAxes
Number of existing machine axes
- Word r
Multi-line: no
Example for reading the number of machine axes in channel 1:
MMC102:
/Channel/Configuration/numMachAxes[u1]
MMC100/OP030:
P_C_Y_numMachAxes
PLC with NC-Var-Selector:

Area: C[.]
Module: Y
Variable: numMachAxes
Area No. = 1

07.05 1 Variables
1.1 Introduction
Multi-line variables These variables are defined as a one-dimensional field. When accessing a
variable of this type the following information must be specified:
2. Module
3. Variable name
4. Line number
actFeedRate $AA_VACTB[x] S5
Axial feedrate actual value (only if axis is a positioning axis "spec" = 1)
% Double r
Multi-line:yes Axis index numMachAxes
Example for reading the current velocity of axis 3 in channel 1:
MMC102:
/Channel/MachineAxis/actFeedRate[u1, 3]
MMC100/OP030:
P_C_SEMA_actFeedRate

Area: C[.]
Module: SEMA
Variable: actFeedRate[.]
Area No. = 1
Line = 3
Multi-line and multi- These variables are defined as a two-dimensional field. In order to access a
column variables variable of this type, the following information must be specified:
2. Module
3. Variable name
4. Column number
5. Line number
In this case the entire data module only consists of this two-dimensional
variable.
cuttEdgeParam $TC_DPx[y,z]
Offset value parameters for a cutting edge
mm, inch or userdef 0 Double wr
Multi-line:yes (CuttEdgeNo 1) * numCuttEdgeParams * numCuttEdges
numCuttEdgeParams +
ParameterNo

1 Variables 07.05
1.1 Introduction
Example for reading the current cutting edge data of cutting edge 3/parameter
1 of tool 3 in T area 1: (in this example it is assumed that each tool cutting edge
has been defined with (numCuttEdgeParams =) 25 parameters).
MMC102:
/Tool/Compensation/cuttEdgeParam[u1,c3, 51]
MMC100/OP030:
P_T_TO_cuttEdgeParam

Area: T[.]
Module: TO
Variable: cuttEdgeParam[.]
Area No. = 1
Column = 3
Line = 51
1.1.4 Data types
The following data types are used in this description:
Data type Description

Bool 1 bit
Character 8 bits without sign
Byte 8 bits with sign
Word 16 bits without sign
Short Integer 16 bits with sign
Doubleword 32 bits without sign
Long Integer 32 bits with sign
Float 32 bits floating point
Double 64 bits floating point
String String ending in zero
In the tables below the individual fields have the following meaning:

07.05 1 Variables
1.1 Introduction
Variable name Reference to assigned MD Ref.

Variable brief description/
variable description
« Description of value range »
Physical unit Default value Lower limit Upper limit Format / w/r
field length
Multi-line:yes / no Description of line index Maximum line index
Ref. Cross-reference to references

w/r w Variable can be overwritten
r Variable can be read

1 Variables 07.05
1.2 System data
1.2 System data
1.2.1 Area N, Mod. Y: Global system data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/Configuration/...
The machine tool builder or user configures the control with the help of the
machine data. Configuration can only be performed with certain access rights.
The configuration of the NC can be read in the system data regardless of
current access rights.
accessLevel
Level of the access rights currently set. Can be changed by entering the password or turning the keyswitch.
0 = access level SIEMENS
1 = access level machine tool builder
2 = access level system start-up engineer (machine tool builder)
3 = access level end user with password
4 = access level key switch 3
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
axisType
Axis types for all machine axes (necessary for start-up): If a machine axis is addressed via the M module, the units and
values are returned with reference to the axis type accessible via this variable. (The absolute machine axis index 1-
N_Y_maxnumGlobMachAxes is specified via the line index)
0 = Linear axis
1 = Rotary axis
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Absolute machine axis number maxnumGlobMachAxes
basicLengthUnit
Global basic unit
0 = mm
1 = inch
4 = userdef
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
chanAssignment MD 10010: ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP[x] x=ChannelNo K1

Assignment of each channel to mode group
0 = channel does not exist
n = channel assigned to mode group n (n is maximum numBAGs (BAG = mode group))
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Channel number maxnumChannels
externCncSystem $MN_EXTERN_LANGUAGE und $MN_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM

CNC system whose part programs must be processed on the
SINUMERIK control.
0: No external language defined
1: System ISO Dialect0 Milling
2: System ISO Dialect0 Turning
etc.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

07.05 1 Variables
1.2 System data
extraCuttEdgeParams
Bit string that specifies which TO edge parameters are available
in addition to the 25 standard parameters.
Bit 0: Edge parameter no. 26 valid (ISO Dialect Milling H No.)
Bit 1: Edge parameter no. 27 valid
etc.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
kindOfSumcorr $MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR
Characteristics of total offsets in NCK:
Bit No. Value Meaning
0 0 Total offsets are saved at the same time as the tool data.
1 Total offsets are not saved at the same time as the tool data.
1 0 Setup offsets are saved at the same time as the tool data.
1 Setup offsets are not saved at the same time as the tool data.
2 0 If the "Tool management" function is in use: The existing total/setup offsets are not affected when
tool status "active" is set.
1 When tool status "active" is set, the existing total offsets are set to zero. The setup offsets are not
affected.
3 0 If the "Tool management" function plus "Adapter" is in use: Transformation of total offsets
1 No transformation of total offsets
4 0 No setup offset data sets
1 Setup offset data sets are created additionally, in which case the total offset equals the product of
total offset + "fine total offset".
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
maskToolManagement $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Settings for NCK tool management function
Activation of tool management memory with "0" means: The set tool management data do not occupy any memory
space.
Bit 0=1: Memory for TM-specific data is made available
Bit 1=1: Memory for monitoring data is made available
Bit 2=1: Memory for user data (CC data) is made available
Bit 3=1: Memory for "Consider adjacent location" is made available
SW 5.1 and later:
Bit 5=0: Parameters and function for tool wear monitoring are not available.
Bit 5=1: Parameters and function for tool wear monitoring are available and, if bit 1 = 1, the wear monitoring function
is also available.
Bit 6=0: The wear group function is not available; i.e. parameters $TC_MAMP3, $TC_MAP9 cannot be programmed,
$TC_MPP5 is not defined for magazine locations of type 1.
Bit 6=1: The wear group function is available; i.e. parameters $TC_MAMP3, $TC_MAP9 can be programmed and
wear groups defined. $TC_MPP5 contains the wear group number for location type 1.
Bit 7=1: Tool adapter data sets are available.
Bit 8=1: Total offsets are available.
Bit 9=1: Tools in a turret are handled in OPI variable modules such that they are not "displayed" in tool half-locations,
but always displayed in a turret location. Please note, therefore, that tools in a turret remain (in display terms) in their
turret location in the event of a tool change.
Bit 9=0: Default response; Tools in a turret are "displayed" in the OPI in their actual (according to data) location.
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1
maxCuttingEdgeNo $MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO
Maximum value of D number
1 to 32000
- 9 1 32000 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

1 Variables 07.05
1.2 System data
maxNumAdapter $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER
Maximum number of tool adapter data sets available in NCK
>0: Maximum number of adapter data sets.
0: Adapter data cannot be defined. Edge-specific parameters $TC_DP21, $TC_DP22, $TC_DP23 are available,
i.e. active tool management function with adapters is not in use.
-1: An adapter is automatically assigned to each magazine location, i.e. the number of adapters provided internally
corresponds to the number of magazine locations set in machine data $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION.
- 0 -1 600 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1
maxnumAlarms
Size of NCK alarm buffer (maximum number of pending alarms)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxnumChannels
Maximum number of available channels
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxnumContainer
Maximum number of available axis containers
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
maxnumContainerSlots
Maximum number of available slots per axis container
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
maxnumCuttEdges_Tool $MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL
Max. number of edges per tool
1 to 12
- 9 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
maxnumDrives
Maximum number of available drives
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxnumEdgeSC $MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUTTING_EDGE
Max. number of total offsets per edge
0 to 6
- 0 ??? NCK UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
maxnumEventTypes
Maximum number of event types for the trace protocolling
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxnumGlobMachAxes
Maximum number of available machine axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variables
1.2 System data
maxNumSumcorr $MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR
Total number of total offsets in NCK
A setting of -1 means that the number of total offsets equals the
number of edges * number of total offsets per edge.
A setting of > 0 and < number of edges * number of total offsets per edge
means that a maximum number of total offsets equalling "number of total
offsets per edge" can be defined per edge, but need not be, i.e. it is thus
possible to use the buffer memory more economically.
In other words, only the edges have a total offset data set for which
data can be defined explicitly.
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1
maxnumTraceProtData
Maximum number of data per data list for trace protocolling
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxnumTraceProtDataList
Maximum number of data per data list for trace protocolling
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
modeSpindleToolRevolver MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Bit 9

Representation of tool currently in use in modules
magazine location data (T / TP, magazine data, location data) and
tool data (T / TD, tool data, general data and T / TV, tool data, directory)
0: Previous method: During operation, the tool is removed (in data terms) from its circular magazine location and
loaded to the spindle location in the buffer magazine.
1: During operation, the tool remains in its circular magazine locations in the OPI modules. This applies to OPI
modules magazine location data (T / TP, magazine data and location data) and tool data (T / TD, tool data, general
data and T / TV, tool data, directory and T / AEV, working offsets, directory).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
nckLogbookSeekPos
NCK logbook
- Long Integer wr
Multi-line: no 1
nckType
NCK type
0: 840D pl
1000: FM-NC (up to and including SW 6)
2000: 810D pl
3000: 802S (up to and including SW 6)
4000: 802D pl (up to and including SW 6)
5000: 840Di pl (up to and including SW 6)
6000: SOLUTIONLINE
10700: 840D sl
14000: 802D sl T/M
14000: 802D sl N/G or C/U
15000: 840Di sl
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 07.05
1.2 System data
nckVersion
NCK version
Only the digits before the comma of the floating point number are evaluated, the digits after the comma may contain
identifiers for development-internal intermediate releases.
The digits before the comma includes the official NCK identifier for the software release: For software release 3.4 the
value of the variable is 34,....
- Double r
Multi-line: no
ncuPerformanceClass
NCU power class
Not defined in SW 6.2.
0: No special power class
1: Powerline
2-n: Reserved
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numAnalogInp MD 10300: FASTIO_ANA_NUM_INPUTS A2

Number of HW analog inputs
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numAnalogOutp MD 10310: FASTIO_ANA_NUM_OUTPUTS A2

Number of HW analog outputs
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numBAGs
Number of available mode groups
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numBasisFrames $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES
Number of channel-independent basic frames
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numChannels
Number of active channels
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numContainer
Number of currently available axis containers
- 0 maxnumContaine UWord r
r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numContainerSlots
Number of currently available slots per axis container
- maxnumContaine UWord r
rSlots
Multi-line: yes Index of axis container numContainer

07.05 1 Variables
1.2 System data
numCuttEdgeParams
Number of P elements of a cutting edge
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numCuttEdgeParams_tao $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_TOA_PARAM
Number of Siemens application cutting edge data in module TAO
!! Reserved for SIEMENS applications !!
- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numCuttEdgeParams_tas $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MON_PARAM
Number of Siemens application monitoring data in module TAS
- 0 0 10 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numCuttEdgeParams_ts
Number of P elements of a cutting edge in module TS (tool monitoring data)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numCuttEdgeParams_tu MD 18096: MM_CC_TOA_PARAM

Number of P elements of a cutting edge in module TUE (cutting edge data for OEM)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numCuttEdgeParams_tus $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM
Number of parameters in the user monitoring data of a cutting edge in the module TUS
- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numDigitInp MD 10350: FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS A2

Number of HW digital inputs
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numDigitOutp MD 10360: FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS A2

Number of HW digital outputs
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numDrives
Number of active drives
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numGCodeGroups
Number of NC instruction groups
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 07.05
1.2 System data
numGCodeGroupsFanuc
Number of NC instruction groups in ISO Dialect mode
(the number for the turning and milling versions is not the same)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numGlobMachAxes
Number of active machine axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numHandWheels
Maximum number of handwheels
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numMagLocParams_tap $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM
Number of Siemens application magazine location data in module TAP
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numMagLocParams_u $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM
Number of parameters of the magazine user data for a tool magazine place in the module TUP
- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numMagParams_tam $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM
Number of Siemens application magazine data in module TAM
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numMagParams_u $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
Number of parameters of the magazine user data for a tool magazine in the module TUM
- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numMagPlaceParams $TC_MPP1
Number of parameters of a magazine location
8 in SW 5.1 and later
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
numMagPlacesMax MD 18086: MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION FBW

Maximum number of magazine locations
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numMagsMax MD 18084: MM_NUM_MAGAZINE FBW

Maximum number of magazines
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variables
1.2 System data
numParams_Adapt
Number of parameters per adapter
- 4 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
numParams_SC $TC_SCPx; x=13,...21,....71

Number of total offset parameters per total offset set
- 9 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
numPlaceMulti FBW
Number of possible multiple assignments of a location to magazines
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numPlaceMultiParams FBW
Number of parameters of a multiple assignment
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numToBaust MD 18110: MM_NUM_TOA_MODULES

Number of T areas
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numToolHolderParams
Number of parameters in the data toolHolderData in the area C, module S
Number of parameters in toolHolderData.
If the tool magazine management is not active, the value =0 will be returned.
- 3 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
numToolParams_tad $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_TDA_PARAM
Number of Siemens application tool data in module TAD
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numToolParams_tu MD 18094: MM_CC_TDA_PARAM

Number of P elements of a tool in module TU (tool data for OEM)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numUserFrames MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES
Number of channel-independent user frames
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
simo611dSupport
This data specifies the extent to which the system supports 611 drives.
Bit 0 set: NCK software supports 611D drives

Bit 1 set: Hardware supports 611D drives
(only if bit 0 is also set).
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

1 Variables 07.05
1.2 System data
toolChangeMfunc MD 22560: TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE W1

Number of M function for tool change
0 = change on T selection (standard for turning)
1 = change on selection M1..
99999 = change on selection M99999
(standard for milling M06)
- Double r
Multi-line: no
typeOfCuttingEdge
Type of D-number programming see MD: MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE
0 no 'flat D-number management' active
1 D-numbers are programmed directly and absolutely
2 D-numbers are programmed indirectly and relatively
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
userScale
User unit table with 13 elements (see Start-up Guide 2.4 and machine data)
0 = table not active
1 = table active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

07.05 1 Variables
1.2 System data
1.2.2 Area C, Mod. Y: Channel-specific system data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Configuration/...
The machine tool builder or user configures the control with the help of the
machine data. Configuration can only be performed with certain access rights.
The configuration of the NC can be read in the system data regardless of
current access rights.
channelName MD 20000: CHAN_NAME K1

Channel name
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no
maskToolManagement MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Channel-specific settings for NCK tool management function
Activation of TM memory by "0" means: The set tool management data do not use any memory space.
Value=0: TM deactivated
Bit 0=1: TM active: The tool management functions are enabled for the current channel.
Bit 1=1: TM monitoring function active: Functions required to monitor tools (tool life and number of workpieces) are
enabled.
Bit 2=1: OEM functions active: The memory for user data can be utilized.
Bit 3=1: Consideration of adjacent location active
Bits 0 to 3 must be set identically to machine data MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (18080).
Bit 4=1: The PLC has the possibility of issuing another request for tool change preparation with modified parameters.
-------------------------For test purposes only :------------------------------------------------
Part program is halted in response to T selection or M06 until it has been
acknowledged by the PLC program.
Bit 5=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the main spindle is executed
simultaneously with the transport acknowledgement.
Bit 6=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the auxiliary spindle is executed
simultaneously with the transport acknowledgement.
Bit 7=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the main spindle is not executed until the
PLC acknowledgement confirms that the tool change is complete.
Bit 8=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the auxiliary spindle is not executed until
the PLC acknowledgement confirms that the tool change is complete..
-------------------------End For test purposes only :-------------------------------------------
Bit 9: Reserved
Bit 10=1: M06 is delayed until the preparation acknowledgement has been output by the PLC. The change signal (e.g.
M06 ) is not output until the tool selection ( DBX [ n+0 ].2 ) has been acknowledged. The part program is halted in
response to M06 until the T selection has been acknowledged.
Bit 11=1: The preparation command is output even if a preparation command has already been output for the same
tool. This setting is useful, for example, if the chain is to be positioned when "Tx" is first called and if the second call is
to initiate a check as to whether the tool is in the correct location for a tool change (e.g. in front of tool-change station).
Bit 12=1: The preparation command is executed even if the tool is already loaded in the spindle, i.e. the T selection
signal (DB72.DBXn.2) is set even if it has already been set for the same tool. (Tx...Tx)
Bit 13=1: Only on systems with sufficient memory space (NCU572, NCU573): Recording of tool sequences in a
diagnostics buffer. The commands are fetched from the diagnostics buffer in response to Reset and stored in a file in
the passive file system, NCATR xx.MPF under part program. The trace file is useful for the Hotline in the event of
errors and is not described in detail here.
Bit 14=1: Automatic tool change in response to Reset and Start according to machine data MD20120
TOOL_RESET_NAME MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER. If
machine data RESET_MODE_MASK is in use, then this bit must be set as well. If RESET_MODE_MASK is set such
that the tool stored in TOOL_RESET_NAME must be loaded in response to RESET, then the select and change
command is output to the user interface (DB 72) in response to RESET or Start. If machine data
RESET_MODE_MASK is set such that the active tool must remain active after M30 or RESET and if the active tool is
disabled in the spindle (by user), then a change command for a replacement tool is output to the user interface in
response to RESET. If no replacement tool is available, then an error message is output.
Bit 15=1: No return transport of tool when several preparation commands are output. (Tx->Tx)
Bit 16=1: T location number is active
Bit 17=1: Tool life decrementation can be started/stopped via the PLC.
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1

1 Variables 07.05
1.2 System data
mmcCmd
Command from NCK to MMC
The string is made up of the following characters:
1st Character acknowledgement mode:
"N" no acknowledgement
"S" synchronous acknowledgement
"A" asynchronous acknowledgement
2. - 6th character: five-digit sequence number in ASCII that is generated by the NCK
7. - 207th character: Command string which ends with "\0"
- String[206] r
Multi-line: no
mmcCmdPrep
Command from the NCK-preparation task to the MMC (e.g. for calling external subprograms)
- String[206] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
mmcCmdQuit
Acknowledgement from MMC for command from NCK to MMC
The string is made up of the following characters:
1st Character acknowledgement code:
"P" programmed
"B" busy
"F" failed
"E" executed
2. - 6th character: five-digit sequence number in ASCII for acknowledgement code "B", "F" or "E", generated by NCK
7. - 201th character: additional communication-specific information for acknowledgement code "B", "F" or "E", ends
with "\0"
- String[200] w
Multi-line: no
mmcCmdQuitPrep
Acknowledgemnt by MMC for an NCK-preparation command to the MMC (e.g. for calling external subprograms)
- String[200] wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numActAxes
Number of active tools in channel.
Channel axis gaps are not included in count which means that value might be lower than numMachAxes.
The following applies:
numMachAxes >= numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes
numActAxes = numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes
- 0 0 numMachAxes UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numAuxAxes
Number of auxiliary axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numBasisFrames $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES
Number of basic frames in channel
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numContourInProtArea
Maximum number of polygon elements per protection zone
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variables
1.2 System data
numGeoAxes
Number of geometry axes and orientation axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numMachAxes
No. of highest channel axis.
This also corresponds to the number of axes in the
channel provided there are no gaps in the axis sequence.
- 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numOriAxes
Number of orientation axes in channel
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numProtArea MD 28200: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN S7

Maximum number of protection zones
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numRParams MD 28050: MM_NUM_R_PARAM S7

Number of channel-specific R parameters
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numSpindles
Number of spindles
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numSpindlesLog
Number of logical spindles.
Specifies the number of lines in module SSP2.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
numToolEdges MD 18100: MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA S7

Number of tool edges in this channel
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numUserFrames MD 28080: MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES S7

Number of user frames in this channel
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
oemProtText
OEM text to be entered next in the logging buffer.
- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 07.05
1.2 System data
progProtText
Programmable text to be entered next in the logging buffer
- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
punchNibActivation MD 26012: PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION N4

Activation of punching and nibbling functions
0 = option not available
1 = option available
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
systemFrameMask $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK
Configuring screenform for channel-specific system frames
Indicates in bit-coded form which system frames are available
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toNo MD 28085: MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT W1

Number of T area that is assigned to the channel
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variables
1.2 System data
1.2.3 Area N, Mod. PA: Global protection zones

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/ProtectedArea/...
Up to 10 protection zones can be defined. Each protection zone is described by

a polygon function consisting of up to 10 elements. The module PA contains
the individual coordinates of the polygon elements. The protection zones are
addressed via the variable indices. The physical unit of the parameters can be
read from the variable "basicLengthUnit" in the module Y in area N.
The classification as NCK or channel-specific protection zones does not affect

the protection zone monitoring function, but indicates the area in which the
protection zone is registered.
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_0 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 1st contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 2nd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 3rd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 4th contour element





1 Variables 07.05
1.2 System data


MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_0 $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 1st contour element

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 2nd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 3rd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 4th contour element






07.05 1 Variables
1.2 System data

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_0 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 1st contour element

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 2nd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 3rd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 4th contour element







1 Variables 07.05
1.2 System data
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_0 $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 1st contour element

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 2nd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 3rd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 4th contour element






MDD_PA_MINUS_LIM $SN_PA_MINUS_LIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Limitation in the minus direction of the protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition
(applicate)

07.05 1 Variables
1.2 System data
MDD_PA_PLUS_LIM $SN_PA_PLUS_LIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Limitation in the plus direction of the protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition
(applicate)
MDU_PA_ACTIV_IMMED $SN_PA_ACTIV_IMMED[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for "active immediately after referencing", i.e. the protection zone is active as soon as the control has been
started up and the axes have been referenced
0 = protection zone is not active immediately
1 = protection zone is active immediately
- UWord r
MDU_PA_CONT_NUM $SN_PA_CONT_NUM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Number of valid contour elements
- 0 numContourInPro UWord r
tArea
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_0 $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 1st contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

Contour type of 2nd contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

Contour type of 3rd contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

Contour type of 4th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

1 Variables 07.05
1.2 System data

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
MDU_PA_LIM_3DIM $SN_PA_LIM_3DIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for limitation of protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to polygon definition (applicate)
0 = no limitation
1 = limitation in positive direction
2 = limitation in negative direction
3 = limitation in both directions
- UWord r
MDU_PA_ORI $SN_PA_ORI[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for plane assignment of protection zone
0 = G17
1 = G18
2 = G19
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variables
1.2 System data
MDU_PA_TW $SN_PA_T_W[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for workpiece or tool-oriented protection zone
0 = workpiece-related
1 = reserved
2 = reserved
3 = tool-related
- UWord r

1 Variables 07.05
1.2 System data
1.2.4 Area C, Mod. PA: Channel-specific protection zones

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ProtectedArea/...
Up to 10 protection zones can be defined. Each protection zone is described by

a polygon function consisting of up to 10 elements. The maximum permissible
number of protection zones is specified in "numProtArea" in the module Y in
area C. The maximum permissible number of polygon definition elements is
specified in "numContourInProtArea" in module Y in area C. Module PA
contains the individual coordinates of the polygon elements. The protection
zones are addressed via the variable indices.
The classification as NCK or channel-specific protection zone does not affect

the protection zone monitoring function but simply indicates the area in which
the protection zone is registered.
The physical unit actually used for length quantities is defined in

"/C/SGA/extUnit" in module SGA in area C.
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_0 $SC_PA_CENT_ABS[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 1st contour element

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 2nd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 3rd contour element





07.05 1 Variables
1.2 System data



MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_0 $SC_PA_CENT_ORD[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 1st contour element

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 2nd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 3rd contour element






1 Variables 07.05
1.2 System data


MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_0 $SC_PA_CONT_ABS[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 1st contour element

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 2nd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 3rd contour element







07.05 1 Variables
1.2 System data

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_0 $SC_PA_CONT_ORD[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 1st contour element

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 2nd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 3rd contour element








1 Variables 07.05
1.2 System data
MDD_PA_MINUS_LIM $SC_PA_MINUS_LIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Limitation in the minus direction of the protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition
(applicate)
MDD_PA_PLUS_LIM $SC_PA_PLUS_LIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Limitation of the protection zone in the plus direction of the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition
(applicate)
MDU_PA_ACTIV_IMMED $SC_PA_ACTIV_IMMED[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for "active immediately after referencing", i.e. the protection zone is active as soon as the control has been
started up and the axes have been referenced
0 = protection zone is not active immediately
1 = protection zone is active immediately
- UWord r
MDU_PA_CONT_NUM $SC_PA_CONT_NUM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Number of valid contour elements
- 0 numContourInPro UWord r
tArea
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_0 $SC_PA_CONT_TYP[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 1st contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

Contour type of 2nd contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

Contour type of 3rd contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variables
1.2 System data

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
MDU_PA_LIM_3DIM $SC_PA_LIM_3DIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for limitation of protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to polygon definition (applicate)
0 = no limitation
1 = limitation in positive direction
2 = limitation in negative direction
3 = limitation in both directions
- UWord r

1 Variables 07.05
1.2 System data
MDU_PA_ORI $SC_PA_ORI[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for plane assignment of protection zone
0 = G17
1 = G18
2 = G19
- UWord r
MDU_PA_TW $SC_PA_T_W[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for workpiece or tool-oriented protection zone
0 = workpiece-related
1 = reserved
2 = reserved
3 = tool-related
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variables
1.2 System data
1.2.5 Area N, Mod. YNCFL: NCK instruction groups

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/FunctionGrouping/...
All G functions currently configured for the channels are made available for
reading by the NCK. They are configured via machine data. Since the G
functions are organized in groups, only one of which can be active at a time,
this module is organized as a table.
There are two columns for each G group. The 1st column lists the number of G
functions in a group (/N/YNCFL/Gruppe_NUM), this corresponds to the number
of rows in each subsequent column. This second column contains all the G
functions belonging to a group (/N/YNCFL/Gruppe).
As a result, the data for a certain G group are calculated via a column offset.
The column offset of each variable is:
2 * (G group number - 1)
The number of G groups is given in the variable "numGCodeGroups" in area N

/ module Y. The resultant the maximum column offset of the variables is thus
2 * numGCodeGroups.
The G functions currently active are listed in area C / module SNCF.
Function
Instruction group
Attention: This variable is called "Gruppe" in the non-Windows MMC and the PLC !
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes Serial number /N/YNCFL/GroupID
GroupID
Number of G functions in each G group
Attention: This variable is called "Gruppe_NUM" in the non-Windows MMC and the PLC !
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
Gruppe
Instruction group
Attention: This variable is called "Function" in the MMC102 !
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes Serial number /N/YNCFL/Gruppe_NUM
Gruppe_NUM
Number of G functions in each G group
Attention: This variable is called "GroupID" in the MMC102 !
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 07.05
1.3 State data of system
1.3.1 Area N, Mod. S: Global state data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/State/...
During NC operation different internal states occur and system-specific data

may change during operation. To distinguish those from system variables, they
are classified as state data.
A distinction is made between:

- NCK-specific state data
- Mode-group-specific state data
- Channel-specific state data
- Drive-specific state data (FDD)
- Drive-specific state data (MSD)
accIndex
Global upload starting point for ACC entries. If a value is set here, upload access to _N_xx_yyy_ACC modules starts
from this entry.
- 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: no
aDbb $A_DBB[x] x = ByteNo

Data byte from/to the PLC
Can be written from SW 6.4.
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within an I/O area
aDbd $A_DBD[x] x = Offset

Data double word (32 bits) from/to the PLC
- Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within an I/O area.
The offset refers to the byte, with the
count beginning at 0.
Permissible values for x are thus 0,
4, 8 etc.
aDbr $A_DBR[x] x = Offset

Real data (32 bits) from/to the PLC
- Double wr
aDbw $A_DBW[x] x = Offset

Data word (16 bits) from/to the PLC
- UWord wr
aDlb $A_DLB[index]
Data byte (8 bits) in link area
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within link data area

07.05 1 Variables
aDld $A_DLD[index]
Data double word (32 bits) in link data area
- UDoubleword wr
aDlr $A_DLR[index]
Read data (32 bits) in link data area
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within link area
aDlw $A_DLW[index]
Data word (16 bits) in link data area
- UWord wr
aInco $A_INCO[x] x = InputNo

Comperator input NC
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Input number 2
analogInpVal $A_INA[x] x = AnaloginputNo

Value of HW analog input
A or V Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of analog input numAnalogInp
analogOutpVal $A_OUTA[x] x = AnalogoutputNo

Number of HW analog output
A or V Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of analog output numAnalogOutp
anAxCtAS $AN_AXCTAS[n]
Current container rotation, i.e. by how many slots the axis
container has been currently advanced. The original container
assignment is valid after Power On and outputs value 0.
maxCount = max. number of occupied slots in axis container - 1
- 0 0 maxnumContaine UWord r
rSlots - 1
Multi-line: yes Container no. numContainer
anAxCtSwA $AN_AXCTSWA[CTn]
A rotation is currently being executed on the
axis container.
- 0 0 1 UWord r
anAxEsrTrigger $AN_ESR_TRIGGER
(Global) control signal "Start Stop/Retract". With a signal edge change
from 0 to 1, the reactions parameterized beforehand in axial MD $MA_ESR_REACTION
and enabled via system variable $AA_ESR_ENABLE are started.
Independent drive reactions subsequently require a Power-Off / Power-On,
independent NC reactions require at least an opposite edge change in the
relevant system variable as well as a Reset.
0: FALSE
1: TRUE
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 07.05
anTimer $AN_TIMER[n]
Global NCK timer in seconds.
s, user defined 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Index in $AN_TIMER[n] $MN_MM_NUM_AN_TIMER
aPbbIn $A_PBB_IN[index]
Data byte (8bits) in PLC input/output area IN
(also available on 810D CCU2)
Neg. values are also permitted in spite of TYPE_UWORD
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Position offset within PLC
input/output area
aPbbOut $A_PBB_OUT[index]
Data byte (8 bits) in PLC input/output area OUT
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within the PLC
input/output area
aPbdIn $A_PBD_IN[index]
Data double word (32bits) in PLC input/output area IN
- UDoubleword r
input/output area
aPbdOut $A_PBD_OUT[index]
Data double word (32 bits) in the PLC input/output area OUT
- UDoubleword wr
input/output area
aPbrIn $A_PBR_IN[index]
Real data (32bits) in PLC input/output area IN
- Double r
input/output area
aPbrOut $A_PBR_OUT[index]
Real data (32 bits) in the PLC input/output area OUT
- Double wr
input/output area
aPbwIn $A_PBW_IN[index]
Data word (16bits) in PLC input/output area IN
- UWord r
input/output area

07.05 1 Variables
aPbwOut $A_PBW_OUT[index]
Data word (16 bits) in the PLC input/output area OUT
- UWord wr
input/output area
axisActivInNcu
Display indicating whether the axis is active, i.e. whether it can be traversed via a channel
of its own NCU or via another NCU (link axis).
This data can be utilized by MMCs in order to suppress the display of any non-active axes.
Bits 0-31 stand for the axes of the NCU.

Bit n = 1: Axis can be traversed.
Bit n = 0: Axis cannot be traversed.
- UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
badMemFfs
Number of bytes which are defective in the Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
basisFrameMask $P_NCBFRMASK
Display indicating which channel-independent basic frames are active.
Each bit in the mask specifies whether the relevant basic frame
is active. Bit0 = 1st basic frame, Bit1 = 2nd basic frame etc.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
completeDocAcxChangeCn
t
Modification counter of ACX for the configuration of
DO of all SINAMICS on all PROFIBUS segments (_N_COMPLETE_DOC_ACX) that is
incremented when the ACX is changed. If the contents of ACX
is or becomes invalid, the modification counter will be set to 0.
If the contents of ACX is valid again, the modification counter will
be reset to the value it had before the contents of ACX became invalid,
and will simultaneously be incremented (only the value), if the contents of
ACX has really changed.
== 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DOC_ACX is invalid
!= 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DOC_ACX is valid
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
completeDotAcxChangeCnt
Modification counter of ACX that describes all
SINAMICS DO types known to the OPI (_N_COMPLETE_DOT_ACX) and that
is incremented when ACX changes. If the contents of ACX is or becomes
invalid, the modification counter will be set to 0.
If the contents of ACX is valid again, the modification counter will be
reset to the value it had before the contents of ACX became invalid and will
be incremented (only the value) simultaneously, if the contents of ACX has really changed.
== 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DOT_ACX is invalid

!= 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DOT_ACX is valid
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

1 Variables 07.05
completeDpcAcxChangeCn
t
Modification counter of ACX for the PROFIBUS configuration of
all PROFIBUS segments (_N_COMPLETE_DPC_ACX) that is
incremented when ACX is changed. If the contents of ACX
is or becomes invalid, the modification counter will be set to 0.
If the contents of ACX is valid again, the modification counter will
be reset to the value it had before the contents of ACX became invalid,
and will simultaneously be incremented (only the value), if the contents of
ACX has really changed.
== 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DPC_ACX is invalid
!= 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DPC_ACX is valid
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
diagnoseDataFfs
Diagnostic data for Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1: realspace (bytes) 8
2: formspace (bytes)
3: freespace (%)
4: delspace (%)
5: badspace (%)
6: actlowwater (%)
7: lowwater (%)
8: reorgmode (%)
digitInpVal $A_IN[x] x = DigitalinputNo

Value of HW digital input
0 = low
1 = high
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of digital input numDigitInp
digitOutpVal $A_OUT[x] x = DigitaloutputNo

Value of HW digital output
0 = low
1 = high
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Number of digital output numDigitOutp
driveType
Digital drive type. Coded according to machine data 13040, but additional code.
Note:
As long as the OPI variable contains the identifier 0x100 "Drive type unknown" after an NCK ramp-up, the information
is not yet consistent and must not be evaluated.
As soon as the identifier 0x100 is deleted, in NCU systems with SIMODRIVE 611D drives it can be assumed that the
content can only change after renewed link to the NCK.
(e.g. after modification of the drive modules), i.e. it need not be cyclically checked for change.
0x100: Drive type unknown.

0x200: This identifier is entered in addition to the code according to the machine data 13040 if a 611D-Performance2
module is detected.
For other codes, see MD 13040.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no maxnumDrives

07.05 1 Variables
driveTypeChangeCnt
This counter is incremented by 1 every time driveType is modified.
The next value after 65535 is 0.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
freeDirectorys
Number of directories that can be created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeFiles
Number of files that can be created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMem
Free SRAM in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemDram
Free memory in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemDram2PassF
Memory available in passive file system (DRAM no. 2) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemDramPassF
Memory available in passive file system (DRAM no. 1) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemFfs
Number of bytes that are still available in the Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemSramPassF
Memory available in passive file system (SRAM) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeProtokolFiles
Logging: Number of protocol files that can still be created
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10
hwMLFB
MLFB of the NCU module
- String[24] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 07.05
hwProductSerialNr
Unique hardware number of the NCU module
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
hwProductSerialNrL
Unique hardware number of the NCU module
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
licenseStatus
Licensing status
0: Licensed,
1: Insufficiently licensed
2: Not licensed
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
mmcCmdPrepCounter
Counter that is incremented with each call of EXTCALL
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
nckAliveAndWell DB10, DBX104.7 A4

NCK sign-of-life
This value is incremented every time the variable is read which means that an
MMC can determine whether the NCK is still operating correctly by reading the variable
cyclically.
The value itself has no meaning.
Cyclic result acknowledgements in relation to this variable are generated even if the NCK
is otherwise no longer operating cyclic services owing to problems with block cycle times.
However, this response can be guaranteed only if the variable is not mixed with others in
one request, i.e. nckAliveAndWell must be the only variable linked to the cluster.
As long as a cyclic read service is set for this variable, one of the MMC-CPU-Ready signals
is set in the PLC interface.
Which of the signals is set is determined on the one hand by the line number and, on the other,
by the client's "gloports":
line index = 1 and gloports 0x20-0x2f --> DB10.DBX108 bit2 MMC1-CPU-Ready to MPI
line index = 1 and gloports 0x10-0x1f --> DB10.DBX108 bit3 MMC1-CPU-Ready to OPI
line index = 2 --> DB10.DBX108 bit1 MMC2-CPU-Ready
Note: The related NCK-CPU-Ready signal is stored in DB10,DBX104.7.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes MMC No. 2 (ab SW 5.2)
ncuLinkActive
Display indicating whether NCU link is activated (via machine data setting)
Based on display, MMC decides whether link-specific calculations and
displays are required.
0: NCU link not activated
1: NCU link activated
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
nettoMemFfs
Net number of bytes which are available for the
Flash File System (FFS).
This memory stores the files contents and
management data (e.g. file names).
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

07.05 1 Variables
numAlarms
Number of pending general alarms
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numFilesPerDir
Maximum number of files per directory (see: $MN_MM_NUM_FILES_PER_DIR)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numSubDirsPerDir
Maximum number of subdirectories per directory see: $MN_MM_NUM_SUBDIR_PER_DIR
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numTraceProtocDataList $MM_PROTOC_NUM_ETPD_STD_LIST
Logging: Number of standard data lists per user
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10
numTraceProtocOemDataLi $MM_PROTOC_NUM_ETPD_OEM_LIST
st
Logging: Number of OEM data lists per user
- 0 0 UWord r
protCnfgAutoLoad
Log: Controls automatic loading of the trace session
from the description file during the NCK start-up process
0: Automatic load is disabled
1: Load trace session from description file during NCK start-up
2: Same as (1), but cancel automatic load when stop trigger fires
3: Same as (1), but update the description file whenever the logging state changes
- 0 0 3 UWord wr
protCnfgAutoLoadFile
Log: Directory path and file name from which
the trace session is to be loaded during NCK start-up
- String[64] wr
protCnfgAutoSave
Log: Automatically save the trace session into a description file
0: Automatic save is disabled
1: Save the trace session to a description file whenever data logging is terminated
2: Save the trace session and diagnostic information to a description file whenever data logging is terminated
- 0 0 2 UWord wr

1 Variables 07.05
protCnfgCtl
Log: Control word to manipulate the trace session description file
0: Do nothing
1: Save the trace session into a description file
2: Save the trace session with diagnostic information into a description file
3: Load the trace session from a description file and reset all active triggers to the armed state
4: Load the trace session from a description file with the saved trigger states
5: Delete the trace session description file
- 0 0 5 UWord wr
protCnfgFilename
Log: Directory path and file name of the
session description file that is managed by protCnfgCtl
- String[64] wr
protCnfgStat
Log: Result from the most recent save or load of a description file
0: No Error
- 0 UWord wr
protocLastValNetIpoCycle
Logging: Runtime of all events of all channels of a user in the last IPO cycle
- 0 0 Double r
protocMaxValNetIpoCycle
Logging: Maximum run time of all events of all channels of a user
- 0 0 Double wr
protocStrtMaskInt16
Logging: Integer 16 bit screen form with which the start trigger variable is logically AND-ed before the comparison is
made with the trigger value. There is no logic operation with the value 0.
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocStrtMaskInt32
Logging: Integer 32 bit screen form with which the start trigger variable is logically AND-ed before the comparison is
made with the trigger value. There is no logic operation with the value 0.
- 0 0 UDoubleword wr
protocStrtMatchCount
Logging: Specifies how often the comparison must match before the start trigger fires.
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocStrtNumEvDelay
Logging: Number of events which are still to be omitted after the occurrence of the trigger event before logging is
started.
- 0 0 UWord wr

07.05 1 Variables
protocStrtRemMatchCount
Logging: Specifies how often the comparison still has to match before the start trigger fires.
- 0 0 UWord r
protocStrtState
Logging: Status of the start triggering
0: Passive (trigger inactive)
1: Active (trigger is active, but has not yet responded)
2: Delay (trigger has responded and is still waiting the delay time)
3: Firing (trigger has responded, but must still respond more frequently until the triggering takes place)
4: Done (trigger has responded and is inactive)
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocStrtType
Logging: Type of start triggering
0: Monitoring for equality
1: Monitoring for more than or equal to
2: Monitoring for greater than
3: Monitoring for less than or equal to
4: Monitoring for less than
5: Monitoring for inequality
6: Monitoring for value change
7: Monitoring for increasing values
8: Monitoring for falling values
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocStrtValueInt16
Logging: Integer 16 bit value with which the start trigger variable is to be compared
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocStrtValueInt32
Logging: Integer 32 bit value with which the start trigger variable is to be compared
protocStrtValueReal32
Logging: Real 32 bit value with which the start trigger variable is to be compared
- 0 0 Float wr
protocStrtValueReal64
Logging: Real 64 bit value with which the start trigger variable is to be compared
- 0 0 Double wr
protocStrtVarCol
Logging: Variable which is to be monitored for the start triggering.
Statement of the "Col"
- 0 0 UWord wr

1 Variables 07.05
protocStrtVarRow
Statement of the "Row"
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocStrtVarType
Statement of the "Type"
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocStrtVarUnit
Statement of the "Unit".
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocTrigMaskInt16
Logging: Integer 16-bit mask with which the trigger variable is logically
ANDed before the comparison with the trigger value is made.
Variable is not ANDed if value is 0.
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocTrigMaskInt32
Logging: Integer 32-bit mask with which the trigger variable is logically
ANDed before the comparison with the trigger value is made.
Variable is not ANDed if value is 0.
protocTrigMatchCount
Logging: Specifies how often the comparison must match before the trigger fires.
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocTrigNumEvDelay
Logging: Number of events to be recorded after the trigger event
has occurred before the logging operation is stopped.
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocTrigRemMatchCount
Logging: Specifies how often the comparison still has to match before the trigger fires.
- 0 0 UWord r
protocTrigState
Logging: Triggering status
0: Passive (trigger not active)
1: Active (trigger is active, but has not yet responded)
2: Delay (trigger has responded and is waiting for delay)
3: Firing (trigger has responded, but must still respond more frequently until the triggering takes place)
4: Done (trigger has responded and is inactive)
- 0 0 UWord wr

07.05 1 Variables
protocTrigType
Logging: Triggering method
0: Monitor for equals
1: Monitor for greater than/equal to
2: Monitor for greater than
3: Monitor for less than/equal to
4: Monitor for less than
5: Monitoring for inequality
6: Monitoring for value change
7: Monitoring for increasing values
8: Monitoring for falling values
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocTrigValueInt16
Logging: Integer 16-bit value with which trigger variable must be
compared
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocTrigValueInt32
Logging: Integer 32-bit value with which trigger variable must be
compared
protocTrigValueReal32
Logging: Real 32-bit value with which trigger variable must be
compared
- 0 0 Float wr
protocTrigValueReal64
Logging: Real 64-bit value with which trigger variable must be
compared
- 0 0 Double wr
protocTrigVarArea
Specification of "Area".
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocTrigVarCol
Logging: Variable to be monitored for triggering.
Specification of "Col".
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocTrigVarRow
Specification of "Row".
- 0 0 UWord wr

1 Variables 07.05
protocTrigVarType
Specification of "Type".
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocTrigVarUnit
Specification of "Unit".
- 0 0 UWord wr
protSessAccR
Logging: Access rights of the session
- String[32] wr
protSessComm
Logging: Comments on session
- String[128] wr
protSessConn
Logging: Connection of the session
- String[32] wr
protSessName
Logging: Name of the session
- String[32] wr
protSessPrior
Logging: Priority of the session
- String[32] wr
safeExtInpValNckBit $A_INSE[n]
External NCK input of the SI programmable logic from the NCK periphery
- 0 0 1 UWord r
safeExtInpValNckWord $A_INSED
Image of the external NCK inputs of the SI programmable logic
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1: image of the system variables 2
$A_INSE[1]...[32]
2: image of the system variables
$A_INSE[33]...[64]
safeExtInpValPlcBit $A_INSEP[n]
External PLC input of the SI programmable logic from the PLC periphery
- 0 0 1 UWord r

07.05 1 Variables
safeExtInpValPlcWord $A_INSEPD
Image of the external PLC inputs of the SI programmable logic
- 0 Long Integer r
$A_INSEP[1]...[32]
$A_INSEP[33]...[64]
safeExtOutpValNckBit $A_OUTSE[n]
External NCK output of the SI programmable logic to the NCK periphery
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Output number 64
safeExtOutpValNckWord $A_OUTSED
Image of the external NCK outputs of the SI programmable logic
- 0 Long Integer r
$A_OUTSE[1]...[32]
$A_OUTSE[33]...[64]
safeExtOutpValPlcBit $A_OUTSEP[n]
External PLC output of the SI programmable logic to the PLC periphery
- 0 0 1 UWord r
safeExtOutpValPlcWord $A_OUTSEPD
Image of the external PLC outputs of the SI programmable logic
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1: image of the system variable 2
$A_OUTSEP[1]...[32]
2. mage of the system variable
$A_OUTSEP[33]...[64]
safeIntInpValNckBit $A_INSI[n]
Internal NCK input of the SI programmable logic from the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- 0 0 1 UWord r
safeIntInpValNckWord $A_INSID
Image of the internal NCK inputs of the SI programmable logic from the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- 0 Long Integer r
$A_INSI[1]...[32]
$A_INSI[33]...[64]
safeIntInpValPlcBit $A_INSIP[n]
Internal PLC input of the SI programmable logic from the 611D's SI monitoring channel
- 0 0 1 UWord r
safeIntInpValPlcWord $A_OUTSID
Image of the internal PLC inputs of the SI programmable logic from the 611D's SI monitoring channel
- 0 Long Integer r
$A_INSIP[1]...[32]
$A_INSIP[33]...[64]

1 Variables 07.05
safeIntOutpValNckBit $A_OUTSI[n]
Internal NCK output of the SI programmable logic to the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- 0 0 1 UWord r
safeIntOutpValNckWord $A_OUTSID
Image of the internal NCK outputs of the SI programmable logic to the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- 0 Long Integer r
$A_OUTSI[1]...[32]
2: image of the system variable
$A_OUTSI[33]...[64]
safeIntOutpValPlcBit $A_OUTSIP[n]
Internal PLC output of the SI programmable logic to the 611D's SI monitoring channel
- 0 0 1 UWord r
safeIntOutpValPlcWord $A_OUTSIPD
Image of the internal PLC outputs of the SI programmable logic to the 611D's SI monitoring channel
- 0 Long Integer r
$A_OUTSIP[1]...[32]
2: image of the system variable
$A_OUTSIP[33]...[64]
safeMarkerNck $A_MARKERSI
NCK flag for the SI programmable logic
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 64
safeMarkerPlc $A_MARKERSIP
Image of the PLC flag-variable for SI programmable logic
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 64
safePlcIn $A_PLCSIIN[index]
Bit image of the single channel safety signals from PLC to NCK
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index for $A_PLCSIIN[1...32] 32
safePlcOut $A_PLCSIOUT[index]
Bit image of the single channel safety signals from NCK to PLC
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index for $A_PLCSIOUT[1...32] 32

07.05 1 Variables
safeSplStatus
Status of components and parameter settings required for
operation of Safe Programmable Logic
Bit 0: SPL interfaces $A_INSE, $A_OUTSE, $A_INSI

or $A_OUTSI have been parameterized
Bit 1: SPL program file SAFE.SPF loaded
Bit 2: Drive runup status 4 reached, NCK is waiting
for PLC to run up
Bit 3: Drive runup status 4 reached, PLC has
reached cyclic operating status. PLC can now communicate
with drive.
Bit 4: Interrupt for ASUB start of SPL must be
assigned (FB4 call started)
Bit 5: Interrupt for ASUB start of SPL has been
assigned (FB4 call ended)
Bit 6: Interrupt processing for SPL start called
(FC9 call started)
Bit 7: Interrupt processing for SPL start ended
(FC9 call ended)
Bit 8: -
Bit 9: NCK cross-checking has been started
Bit10: PLC cross-checking has been started
Bit11: Cyclic SPL checksum check active
Bit12: All SPL protective mechanisms active
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
safeTimerNck $A_TIMERSI
NCK timer-variable for the SI programmable logic
s, user defined 0.0 Double r
Multi-line: no 8
safeXcmpCmd $A_CMDSI[index]
Command word for cross-checking (KDV) between NCK and PLC
0:No command
1:Extension of time window for different signal levels in cross-checking operation between NCK and PLC
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 32
safeXcmpLevel $A_LEVELSID
Fill-level display for cross-checking operation (KDV)
between NCK and PLC. Specifies the current number
of signals of different levels between the NCK and PLC)
- 0 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1
safeXcmpState $A_STATSID
Cross-checking (KDV) error has occurred between NCK and PLC.
0: No error has occurred

Multi-line: no 1
scalingSystemCounter
Modification counter for dimension system
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 07.05
semaDataAvailable
Display indicating whether complete SEMA data are available for individual axes.
This is the case if a channel can be assigned to the relevant NCU axis, thus allowing
the data in the channel context to be accessed. This does not apply to link axes as these
are traversed by a channel of another NCU.
This data can be utilized by MMCs in order to conceal specific, inaccessible data
in link axis data displays.
Bits 0-31 stand for the axes of the NCU.

Bit n = 1: Data can be accessed easily
Bit n = 0: Not all SEMA data are accessible
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
swLicensePIN
PIN for licensing
- String[128] wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
sysTimeBCD
Time represented in PLC format:
<month>.<day>.<year> <hours>:<minutes>:<seconds>.<milliseconds> <weekday> <status>
<weekday> can take following values: "SUN", "MON", "TUE", "WED", "THU", "FRI", "SAT"
- Date+Time r
Multi-line: no
sysTimeNCSC
NCSC system time in microseconds
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
sysTimeSinceStartup
System run time in seconds since NCK ramp-up
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalDirectorys
Maximum number of directories which may be created
see: $MN_MM_NUM_DIR_IN_FILESYSTEM
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalFiles
Maximum number of files which may be created (see: $MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalMem S7
Total SRAM in bytes (user memory)
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1
totalMemDram
total DRAM in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

07.05 1 Variables
totalMemDram2PassF
Size of passive file system (DRAM No.2) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalMemDramPassF
Size of passive file system (DRAM No. 1) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalMemFfs
Number of bytes reserved on the PCMCIA card for the
Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalMemSramPassF
Size of passive file system (SRAM) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalProtokolFiles $MM_PROTOC_NUM_FILES
Logging: Maximum number of log files which may be created
- 0 0 1 UWord r
traceProtocolActive $A_PROTOC
Logging: User status
1 = Not active
2 = Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
traceProtocolLock $A_PROT_LOCK
Logging: Recording disable of a user
0: No disable
1: Disable
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
traceStopAction
Logging: Actions on ending the recording
Bit 0: Automatic restart
1: Disable
- 0 0 UWord wr
usedDirectorys
Number of directories that have already been created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedFiles
Number of files that have already been created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 07.05
usedMem S7
Used memory in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1
usedMemDram
Used DRAM in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedMemDram2PassF
Memory used in passive file system (DRAM No.2) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedMemDramPassF
Memory used in passive file system (DRAM No. 1) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedMemFfs
Number of used bytes in the Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedMemSramPassF
Memory used in passive file system (SRAM) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedOptionsNotLicensed
List of options which are not licensed
- String[200] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedProtokolFiles
Logging: Number of protocol files that have already been created
- 0 0 1 UWord r
vaDpActTel $VA_DP_ACT_TEL[n, Achse]

Word for word image of the Profibus actual value message frames from drives on the Profibus/PROFIdrive
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 100 * axis index + word offset in the 100 * numMachAxes + 19
message frame

07.05 1 Variables
1.3.2 Area N, Mod. SALA: Alarms: List organized according to time, oldest
alarm appears first
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/SequencedAlarms/...
The NCK alarms are sorted in a list in the order they occurred, the oldest alarm
appears at the top of the list. The alarm parameters are transferred as ASCII
strings, the first character contains the type information for that parameter. The
following types are used:
S: General string, e.g. part program name
A: Axis name / spindle name
K: Channel name
N: Block number
Y: System error
D: Drive number
If a parameters is not assigned, an "S" is transferred.
All variables in this module are privileged variables! This means that cyclic
acknowledgements are sent for these variables even if the cyclic services are
no longer serviced by the NCK because of block cycle problems.
Attention: Privileged variables lose this characteristic if they are combined with
non-privileged variables in a request. -> Do not combine alarm variables with
other variables in a cluster!
In addition it is presumed that the cyclic services are set "on change" for the
alarm variables and are not combined with other variables (not even with
privileged variables) in the same request.
The module SALA only contains the alarms that are generated in the NCK. It
contains neither PLC nor MMC alarms. In order to read all alarms, the OEM-
MMC user should use the alarm server functions and not read the SALA
module directly.
alarmNo DA
Ordinal number of an alarm (how many alarms since control ON)
0 = unknown alarm
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can
be read via variable numAlarms in
module S.
clearInfo DA
Acknowledgement criteria for an alarm
1 = Power On
2 = Reset
3 = Cancel
4 = Alarm is cancelled by NCK-software (from SW 4.1)
5 = Alarm is cancelled by starting a program
6 = Alarm is cancelled by RESET in all channels of the bags (from SW 4.1)
7 = Alarm is cancelled by RESET in all channels of the NC (from SW 4.1)
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1

1 Variables 07.05
fillText1 DA
Parameter 1 of the alarm
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText2 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText3 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText4 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
textIndex
Alarm number (actual alarm)
- Long Integer r
module S.
timeBCD
Time stamp of an alarm
Time stamp, displayed in PLC format DATE_AND_TIME
- Date+Time r
Multi-line: no 1

07.05 1 Variables
1.3.3 Area N, Mod. SALAP: Alarms: List organized according to priority

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/TopPrioAlarm/...
The alarm parameters are transferred as ASCII strings, the first character
contains the type information for the parameter. The following types are used:
K: Channel name
N: Block name
Y: System error
D: Drive number
If a parameter is not assigned, an "S" is transferred.
The module SALAP only contains the alarms that are generated in the NCK. It
MMC user should use the alarm server functions and not read the SALAP
module directly.
alarmNo DA
0 = unknown alarm
- Long Integer r
module S.
clearInfo DA
Acknowledgement criteria of an alarm
1 = Power On
2 = Reset
3 = Cancel
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 07.05
fillText1 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText2 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText3 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText4 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
textIndex
- Long Integer r
module S.
timeBCD
- Date+Time r
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variables

most recent alarm appears first
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/LastAlarm/...
The NCK alarms are sorted in a list in the order they occurred, the most recent
alarm appears at the bottom of the list. The alarm parameters are transferred
as ASCII strings, the first character contains the type information for that
parameter. The following types are used:
K: Channel name
N: Block number
Y: System error
D: Drive number
If a parameters is not assigned, an "S" is transferred.
The module SALA only contains the alarms that are generated in the NCK. It
MMC user should use the alarm server functions and not read the SALA
module directly.
alarmNo DA
0 = unknown alarm
- Long Integer r
module S.
clearInfo DA
Acknowledgement criteria for an alarm
1 = Power On
2 = Reset
3 = Cancel
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 07.05
fillText1 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText2 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText3 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
fillText4 DA
- String[32] r
module S.
textIndex
- Long Integer r
module S.
timeBCD
- Date+Time r
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variables
1.3.5 Area N, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/MachineAxis/...
All state data that are dependent on machine movement and are defined
specifically for machine axes (geometry and special axes) are combined in
module SMA. Supplementary information is to be found in module SEMA. The
individual variables are defined as fields where the line index is the number of
the machine axis (assigned to the current channel). The variable "name" in
module SMA with the line index in question identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SMA and SEMA is identical.
actIncrVal H1
Active INC weighting of the axis
0 = INC_10000
1 = INC_1000
2 = INC_100
3 = INC_10
4 = INC_1
5 = INC_VAR
6 = INC_JOG_CONT
7 = no incremental mode set
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes
actToolBasePos
Tool base position. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
cmdToolBasePos
Tool base position setpoint. Physical unit is defined in variable extUnit (in this module).
extUnit
Current physical unit of the axis position
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = degree
3 = indexing position
4 = userdef
- UWord r
name
Axis name
- String[32] r
status
Axis state
0 = travel command in plus direction
1 = travel command in minus direction
2 = exact position coarse reached
3 = exact position fine reached
- UWord r

1 Variables 07.05
toolBaseDistToGo
Tool base distance-to-go. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
toolBaseREPOS
Tool base REPOS. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
varIncrVal
Settable value for INC_VAR. The physical value depends on whether the axis is linear or rotary.
Linear axis: unit is 1 mm
Rotary axis: unit is 1/1000 degrees

07.05 1 Variables
1.3.6 Area N, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes (extension of SMA)
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/MachineAxis/...
aaActIndexAxPosNo $AA_ACT_INDEX_AX_POS_NO[<Achse>]
Current indexing position; the display depends on
$MN_INDEX_AX_NO_MODE and the division (via table or equidistant)
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes
aaAlarmStat $AA_ALARM_STAT
Display indicating whether alarms are active for a PLC-controlled axis.
The relevant coded alarm reactions can be used as a source for
the "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
The data is bit-coded, allowing, where necessary, individual states to be
masked or evaluated separately (bits not listed supply a value of 0)
Bit2 = 1: NOREADY (active rapid deceleration + cancelation of servo enable)
Bit6 = 1: STOPBYALARM (rampm stop in all channel axes)
Bit9 = 1: SETVDI (VDI interface signal "Setting alarm")
Bit13 = 1: FOLLOWUPBYALARM (Follow-up)
- 0 UWord r
aaBcsOffset $AA_BCS_OFFSET[Achse]
Sum of all axial offsets of an axis,
such as DRF, online tool offset, $AA_OFF and ext. WO.
- 0 Double r
aaCoupAct
Current coupling state of the slave spindle
- UWord r
aaCoupOffs
Position offset of the synchronous spindle desired value
- Double r
aaCurr
Actual value of the axis/spindle current in A (611D only)
A Double r

1 Variables 07.05
aaDtbb
Axis-specific distance from the beginning of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in
synchronous actions (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDteb
Axis-specific distance to the end of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in synchronous
actions (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDtepb
Axis-specific distance-to-go of infeed during oscillation in the BCS (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaEsrEnable
(Axial) enabling of reactions of "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
The selected axial ESR reaction must be parameterized in MD $MA_ESR_REACTION.
beforehand. The corresponding Stop or Retract reactions can be activated via
$AN_ESR_TRIGGER (or for individual drives in the event of communications failure/
DC-link undervoltage), generator-mode operation is automatically activated in response to
undervoltage conditions.
0: FALSE
1: TRUE
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaEsrStat
(Axial) status checkback signals of "Extended Stop and Retract" function,
which can be applied as input signals for the gating logic of the ESR (synchronous actions).
The data is bit-coded. Individual states can therefore be masked or

evaluated separately if necessary:
Bit0 = 1: Generator mode is activated
Bit1 = 1: Retract operation is activated
Bit2 = 1: Stop operation is activated
Bit3 = 1: Risk of undervoltage (DC-link voltage monitoring,
voltage has dropped below warning threshold)
Bit4 = 1: Speed has dropped below minimum generator mode threshold (i.e. no more
regenerative rotation energy is available).
- 0 UWord r
aaEsrTrigger $AA_ESR_TRIGGER
Activation of "NC-controlled ESR" for PLC-controlled axis
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaIbnCorr $AA_IBN_CORR[<Achse>]
Current BZS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- 0 Double r

07.05 1 Variables
aaIenCorr $AA_IEN_CORR[<Achse>]
Current SZS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- 0 Double r
aaJerkCount $AA_JERK_COUNT[Achse]
Total traverse processes of an axis with jerk
- 0 Double r
aaJerkTime $AA_JERK_TIME[Achse]
Total traverse time of an axis with jerk
- 0 Double r
aaJerkTotal $AA_JERK_TOT[Achse]
Overall total of jerk of an axis
- 0 Double r
aaLeadP
Actual lead value position
- Double r
aaLeadPTurn $AA_LEAD_P_TURN
Current master value - position component lost
as a result of modulo reduction
- 0 0 UWord r
aaLeadSp
Simulated lead value - position
- Double r
aaLeadSv
Simulated leading value velocity
- Double r
aaLeadTyp
Source of the lead value
1: actual value
2: desired value
3: simulated value
- UWord r
aaLeadV
Actual lead value - velocity
- Double r

1 Variables 07.05
aaLoad
Drive load in % (611D only)
% Double r
aaMaslState $AA_MASL_STAT
Each slave axis currently coupled via master-slave delivers the machine axis number of the corresponding master axis.
Zero is displayed as default for inactive coupling. A master axis also shows default value zero.
0: No coupling for this axis configured, or axis is master axis, or no coupling active
>0: Machine axis number of the master axis with which the slave axis is currently coupled
- 0 0 numGlobMachAx UWord r
es
aaMm
Latched probe position in the machine coordinate system
- Double wr
aaMm1
Access to measurement result of trigger event in the MCS
- Double wr
aaMm2
- Double wr
aaMm3
- Double wr
aaMm4
- Double wr
aaOff
Superimposed position offset from synchronous actions
- Double r
aaOffLimit
Limit for axial correction $AA_OFF reached (Note: for SYNACT only)
0: limit not reached

1: limit in positive axial direction reached
11: limit in negative axial direction reached
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variables
aaOffVal
Integrated value of overlaid motion for an axis.
The negative value of this variable can be used to cancel an overlaid motion.
e.g. $AA_OFF[axis] = -$AA_OFF_VAL[axis]
- 0 Double r
aaOscillBreakPos1 $AA_OSCILL_BREAK_POS1[<Achse>]
Oscillation interrupt position 1
- Double r
- Double r
aaOscillReversePos1
Current reverse position 1 for oscillation in the BCS. For synchronous actions the value of the setting data
$SA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1 is evaluated online; (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaOscillReversePos2
Current reverse position 2 for oscillation in the BCS; For synchronous actions the value of the setting data
- Double r
aaOvr
Axial override for synchronous actions
- Double r
aaPlcOvr $AA_PLC_OVR[Achse]
Axial override specified by PLC for motion-synchronous actions
- 100 0 Double r
aaPolfa $AA_POLFA
The programmed retraction position of the single axis
- Double r
aaPolfaValid $AA_POLFA_VALID
Indicates whether the retraction of the single axis is programmed
0: no retraction programmed for the single axis
1: retraction programmed as position
2: retraction programmed as distance
- 0 0 2 UWord r
aaPower
Drive power in W (611D only)
W Double r

1 Variables 07.05
aaSnglAxStat $AA_SNGLAX_STAT
Display status of a PLC-controlled axis
0: Not a single axis
1: Reset
2: Ended
3: Interrupted
4: Active
5: Alarm
- 0 UWord r
aaSoftendn
Software end position, negative direction
- Double r
aaSoftendp
Software end position, positive direction
- Double r
aaStat
Axis state
0: no axis state available
1: travel command is active
2: axis has reached the IPO end. only for channel axes
3: axis in position (exact stop coarse) for all axes
4: axis in position (exact stop fine) for all axes
- UWord r
aaSync
Coupling state of the following axis with lead value coupling
0: not synchronized
1: synchronized coarse
2: synchronized fine
3: synchronized coarse and fine
- UWord r
aaTorque
Desired torque value in Nm (611D only)
Nm Double r
aaTotalOvr $AA_TOTAL_OVR[Achse]
The total axial override for motion-synchronous actions
- 100 0 Double r
aaTravelCount $AA_TRAVEL_COUNT[Achse]
Total traverse processes of an axis
- 0 Double r

07.05 1 Variables
aaTravelCountHS $AA_TRAVEL_COUNT_HS[Achse]
Total traverse processes of an axis at high speed
- 0 Double r
aaTravelDist $AA_TRAVEL_DIST[Achse]
Total travel path of an axis in mm or degrees
- 0 Double r
aaTravelDistHS $AA_TRAVEL_DIST_HS[Achse]
Total travel path of an axis at high speed in mm or degrees
- 0 Double r
aaTravelTime $AA_TRAVEL_TIME[Achse]
Total traverse time of an axis in seconds
- 0 Double r
aaTravelTimeHS $AA_TRAVEL_TIME_HS[Achse]
Total traverse time of an axis at high speed in seconds
- 0 Double r
aaTyp
Axis type
0: axis in other channel
1: channel axis of same channel
2: neutral axis
3: PLC axis
4: reciprocating axis
5: neutral axis, currently traversing in JOG
6: slave axis coupled via master value
7: coupled motion slave axis
8: command axis
9: compile cycle axis
- UWord r
aaVactB
Axis velocity in basic coordinate system
mm/min, inch/min, user 0.0 Double r
defined
aaVactM
Axis velocity in machine coordinate system
defined
aaVc
Additive correction value for path feed or axial feed
- Double r

1 Variables 07.05
ackSafeMeasPos
Confirmation of SI actual position
0 = not confirmed
0x00AC = confirmed
- UWord wr
actCouppPosOffset S3
Position offset of an axis to a leading axis / leading spindle (actual value)
mm, inch, degree, user defined 0 360 Double r
actFeedRate S5
Actual value of axis-specific feedrate for positioning axes. Actual value of single axis feed for additional axes.
- Double r
actIndexAxPosNo
Current indexing position number
0 = no indexing position
>0 = indexing position number
- UWord r
actSpeedRel
Actual value of rotary speed (referring to the maximum speed in %; for 611D in MD1401), for linear drives actual value
of the velocity.
% Double r
actValResol
Actual value resolution. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module)
amSetupState
State variable of the PI Service Automatic set-up of an asynchronous motor
0 = inactive
1 = wait for PLC enable
2 = wait for key NC-start
3 = active
4 = stopped by Servo + fine code in the upper byte
5 = stopped by 611D + fine code in the upper byte
6 = stopped by NCK + fine code in the upper byte
- 0 0 0xff06 UWord r
axComp
Sum of axis-specific compensation values (CEC Cross Error compensation and temperature compensation). The
physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
axisActiveInChan
Flag indicating whether axis is active in this channel
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variables
axisFeedRateUnit
Unit of the axis-specific feedrate
0 = mm/min
1 = inch/min
2 = degree/min
- UWord r
chanAxisNoGap
Display indicating whether axis exists, i.e. no axis gap in channel.
0: Axis does not exist
1: Axis does exist
- 0 0 1 UWord r
chanNoAxisIsActive
Channel number in which the channel axis is currently active
0 = axis is not assigned to any channel
1 to maxnumChannels (Area.:N / Module:Y) = channel number
- UWord r
cmdContrPos
Desired value of position after fine interpolation
cmdCouppPosOffset S3
Position offset of an axis referring to the leading axis / leading spindle (desired value)
cmdFeedRate
Setpoint of axis-specific feedrate, if axis is a positioning axis. Single axis feedrate setpoint if the axis is an additional
axis.
- Double r
cmdSpeedRel
Desired value of rotary speed. (referring to the max. speed in %; for 611D in MD 1401). For linear motors actual value
of velocity.
% Double r
contrConfirmActive
Controller enable
0 = no controller enable
1 = controller enable
- UWord r

1 Variables 07.05
contrMode
Identifier for controller mode servo
0 = position control
1 = speed control
2 = stop
3 = park
4 = follow-up
- UWord r
displayAxis
Identifier indicating whether axis is displayed by MMC as a machine axis.
0= Do not display at all
0xFFFF = Always display everything
bit 0 = Display in actual-value window
bit 1 = Display in reference point window
bit 2 = Display in Preset / Basic offset / Scratching
bit 3 = Display in handwheel selection
- 0xFFFF 0 0xFFFF UWord r
distPerDriveRevol
Distance per revolution. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
drive2ndTorqueLimit
2nd torque limit. With linear motors: 2nd force limit
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
driveActMotorSwitch
Actual motor wiring (star/delta)
0 = star
1 = delta
- UWord r
driveActParamSet
Number of the actual drive parameter set
- 1 8 UWord r
driveClass1Alarm
Message ZK1 drive alarm
0 = no alarm set
1= alarm set (fatal error occured)
- UWord r
driveContrMode
Control mode of drive
0 = current control
1 = speed control
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variables
driveCoolerTempWarn
Heatsink temperature monitoring
0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- UWord r
driveDesMotorSwitch
Motor wiring selection (star/delta)
0 = star
1 = delta
- UWord r
driveDesParamSet
Desired parameter set of the drive
- 1 8 UWord r
driveFastStop
Ramp-function generator rapid stop
0 = not stopped
1 = stopped
- UWord r
driveFreqMode
I/F mode
- UWord r
driveImpulseEnabled
Enable inverter impulse (checkback signal to impulseEnable)
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
- UWord r
driveIndex
Drive assignment (logical drive number)
0 = drive does not exist
1 to 15 = logical drive number
- 0 15 UWord r
driveIntegDisable
Integrator disable
0 = not disabled
1 = disabled
- UWord r
driveLinkVoltageOk
State of the DC link voltage
0 = OK
1 = not OK
- UWord r

1 Variables 07.05
driveMotorTempWarn
Motor temperature warning
0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- UWord r
driveNumCrcErrors
CRC errors on the drive bus
(transmission errors when writing data to the 611D; values may range up to FFFFH)
0 = no error
- UWord r
driveParked
Parking axis
0 = no parking axis
1 = parking axis
- UWord r
drivePowerOn
Drive switched on
0 = drive not switched on
1 = drive switched on
- UWord r
driveProgMessages
Configurable messages (via machine data)
- UWord r
driveReady
Drive ready
0 = drive not ready
1 = drive ready
- UWord r
driveRunLevel
Current state reached during the boot process
(range: coarse state (0 to 5) * 100 + fine state (up to 22)
Boot firmware ---> 0 XX
Enter configuration ---> 1XX
Hardware init, communication init
Load, convert data ---> 2XX
Change bus addressing ---> 3XX
Prepare synchronization ---> 4XX
Activate interrupt ---> 519
XX ==> fine state

- UWord r

07.05 1 Variables
driveSetupMode
Set-up mode
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
driveSpeedSmoothing
Smoothing the desired value of the rotary speed, for linear drives: smoothing the desired value of the velocity
0 = no smoothing
1 = smoothing
- UWord r
effComp1
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 1. The value results from: Temperature compensation, backlash
compensation, quadrant error compensation, beam sag compensation, leadscrew error compensation. The physical
unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
effComp2
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 2. The value results from: Temperature compensation, backlash
encChoice
Active encoder
0 = does not exist
1 = encoder 1
2 = encoder 2
- UWord r
fctGenState
State of the function generator
- UWord r
feedRateOvr
Feedrate override (only if axis is a positioning axis)
% Double r
focStat
Current status of "Travel with limited torque" function
0-2
0: FOC not active
1: FOC modal active (programming of FOCON[])
2: FOC non-modal active (programming of FOC[])
- 0 0 2 UWord r

1 Variables 07.05
fxsInfo $VA_FXS_INFO[Achse]
Additional information on travel to fixed stop if
$VA_FXS[]=2, or OPI variable /N/SEMA/fxsStat=2.
0 No additional information available
1 No approach motion programmed
2 Programmed end position reached, movement ended
3 Abort by NC RESET (Reset key)
4 Fixed stop window exited
5 Torque reduction was rejected by drive
6 PLC has canceled enable signals
- 0 0 6 UWord r
fxsStat
State after travelling to fixed stop
0 = normal control
1 = fixed stop reached
2 = failed
- UWord r
handwheelAss
Number of handwheel assigned to an axis
0 = no handwheel assigned
1 to 3 = handwheel number
- 0 3 UWord r
impulseEnable
Impulse enable for drive
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
- UWord r
index
Absolute axis index referred to machine data
- UWord r
isDriveUsed
One or more machine axes are assigned to each drive.
The drive can only be controlled at any one time by one of these machine axes. The machine manufacturer makes the
selection.
The status of the drive control changes dynamically.
- 0 0 1 UWord r
kVFactor
position control gain factor
16.667 1/s Double r
lag
Following error = desired value of position after fine interpolation - actual value of position. The physical unit is defined
in measUnit (in this module).

07.05 1 Variables
logDriveNo
0 = not available
1 to 15 = drive number
- 0 15 UWord r
measFctState
State of the probing function
- UWord r
measPos1
Actual value of position for encoder 1. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
measPos2
measPosDev
Actual position difference between the two encoders. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
measUnit
Unit for service values of the drives
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = grd
- UWord r
paramSetNo
Number of parameter set
- 1 8 UWord r
preContrFactTorque
Feed forward control factor torque
Nm Double r
preContrFactVel
Feed forward control factor velocity
- Double r
preContrMode
Feed forward control mode
0 = inactive
1 = velocity feed forward
2 = torque feed forward
- UWord r

1 Variables 07.05
PRESETActive
Preset state
0 = no preset active
1 = preset active
- UWord r
PRESETVal
The function PRESETON (...) programs a zero offset for an axis. The value of the offset is stored in the variable
'PRESETVal'. The variable can be overwritten by the part program and by the MMC.
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
progIndexAxPosNo
Programmed indexing position number
- UWord r
qecLrnIsOn
Quadrant error compensation learning active
0 = inactive
1 = Neuronal-QEC learning active
2 = Standard-QEC active
3 = Standard-QEC with adaptation of correction value active
4 = Neuronal-QEC active
5 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of measuring time active
6 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of decay time of correction value active
7 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of measuring time and decay time of correction value active
- 0 7 UWord r
refPtBusy
Axis is being referenced
0 = axis is not being referenced
1 = axis is being referenced
- UWord r
refPtCamNo
Reference point cam
0 = no cam approached
1 = cam 1
2 = cam 2
3 = cam 3
4 = cam 4
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variables
refPtStatus
Identifier indicating whether an axis requires referencing and is referenced.
Note regarding exchange axes:

An exchange axis need only ever be referenced in the channel to which it is currently assigned. A referenced exchange
axis is thus logged onto the channel in which it is traversing with value "3" (requires referencing and referenced) and in
other channels with value "1" (does not require referencing, but referenced).
A set bit means:
SW release 3.1 and earlier:

Bit0: at least 1 measuring system has been referenced
Bit1: current measuring system requires referencing
SW release 3.2 and later:

Bit0: current measuring system has been referenced
Bit1: current measuring system requires referencing
(The busy signal effects the status)
- Achsindex UWord r
Multi-line: no maxnumGlobMachAxes
safeAcceptCheckPhase
Flag for NCK-side acceptance test phase, the human-machine interface can determine which acceptance test phase is
present on the NCK.
0: NCK has acceptance test phase inactive = 0

0ACH: NCK has acceptance test phase active
- 0 0 0ACH UWord r
safeAcceptTestMode
SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by Reset in acceptance test mode
0: Acceptance test mode: SI PowerOn alarms cannot be acknowledged by Reset
0ACH: Acceptance test mode: SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by Reset
- 0 0 0FFH UWord wr
safeAcceptTestPhase
Flag for acceptance test phase
0: Acceptance test Wizard not selected, activate NCK-side alarm suppression
0ACH: Dialogs for acceptance test support selected, deactivate NCK-side alarm suppression
- 0 0 0FFH UWord wr
safeAcceptTestSE
Flag for NCK-side SE acceptance test. The human-machine interface starts checking the safe limit positions during the
acceptance test
0: NCK has SE acceptance test inactive = 0. The single channel SW limit positions are activated.
0ACH: NCK is to activate SE acceptance test. The single channel SW limit positions are deactivated in this way.
- 0 0 0ACH UWord r

1 Variables 07.05
safeAcceptTestState
Flag for acceptance test status, the human-machine interface can determine which acceptance test mode is present on
the NCK.
0: NCK has inactive acceptance test mode

0CH: Acceptance test mode not activated because SI PowerOn alarms already present.
The causes of the SI PowerOn alarms must be eliminated first.
0DH: Acceptance test mode not activated, the HMI writes invalid values in /N/SEMA/safeAcceptTestMode to the NCK.
0ACH: NCK has active acceptance test mode
- 0 0 0FFH UWord r
safeActPosDiff
Current actual value difference betw. NCK and drive monitoring channels
mm, inch, degree, user defined 0.0 Double r
safeActVeloDiff
Current speed difference betw. NCK and drive monitoring channels
defined
safeActVeloLimit
Safe limit of actual speed
-1 => no actual speed limit active
>= 0 => limit of actual speed is active
mm, inch, degree, user defined -1 Double r
safeDesVeloLimit
Safe limit of desired speed
-1 => no desired speed limit active
>= 0 => desired speed limit is active
safeFctEnable
Safe operation active
0 = not activated
1 = activated
- UWord r
safeInputSig
Safe input signals of the axis
- UWord r
safeInputSig2
Safe input signals part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeInputSigDrive
Safe input signals of the drive
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variables
safeInputSigDrive2
Safe input signals of the drive part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeMaxVeloDiff
Maximum speed difference between NCK and drive monitoring channels since last NCK Reset
defined
safeMeasPos
Safe actual position of the axis. The physical unit is defined in the variable measUnit (in this module).
safeMeasPosDrive
Safe actual position of drive. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
safeOutputSig
Safe output signals of the axis
- UWord r
safeOutputSig2
Safe output signals part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeOutputSigDrive
Safe output signals of the drive
- UWord r
safeOutputSigDrive2
Safe output signals of the drive part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeStopOtherAxis
Stop on another axis
0: No stop on another axis
1: Stop on another axis
- 0 0 1 UWord r
spec
Axis specification
0 = path axis
1 = positioning axis
- UWord r

1 Variables 07.05
subSpec T1
Subspecification
0 = normal axis
1 = indexing axis
- UWord r
torqLimit
Torque limitation value (referring to the nominal value of the drive). For linear motors: force limitation value.
% Double r
traceState1
State of trace channel 1
0 = idle state
1 = recording started
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
4 = recording aborted
- UWord r
traceState2
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
traceState3
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
traceState4
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
trackErrContr
Position controller difference (actual value / desired value of position)

07.05 1 Variables
trackErrDiff
Contour deviation (difference actual value of position and calculated dynamical model)
type
Axis type
1 = linear axis
2 = rotary axis
3 = spindle
- UWord r
vaDistTorque $VA_DIST_TORQUE[Achse]
Disturbing torque/max. torque (motor end, York)
% 0 -100 100 Double r
vaDpe $VA_DPE[x1]
Status of power enable of a machine axis
0-1
- 0 0 1 UWord r
vaIm $VA_IM[x]
Encoder actual value in the machine coordinate system (measured
active measuring system)
- 0 0 Double r
vaIm1 $VA_IM1[x]
Actual value in the machine coordinate system (measured encoder 1)
- 0 0 Double r
vaIm2 $VA_IM2[x]
- 0 0 Double r
vaTorqueAtLimit $VA_TORQUE_AT_LIMIT[Achse]
Status "effective torque equals specified torque limit"
0: Effective torque lower than torque limit

1: Effective torque has reached torque limit
- 0 0 1 UWord r
vaVactm
Axis velocity actual value on the load side in the MCS
- Double r

1 Variables 07.05
1.3.7 Area N, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/Spindle/...
All status data that refer to the spindle are combined in the module SSP. The
individual variables are defined as arrays where the row index is the number of
the spindle (assigned to the current channel). The spindle can be identified by
reading the variables "name" or "index" in the same module with the respective
row index.
The number of spindles can be read from "numSpindles" in the module Y in the
area C. Values of 0 or ' ' are supplied for axes which are not spindles. The
value SSP:index = 0 indicates that the axis is not a spindle.
acConstCutS $AC_CONSTCUT_S[n]
Current constant cutting rate
m/min, ft/min, user defined 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles
acSMode $AC_SMODE[x]
Spindle mode
0: No spindle present in channel or spindle is active in another channel or
is being used by PLC (FC18) or by synchronized actions.
1: Open-loop speed control mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 1 0 4 UWord r
actGearStage
Actual gear stage of spindle
- UWord r
actSpeed
Spindle speed actual value
rev/min, user defined Double r
channelNo
Number of channel in which spindle is configured
- UWord r
cmdAngPos
Spindle position (SPOS)
Degree, user defined Double r

07.05 1 Variables
cmdConstCutSpeed
Constant cutting speed of the master spindle. The requested value for the master spindle differs from SSP:cmdSpeed
only if G96 is active

defined
cmdGearStage
Requested gear stage
- UWord r
cmdGwps
Programmed SUG desired value (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel")
m/s, ft/s Double r
cmdSpeed
Spindle speed desired value
rev/min , m/min Double r
driveLoad
Load
% Double r
gwpsActive {$GWPS}
SUG programming active (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel)
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
index
Absolute axis index referred to MD
- UWord r
name
Spindle name
Note: If several logical spindles are referred to one physical spindle with active spindle conversion and access is made
via area N of module SSP2, then the name of the first suitable logical spindle is output.
- String[32] r
namePhys
Name of associated physical spindle, identical to "name" variable.
- String[32] r

1 Variables 07.05
opMode
Spindle mode
0 = spindle mode
1 = oscillation mode (gear step changeover)
2 = positioning mode
3 = synchronous mode
4 = axis mode
- UWord r
speedLimit
Current speed limitation for spindle
speedOvr
Spindle override
% Double r
spindleType
Spindle type
0 = master spindle
1 = no master spindle
- UWord r
status
Spindle state
Bit0 = following spindle

Bit1 = leading spindle
- UWord r
turnState
State of spindle rotation
value range to be read via BTSS variable
0 = clockwise
1 = counter-clockwise
2 = stop
value range to be read via $ variable
3 = clockwise
5 = stop
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variables
1.3.8 Area N, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/LogicalSpindle/...
All state data that refer to a spindle, if a spindle converter (logical spindles) is
active
Multi-line: yes Logical spindle index numSpindlesLog
Spindle mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 1 0 4 UWord r
actGearStage
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog
actSpeed
channelNo
- UWord r
cmdAngPos
cmdConstCutSpeed

defined
cmdGearStage
- UWord r

1 Variables 07.05
cmdGwps
m/s, ft/s Double r
cmdSpeed
driveLoad
Load
% Double r
gwpsActive {$GWPS}
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
index
- UWord r
name
Spindle name
- String[32] r
namePhys
Name of assigned physical spindle.
- String[32] r
opMode
Spindle mode
0 = spindle mode
4 = axis mode
- UWord r
speedLimit
speedOvr
Spindle override
% Double r

07.05 1 Variables
spindleType
Spindle type
0 = master spindle
- UWord r
status
Spindle state

- UWord r
turnState
0 = clockwise
2 = stop
3 = clockwise
5 = stop
- UWord r

1 Variables 07.05
1.3.9 Area N, Mod. FA: Active NCU global frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/ActualFrame/...
There are the following frame indices:

2: IFRAME current settable work offset (only if
$MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES > 0)
6: ACTBFRAME current total of base frames (only if
$MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES = 0)
The maximum frame index is: 6
linShift $P_PFRAME[x,TR] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Translation of an active zero offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * 6 * maxnumGlobMachAxes
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis
number
mirrorImgActive $P_PFRAME[x,MI] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Mirroring enabled in an active zero offset
0 = mirroring not active
1 = mirroring active
- UWord r
number
rotation $P_PFRAME[x,RT] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Rotation of an active zero offset
Degree Double r
number
scaleFact $P_PFRAME[x,SC] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Scaling factor of an active zero offset
- Double r
number

07.05 1 Variables
1.3.10 Area N, Mod. FB: NCU global base frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/BaseFrame/...
This only applies if $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES > 0.
The maximum frame index is: $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES - 1
linShift $P_NCBFR[x,TR] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Translation of settable zero offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES *
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis maxnumGlobMachAxes
number
linShiftFine $P_NCBFR[x,SI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis

Fine offset with frames, expansion of basic frames and settable frames
number
mirrorImgActive $P_NCBFR[x ,MI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Mirroring enabled in a settable zero offset
0: Mirroring not active
1: Mirroring active
- UWord wr
number
rotation $P_NCBFR[x,y,RT] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Rotation of a settable zero offset
Degree Double wr
number
scaleFact $P_NCBFR[x,SC] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Scaling factor of a settable zero offset
- Double wr
number

1 Variables 07.05
1.3.11 Area N, Mod. FU: NCU global settable frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/UserFrame/...
This only applies if $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES > 0.
The following frame indices are possible:

0 = G500
1 = G54
2 = G55
3 = G56
4 = G57
5 = G505
6 = G506
:
n = G5n
:
99 = G599
The maximum frame index is: $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES - 1
The PI service SETUFR has to be called in order to activate the settable

frames.
linShift $P_UIFR[x,y,TR] x=FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES *
number
linShiftFine $P_UIFR[x,y,SI] x=FrameNo,y=Axis

number
mirrorImgActive $P_UIFR[x,y,MI] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Mirroring enabled in settable zero offset
- UWord wr
number
scaleFact $P_UIFR[x,y,SC] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Scaling factor of settable zero offset
- Double wr
number

07.05 1 Variables
1.3.12 Area N, Mod. YFAFL: NCK instruction groups (Fanuc)

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/FunctionGroupingFanuc/...
All G functions currently configured for the channels are made available for
reading by the NCK. They are configured via machine data. Since the G
functions are organized in groups, only one of which can be active at a time,
this module is organized as a table.
There are two columns for each G group. The 1st column lists the number of G
functions in a group (/N/YFAFL/Gruppe_NUM), this corresponds to the number
of rows in each subsequent column. This second column contains all the G
functions belonging to a group (/N/YFAFL/Gruppe).
As a result, the data for a certain G group are calculated via a column offset.
The column offset of each variable is:
2 * (G group number - 1)
The number of G groups is given in the variable "numGCodeGroupsFanuc" in

area N / module Y. The resultant maximum column offset of the variables is
thus 2 * numGCodeGroupsFanuc.
The G functions currently active are listed in area C / module SNCF.
Gruppe
Instruction group
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes Serial number /N/YFAFL/Gruppe_NUM
Gruppe_NUM
Number of Fanuc-G functions in respective group
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 07.05
1.3.13 Area B, Mod. S: Mode-group-specific state data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Bag/State/...


opMode DB11, DBX6.0-6.2

Active mode
0 = JOG
1 = MDA
2 = AUTO
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
readyActive DB11, DBX6.3

Code whether mode group is ready
0 = not ready
1 = ready
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
resetActive DB11, DBX6.7

Code whether all channels in mode group are in Reset
0 = not all channels in reset
1 = all channels in reset
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variablen
1.4 State data of channel
1.4.1 Area C, Mod. M: Channel-specific machine data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Drive/...
Channel-specific machine data
MDS_CHAN_NAME MD 20000: CHAN_NAME

Channel name
- String[16] wr
Multi-line: no 1

1 Variablen 07.05
1.4.2 Area C, Mod. S: Channel-specific status data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/State/...


aaAccLimA $AA_ACCLIMA[a]
Axial acceleration override in main run
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index ) numMachAxes
aaEgActive $AA_EG_ACTIVE[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Link to the specified master axis is operative, i.e. activated.
0: Deactivated
1: Activated
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of the slave) * numMachAxes * numMachAxes
numMachAxes + (axis index of the
master axis) + 1
aaEgAx $AA_EG_AX[n,a]
Electronic gear:
Axis number of nth master axis (1-n).
(Axis index = axis number - 1)
1-numMachAxes
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of slave axis) * 5 + numMachAxes * 5
(index of master axis) + 1
aaEgDenom $AA_EG_DENOM[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Denominator of link factor for the specified master axis.
The link factor of the gear is the result of $AA_EG_NUMERA[a,b]/$AA_EG_DENOM[a,b].
- 1 Double r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of the slave axis) * numMachAxes * numMachAxes
master axis) + 1
aaEgNumera $AA_EG_NUMERA[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Numerator of link factor for the specified master axis.
The link factor of the gear is the result of $AA_EG_NUMERA[a,b]/$AA_EG_DENOM[a,b].
- 0 Double r
master axis) + 1

07.05 1 Variablen
aaEgNumLa $AA_EG_NUM_LA[a]
Electronic gear:
Number of master axes specified with EGDEF.
If the axis has not been specified with EGDEF as slave axis,
the value is 0.
0-5
- 0 0 5 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of slave axis + 1) numMachAxes
aaEgSyn $AA_EG_SYN[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Synchronous position for the specified master axis.
mm, inch, degree, user defined 0 Double r
master axis) + 1
aaEgSynFa $AA_EG_SYNFA[a]
Electronic gear:
Synchronous position for the slave axis.
aaEgType $AA_EG_TYPE[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Type of link for the specified master axis
0: Actual-value linkage
1: Setpoint linkage
- 0 0 1 UWord r
master axis) + 1
aaJerkLimA $AA_JERKLIMA[a]
Axial jerk override in run in
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
aaMeasP1Valid $AA_MEAS_P1_VALID
Save axial measuring point P1 for workpiece and
tool measurement
0: Clear axial measuring point
1: Write actual axial values to axial measuring point
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword wr
tool measurement

1 Variablen 07.05
tool measurement
tool measurement
aaMeasPoint1 $AA_MEAS_POINT1
1st measuring point for workpiece and tool measurement
mm, inch, user defined 0 Double wr
2nd measuring point for workpiece and tool measurement
3rd measuring point for workpiece and tool measurement
4th measuring point for workpiece and tool measurement
aaMeasSetangle $AA_MEAS_SETANGLE
Setpoint angle of an axis
Degree, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index
aaMeasSetpoint $AA_MEAS_SETPOINT
Setpoint position of edge, corner or hole
aaMeasSpValid $AA_MEAS_SP_VALID
Save axial setpoint for workpiece and
tool measurement
0: Clear axial setpoint
1: Validate axial setpoint

07.05 1 Variablen
aaVeloLimA $AA_VELOLIMA[a]
Axial velocity override in main run
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
acAlarmStat $AC_ALARM_STAT
!=0: Alarms are pending, the appropriate coded alarm reactions can be used as source for
"Extended stop and retract".
evaluated separately if necessary (bits excluded below produce a value of 0)
Bit2 = 1: NOREADY (active rapid deceleration + cancellation of servo enable)
Bit6 = 1: STOPBYALARM (ramp stop of all channel axes)
Bit9 = 1: SETVDI (VDI interface signal alarm setting)
Bit13 = 1: FOLLOWUPBYALARM (follow-up)
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acAxCtSwA $AC_AXCTSWA[CTn]
Channel status of axis container rotation
TRUE: The channel has enabled rotation for the axis container
and rotation is still in progress.
FALSE: Axis container rotation is already finished
- 0 0 1 UWord r
acDelt $AC_DELT
Stored distance-to-go of the path in the WCS after delete-distance-to-go of the path DELDTG for synchronous action
(Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acDtbb $AC_DTBB
Distance from the beginning of the block in the BCS (Note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acDtbw $AC_DTBW
Distance from the beginning of the block in the WCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acDteb $AC_DTEB
Distance to the end of the block in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acDtepb $AC_DTEPB
Distance-to-go of infeed during oscillation in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only )
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acDtepw $AC_DTEPW
Distance-to-go of infeed during oscillation in the WCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variablen 07.05
acDtew $AC_DTEW
Distance to the end of the block in the WCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acEsrTrigger $AC_ESR_TRIGGER
Activation of "NC-controlled ESR"
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acFct0 $AC_FCT0[x] x = PolynomNo

a0-coefficient of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the polynominal $MC_MM_NUM_FCTDEF_ELEMENTS

- Double r

- Double r

- Double r
acFctll $AC_FCTLL[x] x = PolynomNo

Lower limit of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- Double r
acFctul $AC_FCTUL[x] x = PolynomNo

Upper limit of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- Double r
acIwStat $AC_IW_STAT
Current position of machine
Bit-coded:
Bit 0: Tool inv. position
Bit 1: Axis 2/3 position
Bit 2: Axis 5 position
Bit 3-31: Not yet assigned
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

07.05 1 Variablen
acIwTu $AC_IW_TU
Current position of channel axes
Bit-coded:
Bit 0: Channel axis 1 position
...
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acJogCoord $AC_JOG_COORD
Setting the coordinate system for the manual travel
0: Work
1: SZS
Multi-line: no
acMea $AC_MEA
Touch probe has switched
No. of touch probe
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes No. of touch probe 2
acMeasActPlane $AC_MEAS_ACT_PLANE
Plane setting for measurement calculation
0: G17, 1: G18, 2: G19
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasChbfr $AC_MEAS_CHBFR
Channel basic frame screen form for setting up the new frame
Multi-line: no
acMeasChsfr $AC_MEAS_CHSFR
System frame bit screen form for setting up the new frame
Multi-line: no
acMeasCornerAngle $AC_MEAS_CORNER_ANGLE
Calculated cutting angle of corner
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasCornerSetangle $AC_MEAS_CORNER_SETANGLE
User-selectable setpoint cutting angle of corner
Permissible input range between 0 and 180 degrees
Degree, user defined 0 180.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasDiameter $AC_MEAS_DIAMETER
Calculated diameter
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variablen 07.05
acMeasDirApproach $AC_MEAS_DIR_APPROACH
Approach direction towards workpiece
0: +x 1: -x 2: +y 3: -y 4: +z 5: -z
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasDNumber $AC_MEAS_D_NUMBER
Selected tool edge number
- 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasFineTrans $AC_MEAS_FINE_TRANS
Correction in fine offset
0: Correction in coarse translation
1: Correction in fine translation
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasFrameSelect $AC_MEAS_FRAME_SELECT
The frame calculated during workpiece measurement is
entered in the selected frame.
0: $P_SETFR
10.. 25: $P_CHBFR[0..15]
50.. 65: $P_NCBFR[0..15]
100.. 199: $P_UIFR[0..99]
1010..1025: $P_CHBFR[0..15]
1050..1065: $P_NCBFR[0..15]
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasInput $AC_MEAS_INPUT[n]
Data for the workpiece and tool measurement
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Index 10
acMeasLatch $AC_MEAS_LATCH
Save measuring points for workpiece and tool measurement
0: Clear measuring point

1: Write current axial values to measuring point
Multi-line: yes Measuring point no. 4
acMeasNcbfr $AC_MEAS_NCBFR
Global basic frame screen form for setting up the new frame
Multi-line: no
acMeasP1Coord $AC_MEAS_P1_COORD
Coordinate system of the 1st measuring point
0: Work 1: BCS 2: MCS
Multi-line: no
Coordinate system of the 2nd measuring point
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variablen
Coordinate system of the 3rd measuring point
Multi-line: no
Coordinate system of the 4th measuring point
Multi-line: no
acMeasPframe $AC_MEAS_PFRAME
Programmable frame is not included
Multi-line: no
acMeasResults $AC_MEAS_RESULTS[n]
Measurement results
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Index 10
acMeasScaleunit $AC_MEAS_SCALEUNIT
Unit of measurement for input and output values
0: Unit of measurement as configured
1: Unit of measurement in relation to active G code G70/G700/G71/G710
- 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasSema $AC_MEAS_SEMA
Variable for disabling and enabling the measurement interface
0: Not assigned
1: Assigned
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasSetCoord $AC_MEAS_SET_COORD
Coordinate system of the set point
Multi-line: no
acMeasTNumber $AC_MEAS_T_NUMBER
Selected tool number
- 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasToolLength $AC_MEAS_TOOL_LENGTH
Calculated tool length
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasToolMask $AC_MEAS_TOOL_MASK
Tool setting for the measurement calculation
Bit 0: Tool radius is not included in the calculation
Multi-line: no

1 Variablen 07.05
acMeasType $AC_MEAS_TYPE
Measurement type specification
0: Default
1: x edge
2: y edge
3: z edge
4: Corner 1
5: Corner 2,
6: Corner 3
7: Corner 4
8: Hole
9: Shaft
10: Tool length
11: Tool diameter
12: Groove
13: Web
14: Actual value setting for geo and special axes
15: Actual value setting for special axes only
16: Edge_2P
17: Plane_Angles
18: Plane_Normal
19: Dimension_1
20: Dimension_2
21: Dimension_3
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasUifr $AC_MEAS_UIFR
Settable data management frame for setting up the new frame
Multi-line: no
acMeasValid $AC_MEAS_VALID
Validity bits for measurement input values
Bit 0: $AA_MEAS_POINT1[axis]
Bit 4: $AA_MEAS_SETPOINT[axis]
Bit 5: $AC_MEAS_WP_SETANGLE
Bit 6: $AC_MEAS_CORNER_SETANGLE
Bit 7: $AC_MEAS_T_NUMBER
Bit 8: $AC_MEAS_D_NUMBER
Bit 9: $AC_MEAS_DIR_APPROACH
Bit 10: $AC_MEAS_ACT_PLANE
Bit 11: $AC_MEAS_FRAME_SELECT
Bit 12: $AC_MEAS_TYPE
Bit 13: $AC_MEAS_FINE_TRANS
- 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasWpAngle $AC_MEAS_WP_ANGLE
Calculated workpiece position angle
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasWpSetangle $AC_MEAS_WP_SETANGLE
User-selectable setpoint workpiece position angle
Permissible input range less than +/- 90 degrees
Degree, user defined -90.0 90.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

07.05 1 Variablen
acOvr $AC_OVR
Path override for synchronous actions (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPathn $AC_PATHN
Normalized path parameter (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPlcOvr $AC_PLC_OVR
Path override for synchronized actions specified by the PLC
- 100 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPltbb $AC_PLTBB
Path length from the beginning of the block in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPlteb $AC_PLTEB
Path length to the end of the block in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acProg $AC_PROG
Program status
(identical to progStatus but with coding that corresponds to $AC_PROG)
0: aborted (reset)
1: halted (stop)
2: running (active)
3: waiting
4: interrupted
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPRTimeA
For simulation: Estimation of program runtime in seconds - downtime
s, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPRTimeM
For simulation: Estimation of program runtime in seconds - machining time
s, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPtpSup
Cartesian point-to-point travel (PTP) is supported by transformation
0: Cart. PTP travel is not supported
1: Cart. PTP travel is supported
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variablen 07.05
acStat $AC_STAT
Channel status
(identical to chanStatus but with coding that corresponds to $AC_STAT)
0: reset
1: interrupted
2: active
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acSynaMem $AC_SYNA_MEM
Free memory for synchronous actions: Shows how many elements of the memory set with
$MC_MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS are still free.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actDLNumber ??
Number of active total offset DL
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
actDNumber $P_TOOL
Number of active tool edge
- 0 9 UWord r
Multi-line: no
actDNumberFanuc
With programming in ISO Dialect mode:
Offset memory number radius.
Assigned only in conjunction with ISO Dialect M external language.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actDNumberS
Corresponds to actNumber for block search with calculation
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling block search events only, not for the Variable Service!
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actDuploNumber
Duplo number of active tool
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
actFeedRateIpo
Actual value of the interpolation feedrate. The actual value is the feed actually moved with. (depends on the
acceleration profiles, LookAhead, velocity limits etc. ) The variable 'feedRateIpoUnit' defines the physical unit.
mm/min, inch/min, user Double r
defined
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variablen
actFrameIndex $P_UIFRNUM
Index of the active set frame (index in G group 8 "Settable zero offset"). Frames 0 - 4 (corresponds to G500 ... G57)
can be set in the standard version. The number of frames can be changed via machine data
MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES.
0 = no frame selected
1 = G54
2 = G55
3 = G56
4 = G57
5 = G505
to
99 = G599
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
actHNumberFanuc
With programming in ISO Dialect mode:
Offset memory number length.
Assigned only in conjunction with ISO Dialect M external language.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acThreadPitch $AC_THREAD_PITCH
Programmed lead
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acThreadPitchAct $AC_THREAD_PITCH_ACT
Current lead
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acThreadPitchInc $AC_THREAD_PITCH_INC
Current lead change
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTime $AC_TIME
Time from the beginning of the block in seconds (Note: for SYNACT only)
s Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTimec $AC_TIMEC
Time from the beginning of the block in interpolation cycles (Note: for SYNACT only)
IPO cycle Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTimer $AC_TIMER[x] x = TimerNo

Time variable in seconds (Note: for SYNACT only)
s Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the time variable $MN_MM_NUM_AC_TIMER

1 Variablen 07.05
actIpoType
Active interpolation mode used for the path motion. This date corresponds to a large degree to the SNCF:ncFktBin for
the first G-group. The value differs for automatically generated intermediate blocks only. This is e.g. the case if two
lines are connected with an arc by the command RND. The value is the index of the active G-code (analog with
SNCF:ncFktBin)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actIpoTypeS
Active mode of interpolation applied during block searches.
This data is very similar to SNCF:ncFktBinS for the 1st G group.
Its value is different only in the case of automatically generated intermediate blocks,
such as when, for example, two straight lines are connected to an arc
by means of command RND.
The value is the index of the active G function (analogous to SNCF:ncFktBinS).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actMasterToolHolderNo $P_MTHNUM, $AC_MTHNUM bzw. $P_MSNUM, $AC_MSNUM

Active number of the master tool holder.
Especially for $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, Bit0=0, this is the value of
SETMS or SETMTH last programmed in the RESET status of the NCK.
Especially for $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, Bit0=1, this is the value in the RESET status of the NCK for
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND (if $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER=0);
or $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER (if $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER > 0)
- 1 max. Anzahl der UWord r
Kanalachsen
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actOriToolLength1
X component in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) of active tool length,
taking into account the tool orientation, incl. adapter data, mirroring and TCARR
(orientable toolholder).
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actOriToolLength2
Y component in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) of active tool length,
(orientation-capable toolholder).
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actOriToolLength3
Z component in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) of active tool length,
(orientation-capable toolholder).
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTotalOvr $AC_TOTAL_OVR
Total path override for synchronized actions
- 100 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

07.05 1 Variablen
actParts $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS
Total number of workpieces machined in current run:
This counter registers the number of workpieces
machined since it started.
When the required number is reached, the counter is set
to zero automatically.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: no
acTrafo $AC_TRAFO
Code number of the active transformation (encoded as for $AC_TRAFO)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTrafoParSet $AC_TRAFO_PARSET
Number of current transformation data record.
The variable is '0' if no transformation is active.
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actTNumber $P_TOOLNO W1
Number of active tool
- 0 32000 UWord r
Multi-line: no
actTNumberLong
Number of the active tool using flat D-numbers with up to 8 digits
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actTNumberS
Corresponds to actTNumber for block search with calculation. Attention: This variable is available for protocolling the
block search events only, not for the Variable Service!
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actToolIdent W1
Identifier of active tool
- "\0" String[32] r
Multi-line: no 1
actToolLength1 $P_TOOLL[1] W1
Active tool length 1
Multi-line: no
actToolLength2 $P_TOOLL[2] W!
Multi-line: no
actToolLength3 $P_TOOLL[3] W1
Multi-line: no

1 Variablen 07.05
actToolRadius $P_TOOLR W1
Active tool radius
Multi-line: no
actTransform
Active transformation
- \0 String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acVactB $AC_VACTB
Path velocity in basic coordinate system
mm/min, inch/min, user 0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acVactw $AC_VACTW
Path velocity in the work piece coordinate system (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acVc $AC_VC
Additive path feedrate correction value for synchronous actions (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aLinkTransRate $A_LINK_TRANS_RATE
Link transfer rate
Number of bytes that can still be transferred in the
current IPO cycle via the NCU link communication.
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle no. or toolholder no. max. Spindelnr oder WZ-Halter-Nr.
allAxesRefActive DB21-28, DBX36.2

Code specifying whether all axes are referenced
1 = all axes referenced
0 = at least 1 axis not referenced
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
allAxesStopped
Code specifying whether axes are in exact stop
0 = at least one axis is not in exact stop
1 = All axes in exact stop
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
aTcAckC $AC_TC_ACKC
Counter variable: aTcAckC (AcknowledgeCounter) is incremented by 1
every time the PLC acknowledges a tool management command.
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcCmdC $AC_TC_CMDC
Counter variable: aTcCmdC (CoMmandCounter) is incremented by
1 every time the tool management outputs a command to the PLC.
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

07.05 1 Variablen
aTcFct $AC_TC_FCT
Command number
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcLfn $AC_TC_LFN
Source location number of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcLfo $AC_TC_LFO
Source location number of old tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcLmyn $AC_TC_LMYN
Owner location number of the new tool
- -1 32000 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcLtn $AC_TC_LTN
Target location number of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcLto $AC_TC_LTO
Target location number of old tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcMfn $AC_TC_MFN
Source magazine of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcMfo $AC_TC_MFO
Source magazine number of old tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcMmyn $AC_TC_MMYN
Owner magazine number of the new tool
- -1 32000 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcMtn $AC_TC_MTN
Target magazine number of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcMto $AC_TC_MTO
Target magazine number of old tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variablen 07.05
aTcStatus $AC_TC_STATUS
Command status
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcThno $AC_TC_THNO
Number of toolholder for new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcTno $AC_TC_TNO
T number of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
basisFrameMask $P_CHBFRMASK
Display indicating which channel-specific basic frames are active
Every bit in the mask indicates whether the appropriate basic frame
is active. Bit0 = 1st basic frame, Bit1 = 2nd basic frame, etc.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
blockType $AC_BLOCKTYPE
Identifies the type of a block (programmed or generated internally)
0: No internally generated block
1: Internally generated block, but cannot be specified in detail
2: Block was generated on chamfering/rounding
3: Smooth approach and retraction (SAR)
4: Block was generated during tool offset
5: Block was generated on smoothing
6: Block was generated by TLIFT (tangential correction)
7: Block was generated during path segmentation
8: Block was generated by compile cycles
Multi-line: yes 1 1

07.05 1 Variablen
blockTypeInfo $AC_BLOCKTYPEINFO
Detailed information on block type
The value range and the meaning of this variable depend on the current
value of system variable blockType
With system variable blockTypeInfo, additional information on

variable blockType can be requested.
Depending on the value of system variable blockType, different values are possible:
1. General internally generated block: blockType = 1

blockTypeInfo = 1000 and does not include any additional information.
2. Chamfer/round: blockType = 2
2001: straight
2002: circle
3. SAR: blockType = 3
3001: Approach with straight
3002: Approach with quadrant
3003: Approach with semicircle
4. Tool offset: blockType = 4

4001: Approach block after STOPRE
4002: Link sets when intersection not found
4003: Pointed circle on the inner corners (with TRACYL only)
4004: Bypass circle (or conic) on outer corners
4005: Approach blocks for offset suppression
4006: Approach blocks for reactivation of TRC
4007: Block separation when curvature is too high
4008: Compensation blocks for 3D front milling (tool vector || plane vector)
5. Corner rounding: blockType = 5

5001: Rounding contour through G641
6. TLIFT: blockType = 6
6001: TLIFT block with linear movement of the tangential axis and without retraction movement.
6002: TLIFT block with non-linear tangential axis (polynomial)
and without retraction movement.
6003: TLIFT block with retraction movement; tangential axis movement and retraction movement
start simultaneously.
6004: TLIFT block with retraction movement; tangential axis will only start, if certain
retraction position has been reached.
7. Path segmentation: blockType = 7

7001: Programmed path segmentation without punching/nibbling to be active.
7002: Programmed path segmentation with active punching/nibbling.
7003: Automatic internally generated path segmentation.
8. Compile cycles: blockType = 8

In this case, system variable $AC_BLOCKTYPEINFO includes the ID of the compile cycles
application that created the block.
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
chanAlarm DB21-28, DBX36.6 und DBX36.7 A2

Code whether NCK alarm pending.
0 = no alarm in this channel
1 = alarm without stop
2 = alarm with stop
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variablen 07.05
chanAxisNoGap
Display of existing axes, i.e. no axis gap in channel.
Bits 0-31 represent the axes of the channel.
Bitn = 0: Axis does not exist.
Bitn = 1: Axis does exist.
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
changeAxConfCounter
A counter which is incremented if the axes configuration has changed. This is the case, if e.g. geometry axes are
switched or axes have been changed between channels. The counter is set to 0 at PowerOn and it might overflow. You
cannot be sure, that the axes configuration actually has changed when the counter is incremented.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
chanStatus DB21-28, DBX35.5-DBX35.7 K1

Channel status
0 = RESET
1 = active
2 = interrupted
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
cIn $C_IN[n]
Signal from PLC to cycle (reserved for
SIEMENS application, e.g. ShopMill/ManualTurn)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes No. of input signal 16
cmdDwellTime
Programmed dwell time
See timeOrRevolDwell
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
cmdFeedRateIpo
Desired feedrate of the interpolation feedrate. The physical unit is defined in the variable 'feedRateIpoUnit'
defined
Multi-line: no
cmdTrafoParSetS $P_TRAFO_PARSET
Number of programmed transformation data record for block search
The variable is '0' if no transformation is active.
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
cmdTrafoS $P_TRAFO
Code number of programmed transformation for block search
Coding as for variable $AC_TRAFO
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
corrBlActive
Incorrect block has occurred (correction block)
0 = no incorrect block
1 = incorrect block
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variablen
cOut $C_OUT[n]
Signal from cycle to PLC (reserved for
SIEMENS application, e.g. ShopMill/ManualTurn)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes No. of output signal 16
cycServRestricted
Code whether restricted cyclic variable service is available.
This is a privileged variable: Cyclic result acknowledgements for this variable are produced even if the cyclic services
are no longer served by the NCK because of block cycle time problems. Caution: Privileged variables lose this
characteristic if they are mixed with non-privileged variables in one request. -> Do not combine the variable
cycServRestricted in a cluster with other variables!
0 = normal cycl. service

1 = no cyclic service (but acknowledgement)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
delayFSt
Delay Feed Stop, Stop is delayed in the current program area
0: Stop in the current program area is effective immediately
1: Stop in the current program area is effective after a delay
2: Stop in the current program area is effective immediately (same as 0), although
a stop delay area was programmed in the parts program.
(This means that the NCK could not switch on the stop delay area.)
- 0 0 2 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
direction
Traversing direction
0 = normal travel
1 = forward travel
2 = reverse travel
3 = reference point cycle
4 = stop state
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
extProgActive DB21-28, DBB32.0

Flag indicating whether program execution from external is active.
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
feedRateIpoOvr
Interpolation feedrate, override
% Double r
Multi-line: no
feedRateIpoUnit
Interpolation feedrate, units
0 = mm/min
1 = mm/rev
2 = inch/min
3 = inch/rev
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variablen 07.05
findBlActive DB21-28, DBX33.4 K1

Code whether block search is active.
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
G0Mode $AC_G0MODE
G00 is active and $MC_G0_LINEAR_MODE is FALSE (Siemens mode) or $MC_EXTERN_G0_LINEAR_MODE is
FALSE (ISO mode) and therefore non-linear interpolation is active with G0, i.e. the path axes are traversed as
positioning axes.
0: G00 not active
1: G00 and linear interpolation active
2: G00 and non-linear interpolation active
- 0 0 2 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
ludAccCounter
Counter indicating that a new LUD ACC is available. If subprograms are called during an automatic program execution,
a new set of LUDs becomes valid. In order to indicate to the MMC that it has to modify the display of the LUDs,
respectively that the validity of the LUDs has changed, the variable 'ludAccCounter' is incremented. It is only
necessary for the MMC to inquire a change of the variable's value, the value itself is of no importance.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
machFunc DB11, DBX7.0-DBX7.2

Active channel machine function
0 = none
1 = REPOS
2 = TEACH IN
3 = REF
4 = TEACH-REPOS
5 = TEACH-REF
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
markActiveList
Status array for the active marker in channel m.
The first element (markActiveList[1] ) of the array specifies the currently active marker number of this channel (channel
m).
The second element ( markActiveList[2] ) specifies bit-coded whether channel m is still waiting for the mark to
be reached in the other channels (channel n), in short "waiting status".
markActiveList[2] Bit-n == 1 Channel m is waiting for mark markActiveList[1] in channel n

markActiveList[2] Bit-n == 0 Channel n has already reached mark markActiveList[1], or channel m is not
waiting for mark markActiveList[1] at all
markActiveList[1] == 0 Current channel m does not edit any wait marker
markActiveList[1] == 1..99 Current channel m is positioned on the wait marker with markActiveList[1]
markActiveList[2] Bit-n == 1 Channel m is waiting for mark markActiveList[1] in channel n

markActiveList[2] Bit-n == 0 Channel n has already reached mark markActiveList[1], or channel m is not
waiting for mark markActiveList[1] at all
- 0 0 99 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1: Wait marker number 2
2: Bit-coded wait status for all
channels
ncStartCounter
Counter for the NC-start key. Pressing this key increments the variable 'ncStartCounter'. The value of the variable can
be ignored, the MMC must just inquire the change of the variable to see whether the start-key has been pressed.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variablen
ncStartSignalCounter
Counter that is incremented
as soon as the channel-specific NC start signal has been activated in the VDI interface.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numToolHolders $P_MAGNS
Number of tool holders/ spindles (buffer locations of the location type = spindle) from the magazine configuration of the
TOA which are allocated to the channel. The number of tool holders / spindles is solely a function of the magazine
configuration and does not change during an NC program execution.
Value = 0, if there is no magazine configuration or the TMMG (tool management magazines) is not present in the NC.
Multi-line: no 1
numTraceProtocEventType
Logging: Number of standard event types
- 0 UWord r
numTraceProtocOemEvent $MM_PROTOC_NUM_ETP_OEM_TYP
Type
Logging: Number of OEM event types
- 0 UWord r
paAccLimA $PA_ACCLIMA[a]
Axial acceleration override in run in
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
paJerkLimA $PA_JERKLIMA[a]
Axial jerk override in run in
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
paVeloLimA $PA_VELOLIMA[a]
Axial velocity override in run in
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
pEgBc $P_EG_BC[a]
Electronic gear:
Block change criterion. Important for EGON, EGONSYN
0: NOC Block change is performed immediately
1: IPOSTOP Block change is performed with setpoint synchronism
2: COARSE Block change is performed with "Synchronism coarse"
3: FINE Block change is performed with "Synchronism fine"
- 3 0 3 UWord r

1 Variablen 07.05
pMthSDC $P_MTHSDC
Master tool holder no. or master spindle no. is determined with reference to the active tool for the next D offset
selection. This is important if the master spindle changes after the last tool change.
>0 Successful read access
0 No master tool holder or no master spindle available.
The next D offset works with TO.
-1 TMMG not available
- 0 0 numMachAxes UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1
pOffn $P_OFFN
Last programmed offset normal
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: no
progDLNumberS ??
Corresponds to actDLNumber for block search with calculation
Caution: This variable is not available for the Variable Service,
but only for logging in the case of block search events!.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
progDuploNumber
Duplo number of programmed tool (does not yet have to be active)
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
progStatus DB21-28, DBX35.0 - DBX35.4 K1

Program status
1 = interrupted
2 = stopped
3 = in progress
4 = waiting
5 = aborted
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
progTNumber
Number of programmed tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
progTNumberLong
Number of the programmed tool using flat D-numbers with up to 8 digits
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
progToolIdent
Identifier of programmed tool (does not yet have to be active)
- "\0" String[32] r
Multi-line: no 1
progWaitForEditUnlock
The interpreter is waiting until the editor has saved the specified parts
program and has enabled it by means of _N_F_MODE
- 0 String[160] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

07.05 1 Variablen
protAreaCounter
Counter is incremented by 1 every time a
protection zone (block PA) is modified
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
protocUserActive $MM_PROTOC_USER_ACTIVE
Logging: Displays active users
0: User inactive
1: User active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
pTc $P_TC
The active orientatable toolholder
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pTcAng $P_TCANG[n]
The current angles of the two axes of an orientation-capable toolholder
Degree 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis no. of toolholder 2
pTcDiff $P_TCDIFF[n]
The difference between the exact and the actually used
angles of the two axes of
an orientation-capable toolholder
Degree 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis no. of toolholder 2
pTcNum $P_TCNUM
Number of available orientable tool carriers in the channel
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pTcSol $P_TCSOL
Number of solutions (configuration options for rotary
axes) on selection of an orientatable toolholder. The variable
value can be between 0 and 2, where 0 to 2 means either none,
1 solution or 2 solutions.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pTcStat $P_TCSTAT
Specifies the status of an orientable tool carrier.
The variable is bit-coded with the following meanings:
0x0001 The first rotary axis is available
0x0002 The second rotary axis is available
0x0004 The angles used for the calculation come from an orientation in the frame direction
0x0008 The angles used for the calculation have been absolutely defined
0x0010 The polar axis angle is not defined in the case of orientation in the frame direction
0x1000 Only the tool can be rotated (kinematic type T)

0x1000 Only the workpiece can be rotated (kinematic type P)
0x4000 Tool and workpiece can be rotated (kinematic type M)
The bits stated here are not currently assigned.

- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variablen 07.05
pTCutMod $P_AD[2]
Angle of rotation for modification of edge position and cutting direction
Angle between 0 and 360 degrees
Degree 0 0 360 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pTCutModS $P_AD[2]
Angle of rotation for edge position and
cutting direction for block search
Angle between 0 and 360 degrees
Degree 0 0 360 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pToolO $P_TOOLO
Supplies the current tool orientation
The orientation vector is normalized, i.e. it has the value 1.
- 0 -1 1 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1: X component 3
2: Y component
3: Z component
rapFeedRateOvr
Rapid traverse override
% Double r
Multi-line: no
remainDwellTime
Remaining dwell time
See timeOrRevolDwell
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
reqParts $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS
Number of required workpieces (workpiece requirement):
The workpiece count at which the number of current
workpieces $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is set to zero can be
defined in this counter.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: no
rotSys $AC_ROT_SYS
Reference system for orientation movements with cartesian manual traversal
0: Axis-specific manual traversal active
1: Cartesian manual traversal in basic coordinate system active
2: Cartesian manual traversal in workpiece coordinate system active
3: Cartesian manual traversal in tool coordinate system active
- 0 0 3 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
seruproMasterChanNo
The search type SERUPRO (search via program testing) may be
started simultaneously in several channels in order to start a channel grouping
correctly. A search target must be specified in one channel (master channel) in the grouping.
The other channels do not need a search target, they wait until they have reached a
stop condition and the master channel has reached the search target. These channels generally
stop at WAIT marks. The variable seruproMasterChanNo defines the master channel.
- 0 0 numChannels UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

07.05 1 Variablen
seruproMasterNcuNo
The search type SERUPRO (search via program testing) may be
started simultaneously in several channels in order to start a channel grouping
correctly. A search target must be specified in one channel (master channel) in the grouping.
The other channels do not need a search target, they wait until they have reached a
stop condition and the master channel has reached the search target. These channels generally
stop at WAIT marks. The variable seruproMasterChanNo defines the master channel.
seruproMasterNcuNo specifies the master channel in more detail if it is not on the active NCU.
- 0 0 $MN_MM_LINK_ UWord wr
NUM_OF_MODU
LES
Multi-line: yes 1 1
specParts $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS
Number of current workpieces as defined by user:
This counter enables the user to define his own
workpiece count. The counter is reset to zero automatically
only when the control system boots on defaults.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: no
splitBlock $AC_SPLITBLOCK
Identifier of internally splitted blocks
0: A BLOCK programmed unchanged
(a BLOCK generated by the compressor is regarded as programmed BLOCK):
<>0: BLOCK was shortened or is an internally generated BLOCK; the following values are possible:
1: It is an internally generated BLOCK or a shortened original BLOCK
3: It is the last block in a chain of internally generated
blocks or shortened original blocks.
Multi-line: yes 1 1
startLockState
Status of the global start disable.
Also see PI _N_STRTLK and _N_STRTUL.
0: No start disable
1: Start disable is switched on and program is not running
2: Start disable is switched on and program is running nevertheless
The NCK changes from 2->1 as soon as the program is stopped.
- 0 0 2 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
startRejectCounter
Counter that is incremented
as soon as an NC start is rejected due to a global start
disable (see _N_STRTLK) or a program-specific
start disable (see _N_F_MODE).
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variablen 07.05
stopCond
NC in stop state
NC stop state
0= No stop state
1= NC not ready
2= Mode group not ready
3= EMERGENCY STOP active
4= Alarm with stop active
5= M0 / M1 active
6= Block ended in single block mode
7= NC stop active
8= Read-in enable missing
9= Feed enable missing
10 = Dwell time active
11 = Aux. funct. acknowledgement missing
12 = Axis enable missing
13 = Exact stop not reached
14 = Wait for positioning axis
15 = Wait for spindle
16 = Wait for another channel
17 = Wait for feed override
18 = NC block faulty or user alarm
19 = Wait for NC blocks from external source
20 = Wait for synchronized action
21 = Block search active
22 = Spindle enable missing
23 = Axis feed override 0
24 = Wait for tool change acknowledgement
25 = Gear ratio change
26 = Wait for position control
27 = Wait for thread first cut
28 = Reserved
29 = Wait for punching
30 = Wait for safe operation
31 = No channel ready; from SW 4.1
32 = Oscillation active; from SW 4.1 to SW 6.3
32 = Reserved; from SW 6.3
33 = Axis replacement active; Block change prevented because axis replacement was active from
SW 4.1
34 = Axis container rotation; from SW 4.4
35 = AXCT: Slave axis active; Axis container replacement from SW 5.2
36 = AXCT: Master axis active; Axis container replacement from SW 5.2
37 = AXCT: Follow-up active; Axis container replacement from SW 5.2
38 = AXCT: Internal status change; Axis container replacement from SW 5.2
The following internal status changes may cause this waiting status:
- Switch on the position controller
- Request the zero mark
- Reference point approach active
- Parameter block change active
- Measuring cycle system change active
- In-process measurement active
- Servo enable removed
39= AXCT: Axis/spindle disable; Axis container replacement from SW 5.2
40 = AXCT: Corr. motion active; Axis container replacement: overlaid motion from SW 5.2
41 = AXCT: Axis replacement active; Axis container replacement from SW 5.2
42 = AXCT axis interpolator active; Axis container replacement from SW 5.2
43 = Wait for compile cycle; from SW 5.2
44 = Access to system variables; from SW 5.3
45 = Search target found; block search has found search target and NCK has stopped.
46 = Rapid retraction activated; from SW 6.2.
47 = AXCT: Wait for spindle stop; axis container replacement from SW 6.2.
48 = Machine data match; New config, from SW 6.2.
49 = Axis replacement: coupled axis; from SW 6.3
50 = Axis replacement: Liftfast active; from SW 6.3
51 = Axis replacement: New config active; from SW 6.3
52 = Axis replacement: AXCTSW active; from SW 6.3
53 = Axis replacement: Waitp active; from SW 6.3
54 = Axis in another channel; axis replacement from SW 6.3

07.05 1 Variablen
55 = Axis replacement: axis PLC axis; from SW 6.3

56 = Axis replacement: axis reciprocating axis; from SW 6.3
57 = Axis replacement: axis jog axis; from SW 6.3
58 = Axis replacement: command axis; from SW 6.3
59 = Axis replacement: axis OEM axis; from SW 6.3
60 = Linked slave axis; axis replacement from SW 6.3
61 = Coupled-motion slave axis; axis replacement from SW 6.3
62 = Linked slave axis; axis replacement from SW 6.3
63 = Stop: associated M0 active; from SW 6.3
64 = Stop: associated M1 active; from SW 6.3
65 = Axis at limit stop; from SW 6.3
66 = Master-slave changeover active; from SW 6.3
67 = Axis replacement: axis single axis; from SW 6.3
68 = Stop run has reached the stop block; from SW 7.1
69 = Synchronous run: synchronous spindle; from SW 6.4
70 = Deactivation position of synchronous spindle; from SW 6.4
71 = Wait for release of transformation axis; from SW 7.1
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
stopCondPar
Supplementary parameters for variable stopCond.
stopCondPar has the default value 0. If stopCond takes one of the following values, variable stopCondPar contains
supplementary information:
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
stopRunActive
Stop run active
0 = inactive
1 = active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
stopRunCounter
Modification counter for stop run.
This is always incremented when the NCK has stopped at a stop block.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
suppProgFunc
Disabling of language commands
Bit0 = 0: SBLOF command is active
Bit0 = 1: SBLOF command is disabled
- Bit0 = 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
threadPitch
Current lead
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
threadPitchS
Current lead during search run
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variablen 07.05
timeOrRevolDwell
Dwell time unit in seconds or spindle revolutions
0: cmdDwellTime and remainDwellTime in seconds
1: cmdDwellTime and remainDwellTime in spindle revolutions
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
timeS $AC_TIMES
Time after a block change between programmed blocks in seconds
Each programmed block can be divided up into a chain of part blocks that are
processed one after the other.
O n l y with the 1st cycle of the 1st block of the chain, timeS is set to zero and
then counted up in seconds. Therefore, the variable enables time measurements
throughout the entire block chain.
Multi-line: yes 1 1
timeSC $AC_TIMESC
Time after a block change between programmed blocks in IPO cycles
Each programmed block can be divided up into a chain of part blocks that are
processed one after the other.
Only (!) with the 1st cycle of the 1st block of the chain, timeSC is set to zero and
then counted up in seconds. Therefore, the variable enables time measurements
throughout the entire block chain.
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toolCounter
Counter of the changes of the tool data assigned to a channel. The counter is incremented each time a tool data is
changed.
All changes of tool data made by BTSS, part programs, INI files and by the Tool Management software are considered.
Tool data are tool compensations, grinding-specific tool parameters, OEM tool parameters and Tool Managment data
including magazine data.
There is one exception: the present tool-in-use-time, since it is changed in each IPO cycle.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toolCounterC
Counter for modifications to tool offset data assigned to the channel
(analog toolCounter).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toolCounterM
Counter for modifications to magazine data assigned to the channel
(analog toolCounter).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

07.05 1 Variablen
toolHolderData GETSELT, GETEXET

Data for each tool holder/spindle from the magazine configuration of the TOA which is assigned to the channel.
There is a set of numToolHolderParams parameters for each tool holder.

Currently there are the three parameters P1, P2 and P3.
There are numToolHolders tool holders. The number of tool holders in this list is solely a function of the magazine
configuration and does not change while an NC program runs.
- P1: THNo ToolHolderNumber / SpindleNumber
(In the language commands of the NC program,
corresponds to the address extension
<n> from T<n>=... or M<n>=6 with explicit notation;
in the magazine configuration, corresponds to the location
type index of the associated buffer location of the location
type = spindle.)
- P2: SelTno T number of the selected tool with
reference to the tool holder / spindle with the number of THNo
(The same TNo would also return the language command GETSELT.)
The value 0 indicates that no tool is selected with
reference to the tool holder. For further behavior see the description of GETSELT.
- P3: ExeTno TNumber of the tool to be loaded / loaded with
reference to the tool holder / the spindle with the number THNo from
the point of view of the NC program.
When working without M6, the same TNumber is in SelTno and ExeTno.
(The same TNumber would also return the language command GETEXET.)
The value 0 indicates that no tool is to be loaded / is loaded
with reference to the tool holder. For further behavior see the description of GETEXET.
An array access is possible to toolHolderData, with which the data of all numToolHolders tool holders can be read at
one time.
0 will be returned for line 1 only, if tool magazine management is not active.
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes The line index addresses the numToolHolderParams * numToolHolders
parameters of the tool holder and
the tool holder itself:
Line index = (ElementNo - 1) *
numToolHolderParams + PNo
With: ElementNo 1 to
numToolHolders;
The ElementNo is the list element
no of the tool holder in this list.
PNo: Parameter number from 1 to

numToolHolderParams
numToolHolderParams from range
N, block Y, global system data
totalParts $AC_TOTAL_PARTS
Total number of all machined workpieces:
This counter specifies the number of workpieces machined
since it was started. The counter is automatically
set to zero only if the control system boots on defaults.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: no
transfActive DB21-28, DBX33.6 K1,

M1
Transformation active
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variablen 07.05
transSys $AC_TRANS_SYS
Reference system for translation with cartesian manual traversal
0: Axis-specific manual traversal active
1: Cartesian manual traversal in basic coordinate system active
2: Cartesian manual traversal in workpiece coordinate system active
3: Cartesian manual traversal in tool coordinate system active
- 0 0 3 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
vaEgSyncDiff $VA_EG_SYNCDIFF[a]
Electronic gear:
Synchronism deviation (actual values). The comparison between this value
and $MA_COUPLE_POS_TOL_... determines whether the appropriate
"Synchronism" VDI signal is set.
vaEgSyncDiffS $VA_EG_SYNCDIFF_S[a]
Electronic gear:
Synchronous run difference (actual values) with sign. Whether the corresponding VDI signal "synchronous run" is set
depends upon the comparison of this value with $MA_COUPLE_POS_TOL_....

Multi-line: yes (Axis index of the following axis) numMachAxes

07.05 1 Variablen
1.4.3 Area C, Mod. SINF: Part-program-specific status data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ProgramModification/...
During automatic execution of a part program different parameters can

influence the type of machining. The current status data for the selected part
program are combined in module SINF. The status data must only be changed
via the PLC. interface.
DRFActive
DRF active
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
feedStopActive
Feed disable
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
ipoBlocksOnly
Display traversing blocks
0 = normal block transfer
1 = exclusively traversing blocks
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
optAssStopActive
Associated M01 selected
0: Not selected
1: Selected
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
optStopActive
M01 selected
0 = not selected
1 = selected
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
progTestActive DB21-28, DBX1.7 K1

Program test
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
rapFeedRateOvrActive
ROV rapid traverse override
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variablen 07.05
singleBlockActive
Single block, SBL
0 = no single block
1 = SBL 1
2 = SBL 2
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
singleBlockType
Single block mode
1 = interpolation single block
2 = decoder single block
- UWord wr
Multi-line: no
skipLevel0Active
Info whether skip level /0 is activated.
0: Skip level /0 not active
1: Skip level /0 active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel1Active
Info whether skip level /1 is activated
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel2Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel3Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel4Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel5Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variablen
skipLevel6Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel7Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel8Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel9Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
trialRunActive DB21-28, DBX0.6 V1

Dry run feedrate
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variablen 07.05
1.4.4 Area C, Mod. SPARP: Part program information

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ProgramInfo/...
This module contains information on the currently active part programm in the
respective channel.
absoluteBlockBufferName
File name with path of upload buffer in which display blocks are stored
Empty string: Function is deactivated

- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
absoluteBlockBufferPrevie
w
Part of content of file absoluteBlockBufferName.
The desired content of the variables is set by $MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF.
In principle, only complete parts program blocks are entered.
If the desired number of previous blocks are not present, then an empty block ("LF") is entered in that place.
If there is insufficient space for all parts program blocks, then the previous blocks are first replaced by empty blocks
("LF"), if this is still insufficient, the blocks at the end are also omitted.
- String[198] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
absoluteBlockCounter
Modification counter for display information in the upload buffer
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actBlock
Current part program block.
If search run is active, then search run block is displayed.
With DISPLOF an empty string is returned; with search run the subroutine call.
- String[66] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actBlockA
Current part program block.
If search run is active, then search run block is displayed.
Display is always made irrespective of DISPLOF.
- String[66] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actBlockI
Current part program in the interpreter.
Display is always made irrespective of DISPLOF.
- String[66] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

07.05 1 Variablen
actLineNumber
Line number of the current NC instruction (starting at 1)
0: before program start
-1: not available due to an error
-2: not available because of DISPLOF
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
block
To display the currently active part programm, NCK supplies 3 ascii-blocks of the part programm in one single variable
job (last, current and next block). That means the variable 'block' consists of a maximum of 3 lines:
Line index 1: string of the last block
Line index 2: string of the current block
Line index 3: string of the next block
To gain consistent information, all 3 array elements must be processed in one variable request. This is why the
maximum string length of each array element is limited to 66 characters.
- String[66] r
Multi-line: yes Block index, 1 = last, 2 = current, 3 = 3
next block
blockNoStr
Block number
- String[12] r
Multi-line: no
circleCenter
Center of the circle (WCS)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Line index 1 - 3 for geometry axis 3
and only effective for G02 or G03
circleCenterS
Corresponds to circleCenter for search with calculation
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling the block search events only, not for the Variable Service!
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes No. of the geometry axis 3
circlePlane
The vector perpendicular to the circular plane (axial) is output
to enable identification of the position of a circle in space
- Double r
Multi-line: yes No. of geo axis 3
circlePlaneS
The vector perpendicular to the circular plane (axial) is output
to enable identification of the position of a circle in space
- Double r
Multi-line: yes No. of geo axis 3
circleRadius
Radius of the circle (only effective for G02/G03)
- Double r
Multi-line: no

1 Variablen 07.05
circleRadiusS
Corresponds to circleRadius for block search with calculation.
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service, but only for logging in connection with block search events!
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1
circleTurn
Progr. number of additional circular passes with
helical interpolation in curr. program
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
circleTurnS
Programmed number of additional circular passes with
helical interpolation in the current program for search with calculation.
Note: This variable is not available for the Variable Service, but only for
logging of block search events
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleC
enterEns
Arc center in relation to WOS frame, i.e. with tool length but
without tool radius
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes No. of geo-axis 3
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleC
enterEnsS
Corresponds to circleCenterWos for block search with calculation
in relation to the WOS frame, i.e. with tool length but without tool radius
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service, but only for
logging in connection with block search events!
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes No. of geo-axis 3
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleR
adiusEns
Arc radius in relation to WOS frame as center-point path, i.e. with tool
length but without tool radius
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleR
adiusEnsS
Corresponds to circleRadiusWos for block search with calculation
in relation to WOS frame as center-point path. i.e. with tool length
but without tool radius
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service, but only for
logging in connection with block search events!
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

07.05 1 Variablen
lastBlockNoStr
Indicates the last programmed block number, if $MN_DISPLAY_FUNCTION_MASK bit 0 is set. A block number is
shown until either a new block number is programmed or the subroutine level which generated the block number has
been left. Block numbers of masked blocks are not displayed.
There is also no display if DISPLOF is active.
- String[12] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
msg PG
Messages from a part program can be programmed with the instruction 'MSG (...)'. The variable 'msg' contains the text
of the current 'MSG(...)'-instruction until a new instrucion is processed or until the message is deleted with the
instruction 'MSG ()'.
- String[128] r
Multi-line: no 1
progName
Progam name of the currently active program (or subroutine)
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no 1
seekw
First line enabled for modification in part program
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
singleBlock
In most cases the variable 'block' is used to read the currently active blocks of the part program. Because this variable
is limited to 66 characters per string, it might be necessary (for long blocks) to read longer strings. The variable
'singleBlock' can read complete blocks (up to strings with 198 charecters) . 3 lines can be addressed:
Line index 1: last block

Line index 2: current block
Line index 3: next block
It is not guaranteed for rapid block changes, that the information of 3 successive blocks is always consistent, because
each block is read with a single variable request. This method is only safe, if the part program has stopped.
- String[198] r
Multi-line: yes Block index, 1 = last, 2 = current, 3 = 3
next block
stepEditorFormName
Current module name for step editor is stored
- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
workPandProgName
Workpiece name and name of current program.
- String[160] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
workPName
Name of the active workpiece
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no 1

1 Variablen 07.05
workPNameLong
Workpiece name of active workpiece
- String[128] r
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variablen
1.4.5 Area C, Mod. SPARPP: Program pointer in automatic operation

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ProgramPointer/...
In automatic mode it is possible to branch to several subroutine levels from the

main program level. The state of the program can be determined for every
program level. Each variable of the module consists of 12 rows. This makes it
possible to address the main program level and 11 subroutine levels (incl.
ASUP levels).
The array indices (row indices) mean:
1 = Main program
2 = 1st subroutine level
3 = 2nd subroutine level
4 = 3rd subroutine level
5 = 4th subroutine level
9 = 1st asynchronous subroutine level
10 = 2nd asynchronous subroutine level
11 = 3rd asynchronous subroutine level
12 = 4th asynchronous subroutine level
actInvocCount
Subroutine call counter, actual value. Specifies the number of subroutine passes. Is always set 1 for the main program
and for asynchronous subroutines.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12
blockLabel
Block label
- String[32] r
blockNoStr
Block number
[:][N]<No>
- String[12] r
cmdInvocCount
Subroutine call counter, desired value. Specifies the number of subroutine passes. Is always set to 1 for the main
program and for asynchronous subroutines.
- UWord r
displayState
Display state for block display.
(Blocks should not be displayed automatically for program levels for which DISPLAY OFF has been programmed in the
PROC instruction. This is valid also for the subroutine levels below).
0 = DISPLAY OFF for the program level

1 = DISPLAY ON for the program level
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index of the program level 12

1 Variablen 07.05
extProgBufferName
Name of FIFO buffer for execution from external source
- String[160] wr
extProgFlag
Indicates whether programs are being executed externally
0: Program is being processed from NCK program memory
1: Program is being executed externally
- UWord r
lastBlockNoStr
Returns the last programmed block number for each program level when $MN_DISPLAY_FUNCTION_MASK bit 0 is
set. A block number is shown until either a new block number is programmed or the subroutine level which generated
the block number has been left. Block numbers of masked blocks are not displayed.
There is also no display if DISPLOF is active.
- String[12] r
progName
Program name
- String[32] r
seekOffset
Search pointer (block offset, each block consists of a string that ends with a line feed)
- Long Integer r
seekw
First line enabled for modification in part program
- 0 0 UWord r
workPandProgName
Workpiece name and name of current program.
- String[160] r
workPName
Workpiece name = path name in the NCK file structure
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Program level index 12
workPNameLong
Note: This variable is ignored when lines are accessed!
- String[128] r

07.05 1 Variablen
1.4.6 Area C, Mod. SPARPI: Program pointer on interruption

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/InterruptionSearch/...
In order to be able to continue at the point of interruption in a program, the

current states of the main program and any subroutines must be stored. On a
program interrupt the information is immediately updated in the NCK and
reamins valid even after RESET.
This makes it possible to read the states of the main program level and the 11
subroutine levels (incl. ASUP levels).
1 = main program
2 = 1st subroutine level
3 = 2nd subroutine level
4 = 3rd subroutine level
9 = 1st asynchronous subroutine level
10 = 2nd asynchronous subroutine level
11 = 3rd asynchronous subroutine level
12 = 4th asynchronus subroutine level
forward
Search direction
2 = forwards
- UWord r
invocCount
Actual value of the subroutine call counter. Is always 1 for the main program
- UWord r
plcStartReason
Specifies for the SERUPRO function which channel has to be started by the PLC so that the current channel starts.
- 0 0 UWord r
progName
Program name
- String[32] r
searchString
Search string (the first 64 characters of the NC block - corresponding to the search pointer)
- String[64] r

1 Variablen 07.05
searchType
Search type
5 = search pointer block-oriented (searching for line feed characters)
- UWord r
seekOffset
Search pointer (block-oriented, searching for linefeed characters)
1fffffff HEX is returned if the value is invalid.
- Long Integer r
status
Informs about whether block SPARPI includes currently
valid values, and provides the reason for the last update of the
block, if available.
Note: If an interruption occurs in a program range between the command
IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK, the first block after IPTRLOCK will be provided
in the SPARPI instead of the current block.
The first interruption between IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK will set "status"
and any additional interruption prior to IPTRUNLOCK will neither change "status" nor SPARPI.
0: Program is running, i.e. SPARPI variables are not up-to-date
1: Program selection, i.e. SPARPI has been reset
2: Block selection through PI service _N_SEL_BL
3: Reset (program abort)
4: Stop after program instruction, e.g. M0
5: Stop with STOP key
6: Stop caused by alarm
- 1 0 6 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
workPName
Workpiece name = path name in the NC file structure
- String[32] r
workPNameLong
- String[128] r

07.05 1 Variablen
1.4.7 Area C, Mod. SPARPF: Program pointers for block search and stop
run
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Search/...
To look for a particular block within a parts program the user can enter search
criteria and start a block search. The variables to be entered are combined in
the module SPARPF and must be written by the MMC (or another component
on the MPI bus).
One main program level and 11 subroutine levels can be processed. These
levels are the row indices of the individual variables. The search targets (seek
pointer and search string) can only be used mutually exclusively in one level. If
a collision occurs, a negative acknowledgement results when the block search
is started.
Depending on the search type, the search string is either a block label, block
number or any string.
If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for subroutine calls is
used. The main program entered in the first program level must be selected for
the block search; otherwise the search request is acknowledged negatively.
1 = main program level for search run

2 = 1st subroutine level for search run
3 = 2nd subroutine level for search run
4 = 3rd subroutine level for search run
5 = 4th subroutine level for search run
9 = 1st asynchronous subroutine level for search run
10 = 2nd asynchronous subroutine level for search run
11 = 3rd asynchronous subroutine level for search run
12 = 4th asynchronous subroutine level for search run
101 = main program level for stop run

102 = 1st subroutine level for stop run
103 = 2nd subroutine level for stop run
104 = 3rd subroutine level for stop run
105 = 4th subroutine level for stop run
109 = 1st asynchronous subroutine level for stop run
110 = 2nd asynchronous subroutine level for stop run
111 = 3rd asynchronous subroutine level for stop run
112 = 4th asynchronous subroutine level for stop run
forward
Search direction
Search direction "backwards" is only possible in the mode without calculation
1 = backwards (without calculation)
2 = forwards
- UWord wr

1 Variablen 07.05
invocCount
Actual value of the subroutine call counter. Is always 1 for the main program.
- UWord wr
plcStartReason
Specifies for the SERUPRO function which channel has to be started by the PLC so that the current channel starts.
- 0 0 UWord wr
progName
Program name. The main program that is used in the first main program level must be selected for the block search,
otherwise the search request will be acknowledged negatively.
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes Index of the program level 12
searchString
Search string (the first 64 characters of the NC block - corresponding to search pointer). Contents of the search string
depends on the search type and are either:
block label
block number
any string
- String[64] wr
searchType
Search type
1 = block number
2 = label
3 = string
4 = program level
5 = search pointer block-oriented (searching for line feeds)
- UWord wr
seekOffset
Search pointer (block-oriented, searching for line feeds). If the search pointer is used, a program name (progName)
always must have been defined. The search pointer refers to this program.
- Long Integer wr
status
This variable is without function in block SPARPF.
It has only been introduced to achieve the same structure of SPARPI and SPARPF.
- 0 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
workPName
Workpiece name = path name in the NC file structure. If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for
subroutine calls is used.
- String[32] wr

07.05 1 Variablen
workPNameLong
Workpiece name = path name in the NCK file structure. If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for
subroutine calls is used.
- String[128] wr

1 Variablen 07.05
1.4.8 Area C, Mod. SSYNAC: Synchronous actions

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/SelectedFunctions/...
Several synchronous actions (M, H, S, E, F, T, D) can be active simultaneously

in one channel. The module SSYNAC contains a list of all the synchronous
actions programmed in the current block. This module consists of arrays of
varying length because some types of synchronous actions might be
programmed several times in a block. A synchronous action that is not
assigned produces a negative number for the respecitive index.
For each synchronous action there is an address variable and a variable in
which the value of the address is entered.
5 M functions
3 S functions
3 H functions
1 T function
1 D function
6 F functions
1 E function
can be programmed in each part program block, but no more than 10
synchronous actions must be programmed in a single block.
blockNoStrAct
Block number of the current block if synchronous actions are active
- String[12] r
Multi-line: yes No of the synchronous action /C/SSYNAC/numSynAct
blockNoStrProg
Number of the block where the synchronous action has been programmed
- String[12] r
Multi-line: yes No. of the synchronous action /C/SSYNAC/numSynAct
Dadr
D-number. There is only one active D-number per channel.
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1
Dval
Value of the current D-number
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1
Eadr S5
Number of active E-function
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
Eval S5
Value of the E-function
defined
Multi-line: no 1

07.05 1 Variablen
Hadr S5
Number of active auxiliary functions (H-functions). Up to three H-functions can be active simultaneously.
- 0 99 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number 3
Hval S5
Value of the H-function
- -99999,9999 99999,9999 Double r
id
ID of the synchronous action; value 0 means no ID defined
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes No. of the synchronous action /C/SSYNAC/numSynAct
Madr S5
Number of the active M-function. Up to 5 M-functions can be active simultaneously.
- 0 99 UWord r
Mval S5
Value of the M-function
numSynAct
Number of synchronous actions
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
Sadr S5
Number of active S-functions. Up to three S-functions can be active simultaneously.
- 0 6 UWord r
Sval S5
Value of the S-function. Specifies the spindle speed.
rev/min , m/min 0 999999,999 Double r
Tadr
Active T-number. Only one T-number can be active at any a time.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
TPreSelAdr
Number of the preselected T-function
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
TPreSelVal
Value of the preselected T-function
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1

1 Variablen 07.05
Tval
T-function value
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1
typStatus
Type and state of the synchronous action
Bits0-7 describe the state:
Bit0: active
Bit1: lock
Bits8-15 describe the type:
Bit8: static
Bit9: modal
Bit10: blockwise
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of the synchronous action /C/SSYNAC/numSynAct

07.05 1 Variablen
1.4.9 Area C, Mod. SYNACT: Channel-specific synchronous actions

This module contains information on the synchronous actions. The 1000 digit of
the cell contains the user protection level (0-7) needed for displaying the
corresponding synchronous action.
blockNoStrAct
If a technology cycle is active: block number of the current action
- String[12] r
Multi-line: yes (Protection level) * 1000 + no. of the 7 * 1000 + /C/SYNACT/numSynAct
synchronous action
blockNoStrProg
Number of the block where the synchronous action has been programmed
- String[12] r
synchronous action
id
ID of the synchronous action; value 0 means that there is no ID defined (blockwise)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes (protection level) * 1000 + no. of the 7 * 1000 + /C/SYNACT/numSynAct
synchronous action
numSynAct
Number of synchronous actions
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes (protection level) * 1000 + 1 7 * 1000 + 1
typStatus
Type and state of the synchronous action
Bits0-7 describe the state:
Bit0: active, i.e. condition fullfilled, action is being executed
Bit1: lock, i.e. action is locked by PLC or Synact
Bits8-15 describe the type:
Bit8: static
Bit9: modal
Bit10: blockwise (to be recognized by id=0)
- UWord r
synchronous action

1 Variablen 07.05
1.4.10 Area C, Mod. SNCF: Active G functions

All G functions are organized in G groups. Only one function of each G group
can be active at a time. The module SNCF consists of a single variable that is
organized as an array. The row index corresponds to the G group number.
ncFkt
Active G-function of relevant group G <No>.
If there is no function active within the corresponding G-group, the variable returns an empty string "\0".
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes G group number numGCodeGroups
ncFktAct
Active G function of relevant current group in current
language mode.
Depending on whether function has been programmed in Siemens or
ISO Dialect mode, this is identical to ncFkt or ncFktFanuc.
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes G group number or ISO Dialect G numGCodeGroups bzw.
group number numGCodeGroupsFanuc
ncFktBin
Active G-function of the correponding group
- UWord r
ncFktBinAct
Active G function of relevant current group in current
language mode.
Depending on whether function has been programmed in Siemens or
ISO Dialect mode, this is identical to ncFktBin or ncFktBinFanuc.
(The value is the index of the active G function within the group)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes G group number or ISO Dialect G numGCodeGroups bzw.
group number numGCodeGroupsFanuc
ncFktBinFanuc
Active G function of relevant ISO Dialect group
(the value is the index of the active G function within the group)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes ISO Dialect G group number numGCodeGroupsFanuc
ncFktBinS
Active G-function of the correponding group for block search with calculation
(The value is the index of the active G-function within the group)
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling block search events only, but not for the Variable Service.
- UWord r
ncFktFanuc
Active G function of relevant ISO Dialect group
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes ISO Dialect G group number numGCodeGroupsFanuc

07.05 1 Variablen
ncFktS
Active G-function of the correponding group for block search with calculation
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling block search events only, but not for the Variable Service.
- String[16] r

1 Variablen 07.05
1.4.11 Area C, Mod. NIB: State data: Nibbling

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Nibbling/...
The module NIB contains technology-specific data for nibbling.
actPunchRate N4
Strokes per minute
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
automCutSegment N4
Identifier that indicates which type of automatic block division is active. The division is specified by the commands
'SPP' and 'SPN' in the part program.
0 = no block division
1 = number of segments per block ('SNP')
2 = segments of fixed length ('SPP')
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
numStrokes N4
Number of strokes when the instruction 'SPN' divides the block into segments (variable 'automCutSegment' = 1).
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
partDistance N4
If the block has been divided in segments with the instruction 'SPP' (variable 'automCutSegment' = 2) the variable
specifies the length of the path between the punches.
Multi-line: no 1
punchActive N4
Identification of punching or nibbling active. The part program turns off/on punching and nibbling with 'SPOF', 'SON'
and 'PON'. Rapid punching and nibbling are turned on/off with 'SONS' and 'PONS'.
The variable 'punchActive' specified the present state.
0 = inactive
1 = punching active
2 = nibbling active
3 = rapid punching active (PONS from SW 4.1)
4 = rapid nibbling active (SONS from SW 4.1)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
punchDelayActive N4
Identifier that indicates whether punching with delay is active. The part program can turn on/off the delay with the
instructions 'PDELAYON' and 'PDELAYOF'. The variable 'PunchDelayActive' indicates the present state.
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
punchDelayTime SD 42400: PUNCH_DWELL_TIME N4

Punching delay time
ms Double r
Multi-line: no 1

07.05 1 Variablen
strokeNr
Current stroke number
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

1 Variablen 07.05
1.4.12 Area C, Mod. FB: Channel-specific base frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/BaseFrame/...
This only applies if $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES > 0.
The maximum frame index is: $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES - 1
linShift $P_CHBFR[x,y,TR] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * (numGeoAxes + $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES *
numAuxAxes) + axis number (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)
linShiftFine $P_CHBFR[x,y,SI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis

mirrorImgActive $P_CHBFR[x,y,MI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Mirroring enabled in a settable zero offset
0: Mirroring not active
1: Mirroring active
- UWord wr
rotation $P_CHBFR[x,y,RT] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Rotation of a settable zero offset
Degree Double wr
scaleFact $P_CHBFR[x,y,SC] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Scaling factor of a settable zero offset
- Double wr

07.05 1 Variablen
1.4.13 Area C, Mod. FS: Channel-specific system frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/SystemFrame/...
Those that there are, are set by the bits in

$MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK.
Consequently, there may be gaps between the active system frames.
The maximum frame index is:

3 up to but excluding SW 6.3.
5 from and including SW 6.3.
linShift $P_SETFR[Achse, TR]

Translation
Multi-line: yes Frameindex 4 * (numGeoAxes+numAuxAxes)
linShiftFine $P_SETFR[Achse, SI]

Fine offset
mirrorImgActive $P_SETFR[Achse, MI]

Mirroring
0: Mirroring inactive
1: Mirroring active
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
rotation $P_SETFR[Achse, RT]

Rotation
Degree 0 Double wr
scaleFact $P_SETFR[Achse, SC]

Scaling factor
- 0 Double wr

1 Variablen 07.05
1.4.14 Area C, Mod. AUXFU: Auxiliary functions

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel//...
The module includes the active auxiliary functions for each group.
In the line, the auxiliary function group (64 groups) and the
desired view are addressed:
Line 1001-1064: Active auxiliary function from the point of view of the NCK
Line 2001-2064: Collected auxiliary function (after search run) from the point of
view of the NCK
Line 3001-3064: Active auxiliary function from the point of view of the PLC
Line 1-64: Summary of the above views
Only the values of lines 3001-3064 can be written.

When writing individual values, it must be taken care
that the status variable is written last.
The entire data block of an auxiliary function will not be
accepted before this variable is written.
extension
Extension of the auxiliary function
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Group of auxiliary functions/view 3064
status
Status of the auxiliary function
Bit0 = 1: Auxiliary function has been collected (NCK view)
Bit1 = 1: Auxiliary function has been output to PLC (NCK view)
Bit2 = 1: Auxiliary function has been acknowledged by PLC (NCK view)
Bit3 = 1: Auxiliary function has been acknowledged by PLC (PLC view)
Bit4 = 1: Auxiliary function has been functionally completed (PLC view)
Bit14 = 1: Value type is LONG

Bit15 = 1: Value type is DOUBLE
- 0 0 UWord wr
type
Type of the auxiliary function, e.g. "M", "S", "T", "D", "F", "H", "L".
- String[2] wr
valueDo
Value of the auxiliary function.
This value will be supplied, if "status" Bit15 = 1
- 0 0 Double wr
valueLo
Value of the auxiliary function.
This value will be supplied, if "status" Bit14 = 1

07.05 1 Variablen
1.5 State data of axes
1.5.1 Area C, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/MachineAxis/...
actIncrVal DB31-48, DBB5 H1

0 = INC_10000
1 = INC_1000
2 = INC_100
3 = INC_10
4 = INC_1
5 = INC_VAR
6 = INC_JOG_CONT
7 = no incremental mode set
- UWord r
actToolBasePos $AA_IM[x] x = Ax is
Tool base position. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
cmdToolBasePos
Tool base position. Physical unit is defined in variable extUnit (in this module).
extUnit
Current physical unit of the axis position
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = degree
4 = userdef
- UWord r
name
Axis name
- String[32] r

1 Variablen 07.05
status
Axis state
2 = exact position coarse reached
3 = exact position fine reached
- UWord r
toolBaseDistToGo
Tool base distance-to-go. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
toolBaseREPOS
varIncrVal
Settable value for INC_VAR. The physical value depends on whether the axis is linear or rotary.
Linear axis: unit is 1 mm
Rotary axis: unit is 1/1000 degrees

07.05 1 Variablen
1.5.2 Area C, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes (extension of SMA)
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/MachineAxis/...
aaActIndexAxPosNo $AA_ACT_INDEX_AX_POS_NO[<Achse>]
Current indexing position; the display depends on
$MN_INDEX_AX_NO_MODE and the division (via table or equidistant)
- 0 UDoubleword r
aaAlarmStat $AA_ALARM_STAT
Display indicating whether alarms are active for a PLC-controlled axis.
The relevant coded alarm reactions can be used as a source for
the "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
The data is bit-coded, allowing, where necessary, individual states to be
masked or evaluated separately (bits not listed supply a value of 0)
Bit2 = 1: NOREADY (active rapid deceleration + cancelation of servo enable)
Bit6 = 1: STOPBYALARM (rampm stop in all channel axes)
Bit9 = 1: SETVDI (VDI interface signal "Setting alarm")
Bit13 = 1: FOLLOWUPBYALARM (Follow-up)
- 0 UWord r
aaBcsOffset $AA_BCS_OFFSET[Achse]
Sum of all axial offsets of an axis,
such as DRF, online tool offset, $AA_OFF and ext. WO.
- 0 Double r
aaCoupAct $AA_COUP_ACT[x] x = Spindle following

Current coupling state of the slave spindle
- UWord r
aaCoupOffs $AA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Spindle

Position offset of the synchronous spindle desired value
- Double r
aaCurr $AA_CURR[x] x = Axis

Actual value of the axis/spindle current in A (611D only)
A Double r

1 Variablen 07.05
aaDtbb $AA_DTBB[x] x = Axis

Axis-specific distance from the beginning of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in
synchronous actions (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDteb $AA_DTEB[x] x = Axis

Axis-specific distance to the end of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in synchronous
actions (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDtepb $AA_DTEPB[x] x = Axis

Axis-specific distance-to-go of infeed during oscillation in the BCS (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaEsrEnable $AA_ESR_ENABLE[Achse]
(Axial) enabling of reactions of "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
The selected axial ESR reaction must be parameterized in MD $MA_ESR_REACTION.
beforehand. The corresponding Stop or Retract reactions can be activated via
$AN_ESR_TRIGGER (or for individual drives in the event of communications failure/
DC-link undervoltage), generator-mode operation is automatically activated in response to
undervoltage conditions.
0: FALSE
1: TRUE
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaEsrStat $AA_ESR_STAT[Achse]
(Axial) status checkback signals of "Extended Stop and Retract" function,
which can be applied as input signals for the gating logic of the ESR (synchronous actions).

evaluated separately if necessary:
Bit0 = 1: Generator mode is activated
Bit1 = 1: Retract operation is activated
Bit2 = 1: Stop operation is activated
Bit3 = 1: Risk of undervoltage (DC-link voltage monitoring,
voltage has dropped below warning threshold)
Bit4 = 1: Speed has dropped below minimum generator mode threshold (i.e. no more
regenerative rotation energy is available).
- 0 UWord r
aaEsrTrigger $AA_ESR_TRIGGER
Activation of "NC-controlled ESR" for PLC-controlled axis
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaIbnCorr $AA_IBN_CORR[<Achse>]
Current BZS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- 0 Double r

07.05 1 Variablen
aaIenCorr $AA_IEN_CORR[<Achse>]
Current SZS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- 0 Double r
aaJerkCount $AA_JERK_COUNT[Achse]
Total traverse processes of an axis with jerk
- 0 Double r
aaJerkTime $AA_JERK_TIME[Achse]
Total traverse time of an axis with jerk
- 0 Double r
aaJerkTotal $AA_JERK_TOT[Achse]
Overall total jerk of an axis
- 0 Double r
aaLeadP $AA_LEAD_P[x] x = Axis

Actual lead value position
- Double r
aaLeadPTurn $AA_LEAD_P_TURN
Current master value - position component lost
as a result of modulo reduction
- 0 0 UWord r
aaLeadSp $AA_LEAD_SP[x] x = Axis

Simulated lead value - position
- Double r
aaLeadSv $AA_LEAD_SV[x] x = Axis

Simulated leading value velocity
- Double r
aaLeadTyp $AA_LEAD_TYP[x] x = Axis

Source of the lead value
1: actual value
2: desired value
3: simulated value
- UWord r
aaLeadV $AA_LEAD_V[x] x = Axis

Actual lead value - velocity
- Double r

1 Variablen 07.05
aaLoad $AA_LOAD[x] x = Axis

Drive load in % (611D only)
% Double r
aaMaslState $AA_MASL_STAT
Each slave axis currently coupled via master-slave delivers the machine axis number of the corresponding master axis.
Zero is displayed as default for inactive coupling.
A master axis also shows default value zero.
0: No coupling for this axis configured, or axis is master axis, or no coupling active
>0: Machine axis number of the master axis with which the slave axis is currently coupled
aaMm $AA_MM[x] x = Axis

Latched probe position in the machine coordinate system
- Double wr
aaMm1 $AA_MM1[x] x = Axis

Access to measurement result of trigger event 1 in the MCS
- Double wr

- Double wr

- Double wr

- Double wr
aaOff $AA_OFF[x] x = Axis

Superimposed position offset from synchronous actions
- Double r
aaOffLimit $AA_OFF_LIMIT[x] x = Axis

Limit for axial correction $AA_OFF reached (Note: for SYNACT only)
0: limit not reached

1: limit in positive axial direction reached
11: limit in negative axial direction reached
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variablen
aaOffVal $AA_OFF_VAL[x]
Integrated value of overlaid motion for an axis.
The negative value of this variable can be used to cancel an overlaid motion.
e.g. $AA_OFF[axis] = -$AA_OFF_VAL[axis]
- 0 Double r
- Double r
- Double r
aaOscillReversePos1 $AA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1[x] x = Axis

Current reverse position 1 for oscillation in the BCS. For synchronous actions the value of the setting data
- Double r
aaOscillReversePos2 $AA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2[x] x = Axis

Current reverse position 2 for oscillation in the BCS; For synchronous actions the value of the setting data
- Double r
aaOvr $AA_OVR[x] x = Axis

Axial override for synchronous actions
- Double r
aaPlcOvr $AA_PLC_OVR[Achse]
Axial override specified by PLC for motion-synchronous actions
- 100 0 Double r
aaPolfa $AA_POLFA
The programmed retraction position of the single axis
- Double r
aaPolfaValid $AA_POLFA_VALID
States whether the retraction of the single axis is programmed
0: No retraction programmed for the single axis
1: Retraction programmed as position
2: Retraction programmed as distance
- 0 0 2 UWord r
aaPower $AA_POWER[x] x = Axis

Drive power in W (611D only)
W Double r

1 Variablen 07.05
aaSnglAxStat $AA_SNGLAX_STAT
Display status of a PLC-controlled axis
0: Not a single axis
1: Reset
2: Ended
3: Interrupted
4: Active
5: Alarm
- 0 UWord r
aaSoftendn $AA_SOFTENDN[x] x = Axis

Software end position, negative direction
- Double r
aaSoftendp $AA_SOFTENDP[x] x = Axis

Software end position, positive direction
- Double r
aaStat $AA_STAT[]
Axis state
0: no axis state available
1: travel command is active
2: axis has reached the IPO end. only for channel axes
3: axis in position (exact stop coarse) for all axes
4: axis in position (exact stop fine) for all axes
- UWord r
aaSync $AA_SYNC[x] x = Axis

Coupling state of the following axis with lead value coupling
0: not synchronized
1: synchronized coarse
2: synchronized fine
3: synchronized coarse and fine
- UWord r
aaTorque $AA_TORQUE[x] x = Axis

Desired torque value in Nm (611D only)
Nm Double r
aaTotalOvr $AA_TOTAL_OVR[Achse]
The total axial override for motion-synchronous actions
- 100 0 Double r
aaTravelCount $AA_TRAVEL_COUNT[Achse]
Total traverse processes of an axis
- 0 Double r

07.05 1 Variablen
aaTravelCountHS $AA_TRAVEL_COUNT_HS[Achse]
Total traverse processes of an axis at high speed
- 0 Double r
aaTravelDist $AA_TRAVEL_DIST[Achse]
Total travel path of an axis in mm or degrees
- 0 Double r
aaTravelDistHS $AA_TRAVEL_DIST_HS[Achse]
Total travel path of an axis at high speed in mm or degrees
- 0 Double r
aaTravelTime $AA_TRAVEL_TIME[Achse]
Total traverse time of an axis in seconds
- 0 Double r
aaTravelTimeHS $AA_TRAVEL_TIME_HS[Achse]
Total traverse time of an axis at high speed in seconds
- 0 Double r
aaTyp $AA_TYP[x] x = Axis

Axis type
0: axis in other channel
1: channel axis of same channel
2: neutral axis
3: PLC axis
4: reciprocating axis
5: neutral axis, currently traversing in JOG
6: slave axis coupled via master value
7: coupled motion slave axis
8: command axis
9: compile cycle axis
- UWord r
aaVactB $AA_VACTB[X]
Axis velocity in basic coordinate system
defined
aaVactM $AA_VACTM[X]
Axis velocity in machine coordinate system
defined
aaVc $AA_VC[x] x = Axis

Additive correction value for path feed or axial feed
- Double r

1 Variablen 07.05
ackSafeMeasPos
Confirmation of SI actual position
0 = not confirmed
0x00AC = confirmed
- UWord wr
actCouppPosOffset $VA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Axis S3

Position offset of an axis to a leading axis / leading spindle (actual value)
actFeedRate S5
Actual value of axis-specific feedrate for positioning axes. Actual value of single axis feed for additional axes.
- Double r
actIndexAxPosNo
Current indexing position number
- UWord r
actSpeedRel
Actual value of rotary speed (referring to the maximum speed in %; for 611D in MD1401), for linear drives actual value
of the velocity.
% Double r
actValResol
Actual value resolution. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module)
amSetupState
State variable of the PI Service Automatic set-up of an asynchronous motor
0 = inactive
1 = wait for PLC enable
2 = wait for key NC-start
3 = active
4 = stopped by Servo + fine code in the upper byte
5 = stopped by 611D + fine code in the upper byte
6 = stopped by NCK + fine code in the upper byte
- 0 0 0xff06 UWord r
axComp
Sum of axis-specific compensation values (CEC Cross Error compensation and temperature compensation). The
physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
axisActiveInChan
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variablen
axisFeedRateUnit
Unit of the axis-specific feedrate
0 = mm/min
1 = inch/min
2 = degree/min
- UWord r
chanAxisNoGap
Display of existing axis, i.e. no axis gap in channel.
0: Axis does not exist
1: Axis does exist
- 0 0 1 UWord r
chanNoAxisIsActive
Channel number in which the channel axis is currently active
0 = axis is not assigned to any channel
1 to maxnumChannels (Area.:N / Module:Y) = channel number
- UWord r
cmdContrPos
Desired value of position after fine interpolation
cmdCouppPosOffset $AA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Axis S3

Position offset of an axis referring to the leading axis / leading spindle (desired value)
cmdFeedRate
Desired value of axis-specific feedrate, if axis is a positioning axis. Single axis feedrate if the axis is an additional axis.
- Double r
cmdSpeedRel
Desired value of rotary speed. (referring to the max. speed in %; for 611D in MD 1401). For linear motors actual value
of velocity.
% Double r
contrConfirmActive
Controller enable
0 = no controller enable
1 = controller enable
- UWord r

1 Variablen 07.05
contrMode
Identifier for controller mode servo
0 = position control
1 = speed control
2 = stop
3 = park
4 = follow-up
- UWord r
displayAxis $MC_DISPLAY_AXIS Bit16-31

Identifier indicating whether axis is displayed by MMC as a machine axis.
distPerDriveRevol
Distance per revolution. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
drive2ndTorqueLimit
2nd torque limit. With linear motors: 2nd force limit
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
driveActMotorSwitch
Actual motor wiring (star/delta)
0 = star
1 = delta
- UWord r
driveActParamSet
Number of the actual drive parameter set
- 1 8 UWord r
driveClass1Alarm
Message ZK1 drive alarm
0 = no alarm set
1= alarm set (fatal error occured)
- UWord r
driveContrMode
Control mode of drive
0 = current control
1 = speed control
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variablen
driveCoolerTempWarn
Heatsink temperature monitoring
0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- UWord r
driveDesMotorSwitch
Motor wiring selection (star/delta)
0 = star
1 = delta
- UWord r
driveDesParamSet
Desired parameter set of the drive
- 1 8 UWord r
driveFastStop
Ramp-function generator rapid stop
0 = not stopped
1 = stopped
- UWord r
driveFreqMode
I/F mode
- UWord r
driveImpulseEnabled
Enable inverter impulse (checkback signal to impulseEnable)
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
- UWord r
driveIndex
0 = drive does not exist
1 to 15 = logical drive number
- 0 15 UWord r
driveIntegDisable
Integrator disable
0 = not disabled
1 = disabled
- UWord r
driveLinkVoltageOk
State of the DC link voltage
0 = OK
1 = not OK
- UWord r

1 Variablen 07.05
driveMotorTempWarn
Motor temperature warning
0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- UWord r
driveNumCrcErrors
CRC errors on the drive bus
(transmission errors when writing data to the 611D; values may range up to FFFFH)
0 = no error
- UWord r
driveParked
Parking axis
0 = no parking axis
1 = parking axis
- UWord r
drivePowerOn
Drive switched on
0 = drive not switched on
1 = drive switched on
- UWord r
driveProgMessages
Configurable messages (via machine data)
- UWord r
driveReady
Drive ready
0 = drive not ready
1 = drive ready
- UWord r
driveRunLevel
Current state reached during the boot process
(range: coarse state (0 to 5) * 100 + fine state (up to 22)
Booting the firmware ---> 0 XX
entering the configuration ---> 1XX
hardware-init, communication-init
loading, converting data ---> 2XX
changing bus addressing ---> 3XX
preparing synchronization ---> 4XX
activating interrupt ---> 519
XX ==> fine state

- UWord r

07.05 1 Variablen
driveSetupMode
Set-up mode
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
driveSpeedSmoothing
Smoothing the desired value of the rotary speed, for linear drives: smoothing the desired value of the velocity
0 = no smoothing
1 = smoothing
- UWord r
effComp1
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 1. The value results from: temperature compensation, backlash
effComp2
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 2. The value results from: temperature compensation, backlash
encChoice
Active encoder
0 = does not exist
1 = encoder 1
2 = encoder 2
- UWord r
fctGenState
State of the function generator
- UWord r
feedRateOvr
Feedrate override (only if axis is a positioning axis)
% Double r
focStat $AA_FOC[x]
Current status of "Travel with limited torque" function
0-2
0: FOC not active
1: FOC modal active (programming of FOCON[])
2: FOC non-modal active (programming of FOC[])
- 0 0 2 UWord r

1 Variablen 07.05
fxsInfo $VA_FXS_INFO[Achse]
Additional information on travel to fixed stop if
$VA_FXS[]=2, or OPI variable /C/SEMA/fxsStat=2.
0 No additional information available
1 No approach motion programmed
2 Programmed end position reached, movement ended
3 Abort by NC RESET (Reset key)
4 Fixed stop window exited
5 Torque reduction was rejected by drive
6 PLC has canceled enable signals
- 0 0 6 UWord r
fxsStat $AA_FXS[x] x = Axis

State after travelling to fixed stop
0 = normal control
1 = fixed stop reached
2 = failed
- UWord r
handwheelAss
Number of handwheel assigned to an axis
- 0 3 UWord r
impulseEnable
Impulse enable for drive
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
- UWord r
index
Absolute axis index referring to machine data axis number
- UWord r
isDriveUsed
One or more machine axes are assigned to each drive.
The drive can only be controlled at any one time by one of these machine axes. The machine manufacturer makes the
selection.
The status of the drive control changes dynamically.
- 0 0 1 UWord r
kVFactor
position control gain factor
16.667 1/s Double r
lag
Following error = desired value of position after fine interpolation - actual value of position. The physical unit is defined
in measUnit (in this module).

07.05 1 Variablen
logDriveNo
0 = not available
1 to 15 = drive number
- 0 15 UWord r
measFctState
State of the probing function
- UWord r
measPos1
measPos2
measPosDev
Actual position difference between the two encoders. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
measUnit
Unit for service values of the drives
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = grd
- UWord r
paramSetNo
Number of parameter set
- 1 8 UWord r
preContrFactTorque
Feed forward control factor torque
Nm Double r
preContrFactVel
Feed forward control factor velocity
- Double r
preContrMode
Feed forward control mode
0 = inactive
1 = velocity feed forward
2 = torque feed forward
- UWord r

1 Variablen 07.05
PRESETActive
Preset state
0 = no preset active
1 = preset active
- UWord r
PRESETVal $AC_PRESET[x] x = Axis

The function PRESETON (...) programs a zero offset for an axis. The value of the offset is stored in the variable
'PRESETVal'. The variable can be overwritten by the part program and by the MMC.
progIndexAxPosNo
Programmed indexing position number
- UWord r
qecLrnIsOn
Quadrant error compensation learning active
0 = inactive
1 = Neuronal-QEC learning active
2 = Standard-QEC active
3 = Standard-QEC with adaption of the correction value active
4 = Neuronal-QEC active
5 = Neuronal-QEC with adaption of the measuring time active
6 = Neuronal-QEC with adaption of the decay time of the correction value active
7 = Neuronal-QEC with adaption of the measuring time and the decay time of the correction value active
- 0 7 UWord r
refPtBusy
Axis is being referenced
0 = axis is not being referenced
1 = axis is being referenced
- UWord r
refPtCamNo
Reference point cam
0 = no cam approached
1 = cam 1
2 = cam 2
3 = cam 3
4 = cam 4
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variablen
refPtStatus
Identifier indicating whether an axis is liable for reference and actually is referenced.
Note for changing axes into another channel:
In general a changable axis is only liable for reference in the channel it is presently assigned to. Thus a referenced
changable axis is announced to the channel it is presently being moved in with the value 3 (liable for reference and
referenced) and to all other channels with the value 1 (not liable for reference but referenced).
A set bit means:
Until SW release 3.1:

bit0: at least 1 measuring system has been referenced
bit1: active measuring system is liable for reference
From SW release 3.2:

bit0: active measuring system has been referenced
bit1: active measuring system is liable for reference
(The busy signal effects the state)
- Achsindex UWord r
Multi-line: no numMachAxes
safeAcceptCheckPhase
Flag for NCK-side acceptance test phase, the human-machine interface can determine which acceptance test phase is
present on the NCK.
0: NCK has acceptance test phase inactive = 0

0ACH: NCK has acceptance test phase active
- 0 0 0ACH UWord r
safeAcceptTestMode
SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by Reset in acceptance test mode
0: Acceptance test mode: SI PowerOn alarms cannot be acknowledged by Reset
0ACH: Acceptance test mode: SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by Reset
- 0 0 0FFH UWord wr
safeAcceptTestPhase
Flag for acceptance test phase
0: Acceptance test Wizard not selected, activate NCK-side alarm suppression
0ACH: Dialogs for acceptance test support selected, deactivate NCK-side alarm suppression
- 0 0 0FFH UWord wr
safeAcceptTestSE
Flag for NCK-side SE acceptance test. The human-machine interface starts checking the safe limit positions during the
acceptance test
0: NCK has SE acceptance test inactive = 0. The single channel SW limit positions are activated.
0ACH: NCK is to activate SE acceptance test. The single channel SW limit positions are deactivated in this way.
- 0 0 0ACH UWord r
safeAcceptTestState
Flag for acceptance test status, the human-machine interface can determine which acceptance test mode is present on
the NCK.
0: NCK has acceptance test mode inactive
0CH: Acceptance test mode not activated because SI PowerOn alarms already present.
The causes of the SI PowerOn alarms must be eliminated first.
0DH: Acceptance test mode not activated, the HMI writes invalid values in /C/SEMA/safeAcceptTestMode to the NCK.
0ACH: NCK has acceptance test mode active
- 0 0 0FFH UWord r

1 Variablen 07.05
safeActPosDiff
Current actual value difference betw. NCK and drive monitoring channels
safeActVeloDiff
Current speed difference between NCK and drive monitoring channels
defined
safeActVeloLimit
Safe limit of actual speed
-1 => no actual speed limit active
>= 0 => limit of actual speed is active
safeDesVeloLimit
Safe limit of desired speed
-1 => no desired speed limit active
>= 0 => desired speed limit is active
safeFctEnable
Safe operation active
0 = not activated
1 = activated
- UWord r
safeInputSig
Safe input signals of the axis
- UWord r
safeInputSig2
Safe input signals part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeInputSigDrive
Safe input signals of the drive
- UWord r
safeInputSigDrive2
Safe input signals of the drive part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeMaxVeloDiff
Maximum speed difference between NCK and drive monitoring channels since last NCK Reset
defined

07.05 1 Variablen
safeMeasPos $VA_IS[x] x = Axis

Safe actual position of the axis. The physical unit is defined in the variable measUnit (in this module).
safeMeasPosDrive
Safe actual position of drive. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
safeOutputSig
Safe output signals of the axis
- UWord r
safeOutputSig2
Safe output signals part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeOutputSigDrive
Safe output signals of the drive
- UWord r
safeOutputSigDrive2
Safe output signals of the drive part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeStopOtherAxis
Stop on another axis
0: No stop on another axis
1: Stop on another axis
- 0 0 1 UWord r
spec
Axis specification
0 = path axis
- UWord r
subSpec T1
Subspecification
0 = normal axis
1 = indexing axis
- UWord r
torqLimit
Torque limitation value (referring to the nominal value of the drive). For linear motors: force limitation value.
% Double r

1 Variablen 07.05
traceState1
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
traceState2
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
traceState3
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
traceState4
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
trackErrContr
Position controller difference (actual value / desired value of position)
trackErrDiff
Contour deviation (difference actual value of position and calculated dynamical model)
type
Axis type
1 = linear axis
2 = rotary axis
3 = spindle
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variablen
vaDistTorque $VA_DIST_TORQUE[Achse]
Disturbing torque/max. torque (motor end, York)
% 0 -100 100 Double r
vaDpe $VA_DPE[x1]
Status of power enable of a machine axis
0-1
- 0 0 1 UWord r
vaIm $VA_IM[x]
Encoder actual value in the machine coordinate system (measured
active measuring system)
- 0 0 Double r
vaIm1 $VA_IM1[x]
- 0 0 Double r
vaIm2 $VA_IM2[x]
- 0 0 Double r
vaTorqueAtLimit $VA_TORQUE_AT_LIMIT[Achse]
Status "effective torque equals specified torque limit"
0: Effective torque lower than torque limit

1: Effective torque has reached torque limit
- 0 0 1 UWord r
vaVactm $VA_VACTM[x] x = Axis

Axis velocity actual value on the load side in the MCS
- Double r

1 Variablen 07.05
1.5.3 Area C, Mod. SGA: State data: Geometry axes in tool offset memory
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/GeometricAxis/...
All status data that are dependent on machine movement and specified in the
workpiece coordinate system are included in module SGA. Supplementary
information can be found in module SEGA. The individual variables are defined
as arrays where the line index is the number of the axis (assigned to the current
channel).The variable "name" in module SGA with the line index in question
identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SGA and SEGA is identical.
With SW 5.2 and later, OPI modules SGA and SEGA can be addressed via the
geo-axis no. instead of via the channel axis no.:
Line index 1001: 1st geo-axis
Line index 1002: 2nd geo-axis
Line index 1003: 3rd geo-axis
The number of channel axes (geometry, special axes and spindles) can be
found in "numMachAxes" in module Y in area C.
actIncrVal
0 = INC_10000
1 = INC_1000
2 = INC_100
3 = INC_10
4 = INC_1
5 = INC_VAR
6 = INC_JOG_CONT
7 = no increment mode has been set
- UWord r
actProgPos
Programmed position, actual value. The physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module)
actToolBasePos $AA_IW[x] x = Axis

Tool base position. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (from this module)
actToolEdgeCenterPos
Center point of a cutting edge. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (from this module)
cmdProgPos
Programmed position, desired value. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module)

07.05 1 Variablen
cmdToolBasePos
Tool base position, desired value . Physical unit is defined in variable extUnit (in this module).
cmdToolEdgeCenterPos
Position of the cutting edge center point. Physical unit is defined in variable extUnit (in this module).
extUnit
Current physical unit of the related geometry axis or auxiliary axis
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = degree
4 = userdef
- UWord r
name
Axis name
- String[32] r
progDistToGo
Programmed position, distance-to-go. The physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
progREPOS
Programmed position, REPOS. The physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
status
Axis state
2 = exact stop coarse reached
3 = exact stop fine reached
- UWord r
subType
Axis type geometry or auxiliary axis
0 = auxiliary axis
1 = geometry axis
2 = orientation axis
- UWord r
toolBaseDistToGo
Tool base distance-to-go. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module)

1 Variablen 07.05
toolBaseREPOS
toolEdgeCenterDistToGo
Center point of cutting edge distance-to-go. Physical unit results from the variable extUnit (in this module)
toolEdgeCenterREPOS
Center point of the cutting edge REPOS. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
varIncrVal
Setable value for INC_VAR. The physical unit depends on whether the axis is rotary or linear. Linear axes: 1mm rotary
axes: 1/1000 degrees
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double wr

07.05 1 Variablen
1.5.4 Area C, Mod. SEGA: State data: Geometry axes in tool offset
memory (extension of SGA)
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/GeometricAxis/...
All status data that are dependent on machine movement and specified in the
workpiece coordinate system are combined in module SGA. Supplementary
information can be found in module SEGA. The individual variables are defined
as arrays where the line index is the number of the axis (assigned to the current
channel).The variable "name" in module SGA with the line index in question
identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SGA and SEGA is identical.
With SW 5.2 and later, OPI modules SGA and SEGA can be addressed via the
geo-axis no. instead of via the channel axis no.:
Line index 1001: 1st geo-axis
Line index 1002: 2nd geo-axis
Line index 1003: 3rd geo-axis
The number of channel axes (geometry, special axes and spindles) can be
found in "numMachAxes" in module Y in area C.
aaDelt $AA_DELT[x] x = Axis

Stored axial distance-to-go in the WCS after axial delete-distance-to-go DELDTG(axis) for synchronous actions (Note:
for SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDtbw $AA_DTBW[x] x = Aaxis

Axial distance from the beginning of the block in the WCS for positioning and synchronous axes for synchronous
motion (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDtepw $AA_DTEPW[x] x = Axis

Axial distance-to-go for infeed during oscillation in the WCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDtew $AA_DTEW[x] x = Axis

Axial distance to the end of the block in the WCS for positioning and synchronous axes for synchronous actions (Note:
for SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaIbCorr $AA_IB_CORR
Current BCS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- Double r
aaIwCorr $AA_IW_CORR
Current WCS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- Double r

1 Variablen 07.05
aaMw $AA_MW[x] x = Axis

Latched probe position retransformed in the WCS
- Double wr
aaMw1 $AA_
MW1
[Achs
e]
Access to measurement result of trigger event 1 in the WCS
- Double wr
aaMw2 $AA_
MW2
[Achs
e]
- Double wr
aaMw3 $AA_
MW3
[Achs
e]
- Double wr
aaMw4 $AA_
MW4
[Achs
e]
- Double wr
aaTOff $AA_TOFF[ ]
Value of the superimposed motions which have been retracted in the individual tool directions via $AA_TOFF[ ]
mm, inch, user defined 0 Double r

Multi-line: yes 1000 + geo axis number 1000 + numGeoAxes
aaTOffLimit $AA_TOFF_LIMIT[ ]
Limiting value of the superimposed motion has been achieved in the tool direction via $AA_TOFF[ ]
0 : Limiting value not achieved

1 : Limiting value achieved in positive direction
11 : Limiting value achieved in negative direction
- 0 0 11 UWord r
aaTOffPrepDiff $AA_TOFF_PREP_DIFF[ ]
Difference between the current value of $AA_TOFF[] and the value as the current block was prepared.


07.05 1 Variablen
aaTOffVal $AA_TOFF_VAL[ ]
Integrated value of the superimposed motions which have been retracted in the individual tool directions via
$AA_TOFF[ ]

aaVactW $AA_VACTW[X]
Axis velocity in workpiece coordinate system
defined
acRetpoint $AC_RETPOINT[x] x = Axis

Return point on the contour for repositioning
- Double r
actDistToGoEns
Distance-to-go in the SZS based on the programmed position
- Double r
actFeedRate S5
Actual value of axis-specific feedrate, if the axis is a positioning axis.
defined
actProgPosBKS $AA_IBORI
Actual value of geometry and orientation axes in basic coordinate system
actToolBasePosBasic
Base position of the active tool in the base system (inch/metrical)
actToolBasePosBasicDiam
Corresponds to actToolBasePosBasic with diameter conversion
- Double r
actToolBasePosDiam
Corresponds to /C/SGA/actToolBasePos with diameter conversion
- Double r
actToolBasPosBN $AA_IBN[x] x=Axis

Actual tool base position in relation to basic zero point
(SGA:/C/SGA/actToolBasePos without progr. frame and without settable frames)

1 Variablen 07.05
actToolBasPosBNDiam
Corresponds to actToolBasPosBN with diameter conversion
- Double r
actToolBasPosEN $AA_IEN[x] x = Axis

Base position of the active tool relative to the workpiece zero point
(SGA:/C/SGA/actToolBasePos without programmed frame)
- Double r
actToolBasPosENitc
corresponds to actToolBasPosEN with $DISPLAY_MODE_POSITION=1
- Double r
actToolBasPosENjmp
corresponds to actToolBasPosEN with $DISPLAY_MODE_POSITION=0
- Double r
actToolEdgeCenterPosEns
Actual position value in relation to the WOS frame as center-point path, i.e. with tool length but without tool radius
- Double r
axisActiveInChan
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
axisFeedRateUnit
Unit of axial feedrate
0 = mm/min
1 = mm/rev
2 = inch/min
- UWord r
cmdFeedRate
Desired value of axis-specific feedrate for a positioning axis.
defined
cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEn
sS
Programmed position for block search with calculation
in relation to the WOS frame as center-point path, i.e. with tool length
but without tool radius
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service,
but only for logging in connection with block search events!

07.05 1 Variablen
diamonInfo
Information whether position values are shown as diameter or radius values.
This information is relevant for the following variables of the blocks SGA/SEGA:
- /C/SGA/cmdToolBasePos
- /C/SGA/toolBaseDistToGo
- /C/SGA/toolBaseREPOS
- cmdToolEdgeCenterPos
- actToolEdgeCenterPos
- toolEdgeCenterDistToGo
- toolEdgeCenterREPOS
- cmdProgPos
- actProgPos
- progDistToGo
- progREPOS
- actToolBasPosEN
- cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEnsS
- /C/SEGA/actToolEdgeCenterPosEns
- actToolBasPosBN
- cmdToolBasPosENS
- actProgPosBKS
- actToolBasePosDiam
- actToolBasePosBasicDiam
- actToolBasPosBNDiam
0: Diameter programming inactive
1: Diameter programming active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
displayAxis $MC_DISPLAY_AXIS Bit0-15

Identifier indicating whether the axis is displayed by the MMC as a geometry or auxiliary axis.
drfVal $AC_DRF[x] x = Axis

DRF value. The physical unit is defined in /C/SGA/extUnit (in module SGA).
dummy
Added for alignment only, row index may be used later
- UWord
Multi-line: no
feedRateOvr
Feedrate override if axis is a positioning axis. Multiplying override component which is active in addition to the override
factors programmed, set via handwheel or via PLC.
% Double r

1 Variablen 07.05
geoAxisNr
Number of the geometry axis
1 - 3 for geometry axes

0 for non-geometry axes
- UWord r
handwheelAss
Number of handwheel assigned to axis
- 0 3 UWord r
index
Absolute axis index referring to machine data axis number
- UWord r
motEnd $AA_MOTEND
Current motion end criterion for single-axis interpolation
1 = Motion end with exact stop FINE
2 = Motion end with exact stop COARSE
3 = Motion end with exact stop IPO Stop
4 = Block change in braking ramp of axis motion
5 = Block change in braking ramp of axis motion with tolerance window with reference to setpoint
6 = Block change in braking ramp of axis motion with tolerance window with reference to actual value
- 1 1 6 UWord r
spec
Axis specification
0 = path axis
- UWord r
subSpec MD 30500: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB T1

Subspecification, identifies whether an axis is an indexing axis
0 = normal axis
1 = indexing axis
- UWord r
type
Axis type
1 = linear axis
2 = rotary axis
3 = spindle
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variablen
1.5.5 Area C, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Spindle/...
All status data that refer to the spindle are combined in the module SSP. The
individual variables are defined as arrays where the row index is the number of
the spindle (assigned to the current channel). The spindle can be identified by
reading the variables "name" or "index" in the same module with the respective
row index.
The number of spindles can be read from "numSpindles" in the module Y in the
area C.
Spindle mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 1 0 4 UWord r
actGearStage
- UWord r
actSpeed $AA_S[x] x = SpindleNo

channelNo
- UWord r
cmdAngPos
cmdConstCutSpeed

defined

1 Variablen 07.05
cmdGearStage
- UWord r
cmdGwps
m/s, ft/s Double r
cmdSpeed $P_S[x] x = SpindleNo

driveLoad
Load
% Double r
gwpsActive {$GWPS}
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
index
- UWord r
name
Spindle name
- String[32] r
namePhys
Name of assigned physical spindle, identical to "name" variable.
- String[32] r
opMode
Spindle mode
0 = spindle mode
4 = axis mode
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variablen
pSMode $P_SMODE
Last programmed spindle mode
0: No spindle configured in channel or spindle is active in another channel
or in use by the PLC (FC18) or by synchronized actions.
1: Speed control mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 0 4 UWord r
pSModeS $P_SMODE
Last programmed spindle mode with block search
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 0 4 UWord r
speedLimit
speedOvr
Spindle override
% Double r
spindleType
Spindle type
0 = master spindle
- UWord r
status
Spindle state

- UWord r

1 Variablen 07.05
turnState $AC_SDIR[x] x = SpindleNo

0 = clockwise
2 = stop
3 = clockwise
5 = stop
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variablen
1.5.6 Area C, Mod. FU: Channel-specific settable frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/UserFrame/...
This only applies if $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES > 0 and

$MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES = 0, otherwise all settable frames
have an NCU-global configuration.
The following frame indices are possible:

0 = G500
1 = G54
2 = G55
3 = G56
4 = G57
5 = G505
6 = G506
:
n = G5n
:
99 = G599
The maximum frame index is: $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES - 1
The PI service SETUFR has to be called in order to activate the settable

frames.
linShift $P_UIFR[x,y,TR] x=FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Multi-line: yes Frame index * numMachAxes + axis $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES *
number (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)
linShiftFine $P_UIFR[x,y,SI] x=FrameNo,y=Axis

mirrorImgActive $P_UIFR[x,y,MI] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Mirroring enabled in settable zero offset
- UWord wr
rotation $P_UIFR[x,y,RT] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Rotation of settable zero offset
Degree Double wr
scaleFact $P_UIFR[x,y,SC] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Scaling factor of settable zero offset
- Double wr

1 Variablen 07.05
1.5.7 Area C, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/LogicalSpindle/...
All state data that refer to a spindle, if a spindle converter (logical spindles) is
active
Spindle mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 1 0 4 UWord r
actGearStage
- UWord r
actSpeed
channelNo
- UWord r
cmdAngPos
cmdConstCutSpeed

defined
cmdGearStage
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variablen
cmdGwps
m/s, ft/s Double r
cmdSpeed
driveLoad
Load
% Double r
gwpsActive {$GWPS}
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
index
- UWord r
name
Spindle name
- String[32] r
namePhys
Name of assigned physical spindle, identical to "name" variable.
- String[32] r
opMode
Spindle mode
0 = spindle mode
4 = axis mode
- UWord r
pSMode $P_SMODE
Last programmed spindle mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 0 4 UWord r

1 Variablen 07.05
pSModeS $P_SMODE
Last programmed spindle mode with block search
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 0 4 UWord r
speedLimit
speedOvr
Spindle override
% Double r
spindleType
Spindle type
0 = master spindle
- UWord r
status
Spindle state

- UWord r
turnState
0 = clockwise
2 = stop
3 = clockwise
5 = stop
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variablen
1.5.8 Area C, Mod. FA: Active channel-specific frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ActualFrame/...
The following frame indices are available:
0: ACTFRAME = currently resulting work offset

1: IFRAME = current settable work offset
2: PFRAME = current programmable work offset
3: EXTFRAME = current external work offset
4: TOTFRAME = current total work offset = sum of ACTFRAME and
EXTFRAME
5: ACTBFRAME = current total base frame
6: SETFRAME = current 1st system frame (set actual value, scratching)
7: EXTSFRAME = current 2nd system frame (set actual value, scratching)
8: PARTFRAME = current 3rd system frame (TCARR and PAROT with
orientable toolholder)
9: TOOLFRAME = current 4th system frame (TOROT and TOFRAME)
10: MEASFRAME = result frame for workpiece and tool measurement
11: WPFRAME = current 5th system frame (workpiece reference points)
as of SW 6.3
12: CYCFRAME = current 6th system frame (cycles) as of SW 6.3
The maximum frame index is 12.
linShift $P_PFRAME[x,TR] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Translation of an active zero offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
Multi-line: yes Frame index * numMachAxes + axis 11 * numMachAxes
number
mirrorImgActive $P_PFRAME[x,MI] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Mirroring enabled in an active zero offset
- UWord r
number
rotation $P_PFRAME[x,RT] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Rotation of an active zero offset
Degree Double r
number
scaleFact $P_PFRAME[x,SC] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Scaling factor of an active zero offset
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Frameindex * numMachAxes + axis 11 * numMachAxes
number

1 Variablen 07.05
1.5.9 Area C, Mod. FE: Channel-specific external frame

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ExternFrame/...
There is exactly one external frame defined by the PLC.
The maximum frame index is: 0
linShift $AA_ETRANS[x] x = FrameNo PA

Translation of external zero offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
Multi-line: yes Geo axis number numGeoAxes

07.05 1 Variablen
1.6 State data of drives
1.6.1 Area H, Mod. S: Drive-specific state data (MSD)

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /DriveHsa/State/...


Attention: The HS module cannot be addressed with MMC100/EBF/OP030
actualCurrent MD 1708: ACTUAL_CURRENT IAD

Actual value of the smoothened current (referring to the maximum current of the drive)
CAUTION: The variable cannot be configured by MMC100.
% -100000,0 10000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
actualSpeed MD 1701: ACTUAL_SPEED IAD

Actual value of rotary speed (motor)
CAUTION: The variable cannot be configured by MMC100.
rev/min , m/min -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
cl1PoImage MD 1731: CL1_PO_IMAGE IAD

Image of the ZK1PO register. The format is hexadecimal
Attention: The variable cannot be configured by the MMC 100
- 0x0 0x7FFF UWord r
Multi-line: no
cl1ResImage MD 1732: CL1_RES_IMAGE IAD

Image of the ZK1RES register. The format is hexadecimal
Attention: The variable cannot be configured by the MMC 100!
Multi-line: no
crcErrorCount MD 1720: CRC_DIAGNOSIS IAD

CRC-parameter for diagnosis. Number is displayed in hexadecimal format.
Attention: This variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
Multi-line: no
desiredSpeed MD 1706: DESIRED_SPEED IAD

Desired value of rotary speed. With linear motors: desired velocity
Attention: The variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
Multi-line: no

1 Variablen 07.05
encTypeDirect MD 1791: ENC_TYPE_DIRECT IAD

Direct mounted encoder used for reading in the actual values
Attention: This variable cannot be configured by MMC100!
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
encTypeMotor MD 1790: ENC_TYPE_MPTOR IAD

Motor mounted ( indirect ) encoder used for reading in the actual values.
Attention: This variable cannot be configured by MMC100!
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
firmwareDate MD 1798: FIRMWARE_DATE IAD

Firmware date
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
firmwareVersion MD 1799: FIRMWARE_VERSION IAD

Firmware version
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
linkVoltage MD 1701: LINK_VOLTAGE IAD

Link voltage
0 to 800
V 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
load MD 1722: LOAD IAD

Load. Display is in hexadecimal format
Attention: Variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
% -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
motorTemperature MD 1702: MOTOR_TEMPERATURE IAD

Motor temperature
C 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
operatingMode IAD
Operating mode
Attention: Variable cannot be configured By the MMC100!
Bit0 = VSA
Bit4 = HSA
Bit8 = AM control
Bit9 = AM closed loop control
Bit12 = U/f-operation mode
bits exclude one another (except bit 12)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variablen
pblVersion MD 1797: PBL_VERSION IAD

Data version
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
safeStopFDiagnosis MD 1395 : SAFE_STOP_F_DIAGNOSIS

Drive error code for alarm 300911
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no
terminalState MD 1700: TERMINAL_STATE IAD

State of the binary inputs (displayed in hexadecimal format)
Multi-line: no

1 Variablen 07.05
1.6.2 Area V, Mod. S: Drive-specific status data (FDD)

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /DriveVsa/State/...


No cyclic service may be set up on variables in this module. Only single

variable access is permitted.
actualCurrent MD 1708: ACTUAL_CURRENT IAD

Actual value of the smoothened current (referring to the maximum current of the drive)
% -10000,0 10000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
actualSpeed MD 1707: ACTUAL_SPEED IAD

Actual value of the rotary speed, actual velocity for linear drive (motor)
Multi-line: no
cl1PoImage MD 1731: CL1_PO_IMAGE IAD

ZK1PO register image. Hexadecimal numerical representation
Multi-line: no
cl1ResImage MD 1732: CL1_RES_IMAGE IAD

ZK1RES register image. Hexadecimal numerical representation
Multi-line: no
crcErrorCount MD 1720: CRC_DIAGNOSIS IAD

CRC diagnostic parameter. Hexadecimal numerical representation
Multi-line: no
desiredSpeed MD 1706: DESIRED_SPEED IAD

Speed setpoint
Multi-line: no
encTypeDirect MD 1791: ENC_TYPE_DIRECT IAD

Measuring circuit type of direct measuring system
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variablen
encTypeMotor MD 1790: ENC_TYPE_MOTOR IAD

Measuring circuit type of indirect measuring system
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
firmwareDate MD 1798: FIRMWARE_DATE IAD

Firmware date
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
firmwareVersion MD 1799: FIRMWARE_VERSION IAD

Firmware version
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
linkVoltage MD 1701: LINK_VOLTAGE IAD

DC-link voltage
V 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
load MD 1722: LOAD IAD

Utilization: Represented in hexadecimal format
% -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
motorTemperature MD 1702: MOTOR_TEMPERATURE IAD

Motor temperature
C 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
operatingMode IAD
Operating mode
Bit0 = FDD
Bit4 = MSD
Bit8 = Open-loop AM control
Bit9 = Closed-loop AM control
Bit12 = V/Hz mode
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
pblVersion MD 1797: PBL_VERSION IAD

Data version
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
safeStopFDiagnosis MD 1395 : SAFE_STOP_F_DIAGNOSIS

Drive error code for alarm 300911
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no
terminalState MD 1700: TERMINAL_STATE IAD

State of the binary inputs (in hexadecimal format)
Multi-line: yes 1

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7 Tool and magazine data
1.7.1 Area T, Mod. TO: Tool edge data: Offset data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Compensation/...
The data module TO is organized as a two-dimensional variable array.

The module contains the tool edge offset data for all tools. Each element can
be addressed via a column and row index:
The column index is the tool number (T-number), i.e. the offset data for all
cutting edges of a tool are located in one column. The assignment of a tool to a
T-number is given in the module "Tool directory" (TV) in the related area T. If a
non-existent tool number is entered for the column index the request is
negatively acknowledged.
The number of rows is derived from the number of parameters per tool edge
and the number of edges on a tool:
maxZeilenindex = numCuttEdgeParams * /T/TV/numCuttEdges (T-number)
The number of parameters per tool edge "numCuttEdgeParams" is given in

module Y in area N. The number of cutting edges "/T/TV/numCuttEdges" is
always tool-specific and is given in the module TV in associated area T.
If necessary, several rows can be addressed, so that in one request, for

example, all tool edge offset data of a single tool can be read. The offset values
of the tool edges are all of the same data type and have the same physical unit.

07.05 1 Variablen
cuttEdgeParam $TC_DPCEx[y,z] x = ParamNo y = ToolNo z = EdgeNo

Offset value parameter and edge list with D numbers for a tool
1st section: Offset value parameter for a tool edge:
The meaning of each parameter depends on the tool type. At present 25 parameters are reserved for each tool edge
(however only some of them are used). To be flexible for future extensions use the variable 'numCuttEdgeParams'
rather than the fixed number 25 for the number of parameters.
A detailed description of tool parameters can be found in the documentation 'Tool Offset (W1)', Section "Tool edge".
The following list is a summary of the tool edge parameters:
Parameter 1: Geometry -- tool type ($TC_DP1)
Parameter 2: Geometry -- tool point direction ($TC_DP2)
Parameter 3: Geometry -- length 1 ($TC_DP3)
Parameter 6: Geometry -- radius ($TC_DP6)
Parameter 7: Geometry -- corner radius (tool type 700; slotting saw) ($TC_DP7)
Parameter 8: Geometry -- length 4 (tool type 700; slotting saw) ($TC_DP8)
Parameter 10: Geometry -- angle 1 ($TC_DP10)
Parameter 11: Geometry -- angle 2 for tapered milling tools ($TC_DP11)
Parameter 12: Wear -- length 1 ($TC_DP12)
Parameter 15: Wear -- radius ($TC_DP15)
Parameter 16: Wear -- slot width b / rounding radius ($TC_DP16)
Parameter 17: Wear -- proj. length k ($TC_DP17)
Parameter 19: Wear -- angle 1 ($TC_DP19)
Parameter 20: Wear -- angle 2 for tapered milling tools ($TC_DP20)
Parameter 21: Adapter -- length 1 ($TC_DP21)
Parameter 24: Relief angle ($TC_DP24)
Parameter 25: Manual Turn: Cutting rate ($TC_DP25)
Shopmill: Bit-coded value for different states of tools of type 1xx and 2xx ($TC_DP25)
All parameters up to 25, that are not listed, are reserved.
2nd section: edgeDNo (SW 5.1 and later), associated optional D numbers of edges:
-1: No edge
1 .. maxDNo: Edge exists, associated D number, only when "any D numbers" function is activated
(maxnumCuttEdges_Tool < maxCuttingEdgeNo)
Edge No.: 1 to maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, when edge exists, but when "Assignment of any D numbers" function is not
activated on the NC.
0: No D number assigned/assignment cancelled. (In this case, OPI deviates from NCK variable
$TC_DPCE....
$TC_DPCE = edge number, D = offset number D.
If the D number of an edge (variable of module TO) has been set to invalid, the value $TC_DPCE remains unaffected.
The edge number specified in the description of the row index matches parameter $TC_DPCE.
The variable D No. defined in the module matches the second index in the offset-specific parameters of type
$TC_DPx[T,D],... and others; with x=1,....25.).
Important: This variable is called "edgeData" in the MMC102.

The value for the tool type is stored internally as an integer.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes For edge offset value parameters: (numCuttEdgeParams + 1) *
(edgeNo - 1) * numCuttEdgeParams maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
+ ParameterNo
For D numbers:
((numCuttEdgeParams *
maxnumCuttEdges_Tool) +
EdgeNo)

1 Variablen 07.05
edgeData $TC_DPx[y,z] x = ParamNo y = ToolNo z = EdgeNo

Offset value parameter and edge list with D numbers for a tool
1st section: Offset value parameter for a tool edge:
The meaning of each parameter depends on the tool type. At present 25 parameters are reserved for each tool edge
(however only some of them are used). To be flexible for future extensions use the variable 'numCuttEdgeParams'
rather than the fixed number 25 for the number of parameters.
A detailed description of tool parameters can be found in the documentation Tool Offset (W1), Section "Tool edge".
The following list is a summary of the tool edge parameters:
Parameter 1: Geometry -- tool type ($TC_DP1)
Parameter 2: Geometry -- tool point direction ($TC_DP2)
Parameter 6: Geometry -- radius ($TC_DP6)
Parameter 7: Geometry -- corner radius (tool type 700; slotting saw) ($TC_DP7)
Parameter 8: Geometry -- length 4 (tool type 700; slotting saw) ($TC_DP8)
Parameter 10: Geometry -- angle 1 ($TC_DP10)
Parameter 11: Geometry -- angle 2 for tapered milling tools ($TC_DP11)
Parameter 15: Wear -- radius ($TC_DP15)
Parameter 16: Wear -- slot width b / rounding radius ($TC_DP16)
Parameter 17: Wear -- proj. length k ($TC_DP17)
Parameter 19: Wear -- angle 1 ($TC_DP19)
Parameter 20: Wear -- angle 2 for tapered milling tools ($TC_DP20)
Parameter 24: Relief angle ($TC_DP24)
Parameter 25: Manual Turn: Cutting rate ($TC_DP25)
Shopmill: Bit-coded value for different states of tools of type 1xx and 2xx ($TC_DP25)
All parameters up to 25, that are not listed, are reserved.
2nd section: edgeDNo (SW 5.1 and later), associated optional D numbers of edges:
-1: No edge
1 .. maxDNo: Edge exists, associated D number, only when "any D numbers" function is activated
(maxnumCuttEdges_Tool < maxCuttingEdgeNo)
Edge No.: 1 to maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, when edge exists, but when "Assignment of any D numbers" function is not
activated on the NC.
0: No D number assigned/assignment cancelled. (In this case, OPI deviates from NCK variable
$TC_DPCE.... $TC_DPCE... contains a unique number > 32000 when a D number is not assigned.)
If the D number of an edge (variable of module TO) has been set to invalid, the value $TC_DPCE remains unaffected.
The edge number specified in the description of the row index matches parameter $TC_DPCE.
The variable D No. defined in the module matches the second index in the offset-specific parameters of type
$TC_DPx[T,D],... and others; with x=1,....25.).
Important: This variable is called "cuttEdgeParam" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC.
The value for the tool type is stored internally as an integer.

+ ParameterNo
For D numbers:
EdgeNo)

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.2 Area T, Mod. TD: Tool data: General data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Data/...
In addition to the tool offset data other tool characteristics are stored for
managing the tools. The module TD contains the general data of the tools. The
tool characteristics can be addressed via individual multiple-line variables. The
variable line index corresponds to the T-number. If non-existent T-numbers are
accessed, the request is acknowledged negatively. The module Tool directory
(TV) in the associated T area shows which T-numbers are valid.
A new entry is provided for the tool monitoring mode:

Monitoring modes in toolMon:
0: No tool monitoring
1: Tool life monitoring
2: Workpiece number monitoring
4: Monitoring of edge wear parameters using wear limit (SW 5.1 and later)
8: Monitoring of total offset parameters (fine, $TC_SCP..., not setup offsets
$TC_ECP...) using wear limit (SW 5.1 and later)
adaptNo
Number of adapter defined by system parameter $TC_ADPx which is
supporting the tool
>0: adapter number
0: no adapter assigned
- 0 0 numMagPlacesM UWord r
ax
Multi-line: yes T number max. T-Nummer
duploNo $TC_TP1 FBW

Duplo number (number of replacement tool)
In the tool management each tool is explicitly defined both by its identifier and its duplo number. This means that a T-
area can only contain tool identifiers with different duplo numbers.
- T-Nummer UWord r
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000
numCuttEdges $P_TOOLND[x] x = ToolNo

Number of cutting edges of a tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
toolIdent $TC_TP2 FBW

Tool identifier
- "<T-Nummer>" String[32] r
toolInfo $TC_TP11 FBW

Tool information for MMC
Not currently assigned
- 0 UWord wr
toolInMag $A_TOOLMN[x] x = ToolNo T

Current magazine in which the tool is located
- UWord r

1 Variablen 07.05
toolInPlace $A_TOOLMLN[x] x = ToolNo T

Current location in which the tool is located
- UWord r
toolMon $TC_TP9 FBW

Type of tool monitoring
0: no tool monitoring
1: tool life monitoring
2: no. of workpieces monitoring
4: monitoring of edge wear parameters using wear limit (SW 5.1 and later)
8: monitoring of total offset parameters using wear limit (SW 5.1 and later)
- 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes TNo 32000
toolMyMag $A_MYMN
Owner magazine of the tool magazine from which the tool was loaded
0 = the tool is not loaded. If toollnMag is >0 at the same time,
the T number will specify a manual tool, or TMMG is not active.
- - 0 max. Nummer UWord r
eines def.
Magazins
toolMyPlace $A_MYMLN
Owner magazine of the tool - Magazine location from which the tool was
loaded
0 = the tool is not loaded. If toollnPlace is >0 at the same time,
the T number will specify a manual tool, a valid magazine location number or TMMG is not active.
- - max. Nummer UWord r
def. Magazinplatz
toolplace_spec $TC_TP7 FBW

Magazine location type of tool
- 9999 UWord wr
toolSearch $TC_TP10 FBW

Type of tool search for replacement tools
0: no strategy
1: next duplo no.
2: shortest path
- 0 UWord wr
toolsize_down $TC_TP6 FBW

Size downwards in half locations
- 1 UWord wr
toolsize_left $TC_TP3 FBW

Size to the left in half locations
- 1 UWord wr

07.05 1 Variablen
toolsize_right $TC_TP4 FBW

Size to the right in half locations
- 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number t 32000
toolsize_upper $TC_TP5 FBW

Size upwards in half locations
- 1 UWord wr
toolState $TC_TP8 FBW

Tool state
0: not enabled
1: active tool (A)
2: enabled (F)
4: disabled (G)
8: measured (M)
16: prewarning limit reached (V)
32: tool being changed (W)
64: fixed location coded (P)
128: tool was in use (E)
- 0 UWord wr

1 Variablen 07.05
1.7.3 Area T, Mod. TS: Tool edge data: Monitoring data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Supervision/...
The module TS is organized as a two-dimensional variable array. The module

contains the tool edge monitoring data for all tools. Each element can be
addressed via a column and line index:
The column index is the tool number (T-number), i.e. one column contains the
monitoring data for all tool edges of a tool. The assignment of a tool to a T-
number is given in the module Tool directory (TV) in the associated area T. If a
non-existent tool number is specified for the column index, the request is
acknowledged negatively.
The number of lines is derived from the number of parameters per tool edge
and from the number of tool edges of a tool:
maxZeilenanzahl = numCuttEdgeParams_ts * /T/TV/numCuttEdges (T-number)
The number of parameters per tool edge "numCuttEdgeParams_ts" is given in

the module Y in area N. The number of tool edges "/T/TV/numCuttEdges" is
always tool specific and can be found in the module TV in associated area T.
If necessary, several lines can be addressed, so that in one request, for

example, all tool edge monitoring data of a single tool can be read. The
monitoring data of the tool edges are all of the same data type and have the
same physical unit.
New tool monitoring modes "Monitoring of wear values" and "Monitoring of total
offsets":
3 new parameters are provided for these modes:
P7 = Wear prewarning limit (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP6)
P8 = Remaining wear (actual value) (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP5)
P9 = Wear setpoint (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP15)
data $TC_MOP1[x,y] ...$TC_MOP15[x,y] x=ToolNo y=EdgeNo

Monitoring data per tool edge
Important: This is a two-dimensional variable.
9 parameters are available for each tool edge.
The parameters have the following meaning:
P1 = Prewarning limit service life in minutes ($TC_MOP1)
P2 = Remaining service life in minutes ($TC_MOP2)
P3 = Prewarning limit workpiece number ($TC_MOP3)
P4 = Remaining workpiece number ($TC_MOP4)
P5 = Desired service life ($TC_MOP11)
P6 = Desired workpiece number ($TC_MOP13)
P7 = Prewarning limit wear (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP5)
This parameter can only be set if bit 5 of machine data $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK has been
correspondingly set.
P8 = Remaining wear (actual value) (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP6) cannot be written
P9 = Desired wear (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP15)
This parameter can only be set if bit 5 of machine data $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK has been
correspondingly set.
Important: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC!
The values for P3 to P9 are stored internally as integers.

- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes (ToolEdgeNo - 1) * numCuttEdgeParams_ts *
numCuttEdgeParams_ts + maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
ParameterNo

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.4 Area T, Mod. TU: Tool data: User-defined data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/User/...
The data module TU is defined as a two-dimensional variable array. The

module contains user-defined data for all tools. Each element can be
addressed via a column and row index:
The column index is the number of the user-defined tool parameter. The
number of tool parameters (columns) is to be found in the variable
"numToolParams_tu" in the module Y in area N.
The row index is the tool number. If non-existent tools are accessed, the
request is acknowledged negatively.
The user-defined tool data are all of the same type.
data $TC_TPCx[y] x = ParameterNo y = ToolNo FBW

User-defined tool parameters. Important: This is a two-dimensional variable. The column index is the parameter
number.
Attention: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC !
- Double wr

1 Variablen 07.05
1.7.5 Area T, Mod. TUE: Tool edge data: User-defined data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/User/...
The data module TUE is organized as a two-dimensional variable array. The

module contains user-defined tool edge data for all tools. Each element can be
The column index is the tool number (T-number), i.e. the user-defined data for
all tool edges are to be found in one column.The assignment of a tool to a T-
number is to given in the module Tool directory (TV) in the associated area T. If
a non-existent tool number is specified for the column index, the request is
The number of rows is derived from the number of parameters per tool edge
and the number of tool edges of a tool:
maxZeilenanzahl = numCuttEdgeParams_tu * /T/TV/numCuttEdges (T-number)
The number of parameters per tool edge "numCuttEdgeParams_tu" is given in

the module Y in area N. The number of tool-specific tool edges
"/T/TV/numCuttEdges" are contained in the module TV in the associated area
T.
If neccessary, several lines can be addressed, so that in one request, for
example, all user-defined tool edge data of a single tool can be read. The data
are all of the same data type.
edgeData $TC_DPCx[y,z] x=ParamNo,y=ToolNo z=EdgeNo FBW

User-defined cutting edge parameter. Important: This is a two-dimensional variable, the column index is the T number
Caution: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC!
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes (TooledgeNo - 1) * numCuttEdgeParams_tu *
numCuttEdgeParams_tu + maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
ParameterNo

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.6 Area T, Mod. TG: Tool data: Grinding-specific data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/GrindingData/...
Special tool data are required for grinding tools. These data are contained in
the module TG. They can be addressed via several multiple-row variables. The
row index corresponds to the T number. If a non-existent T-number is
addressed negative acknowledgement is returned. The module tool directory
(TV) in the associated area T shows which T-numbers are valid.
actToolWide $TC_TPG5 W4
Current width of the grinding wheel
conntectPar $TC_TPG2 W4
Chaining rule. This parameter ( which is bitwise defined ) specifies which tool parameters of cutting edge 2 and cutting
edge 1 are chained. If the value of any chained parameter is altered, the value of the other chained parameter is
automatically adapted.
If the following bits are set, the corresponding parameters of D1 and D2 are chained:
Bit0: tool type
Bit2: geometry length1
Bit11: wear length1
Bit12: wear length2
Bit13: wear length3
Bit20: base dimension/adapter dimension length1
The value is stored internally as an integer.
- Double wr
inclAngle $TC_TPG8 W4
Angle of inclination of the inclined grinding wheel in the current plane
Degree -90 90 Double wr
maxRotSpeed $TC_TPG6 W4
Maximum rotary speed of the grinding wheel
rev/min , m/min Double wr
maxTipSpeed $TC_TPG7 W4
Maximum peripheral speed of the grinding wheel
mm/min, inch/min, user Double wr
defined
minToolDia $TC_TPG3 W4
Minimum diameter of the grinding wheel

1 Variablen 07.05
minToolWide $TC_TPG4 W4
Minimum width of the grinding wheel
paramNrCCV $TC_TPG9 W4
Compensation parameters for the function SUG ("constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel"). These parameters
define which compensation value is to be used for SUG, tool monitoring and centerless grinding. The value always
refers to cutting edge D1.
3: length 1
4: length 2
5: length 3
6: radius
- Double wr
spinNoDress $TC_TPG1 W4
Spindle number to which the monitoring data and the function SUG ("constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel")
refer.
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Tool-number T 32000

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.7 Area T, Mod. TMC: Magazine data: Configuration data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/MagazineConfiguration/...
Each tool magazine is configured with several parameters during start-up.

These configuration data together with the state information are combined in
the module TMC.
magBLMag W4
Number of the internal load magazine
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magCBCmd W4
Command for magazine execution
1: Find_empty location_loading
2: Tool_MOVE
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magCBCmdState W4
Command state of the magazine (for magCBCmd)
1: started
2: running
3: end correct
4: end with error
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magCBIdent $TC_MAMP1 W4
Identifier of the magazine
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no
magCMCmdPar1 W4
Return variable for the command MagCBCmd
In case of a succesfull return, the return variable is the magazine number.
If an error occurs, an error number is set.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magCMCmdPar2 W4
Return value for command MagCBCmd
In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the place number.
If an error occurs an error number is set.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magRPlaces W4
Total number of real magazine locations (incl. buffer and loading locations)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variablen 07.05
magSearch $TC_MAMP2 W4
Type of tool search. This variable is bitwise defined.
A set bit has the following meaning:
Bit0: search active tool
Bit1: search tool by shortest path
Bit8: begin search at first location (forwards)
Bit9: begin search at current location forwards
Bit10: begin search at last location (backwards)
Bit11: begin search at current location backwards
Bit12: begin search at current location symmetrically
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magVPlaces W4
Number of defined locations for the control block
Number of virtual locations (without buffer and loading locations) for all real magazines in this area unit
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magZWMag W4
Number of internal buffer magazine
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
modeWearGroup $TC_MAMP3
Definition of strategies relating to wear group.
The value is bit-coded. Default setting = 0.
Effects on tool status
Bit Value Meaning
0 0 When a wear group is activated internally, the status of the tools it contains remains unchanged.
1 When a wear group is activated internally, the status of the tools it contains changes. One tool
from each tool group is set to the "active" state.
1 0 When a wear group is disabled internally, the status of the tools it contains remains unchanged.
1 When a wear group is disabled internally, the status of the tools it contains changes. The "active"
status is cancelled for all tools.
"Internally" in this instance means disabling or activation due to a tool change necessitating a change in the wear
group. Activating/disabling the appropriate tools after writing system parameters or via OPI is described in Section ???.
2... Reserved
... Reserved
7... Reserved
Search strategy for next wear group:
Bit Value Meaning
8 0 Find the next possible wear group
1 Find the wear group with the next-higher group number which can be activated
9... Reserved
... Reserved
11... Reserved
Search strategy within the wear group for the tool to be activated
Bit Value Meaning
12 0 Lowest possible duplo number
1 Lowest possible magazine location number
13... Reserved
... Reserved
15... Reserved
The active wear group can be disabled completely by negating the contents of $TC_MAP9. It is also possible to
disable any selected wear group by negating $TC_MPP5 for a magazine location assigned to the relevant wear group.
See also system parameter magWearCompoundNo / $TC_MAP9 (active wear group number) and wear group number
of magazine location / $TC_MPP5.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.8 Area T, Mod. TMV: Magazine data: Directory

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/MagazineCatalogue/...
The data module TMV can be used for the following purposes:
1. To display all magazines. The most important magazine information is
combined in the module TMV. The existing magazines are sorted in ascending
order according to the magazine number without gaps. This means that
variables that are defined in this module as one-dimensional arrays contain all
magazine information without any gaps. The row index with which a specific
array can be addressed does not refer to the magazine number, it is merely a
serial number. Inserting/deleting a magazine dynamically changes the contents
of a row.
2. To access magazine data in the modules TM, TP and TPM. Before

accessing an element in the above modules, the module TV should be
consulted to determine which tools have actually been defined.
magVIdent
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax
magVNo
Number of the magazine
- UWord r
numActMags
Number of magazines in the modules TMV and TM
- numMagsMax UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variablen 07.05
1.7.9 Area T, Mod. TM: Magazine data: General data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/MagazineDescription/...
This module contains the information for the available tool magazines.
magActPlace $TC_MAP8
Current magazine position
Location number of tool change position
- UWord wr
magCmd
Command for magazine execution
1: Find_empty location_loading
2: Tool_MOVE
- UWord r
magCmdPar1
Command parameter of the magazine
In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the magazine number.
If an error occurs, an error number is set.
- UWord r
magCmdPar2
Command parameter of the magazine
In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the place number.
If an error occurs an error number is set.
- UWord r
magCmdState
Command state of the magazine
1: started
2: running
3: end correct
4: end with error
- UWord r
magDim $TC_MAP6 FBW

Dimension of the magazine, number of magazine lines in the box magazine
Applies to box magazines (magKind = 5) number of lines. For all other magazine types the value is 1.
- UWord r
magIdent $TC_MAP2 FBW

- String[32] r

07.05 1 Variablen
magKind $TC_MAP1 FBW

Type of the magazine
1 = chain
3 = revolver
5 = box magazine
7 = internal magazine tool buffer
9 = internal magazine loading stations
- 0 UWord r
magLink1 $TC_MAP4 FBW

Chaining 1 of the magazine to the following magazine. Number to (next) background magazine. Can be used with
chain, revolver and box magazines (magKind = 1,3 or 5)
- -1 UWord r
magLink2 $TC_MAP5 FBW

Chaining 2 of the magazine to the previous magazine. Backward chaining of background magazines. Can be used for
chaining to chain, revolver and box magazines (magKind = 1, 3 or 5)
- -1 UWord r
magLocSearchStrat $TC_MPAP10, Bits 8-15

Empty location search strategy during tool change
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number 320000
magNo
Number of the magazine
- 1 numMagsMax UWord r
magNrPlaces $TC_MAP7 * $TC_MAP6

Number of real locations (in chain magazine) or number of slots (in box magazine)
- UWord r
magState $TC_MAP3 FBW

State of the magazine
1 = current magazine
2 = disabled
4 = magazine in loading position
8 = motion is active
16 = enabled for loading
- 2 UWord wr
magToolSearchStrat $TC_MPAP10, Bits 0-7

Tool search strategy during tool change
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number 320000

1 Variablen 07.05
magWearCompoundNo $TC_MAP9
Each magazine has its own active wear group (wear group number).
The number of this group is stored in OPI variables magWearCompoundNo:
Meaning: Number of active wear group.
=0: No wear group active.
>0: Number of wear group in which tool search commences.
(this is the number of the active wear group.)
<0: Number of wear group in which tool search commences.
However, this wear group is disabled which means that the next tool
search is started in the next possible wear group.
This system parameter can thus also be used to disable a wear
group. See also wear group number of magazine location
/ $TC_MPP7 and modeWearGroup / $TC_MAMP3.
Previous name: actWearGrInMag

-32000, ..., -1, 0, 1, 2, ... 32000
- 0 Long Integer wr

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.10 Area T, Mod. TP: Magazine data: Location data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Magazine/...
The data module TP is organized as a two-dimensional variable array. The

module contains the state and assignment of all magazine locations of a T
area. Each element can be addressed via a column or a line index:
The column index is the magazine number, i.e. the configuration data for all
locations of a magazine are contained in a column. The assignment of a
magazine to a magazine number is given in the associated module Magazine
directory (TMV) in the associated area T. If a non-existent magazine number is
specified for the column index, the request is negatively acknowledged.
The number of lines is derived from the number of parameters per magazine
location and from the number of magazine locations:
maxZeilenindex = numMagPlaceParams * magNrPlaces
The number of parameters per magazine location "numMagPlaceParams" is

given in module Y in area N and is currently 7 (8 with SW 5.1 and later).
The row indices are based on the following scheme:
1: Location type ($TC_MPP1) (read only)
1: Magazine location
2: Spindle
3: Gripper
4: Loader
5: Transfer location
6: Loading station
7: Loading point
2: Location type ($TC_MPP2) (read only)
>0: Location type for virtual location
=0: "match all" (buffer location)
9999: Undefined (not a virtual location)
3: T number of tool in this location ($TC_MPP6)
4: Consideration of adjacent location on / off ($TC_MPP3)
0: off
1: on
5: Location status ($TC_MPP4)
1: Disabled
2: Free (<> occupied)
4: Reserved for tool in buffer location
8: Reserved for tool to be loaded
16: Occupied in left half-location
32: Occupied in right half-location
64: Occupied in top half-location
128: Occupied in bottom half-location
6: Physical magazine reference (read only)
Magazine number of magazine to which location belongs
7: Type index ($TC_MPP5) (read only) and new: Wear group number
from SW 5.1
Type index/wear group number is read only in SW earlier than 5.1 and
read/write from SW 5.1 if it is assigned "Wear group" meaning.
Type index: The locations of a location type in a magazine are
numbered in ascending sequence, e.g. type=2, type index=5; ==> Spindle5)
(previous meaning when location type = 1 before P5: Equals location
number when location type=1)
Wear group number from SW 5.1 ($TC_MPP5)
When location type = 1: Number of wear group to which this magazine
location is assigned.
Value range: -32000, ..., -1, 0, 1, 2, ... 32000

1 Variablen 07.05
=0: Not assigned to a wear group

>0: Number of assigned wear group, this wear group is enabled
<0: Number of assigned wear group, this wear group is disabled
By negating this system parameter, it is possible to disable or enable
the whole assigned wear group.
See also magWearCompoundNo / $TC_MAP9 (active wear group
number) and modeWearGroup / $TC_MAMP3 (general settings for wear
grouping).
8: Adapter number from SW 5.1 ($TC_MPP7)
Reference to adapter data set number.
Associated system data:

The number of parameters of this module changes accordingly:
N / Y, global system data, numMagPlaceParams = 8 from SW 5.1
The number of magazine locations "magNrPlaces" is magazine specific and

can be found in module TM in associated area T.
The locations of the buffer magazine and the loading magazine are numbered
in ascending order independently of the location type index.
If necessary, several lines can be addressed, so that, for example, all location
data of a magazine can be read in a single request. The location data are all of
the same type.
placeData $TC_MPP1[n,m]...$TC_MPP7[n,m] n=MagNo m=SlotNo

P1: Location type (read access only) ($TC_MPP1)
P2: Location type (read access only) ($TC_MPP2)
P3: T number of tool in this location ($TC_MPP6)
P4: Consider adjacent location on/off ($TC_MPP3)
P5: Location status (bit arry) ($TC_MPP4)
P6: Reference for physical magazine (read access only)
P7: Location type index (location type numbering) ($TC_MPP5)
P8: Number of adapter in magazine location ($TC_MPP7)
Attention: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC!
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes (LocationNo - 1) * numMagPlaceParams * magNrPlaces
numMagPlaceParams +
ParameterNo

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.11 Area T, Mod. TPM: Magazine data: Multiple assignment of location

data
The data module TPM is organized as a two-dimensional variable array.

ParameterNo = 1: Specifies the magazine number with which a relationship
exists.
ParameterNo = 2: Distance (in locations) between the internal location and the
magazine change position (cf. magazine number for 1st parameter) with which
a relationship will be established.
It contains information about possible multiple assignments. The column index
is the magazine number.
For location P with location number p in magazine MP (= column index)

numPlaceMulti times the multiple assignments to other magazines which are
possible are stored with the associated distances to the change positions in
each of the magazines. The offset for row index zi for a location number p is
calculated according to the following rule: zi = (p-1) * numPlaceMulti *
numPlaceMultiParams + ParameterNo.
Determining the distance between the load position and the change position:
The value 9999 (magazine no. load position) must be specified for the variable
multiPlace in the column. The LocationNo (p) for the line is the number of the
load position. The line for the first assignment is calculated with ParameterNo =
1. When reading the variable, the system can thus read the magazine number
linked to the intended change position. If this magazine number is correct, it is
possible to read the number of locations between the load position and the
change position with the variable multiPlace with the next higher line number. If
the magazine number read was incorrect, the following magazine assignment
must be read with the line number increased by numPlaceMulti.
This procedure has to be repeated a max. of numPlaceMultiParams times until
the desired relationship has been found.
multiPlace $TC_MDP1[n,m]...$TC_MDP2[n,m] n=MagNo m=SlotNo

P1: Distance between change position of magazine n and location m of 1st internal magazine (load magazine, 9999)
($TC_MDP1)
P2: Distance between change position of magazine n and location m of 2nd internal magazine (buffer magazine, 9998)
($TC_MDP2)
Attention: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and PLC !

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes (LocationNo - 1) * numPlaceMulti * numPlaceMulti * numPlaceMultiParams *
numPlaceMultiParams+ParameterN magNrPlaces
o
In this case, numPlaceMulti and

numPlaceMultiParams are other OPI
variables from module Y.

1 Variablen 07.05
1.7.12 Area T, Mod. TT: Magazine data: Location types

The module TT is organized as a two-dimensional array where the variable with

index (1/1) contains the maximum number of columns (corresponds to the
location hierarchies) in this module. Each element can be addressed via a
column and row index:
The column index is the number of the location hierarchy + 1. The row index is
the number of the location type + 1. Row 1 contains the current T-number of
rows for a specific location hierarchy as special information.
If all location types are to be read out for a location hierarchy, this must be
defined in two steps:
1. The 1st line of each location hierarchy contains the number of assigned
location types for this hierarchy
2. Lines 2 ... n can be read out in a single request.
placeType $TC_MPTH[n,m] n=0...7 Hierarchy m=0...7 SlotType

Magazine location hierarchy
Attention: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC!
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of location type + 1 Wert aus Zeile 1

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.13 Area T, Mod. TV: Tool data: Directory

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Catalogue/...
Data module TV can be used for the following purposes:
1. For displaying all tools of a magazine. The most important tool information is
contained in module TV. Available tools are sorted consecutively in ascending
order of T-number. This means that variables that are defined as one-
dimensional arrays in this module contain all the tool information without any
gaps. The line index with which a specific array is addressed has no connection
with the tool number but is only a serial number. Inserting/deleting tools
changes the contents of a line dynamically.
2. Access to tool data in modules TD, TG, TO, TS, TU and TUE. Before an
element in one of the above modules is accessed, module TV should be
consulted to ascertain which tools are actually defined.
SW 5.1 and later: Variable modeSpindleToolRevolver (module N/Y, global

system data) defines for circular magazines (T / TM, magazine data, general
data, MagKind=3) whether the tool in OPI modules "T / TP, magazine data,
location data", "T / TD, tool data, general data", "T/TV, tool data, directory" and
"T / AEV, working offsets, directory" remains (new functionality) in its circular
magazine location during operation or changes to the buffer magazine (earlier
behaviour).
Associated system data:

modeSpindleToolRevolver (module N / Y, global system data) with SW 5.1 and
later.
nrDuplo
Duplo number
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number numTools
numCuttEdges
Number of cutting edges of a tool
- 9 UWord r
numTools
Number of tools in the area TO
- 0 MD UWord r
MM_NUM_TOOL
Multi-line: no
TnumWZV
Last assigned T-number for tool management
The last assigned T number is the T number of the new tool
last created in the NCK through an NC language command or the PI service.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variablen 07.05
toolIdent
Tool identifier
- String[32] r
toolInMag
Current magazine in which the tool is located
0 = tool not loaded
- UWord r
toolInPlace
Current location in which the tool is located
0 = tool not loaded
- UWord r
toolNo
T-number
- UWord r

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.14 Area T, Mod. TF: Parametrizing, return parameters of _N_TMGETT,

_N_TSEARC
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Find/...
This module is used for parameterizing as well as for the return parameters of
PI services _N_TMGETT and _N_TSEARC. Access to this module must be T
area specific and exclusive. It is up to the clients to guarantee this by using the
semaphore mechanism (PI service _N_MMCSEM) with the function number
for _N_TMSEARCH.
With _N_TMGETT, NO parameterizing elements (input parameters) are
relevant; the only relevant one is the result parameter resultToolNr
parDataTAD
Parameterizing: For parameters with data type DOUBLE of the module TAD a value can be stored as a comparison
value for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in
the module TAS according to parMasksTAD.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TAO.
See module TAD

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Column index in the module TAD, numToolParams_tad
i.e. the number of the user-defined
tool parameter.
The maximum line index thus equals
the number of columns in the TAD
module.
parDataTAO
Parameterizing: For parameters with data type DOUBLE of the module TAO a value can be stored as a comparison
the module TAS according to parMasksTAO.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TAO.
See module TAO

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Column index in the module TAO, numCuttEdgeParams_tao
i.e. tool number.
the number of columns in the TAO
module.
parDataTAS
Parameterizing: For parameters with data type DOUBLE of the module TAS a value can be stored as a comparison
the module TAS according to parMasksTAS.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TAS.
See module TAS

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Column index in the module TAS, numCuttEdgeParams_tas
i.e. tool number.
the number of columns in the TAS
module.

1 Variablen 07.05
parDataTD
Parameterizing: For parameters with data type UWORD of the module TD a value can be stored as a comparison
the module TD according to parMasksTD.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TD.
See module TD
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Index of the parameter (i.e. column 17
index) in the TD module > 1.
the number of columns in the TD
module.
parDataTO
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TO, a value can be stored as a comparison value for the 'complex
search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TO
according to parMasksTO.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TO.
See module TO
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TO module, i.e. a numCuttEdgeParams * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
cutting edge offset value parameter:
(EdgeNo - 1) * numCuttEdgeParams
+ ParameterNo
The maximum line index is thus the
maximum cutting edge offset value
parameter in the module TO.
parDataToolIdentTD
Parameterizing: For the parameter with data type string[32] (tool identifier) of the module TD a value can be stored as a
comparison value for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding
parameter in the module TD according to parMasksTD.
See module TD
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: no
parDataTS
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TS a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TS
according to parMasksTS.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TS.
See module TS
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TS module: numCuttEdgeParams_ts *
(EdgeNo - 1) * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
numCuttEdgeParams_ts +
ParameterNo
maximum cutting edge parameter in
the module TS.

07.05 1 Variablen
parDataTU
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TU a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TU
according to parMasksTU.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TU.
See module TU
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Index of the parameter (i.e. column numToolParams_tu
index) in the TU module is thus the
number of the user-defined tool
parameter.
the number of columns in the TU
module (numToolParams_tu).
parDataTUE
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TUE a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TUE
according to parMasksTUE.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TUE.
See module TUE

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TUE module: numCuttEdgeParams_tu *
numCuttEdgeParams_tu +
ParameterNo
the module TUE.
parDataTUS
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TUS a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
search' (_N_TUSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TUS
according to parMasksTUS.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TUS.
See module TUS

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TUS module: numCuttEdgeParams_tus *
Number of the user-defined maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
parameter + (number of the tool
cutting edge -1) *
numCuttEdgeParams_tus.
the module TUS.

1 Variablen 07.05
parMasksTAD
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TAD that indicates whether it is to serve as a
search criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC) and how it is to be combined. The corresponding comparison
values are stored in parDataTAD. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are
logically combined with AND.
Value 0 : Corresponding operand is not evaluated / Variable is not a criterion for comparison
Value 1 : == (equal)
Value 2 : < (less than)
Value 3 : > (greater than)
Value 4 : <= (less or equal)
Value 5 : >= (greater or equal)
Value 6 : && (bitwise AND, value only allowed for operands of the types WORD and DOUBLEWORD)
For string operands "==" is the only operator allowed
- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Column index in the module TAD, numToolParams_tad
i.e. the number of the user-defined
tool parameter.
the number of columns in the TAD
module.
parMasksTAO
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TAO that indicates whether it is to serve as a
values are stored in parDataTAO. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are
- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Column index in the module TAO, numCuttEdgeParams_tao
i.e. tool number.
the number of columns in the TAO
module.

07.05 1 Variablen
parMasksTAS
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TAS that indicates whether it is to serve as a
values are stored in parDataTAS. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are
- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Column index in the module TAS, numCuttEdgeParams_tas
i.e. tool number.
the number of columns in the TAS
module.
parMasksTD
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TD that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC) and how it is to be combined. The corresponding comparison values are
stored in parDataTD. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.
- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Index of the parameter (i.e. column 17
index) in the TD module > 1.
the number of columns in the TD
module.

1 Variablen 07.05
parMasksTO
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TO that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
stored in parDataTO. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.
- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TO module is thus numCuttEdgeParams * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
a cutting edge offset value
parameter:
(EdgeNo - 1) * numCuttEdgeParams
+ ParameterNo
maximum cutting edge offset value
parameter in the module TO.
parMasksTS
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TS that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
stored in parDataTS. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.
- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TS module: numCuttEdgeParams_ts *
numCuttEdgeParams_ts +
ParameterNo
the module TS.

07.05 1 Variablen
parMasksTU
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TU that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
stored in parDataTU. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.
- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Index of the parameter (i.e. column numToolParams_tu
index) in the TU module, thus the
number of the user-defined tool
parameter.
the number of columns in the TU
module (numToolParams_tu).
parMasksTUE
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TUE that indicates whether it is to serve as a
values are stored in parDataTUE. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are
- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TUE module: numCuttEdgeParams_tu *
numCuttEdgeParams_tu +
ParameterNo
the module TUE.

1 Variablen 07.05
parMasksTUS
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TUS that indicates whether it is to serve as a
search criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TUSEARC) and how it is to be combined. The corresponding comparison
values are stored in parDataTUS. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are
- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TUS module: numCuttEdgeParams_tus *
Number of the user-defined maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
parameter + (number of the tool
cutting edge -1) *
numCuttEdgeParams_tus.
the module TUS.
resultNrOfTools
Result: Number of tools found
In the case of _N_TMGETT, it is possible to find no tools (value=0) or exactly 1 tool (value 1); in the case of
_N_TSEARC, the number of found tools can be any number > 0, limited by the number of tools in the NC or no tools at
all (value=0).
- 0 0 numTools UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
resultToolNr
Result: T-numbers of the tools found
The array elements contain the internal T- numbers of the tools found. The storing order is the order in which the tools
have been found by the PI-Service.
- 0 0 31999 UWord r
Multi-line: no tfNrOfResults

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.15 Area T, Mod. TUM: Tool data: user magazine data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/MagazineDescription/...
userData $TC_MAPCx[y] x = ParameterNo y = MagazineNo

Magazine user data for a tool magazine. These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM and
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK have been set accordingly.
- 0 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the user-defined numMagParams_u
parameter

1 Variablen 07.05
1.7.16 Area T, Mod. TUP: Tool data: user magatine place data
userPlaceData $TC_MPPCx[y,z] x=ParamNo y=MagazineNo z=MagPlaceNo

Magazine location user data for a tool magazine. These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM and
- 0 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the user-defined numMagLocParams_u * magNrPlaces
parameter + numMagLocParams_u
* (number of the magazine location -
1)

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.17 Area T, Mod. TUS: Tool data: user monitoring data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Supervision/...
userData $TC_MOPCx[y,z] x=ParamNo,y=T-Number,z=Edge

User data for monitoring a cutting edge These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM and
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the user-defined numCuttEdgeParams_tus *
parameter + (number of the cutting maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
edge -1) * numCuttEdgeParams_tus

1 Variablen 07.05
1.7.18 Area T, Mod. AD: Adapter data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Adapter/...
Adapter data are used to define the dimensions of an adapter (L1, L2, L3) per
magazine location and the direction (transformation) of loaded tools. The
transformation is applied when cutting edge data are processed in OPI modules
TOT, TOST and TOET if the tool is loaded in a magazine location to which
adapter data are assigned.
Adapter data exist independently of magazine location data. Magazine location
data contain a reference (see module TP, placeData) to the adapter data.
adaptData $TC_ADPTx; x=1,...3, $TC_ADPTT

Adapter data
mm, inch, user defined 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes ParameterNo numParams_Adapt

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.19 Area T, Mod. AEV: Working offsets: Directory

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/ActiveCatalogue/...
The active tool edges are sorted in consecutive ascending D number sequence
in the AEV module. This module also contains the essential tool data for each
D number entered. "Active" in this case refers to the replacement tools.
(If the "unique D numbers" option is not activated in the NC, the edges are
sorted according to ascending ToolIdent and DuploNumber. The D number
variable is then set to 0 on all lines in this module.)
The D number assignment is not necessarily unique for active tools. For this
reason, the same D number may be entered in several lines (successively).
The line number is a serial number which is not related to the D number.
The number of active tool edges is stored in numActDEdges (module AEV),
e.g. example 10,
i.e. module AEV contains entries for 10 tool edges. These are sorted in
ascending D number sequence. The tool edge with the lowest D number has
index (serial number) 1, the next-higher D number index 2, etc. and the edge
with the highest D number index 10.
When tools are activated/deactivated and D numbers re-assigned, the entries

for a D number change line dynamically.
Module T / AEV is organized as a 1-dimensional variable array and can be
used for the following purposes:
- Display all tool edges, including D numbers, of active tools.
- Display associated tool data
The module contains the following information which can be addressed via a
column index:
- Single column, in 1st line only. Number of D numbers (lines, tool edges) in the
current list
- The other columns apply to all lines, each line contains tool edge data with the
following information:
- D number
- Internal T number of associated tool
- Tool edge number relative to tool
- Tool identifier
- Duplo number
- Magazine number and
- Location number of tool
Individual values cannot be altered via this module.
Re-assignment of D numbers and changes in allocation to tools (deactivate,

activate replacement tools) and other modifications to data cause changes to
toolCounter in "C / S Channel-specific status data".
Variable modeSpindleToolRevolver (module N/Y, global system data) defines

for circular magazines (T / TM, magazine data, general data, MagKind=3)
whether the tool in OPI modules "T / TP, magazine data, location data", "T / TD,
tool data, general data", "T/TV, tool data, directory" and "T / AEV, working
offsets, directory" remains (new functionality) in its circular magazine location
during operation or changes to the buffer magazine (earlier behaviour)).

1 Variablen 07.05
cuttEdgeNo
Number of edge for this tool
Meaningful and defined only in connection with "unique D numbers" function.

- 1 maxnumCuttEdg UWord r
es_Tool
Multi-line: yes Serial number of active edges numActDEdges
DNo
D number

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Current number of active tool edges numActDEdges
duploNo
Duplo number

- UWord r
numActDEdges
Number of D numbers in this list

When tool management function is active:
Specifies the number of edges belonging to tools with "active"
status (contained in the TO unit)
When tool management function is not active:
Specifies the number of all edges contained in the TO unit.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toolIdent
Tool identifier

- String[32] r
toolInMag
Magazine in which tool is located

- UWord r
toolInPlace
Magazine location of tool

- UWord r

07.05 1 Variablen
toolNo
Internal T number

- UWord r

1 Variablen 07.05
1.7.20 Area T, Mod. TC: Toolholder parameters

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/ToolCarrier/...
Module TC contains the data which define an orientatable toolholder (offset

vectors, axis directions, rotation angle, type information).
It is also possible to read the current positions of the toolholder axes and the
differences between the current and programmed axis values for the active
toolholder.
tcCarr1 $TC_CARR1
x component of offset vector l1
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER /
numToBaust
tcCarr10 $TC_CARR10
x component of rotary axis v2
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr11 $TC_CARR11
y component of rotary axis v2
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr12 $TC_CARR12
z component of rotary axis v2
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr13 $TC_CARR13
Angle of rotation alpha1 (in degrees)
Degree 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr14 $TC_CARR14
Angle of rotation alpha2 (in degrees)
Degree 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr15 $TC_CARR15
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust

07.05 1 Variablen
tcCarr16 $TC_CARR16
y component of offset vector l3
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr17 $TC_CARR17
z component of offset vector l3
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr18 $TC_CARR18
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr19 $TC_CARR19
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr2 $TC_CARR2
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr20 $TC_CARR20
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr21 $TC_CARR21
Axis identifier of 1st rotary axis
- 0 String[32] wr
numToBaust
tcCarr22 $TC_CARR22
Axis identifier of 2nd rotary axis
- 0 String[32] wr
numToBaust
tcCarr23 $TC_CARR23
Kinematic type
Kinematic type: P: Rotatable workpiece (part)
M: Rotatable tool and rotatable workpiece (mixed)
T or any character except P and M: Rotatable tool
- 0 String[32] wr
numToBaust

1 Variablen 07.05
tcCarr24 $TC_CARR24
Offset of 1st rotary axis in degrees
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr25 $TC_CARR25
Offset of 2nd rotary axis in degrees
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr26 $TC_CARR26
Offset of Hirth tooth system in degrees of 1st rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr27 $TC_CARR27
Offset of Hirth tooth system in degrees of 2nd rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr28 $TC_CARR28
Increment of Hirth tooth system in degrees of 1st rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr29 $TC_CARR29
Increment of Hirth tooth system in degrees of 2nd rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr3 $TC_CARR3
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr30 $TC_CARR30
Minimum position of 1st rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr31 $TC_CARR31
Minimum position of 2nd rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust

07.05 1 Variablen
tcCarr32 $TC_CARR32
Maximum position of 1st rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr33 $TC_CARR33
Maximum position of 2nd rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr34 $TC_CARR34
Toolholder name
Contains a freely definable string provided as a freely definable
identifier for the orientatable toolholder.
It has no meaning as yet within the NCK and is not evaluated either.
The identifier should not be used for other purposes since a later
expansion will allow an orientatable toolholder to be activated via
a name as well as via numbers
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER
tcCarr35 $TC_CARR35
Axis name 1
Contains a freely definable string provided as a free identifier
for the first rotary axis.
It has no meaning whatsoever within the NCK, neither is it evaluated.
It can therefore be used for any other purposes.
- 0 String[32] wr
tcCarr36 $TC_CARR36
Axis name 2
Contains a freely definable string provided as a free identifier
for the second rotary axis.
It can therefore be used for any other purposes.
- String[32] wr
tcCarr37 $TC_CARR37
Identifier
Contains an integer number for identifying the toolholder.
- 0 UDoubleword wr
tcCarr38 $TC_CARR38
Position component X
Contains a position (X component of return position).
- 0 Double wr

1 Variablen 07.05
tcCarr39 $TC_CARR39
Position component Y
Contains a position (Y component of return position).
- 0 Double wr
tcCarr4 $TC_CARR4
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr40 $TC_CARR40
Position component Z
Contains a position (Z component of return position).
- 0 Double wr
tcCarr41 $TC_CARR41
x-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l1
mm, inch, user defined 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the tool carrier $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER
tcCarr42 $TC_CARR42
y-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l1
tcCarr43 $TC_CARR43
z-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l1
tcCarr44 $TC_CARR44
tcCarr45 $TC_CARR45
tcCarr46 $TC_CARR46
tcCarr5 $TC_CARR5
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust

07.05 1 Variablen
tcCarr55 $TC_CARR55
tcCarr56 $TC_CARR56
tcCarr57 $TC_CARR57
tcCarr58 $TC_CARR58
tcCarr59 $TC_CARR59
tcCarr6 $TC_CARR6
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr60 $TC_CARR60
tcCarr64 $TC_CARR64
Fine offset of the offset of the rotary axis v1
Degree, user defined 0 0 Double wr
tcCarr65 $TC_CARR65
Fine offset of the offset of the rotary axis v2
Degree, user defined 0 0 Double wr
tcCarr7 $TC_CARR7
x component of rotary axis v1
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr8 $TC_CARR8
y component of rotary axis v1
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust

1 Variablen 07.05
tcCarr9 $TC_CARR9
z component of rotary axis v1
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.21 Area T, Mod. TOE: Edge-related coarse total offsets, setup offsets
One set of edge-related coarse total offsets, setup offsets, exists for each tool
edge and operating location.
This module corresponds totally to module T / TOS, edge-related location-
dependent fine total offsets.
edgeECData $TC_ECPx[t,d]
Location-dependent offsets, setup value
Multi-line: yes ((EdgeNo-1) * (maxnumEdgeSC * numParams_SC * maxnumEdgeSC *
numParams_SC)) + ((EdgeSC - 1)* maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
numParams_SC) + ParameterNo

1 Variablen 07.05
1.7.22 Area T, Mod. TOET: Edge-related coarse total offsets, transformed

setup offsets
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/CompTransfor/...
One set of edge-related transformed total offsets exists for each tool edge and
operating location.
This module corresponds totally to module T / TOE.
edgeECData
Transformed location-dependent offsets, setup value

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.23 Area T, Mod. TOS: Edge-related location-dependent fine total

offsets
One set of edge-related total offsets exists for each tool edge and operating
location.
The maximum number of operating locations is identical for all tool edges and
defined by the new variable maxnumEdgeSC
($MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUTTING_EDGE) in "N / Y global system data".
numParams_SC (currently 9) offsets are provided (depending on location-
independent wear values) for each total offset set: Length 1, length 2, length 3,
radius and 5 others.
Each replacement tool has its own separate (different) data.
The NCK resets the data when the associated tool is activated if machine data
($MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR, bit 1 = 1) is used for activation.
The total offsets of a tool edge are accessible via the internal T number of the
associated tool, edge number, total offset number ("operating location").
PI Services may exist for selective creation and deletion of tool edge total
offsets.
The existence of total offsets can be controlled selectively via the new machine
data $MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR (OPI: maxNumSumcorr in N / Y) (P5??).
The following applies:

When the MMC2 tool management function is in use,
$MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR = -1 must be set to ensure that the total offsets
exist for all offset locations (number = maxnumEdgeSC) from creation of the
tool edge until its deletion.
(The new PI Services for creation / deletion will not currently be used by the
MMC2 tool management for turning applications). For the present, the new NC
machine data $MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR = -1 must be set to automatic
creation / deletion.
The method of addressing in this module is analogous to accessing "Edge data

/ offsets" by column addressing with T number (using an array access operation
to gain quick access to the total offsets of all tool edge operating locations or all
edges of a tool).
The module contains the location-dependent total offsets for all tools. Each
element is addressed via a column and line index:
The column index is the tool number (T number), i.e. all location-dependent
total offsets of this tool (for all edges / locations) can be found in one column.
If a non-existent T number is specified as the column index, the request is
The number of lines is determined by the number of total offset values, the
number of operating locations and the maximum possible edge number of a
tool:
maxZeilenindex = numParams_SC * maxnumEdgeSC *
maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
These variables are stored in "N / Y global system data" and have the following
meanings:
numParams_SC: No. of wear offsets per location (according to L1, L2,
L3, radius and 5 others), currently 9

1 Variablen 07.05
maxnumEdgeSC: Maximum number of locations (SC) per edge

maxnumCuttEdges_Tool: Max. permissible number of edges per tool
Several lines can be addressed simultaneously if necessary, allowing, for

example, all location-dependent total offsets of all edges of one tool to be read
in one request. The location-dependent total offsets of the tools are all of the
same data type and have the same physical unit.
Module T / TOS has a 2-dimensional organization.

For OPI, see Section OPI variables.
The following lines are provided for each T number (column index):
Edge 1, Location 1, L1
Edge 1, Location 1, Radius
Edge 1, Location 1, Par5
.......... ..... .....
Edge 1, Location 1, Par numParams_SC
Edge 1, ..... ......
Edge 1, Location maxnumEdgeSC, Par numParams_SC
.......... ..... .....
Edge 2, Location maxnumEdgeSC, Par numParams_SC
.......... ..... .....
Edge maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, Location maxnumEdgeSC, Par
numParams_SC
Interrelationship between edge parameters, total offsets and variables:

Edge parameter DL1 DL2 ... DL4
...
$TC_DP3 $TC_SCP13 $TC_SCP23 ...
$TC_SCP43 ...
$TC_SCP44 ...
$TC_SCP45 ...
....
$TC_SCP49 ...
$TC_SCP50 ...
$TC_SCP51 ...
with DLx, TC_DPy, TC_SCPz

x from 1 to 6 (maxnumEdgeSC =
$MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUTTING_EDGE) and maximum = 6
y from 3 to 11
z = (10 * x) + y

07.05 1 Variablen
edgeSCData $TC_SCPx[t,d]
Location-dependent offsets, wear

1 Variablen 07.05
1.7.24 Area T, Mod. TOST: Edge-related location-dependent fine total

offsets, transformed
One set of edge-related transformed total offsets exists for each tool edge and
operating location.
This module corresponds totally to module T / TOS.
edgeSCData
Transformed location-dependent offsets, wear

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.25 Area T, Mod. TOT: Edge data: Transformed offset data

The MMC must be capable of displaying and modifying the offset data of the
tool edges as both transformed and untransformed data. The transformation
refers to the adapter data (if programmed) of magazine locations. The MMC
can display and modify both transformed and untransformed data (of the same
tool if necessary) "simultaneously" (in different applications or different MMCs).
To provide access to transformed data, a new module, T / TOT (edge data:

transformed offset data), is provided which is identical to the existing module T /
TO (edge data: Offset data), except that it supplies transformed data instead of
untransformed data.
The information edge DNo (D numbers assigned to edges) is included under
the offset (numCuttEdgeParams * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool) in both the T / TOT
and T / TO modules.
Both modules have a 2-dimensional organization.
The T number is the column index.

Line numbers are calculated by the following method:
(EdgeNo -1) * numCuttEdgeParams +parameter No.
numCuttEdgeParams = parameter per edge (currently 25) (from Y in N area)

EdgeNo = edge number for tool
Example: with numCuttEdgeParams = 25 and maxnumCuttEdges_Tool = 9
Column: T number
Lines:
1 edge 1, parameter 1
...
25 edge 1, parameter numCuttEdgeParams
...
50 edge 2, parameter numCuttEdgeParams
...
225 edge maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, parameter numCuttEdgeParams
226 edge 1, D No assigned to edge 1
Untransformed data:
/Tool/Compensation/edgeData[uToa,cTNr,line_from,line_to]
Transformed data:
/Tool/CompTransfor/edgeData[uToa,cTNr,line_from,line_to]
Values which can be displayed as transformed data are the 9 geo-data

(corresponding to L1, L2, L3, radius, and generally 5 other values), wear and
total offsets.
If tools which are not located in a magazine location with adapter data are
accessed via the module for transformed data, then the data are treated as if
they were untransformed.
For OPI, see Section OPI variables.

1 Variablen 07.05
cuttEdgeParam
Transformed edge offset data and D number list
Important: This variable is called "edgeData" in the MMC102.
+ ParameterNo
For D numbers:
EdgeNo)
edgeData
Transformed edge offset data and D number list
Important: This variable is called "cuttEdgeParam" in NonWindows MMC and PLC.
+ ParameterNo
For D numbers:
EdgeNo)

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.26 Area T, Mod. TAD: Application-specific data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool//...
Data module TAD is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This module

contains application-specific data for all tools. Every element can be addressed
via a column and row index:
The column index is the number of the user-defined tool parameter. The
number of tool parameters (columns) can be found in variable
numToolParams_tad in area N / module Y.
The row index is the tool number. Attempts to access non-existent tools are
negatively acknowledged.
Application-specific tool data are all of the same data type.
Application-specific tool data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.
siemData $TC_TPCSx[y]
Siemens application tool parameter
Important: 2-dimensional variable. Column index corresponds to parameter number. Reserved for SIEMENS
applications.
- 0 Double wr

1 Variablen 07.05
1.7.27 Area T, Mod. TAM: Application-specific magazine data

Module TAM contains application-specific information about tool magazines.
Application-specific magazine data are all of the same data type.
The application-specific magazine data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.
siemData $TC_MAPCSx[y]
Siemens application magazine data.
These parameters can be used only if machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK are set
accordingly.
Reserved for SIEMENS applications.
- 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Parameter number numMagParams_tam

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.28 Area T, Mod. TAO: Application-specific cutting edge data

Data module TAO is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This module

contains application-specific cutting edge data for all tools. Every element can
be addressed via a column and row index. The column index is the tool number
(T number), i.e. one column contains the application-specific data for all the
cutting edges of a tool.
The assignments between tools and T numbers are listed in the Tool Directory
(TV) module in the relevant T area. A request is negatively acknowledged if a
non-existent tool number is entered as the column index.
The number of rows is determined by the number of parameters per cutting

edge and the number of cutting edges of a tool:
Max. number of rows = numCuttEdgeParams_tao * /T/TV/numCuttEdges (T

number)
The number of parameters per cutting edge numCuttEdgeParams_tao can be

found in area N / module Y. The number of tool-specific cutting edges is
specified in area T / module TV.
Several rows can be addressed where necessary which means, for example,
that all application-specific edge data of a tool can be read in one request.
Application-specific edge data are all of the same data type.
Application-specific cutting edge data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.
siemEdgeData $TC_DPCSx[y,z]
Siemens application tool cutting edge parameter
Important: 2-dimensional variable. Column index corresponds to the T number. Reserved for SIEMENS applications.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes (EdgeNo-1) * numCuttEdgeParams_tao *
numCuttEdgeParams_tao + /T/TV/numCuttEdges
ParameterNo

1 Variablen 07.05
1.7.29 Area T, Mod. TAP: Application-specific magazine location data

Data module TAP is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This module

contains application-specific data of a T area. Every element can be addressed
via a column and row index:
The column index is the magazine number, i.e. one column contains the
application-specific magazine location data for all the locations of one
magazine. The assignments between magazines and magazine numbers are
listed in the appropriate Magazine Directory (TMV) module in the relevant T
area. A request is negatively acknowledged if a non-existent magazine number
is entered as the column index.
The number of rows is determined by the number of parameters per magazine

location and the number of magazine locations:
Max. number of rows = numMagLocParams_tap * magNrPlaces
Application-specific magazine location data are all of the same data type.
Application-specific magazine location data are reserved for SIEMENS

applications.
siemPlaceData $TC_MPPCSx[y,z]
Siemens application magazine location data.
$MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK are set
accordingly.
- 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes ParameterNumber + numMagLocParams_tap * magNrPlaces
numMagLocParams_tap *
MagazineLocationNumber-1

07.05 1 Variablen
1.7.30 Area T, Mod. TAS: Application-specific monitoring data

Data module TAS is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This module

contains application-specific monitoring data for all tools. Every element can be
The column index is the tool number (T number), i.e. one column contains the
application-specific monitoring data for all the cutting edges of a tool. The
assignments between tools and T numbers are listed in the Tool Directory (TV)
module in the relevant T area. A request is negatively acknowledged if a non-
existent tool number is entered as the column index.
The number of rows is determined by the number of parameters per cutting

edge and the number of cutting edges of a tool:
Max. number of rows = numCuttEdgeParams_tas * /T/TV/numCuttEdges (T

number)
The number of parameters per cutting edge numCuttEdgeParams_tas can be

found in area N / module Y. The number of tool-specific cutting edges
(/T/TV/numCuttEdges) is specified in area T / module TV.
Several rows can be addressed where necessary which means, for example,
that all application-specific monitoring data of a tool can be read in one request.
Application-specific monitoring data are all of the same data type.
Application-specific monitoring data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.
siemData $TC_MOPCSx[y,z]
Siemens application monitoring data of a tool cutting edge.
$MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MON_PARAM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK are set accordingly.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes ParameterNumber + (EdgeNo -1) * numCuttEdgeParams_tas *
numCuttEdgeParams_tas /T/TV/numCuttEdges

1 Variablen 07.05
1.8 Machine and setting data
1.8.1 Area N, Mod. M: Global machine data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/Drive/...
Global machine data
MDBA_DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE MD 13000: DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Activation of 611D drive / enable high-speed inputs/outputs
0 = inactive
1 = active
- Character wr
Multi-line: yes Slot number in drive bus 14
MDCA_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR MD 13010: DRIVE_LOGIC_NR[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Logical drive number
- 0 30 Character wr
MDCA_DRIVE_MODULE_TY MD 13030: DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

PE
Module identifier of relevant drive bus slot
1 = single-axis module
2 = two-axis module
9 = terminal block for dig. I/Os
10 = bit bus interface
- Character wr
MDCA_DRIVE_TYPE MD 13040: DRIVE_TYPE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Drive type identifier for each drive bus slot
1 = FDD
2 = MSD
- Character wr
MDD_INT_INCR_PER_DEG MD 10210: INT_INCR_PER_DEG

Calculation resolution for angular position
- 0,000001 1000 Double wr
Multi-line: no 1
MDD_INT_INCR_PER_MM MD 10200: INT_INCR_PER_MM

Calculation resolution for linear positions
- 0,000001 1000 Double wr
Multi-line: no 1
MDD_SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_ MD 10050: SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME

TIME
Basic system clock cycle. For possible assignment of values, see description of machine data
SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME.
s 0,000125 s 0,032 s Double wr
Multi-line: no 1

07.05 1 Variablen
MDL_POSCTRL_SYSCLOC MD 10060: POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO

K_TIME_RATIO
Position control cycle factor
- 1 100 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: no 1
MDLA_DRIVE_INVERTER_ MD 13020: DRIVE_INVERTER_CODE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

CODE
Power section code of drive module
- Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Slot number of drive module 14
MDSA_AXCONF_MACHAX_ MD 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[x] x = Axis

NAME_TAB
Machine axis name
- String[16] wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index from 0 7

1 Variablen 07.05
1.8.2 Area A, Mod. M: Axis-specific machine data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Axis/Drive/...
Axis-specific machine data
MDCA_CTRLOUT_MODULE MD 30110: CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR

_NR
Setpoint assignment: Drive number / module number
- 1 15 Character wr
Multi-line: no 1
MDCA_CTRLOUT_TYPE MD 30130: CTRLOUT_TYPE

Type of setpoint output
- 0 1 Character wr
Multi-line: no 1
MDCA_ENC_MODULE_NR MD 30220: ENC_MODULE_NR[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Actual value assignment: Drive number / measuring circuit number
- 1 15 Byte wr
Multi-line: yes Encoder number 2
MDCA_ENC_TYPE MD 30240: ENC_TYPE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Type of actual value sensing (actual position value)
0 = Simulation
1 = Raw signal generator, high-resolution
2 = Square-wave generator, standard generator with pulse quadruplication
3 = Encoder for stepper motor
4 = Absolute encoder with EnDat interface
5 = Absolute encoder with SSI interface (FM-NC)
- 0 5 Character wr
Multi-line: yes Encoder number 2

07.05 1 Variablen
1.8.3 Area N, Mod. SE: Global setting data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/Settings/...
This module contains all global setting data. The physical units depend on the
variable "userScale" in module Y of area N.
MDB_JOG_CONT_MODE_L SD 41050: $SN_MDB_JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD

EVELTRIGGRD
Jog mode
- Character wr
Multi-line: no
MDB_JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE SD 41100: $SN_MDB_JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE

JOG at revolutional feedrate
0 = G94
1 = G95
- Character wr
Multi-line: no
MDD_JOG_REV_SET_VELO SD 41120: $SN_MDD_JOG_REV_SET_VELO

JOG velocity for G95
Degree, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: no
MDD_JOG_SET_VELO SD 41110: $SN_MDD_JOG_SET_VELO

JOG velocity for G94
Multi-line: no
MDD_JOG_SPIND_SET_VE SD 41200: $SN_MDD_JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO

LO
JOG velocity for master spindle
rev/min, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: no
MDD_JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZ SD 41010: $SN_MDD_JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE

E
Variable incremental value for JOG mode
- Double wr
Multi-line: no

1 Variablen 07.05
1.8.4 Area C, Mod. SE: Channel-specific setting data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Settings/...
Channel-specific setting data
MDD_DRY_RUN_FEED SD 42100: $SC_MDD_DRY_RUN_FEED

Dry run feedrate
mm/min, inch/min, user Double wr
defined
Multi-line: no
MDD_THREAD_START_AN SD 42000: $SC_MDD_THREAD_START_ANGLE

GLE
Starting angle for thread
Degree Double wr
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variablen
1.8.5 Area A, Mod. SE: Axis-specific setting data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Axis/Settings/...
Axis-specific setting data
AA_OFF_LIMIT SD 43350: $SA_AA_OFF_LIMIT

Upper limit of compensation value which can be preset by means of synchronized actions via the system variable
$AA_OFF.
This limit value acts on the absolutely effective compensation value via $AA_OFF.
It is possible to interrogate the compensation value for limit-range violation via the system variable $AA_OFF_LIMIT.
- Double r
Multi-line: no
MDB_WORKAREA_MINUS_ SD 43410: $SA_MDB_WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE

ENABLE
Working area limitation active in the negative direction
0 = inactive
1 = active
- Character wr
Multi-line: yes Number of machine axis 1
MDB_WORKAREA_PLUS_E SD 43400: $SA_MDB_WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE

NABLE
Working area limitation active in the positive direction
0 = inactive
1 = active
- Character wr
MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G SD 43220: $SA_MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26

26
Maximum spindle speed at G26 (master spindle)
Multi-line: no 1
MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_L SD 43230: $SA_MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS

IMS
Spindle speed limitation (master spindle)
Multi-line: no 1
MDD_SPIND_MIN_VELO_G SD 43210: $SA_MDD_SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25

25
Minimum spindle speed at G25 (master spindle)
Multi-line: no 1
MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_ SD 43430: $SA_MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS

MINUS
Working area limitation in the negative direction

1 Variablen 07.05
MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_P SD 43420: $SA_MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS

LUS
Working area limitation in the positive direction

07.05 1 Variablen
1.9 Parameters
1.9 Parameters
1.9.1 Area C, Mod. RP: Arithmetic parameters
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Parameter/...
Arithmetic parameters are special predefined variables which are addressed

with the letter R followed by a number. The contents and meaning of an
arithmetic parameter are defined by the programmer of the NC program. 100 R
parameters are defined by default. The number of R parameters can be set via
the channel-specific machine data 28050 (MM_NUM_R_PARAM). Up to 1000
R-Parameters can be set.
R $R[x] x = ParameterNo PA
R parameter (up to SW 3.2)
Attention: This variable should be used for SW releases < 3.3. For later releases use the variable rpa !
Attention: For MMC102 the R number is used as row index !!!

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes R number MM_NUM_R_PARAM
rpa R[x] x = ParameterNo PA

R parameter (from SW 3.3)
Attention: For MMC102 the R number is used as row index !!!

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes R number + 1 MM_NUM_R_PARAM + 1

1 Variablen 07.05
1.9 Parameters
1.9.2 Area C, Mod. VSYN: Channel-specific user variables for

synchronous actions
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/SelectedFunctionData/...
This module contains channel-specific user variables for synchronous actions
acFifoN $AC_FIFOx[y] , x = FIFONo (1-10) y = ParameterNo

FIFO variable for synchronous actions (Note: SYNACT only)
The number of columns depends on the number of FIFOs
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1=2: access to the first element read MD $MC_MM_LEN_AC_FIFO+6
in
3: access to the last element read in
4: sum of all FIFO elements
5: number of elements available in
FIFO
6: current write index in relation to
start of FIFO
7 etc: FIFO contents
acMarker $AC_MARKER[x] x = MarkerNo

Flag variable, counter for synchronous actions (Note: SYNACT only)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of the flag MD $MC_MM_NUM_AC_MARKER
acMarkerL $AC_MARKER[n]
Flag variable, counter for motion synchronous actions
(Note: only with SYNACT)
- UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes Flag number MD $MC_MM_NUM_AC_MARKER
acParam $AC_PARAM[x] x = ParameterNo

Dynamic parameters for synchronous actions (Note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the parameter MD $MC_MM_NUM_AC_PARAM

07.05 1 Variablen
1.10 Servo
1.10 Servo
1.10.1 Area N, Mod. SD: Servo data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/ServoData/...
The SD module makes servo data available.

These data can be accessed only via the cyc. variable service and the logging
function (not individual variable service).
The row index is coded as follows:

The lower three places contain the NCK axis index
The fourth place contains the data format.
The column index is coded as follows:

The lower three places contain the signal ID
The fourth place contains the servo cycle
Data format coding:

0: 32 bit float
1: 64 bit float
Servo cycle coding:

0: The average value of all servo cycle values of one IPO cycle
must be applied
61: The minimum value must be applied
62: The maximum value must be applied
n: The value of the nth servo cycle in the course of one IPO cycle
must be applied
Maximum value of: IPO_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO /
POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO
( 1 <=n <=60 )
Coding of signal ID:

1: Following error
2: Control deviation
3: Contour deviation
4: Actual position value, measuring system 1
5: Actual position value, measuring system 2
6: Position setpoint
7: Actual velocity value of active encoders (NCK)
8: Drive velocity setpoint (NCK)
9: Compensation value, measuring system 1
10: Compensation value, measuring system 2
11: Controller mode
12: Parameter set
13: Active measuring system
14: Position setpoint at controller input
15: Velocity setpoint at controller input
16: Acceleration setpoint at controller input
17: Velocity feedforward value (plus QEC)
18: Torque/force feedforward value
19: Torque/force limit value
20: Actual velocity, measuring system 1
21: Actual velocity, measuring system 2
22: Interpolation ended signal
23: Exact stop fine signal
24: Exact stop coarse signal
25: QEC learning criterion

1 Variablen 07.05
1.10 Servo
26: QEC compensation value

50: Utilization
51: Active power
52: Torque/force setpoint
53: Actual current value (smoothed)
54: Actual speed/velocity motor
55: Valve lift setpoint
56: Actual valve lift
57: Actual pressure cylinder A end
58: Actual pressure cylinder B end
60: Safe actual position
61: Safe actual drive position
62: Safety-relevant input signal NCK
63: Safety-relevant output signal NCK
64: Safety-relevant input signal drive (from PLC)
65: Safety-relevant output signal drive (from PLC)
66: Reaction identifier for NCK
67: Reaction identifier for NCK/drive
68: Result list 1 NCK
69: Result list 1 drive
70: Result list 2 NCK
71: Result list 2 drive
72: Safety partial actual value
73: Actual velocity limit
74: Setpoint velocity limit
75: SI actual value difference
76: Current SI slip speed
77: Current SBR limit
servoDataFl32
Servo data
- 0 Float r
Multi-line: yes Axis index / data format (see module siehe Bausteinkopf
header)
servoDataFl64
Servo data
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index / data format (see module siehe Bausteinkopf
header)

07.05 1 Variablen
1.11 Diagnosis data
1.11 Diagnosis data

1.11.1 Area N, Mod. DIAGN: Global diagnostic data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/ChannelDiagnose/...
This module contains information about global NC diagnostic data.

The measured time variables are available on the destination hardware only.
The net time is calculated without interrupts by higher priority time levels, the
gross time includes the interrupts.
The highest priority time level is the SERVO, followed by the IPO and finally the
interpreter/ preparation. To obtain useful minimum and maximum time intervals,
the corresponding variables must be initialized before the measurement.
actCycleTimeBrut
Sum of current gross runtimes of all channels
ms 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Selects a specific SW task on the 4
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
Line index 5: SYNACT (from SW
7.1)
actCycleTimeNet
Sum of current net runtimes of all channels
ms 0 0 Double r
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
7.1)
compressAbility
Describes whether the NCK supports the transfer of compressed files
Bit0=1: With Huffman algorithm compressed files can be transferred
(this corresponds to instruction ";$COMPR=HUFFMAN1" during download)
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dp611USpecAccChangeCnt
The counter is incremented if the NCK changes the
available ACC information
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1
dp611USpecAccKey
Version and type information about available ACC contents
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no maxnumDrives

1 Variablen 07.05
1.11 Diagnosis data
dp611USpecAccMask
Bit-coded screenform indicating the drives for which special ACC files are available
Bit 0 == 1 -> A special ACC is available

for drive with log. drive number 1.
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1
dp611USpecAccPath
Path in which the ACC files are stored in the NCK file system.
This path might be empty later on if the files are to
be supplied from the active file system.
Current equivalent value: /_N_VS_DIR
- 0 String[32] r
Multi-line: no
dpAxisCfgMachAxisNr
Machine axis !!CAUTION NCU LINK!!
- 0 0 INT32_MAX UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpAxisCfgNumAxes
dpAxisCfgNumAxes
Number of axes entered in the system
Multi-line: no 1
dpAxisCfgValid
Axis info is available
0=Information is not available
1=Information is available
Multi-line: no 1
dpAxisStateCtrlout
Status of output drivers.
0=no axis status assigned
1=axis status assigned
2=axis status is cyclical
3=axis status assigned and cyclical
- 0 0 3 UWord r
dpAxisStateEnc1
Status encoder 1 driver
- 0 UWord r
dpAxisStateEnc2
Status encoder 2 driver
- 0 UWord r

07.05 1 Variablen
1.11 Diagnosis data
dpAxisStateLifeCntErrCtrlo
ut
This data counts the number of position control cycles
since failure of the sign-of-life signal
0 to n= number of position control cycles since
failure of the sign-of-life signal
dpAxisStateLifeCntErrEnc1
This data counts the number of position control cycles since
- 0 UDoubleword r
dpAxisStateLifeCntErrEnc2
This data counters the number of position control cycles since
- 0 UDoubleword r
dpBusCfgBaudrate
Baud rate on DP bus (bit/s)
The permissible baud rates are determined by
the Profibus standard (DIN19245 EN50170)
Hz 0 Double r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses
dpBusCfgCycleTime
The time required by the master to scan all
slaves once (request, response), until the
cycle starts from the beginning again.
s, user defined 0 0 DOUBLE_MAX Double r
dpBusCfgDataExTime
Data exchange time in [s,s,userdef]
s, user defined 0 0 DOUBLE_MAX Double r
dpBusCfgNumBuses
Number of DP buses
Currently only one bus standardized acc. to Profibus DP standard
Multi-line: no 1
dpBusCfgValid
Bus configuration data are available
TRUE= data exist and are initialized
FALSE= no data exist
Multi-line: no 1

1 Variablen 07.05
1.11 Diagnosis data
dpBusStateAccessDuration
Act
Current access time to communications buffer for DP master
- 0 UDoubleword r
Max
Maximum access time to communications buffer for DP master
- 0 UDoubleword r
Min
Minimum access time to communications buffer for DP master
- 0 UDoubleword r
dpBusStateAccessErrCnt1
Number of bus access errors of type 1 since NCK Start
- 0 UDoubleword r
dpBusStateAccessErrCnt2
Number of bus access errors of type 2 since NCK Start
- 0 UDoubleword r
dpBusStateAvgCycleBetwe
enErr1
Average number of cycles between two
bus access errors of type 1
- 0 UDoubleword r
dpBusStateAvgCycleBetwe
enErr2
Average number of cycles between two
bus access errors of type 2
- 0 UDoubleword r
dpBusStateCycleCnt
Number of bus cycles since NCK Start
- 0 UDoubleword r
dpBusStateDpmAction
Indicator for operating progress of DP M
- 0 UDoubleword r
dpBusStateDpmActual
Current status of DP M bus - controlled by DP M
- 0 UWord r

07.05 1 Variablen
1.11 Diagnosis data
dpBusStateDpmCtrl
Booting status of processor for DP Master dpcadmin
- 0 UWord r
dpBusStateDpmError
Error on status transitions
- 0 UDoubleword r
dpBusStateDpmPrjCnt
Modification counter for new DP configurations.
Suggested use:
*) Read modification counter (1)
*) Read out configuring data
*) Read modification counter (2)
*) If the modification counters in (1) and (2) are identical
and both display "valid", the data read from HW-Config
will be consistent.
even values -> configuration invalid
uneven values -> configuration valid
- 0 UWord r
dpBusStateDpmRequest
Desired status of DP M bus - request from HOST
- 0 UWord r
dpBusStateNumActiveSlav
es
This data indicates how many slaves can currently be
accessed via the bus. This value is updated in online operation.
The number of slaves on the bus is determined

by the Profibus standard (DIN19245 EN50170)
dpClientCfgId
Identification client NCK/PLC/3RD
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpClientCfgNumClnt
dpClientCfgNumClnt
Number of clients
Multi-line: no 1
dpClientCfgValid
Client information is available
0=no client information available
1=client information is available
Multi-line: no 1

1 Variablen 07.05
1.11 Diagnosis data
dpClientStateComm
Client status incl. output release
0=No output enable
1=Client state output enable
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpClientCfgNumClnt
dpSlaveCfgAssignBus
Bus number of the slave
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves
dpSlaveCfgBusAddr
The address of the slave on the bus.
In addition to its own address, every slave has a
broadcast address via which all salves can be
addressed.
The broadcast address is not available for individually
addressing a single slave.
127: Broadcast address
- 0 0 127 UWord r
dpSlaveCfgInputTime
Time for actual-value sensing
See dpSlaveMasterAppCycTime
s, user defined 0 Double r
dpSlaveCfgMasterAppCycT
ime
Position controller cycle.
For a detailed description, please refer to
PROFIDRIVE PROFIL ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
(Edition: V1.2 Draft, April 1999) Section 7
See PROFIDRIVE PROFIL ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
(Edition: V1.2 Draft, April 1999) Section 7
dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves
Number of slaves configured in SDB1xxx.
This value may not match the actual number of slaves
connected to the bus.
The number of slaves which can be configured for bus connection
is determined by Profibus standard (DIN19245 EN50170).
Multi-line: no 1
dpSlaveCfgOutputTime
Time for setpoint acceptance
See dpSlaveMasterAppCycTime

07.05 1 Variablen
1.11 Diagnosis data
dpSlaveCfgValid
This data indicates whether the slave data structure
has already been initialized. The structure is initialized
when a slave configuration or status data is accessed.
Scanning dpSlaveCfgValid also activates initialization
of the structure.
True: Slave data are available

False: Slave data are not available
Multi-line: no 1
dpSlaveIdentNo
Ident number of the slave
- 0 UWord r
dpSlaveIdentNoEx
The extended ID no. of the PROFIBUS slave
helps to identify the PROFIBUS slaves not officially classified
as such and therefore lack specificiation dpSlaveIdentNo.
- 0 UWord r
dpSlaveStateComm
The slave is active on the bus once the drive assigned to
the slave has successfully logged on to the bus.
True: Slave on bus
False: Slave not on bus
- 0 0 1 UWord r
dpSlaveStateIncCnt
The incarnation counter of the slave
is increased by one each time the slave is included in the bus. If the slave drops out of the bus, this counter is not
changed.
After the first time it has gone into the bus (that is the first operational status of the slave), the value is 1.
In case of an area overflow, the count restarts at 0.
This only functions with slaves which contain at least one assigned NC axis. In the case of other slaves (pure I/O
slaves, or axes controlled by the PLC), this values remains at 0.
From 0 (starting value after Restart) to a maximum of 2147483647 (2^31-1).

dpSlaveStateSync
The drive linked to this slave is operating in cyclic mode.
Slaves without a drive are defined as "non-cyclical".
True: Cyclical
False: Non-cyclical
- 0 0 1 UWord r

1 Variablen 07.05
1.11 Diagnosis data
dpSlotCfgAssignAxis
This data supplies the axis indices of the drive, encoder 1 and encoder 2
for access in the Axis-Assign-Table.
The 32-bit value consists of 4 bytes with the following meaning:
Byte0(bits 0-7) = axis index of axis
Byte1(bits 8-15) = axis index, encoder 1
Byte2(bits 16-23)= axis index, encoder 2
Byte3(bits 24-31)= provided for future extensions.
A byte with the value 0xFF indicates that no axis index
is defined for the relevant slot.
Multi-line: no dpSlotCfgNumSlots
dpSlotCfgAssignBus
Bus number assigned to this slot
Since only one bus is currently supported by Profibus DP,
there is only one bus to which all slots are assigned.
dpSlotCfgAssignClient
This data supplies the clientIndex for accessing the
Client Assign table.
0=no assignment possible (this applies to diagnostic and PKW slots)
>0 assignment exists
dpSlotCfgAssignMaster
Number of master to which this slot is assigned
Since only one bus is currently supported by
Profibus DP and only one Class 1 Master exists
per bus, there is only one master to which all slots
are assigned.
dpSlotCfgAssignSlave
This data contains the bus address of the slave
belonging to the nth slot.
All legal slave addresses can be specified
dpSlotCfgIoType
I/O identifier
0 = input slot
1 = output slot
2 = diagnosis slot
- 0 0 2 UWord r
dpSlotCfgLength
Length in number of bytes

07.05 1 Variablen
1.11 Diagnosis data
dpSlotCfgLogBaseAddress
The logical basic address of the slot is assigned
during configuration. Although it is not needed on the
bus for data transfer purposes, this address is the only
means by which a unique link can be created between the
NCK and bus nodes.
- 0 0 UINT16_MAX UWord r
dpSlotCfgNumSlots
The total number of all slots configured in the system is
stored in this data.
0 (lower limit) up to INT32_MAX(upper limit);
Note that a slave cannot support more than
256 slots.
Multi-line: no 1
dpSlotCfgSlaveAddress
This data contains the bus address of the slave to which this slot is assigned.
Several slots may have the same slave address.
The number of available addresses on the bus is determined

by the Profibus standard (DIN19245 EN50170).
- 0 0 125 UWord r
dpSlotCfgSlotNr
Slot number within the slave
A maximum total of 256 slots can be assigned to each slave.
0: Diagnostic slot
2: Diagnostic slot
4: 1st data slot
- 0 0 255 UWord r
dpSlotCfgValid
The slot data structure (CcIdent) exists and is initialized.
True: Data are valid
False: Data are invalid or not initialized
Multi-line: no 1
dpSlotStateComm
Status of slots (ok, failed, not processed by the NCK)
0= no sign of life
1= sign of life
2= not processed by NCK
- 0 0 1 UWord r
dpSlotStateRecvTelegram
Bit pattern of this slot received by the master
in the form of a hexadecimal string
- 0 String[198] r

1 Variablen 07.05
1.11 Diagnosis data
dpSlotStateSendTelegram
Bit pattern of this slot sent to the slave in
the form of a hexadecimal string
Transmitted message frame
- 0 String[198] r
dpSlotStateTelegramType
Message frame type of slot
0 = Message frame type unknown
- 0 0 UINT16_MAX UWord r
dpSysCfgAvailable
This data specifies whether the system has been generated
with DP Adapter and/or DP Master
0= Neither DPA nor DPM available
1= DPA available
2= DPM available
3= DPA and DPM available
- 0 0 3 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
dpSysCfgNumMaster
Number of masters
There is only one master per bus with DP.
Since only 1 bus is currently permitted by the
bus standard, there can only be a maximum
of one master.
Multi-line: no 1
dpSysCfgValid
This data indicates whether the configuration data are valid and
initialized.
TRUE or FALSE
Multi-line: no 1
dpSysCfgVersionDpm
Version number of DP M SW as numerical value
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: no dpSysCfgNumMaster
dpSysCfgVersionDpr
Actual version Dpr (inaccessible in earlier SW)
- 0 Double r
dpSysCfgVersionDprEx
DPR_SS_VERSION is a version number stored in the NCK which
can be read out via this variable.
- 0 Double r
dpSysCfgVersionHost
This data contains the version number of the host SW as a numerical value
- 0 0 UINT16_MAX Double r

07.05 1 Variablen
1.11 Diagnosis data
dpSysStateDpmInit
There are three different initialization states:
REQUEST, ACKNOWLEDGE and ERROR
- 0 UWord r
errCodeSetNrGen
Selection of error code set to be used in the case of communication
errors. The selection is client-specific, the client is identified by the sender
address.
0: P1-compatible code
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
errCodeSetNrPi
Selection of error code set to be used by PI Services in the case of communication errors. The selection is client-
specific, the client is identified by the sender address.
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
maxCycleTimeBrut
Sum of maximum gross runtime of all channels
ms 0 0 Double r
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
7.1)
maxCycleTimeNet
Sum of maximum net runtime of all channels
ms 0 0 Double r
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
7.1)
minCycleTimeBrut
Sum of minimum gross runtimes of all channel
ms 0 0 Double r
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
7.1)

1 Variablen 07.05
1.11 Diagnosis data
minCycleTimeNet
Sum of minimum net runtimes of all channels
ms 0 0 Double r
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
7.1)
nckCompileSwitches
Selected NCK compiler switches
Bit0: NDEBUG
Bit1: NOTRACES
Bit2: EMBARGO
Bit3: TARGET
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaDataShotAct
Current access to PCMCIA card: Transferred bytes
Data pcmciaShotStatus, pcmciaDataShotSum and pcmciaDataShotAct can be used to implement
a status display for PCMCIA card access operations.
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaDataShotSum
Current access to PCMCIAcard: Total length in bytes.
Data pcmciaShotStatus, pcmciaDataShotSum and pcmciaDataShotAct can be used to implement a
status display for PCMCIA card access operations.
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaFfsLength
Length of FFS on PCMCIA card in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaShotStatus
Current access to PCMCIA-Karte: Status
Data pcmciaShotStatus, pcmciaDataShotSum and pcmciaDataShotAct can be used to implement a
status display for PCMCIA card access operations.
0: Not active
1: Write active
2: Read active
3-: Reserved
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaStartFfsOffset
Start offset of FFS at beginning of PCMCIA card in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaStartShotOffset
Current access to PCMCIA card: Start offset at beginning of PCMCIA card in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

07.05 1 Variablen
1.11 Diagnosis data
poweronTime $AN_POWERON_TIME
Time since last normal boot ( in minutes )
s, user defined 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
setupTime $AN_SETUP_TIME
Time since last "control system boot on default
values" ( in minutes ).
The timer is automatically set to zero on every
"control system boot on default values".
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variablen 07.05
1.11 Diagnosis data
1.11.2 Area C, Mod. DIAGN: Channel-specific diagnosis data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ChannelDiagnose/...
This module contains information about the channel-specific NC diagnostic

data.
The measured time variables are available on the destination hardware only.
The net time is calculated without interrupts by higher priority time levels, the
gross time includes the interrupts. The highest priority time level is the SERVO,
followed by the IPO and finally the interpreter/ preparation. To obtain useful
minimum and maximum time intervals, the corresponding variables must be
initialized before the measurement.
acIpoBuf $AC_IPO_BUF
Level of IPO buffer (number of blocks)
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actCycleTimeBrut
Current gross cycle time
line index 1: SERVO-task
line index 2: IPO-task
line index 3: interpreter/preparation-task
line index 4: PLC
line index 5: SYNACT (from SW 7.1)
ms Double r
Multi-line: yes 1-3 3
actCycleTimeNet
Current net cycle time
line index 4: PLC
ms Double r
cuttingTime $AC_CUTTING_TIME
Tool operating time ( in seconds ):
The operating time of the path axes excluding active
rapid traverse is measured in all NC programs between
NC Start and Program End/NC Reset.
The measurement is also interrupted during an active
dwell time. The timer is automatically set to zero
every time the control boots on default values.
Can be written as of SW 6.3.
Multi-line: yes 1 1

07.05 1 Variablen
1.11 Diagnosis data
cycleTime $AC_CYCLE_TIME
Runtime of selected NC program ( in seconds ):
The runtime between NC Start and Program End / NC
Reset is measured in the selected NC program.
The timer is cleared when a new NC program is
started.
Multi-line: yes 1 1
ipoBufLevel
Fill level of the IPO buffer (integer value in %)
% 0 100 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
maxCycleTimeBrut
Maximum gross cycle time
line index 3: interpreter/preparation task
line index 4: PLC
ms Double wr
maxCycleTimeNet
Maximum net cycle time
line index 4: PLC
ms Double wr
minCycleTimeBrut
Minimum gross cycle time
line index 3: interpreter/preparation task
line index 4: PLC
ms Double wr
minCycleTimeNet
Minimum net cycle time
line index 4: PLC
ms Double wr

1 Variablen 07.05
1.11 Diagnosis data
operatingTime $AC_OPERATING_TIME
Total runtime of NC programs in Automatic mode
( in seconds ):
The runtimes of all programs are summed between
NC Start and Program End/NC Reset.
The timer is set to zero on every control boot.
Multi-line: yes 1 1

07.05 1 Variablen
1.11 Diagnosis data
1.11.3 Area N, Mod. ETPD: Data lists for protocolling
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/ProtocolData/...
Data lists for protocolling.This module allows to access several lines or rows at
a time.
area
Variable specification of nth OPI data in the list:
area
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 2 + 5 * ( n-1) 2 + 5 * (numData- 1)
col
Variable specification of nth OPI data in list:
col
- UWord wr
numData
Number of data in the list
<= maxnumTraceProtData
- 0 maxnumTracePr UWord wr
otData
Multi-line: yes 1 1
row
row
- UWord wr
type
type
- UWord wr
unit
unit
- UWord wr

1 Variablen 07.05
1.11 Diagnosis data
1.11.4 Area C, Mod. ETP: Types of events
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ProtocolEvent/...
Description of logging event types.

It is permissible to access this module via several lines and columns.
The line index identifies a specific event.

Standard events: line index <= 10000:
OEM events: line index > 10000:
User index: is determined by the 1000s digit of the line
index
Event type: is determined by the last three digits of the
line index
Examples of the line index:

00001: Standard event of user 0 with the number 1 (IPO)
00006: Standard event of user 0 with the number 6 (NC start)
10001: OEM event of user 0 with the number 1
13002: OEM event of user 3 with the number 2
Standard event types:
Cyclic events:
1= IPO and IPO cycle
15 = IPO2
47 = IPO3 (from SW 6.4)
48 = IPO4 (from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events related to axis motions:

2= GEO_AXIS_START and Geo axis starts or
changes the direction
18 = GEO_AXIS_STARTa see VDI
interface NCK->PLC channel specific
DBB40 Bit6 and Bit7
(Bit6 = motion command+, Bit7 = motion command-)
Event occurs when a bit
is reset.
3= GEO_AXIS_STOP and Geo axis stops
19 = GEO_AXIS_STOPa, see VDI
interface NCK->PLC channel specific
DBB40 Bit6 and Bit7
(Bit6 = motion command-, Bit7 = motion command+)
Event occurs when both
bits are set to 0 and one of them was previously active.
4= MA_AXIS_START, One machine axis of the
channel starts or changes the direction
see VDI interface NCK-
>PLC axis-specific
DBB64 Bit6 and Bit7
Event occurs when a bit
is reset.
5= MA_AXIS_STOP, One machine axis stops

07.05 1 Variablen
1.11 Diagnosis data
see VDI interface NCK-

>PLC axis-specific
DBB64 Bit6 and Bit7
Event occurs if both bits
are set to 0 and one of them was previously active.
Acyclic events related to channel influence:

6= NC_START NC start (if detected in
NC)
7= NC_STOP NC stop (if detected in
NC, axes may still be traversed)
Acyclic events related to part program processing:

8= BLOCK_BEG_1 Block start (first IPO
cycle of a block) without intermediate blocks, all program levels
9= BLOCK_BEG_2 and Block start (first

IPO cycle of a block) with intermediate blocks, all program levels
20 = BLOCK_BEG_2a
10 = BLOCK_BEG_3 Block start (first IPO
cycle of a block) without intermediate blocks, only main program level and
MDA level
16 = BLOCK_BEG_S1 and Block start

(search run with computation) with intermediate blocks, all program levels
22 = BLOCK_BEG_S1a
11 = BLOCK_END_1 Block end (first IPO
cycle of a block) without intermediate blocks, all program levels
12 = BLOCK_END_2 and Block end (first

IPO cycle of a block) with intermediate blocks, all program levels
21 = BLOCK_END_2a
13 = BLOCK_END_3 Block end (first IPO
cycle of a block) without intermediate blocks, only main program level and
MDA level
17 = BLOCK_END_S1 Block end (search run

with computation) with intermediate blocks, all program levels
31 = BLOCK_END_P1 Block end (run in)
(from SW ?: not yet implemented)
32 = BLOCK_END_P1a Block end (run
in) (from SW ?: not yet implemented)
44 = BLOCK_END_I1 Block end (interpreter)
(from SW 6.4)
43 = NC_LEVEL_CHG Level change during part
program processing (from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by part programm command WRTPR

23 = PROT_TXT_REQ Logging a WRTPR text
24 = PROT_TXT_REQ_S1 Logging a
WRTPR text (search run with computation)
33 = PROT_TXT_REQ_P1 Logging a
WRTPR text (run in) (from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by the logging process itself
14 = PROT_FILE_BEG Start logging
related to a log file.
29 = PROT_START_TRIG Start trigger
has triggered (from SW 6.4)

1 Variablen 07.05
1.11 Diagnosis data
30 = PROT_STOP_TRIG Stop trigger

has triggered
(from SW 6.4)
46 = PROT_START Start logging
(from SW 6.4)
45 = PROT_STOP Stop logging
(from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by buttons

42 = CANCEL_BUTTON The Cancel
button was pressed (from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by alarms
41 = ALARM_REPORTED An alarm has
occurred (from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by synchronized action

36 = SYNC_ACT_ACTIV Activating
synchronized action (from SW 6.4)
37 = SYNC_ACT_DEACT Deactivating
synchronized action (from SW 6.4)
38 = SYNC_ACT_FIRE Synchronized
action triggers (from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by tool
25 = TOOL_CHANGE tool change
(from SW 6.2)
27 = TOOL_CHANGE_S1 tool change
(search run with computation) (from SW 6.3)
34 = TOOL_CHANGE_P1 tool change
(run in) (from SW 6.4)
26 = CUTTEDGE_CHANGE cutting edge change
(from SW 6.2)
28 = CUTTEDGE_CHANGE_S1 cutting edge
change (search run with computation) (from SW 6.3)
35 = CUTTEDGE_CHANGE_P1 cutting edge change
(run in) (from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by PLC
39 = PLC_OB_1 PLC OB1 started
(from SW 6.4)
40 = PLC_OB40 PLC OB40 started
(from SW 6.4)
asciiMode
Data logging format
0: Data recorded in binary format with fixed alignment to 8 bytes
1: Data recorded in ASCII format
2: Data recorded in binary format with variable alignment
3: Data recorded in binary format with variable alignment and optimization of two consecutive data records of the same
event. In this case, only the header is logged, not the actual data.
- 0 0 3 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Event (see module header) siehe Bausteinkopf
countActivated
Number of times the event has occurred
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no

07.05 1 Variablen
1.11 Diagnosis data
dataListIndex
Index of data list to be used
All valid columns in module ETPD - 1)
- 0 0 UWord wr
dataProtok
Number of bytes entered in the Fifo file
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no
dataUploaded
Number of bytes already uploaded from the Fifo file
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no
eventActive
Event state
0: Not active
1: Active
2: Deactivate and release data set
- 0 0 2 UWord wr
eventActiveStatus
For diagnosis: Event state
0: Activated
1: Not activated
2: Cannot be activated because the sum of the variable lengths is too large
3: Cannot be activated because the internal resources are not sufficient
4: Cannot be activated because the protocol file cannot be created
100-...- cannot be activated because the variable specification with the index (value - 100) is wrong
- 0 0 UWord r
maxElementsFastFifoUsed
For diagnosis: Maximum number of entries in the FIFO buffer
- 0 0 UWord r
maxFileLength
Maximum length of log file
- 0 0 UWord wr
maxGrossFileLengthUsed
For diagnosis: Maximum gross size of log file
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Event (See module header) siehe Bausteinkopf
maxNetFileLengthTooSmall
For diagnosis: Number of (net) bytes by which log file is undersized
- 0 0 UWord r

1 Variablen 07.05
1.11 Diagnosis data
numElementsFastFifoTooS
mall
For diagnosis: Number of entries by which the Fifo buffer is undersized
- 0 0 UWord r
protocolFilename
Name of the log file including the path
- 0 String[64] wr
resultPar1
General result value, the significance is a function of the event.
SYNC_ACT_ACTIVATE, SYNC_ACT_DEACTIVATE, and SYNC_ACT_FIRE: ID of the synchronous action.
All non-stated events do not supply this result value.
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Event (see block header) siehe Bausteinkopf
skip
Number of events to be skipped
- 0 0 UWord wr
startTriggerLock
Setting, whether the start trigger is not to be processed during this event.
0: Trigger is processed
1: Trigger is not processed
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: no
stopTriggerLock
Setting, whether the stop trigger is not to be processed during this event.
0: Trigger is processed
1: Trigger is not processed
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: no
suppressProtLock
Clears the effect of traceProtocolLock
0: The disable is active
1: The disable is canceled for this event
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
timePeriod
Time base for cyclic event only
ms 0 0 UWord r

07.05 1 Variablen
1.12 HMI / MMC State data
1.12.1 Area M, Mod. S: Internal status data MMC
OEM-MMC: Linkitem //State/...
Some internal status data of the MMC can be accessed via this module.
/Nck/Nck/ActApplication
Current application for display in MMC
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: no
/Nck/Nck/ActBag
Current operating mode for display in MMC
- Character wr
Multi-line: no
/Nck/Nck/Channel
Current channel for display in MMC
- Character wr
Multi-line: no
/Nck/Nck/CoordSystem
Coordinate system for display in MMC
- Character wr
Multi-line: no

1 Variablen 07.05
Für Notizen

07.05 2 Interface Signals solution line
2.1 Data modules (DB) of the PLC application interface
2
2 Interface Signals solution line

2.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HT6)................................. 2-318
2.2.6 PLC messages (DB 2) ............................................................................ 2-319
2.2.7 Signals to NC (DB 10) ............................................................................ 2-323
2.2.8 Signals from/to NCK/HMI (DB 10) .......................................................... 2-324

2 Interface Signals solution line 07.05

Please find the descriptin of Data modules (DB) of the PLC application interface
in chapter 5.3.

2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface
General In the following list of interface signals, a reference to relevant documentation is

provided for every signal.
This reference specifies the section number or the short designation of the
description of functions, please refer to
References: /FB/, xx, ”yyy”
xx Short designation of individual description of functions (e.g.: /A2/)
yyy Name of description of functions (e.g.: ”Various interface signals”
or title of the guide)
Inverse signals Signals marked with a ”*” are so-called inverse signals. These signals initiate
the appropriate function when a 0 signal appears rather than a 1 signal (e.g.
MCP, byte n+2.0: *NC STOP).
• In STEP7, DBB means data module byte

Legend
• In STEP7, DBW means data module word (16 bits)
• In STEP7, DBD means data module double word (32 bits)
Hinweis
Please refere also to
SINAMICS S120 Installation and Start-UP Manual 6SL3097-2AF00-0BP3,
SINAMICS S List Manual 6SL3097-2AP00-0BP3
for SINAMICS drives.

2.2.1 Signals from/to machine control panel, M version
Signals from machine control panel (keys)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IB n + 0 Spindle speed override Operating mode

D C B A JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO
IB n + 1 Machine function
REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
IB n + 2 Key- Key- Spindle *Spindle Feed *Feed NC Start *NC Stop

switch switch start stop start stop
position 0 position 2
IB n + 3 Key- Feedrate override

switch
position 1
Reset Single E D C B A
block
IB n + 4 Direction keys Keyswitch Direction keys

position 3
+ - Rapid x 4th axis 7th axis R10
R15 R13 traverse R1 R4 R7
R14
IB n + 5 Axis selection
Y Z 5th axis Traverse R11 R9 8th axis 6th axis
R2 R3 R5 command R8 R6
MCS/WCS
R12
IB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)

QB n + 0 Machine function Operating mode

1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO
QB n + 1 Feed *Feed NC Start *NC Stop Machine function

start stop
REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC
QB n + 2 Axis selection Single Spindle *Spindle

block start stop
Direction X 4th axis 7th axis R10
key R1 R4 R7
-
R13
QB n + 3 Axis selection
Z 5th axis Travel R11 R9 8th axis 6th axis Direction
R3 R5 command R8 R6 key
MCS/WCS +
R12 R15
QB n + 4 Unassigned customer keys Y

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 R2
QB n + 5 Unassigned customer keys

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
Note
With the SINUMERIK 840D, the machine control panel is assigned to the
input/output area by GP parameters; as a standard, initial address 0 is
specified for the input and output areas.
With FM-NC, the initial address is set via the SDB 210. For the supplied SDB
210, initial address 120 is specified. If another initial address is desired, this
must be specified via the STEP 7 Package Communication Configuration.
Note that the GD parameters given automatically through Communication
Configuration must be set on the machine control panel.

2.2.2 Signals from/to machine control panel, T version


IB n + 2 Keyswitch Keyswitch Spindle *Spindle Feed start *Feed stop NC Start *NC Stop
position 0 position 2 start stop
IB n + 3 Keyswitch Feed override

position 1
block
IB n + 4 Keyswitch Direction keys

position 3
R15 R13 R14 +Y -Z -C R10
R1 R4 R7
IB n + 5 Direction keys
+X +C Rapid Travel -Y -X +Z
R2 R3 traverse command R11 R9 R8 R6
override MCS/WCS
R5 R12

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8


QB n + 1 Feed start *Feed stop NC Start *NC Stop Machine function

QB n + 2 Direction keys Single Spindle *Spindle

block start stop
+Y -Z -C
R13 R1 R4 R7 R10
QB n + 3 Direction keys
Travel -Y -X +Z
R3 R5 command R11 R9 R8 R6 R15
MCS/WCS

QB n + 4 Unassigned customer keys Direction

key
+X
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 R2

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
2.2.3 Signals from/to slimline machine control panel
Signals from slimline machine control panel

(keys and switches)

*NC Stop SP - SP 100% SP + SINGLEB JOG MDA AUTOM.
IB n + 1 Spindle Keyswitch Machine function

NC Start SP right *SP Stop SP left SS 3 REF. REPOS Teach in
IB n + 2 Feedrate Keyswitch Machine functions

START *STOP var. INC SS 0 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

RESET SS 2 SS 1 E D C B A
IB n + 4 Direction keys Optional customer keys

(+) R15 (-) R13 Rapid KT4 KT3 KT2 KT1 KT0
traverse
R14
T17 KT5 6 5 4 Z Y X

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

Signals to slimline machine control panel

(LEDs)
QB n + 0 Spindle speed override Operating mode

NC Stop SP - SP 100 % SP + SINGLEB JOG MDA AUTOM.
QB n + 1 Spindle Machine function

NC Start SP right SP Stop SP left Unassigned REF. REPOS Teach in
QB n + 2 Feedrate Machine functions

START STOP var. INC Unassigned 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
QB n + 3 Unassigned
Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned
QB n + 4 Direction keys Optional customer keys

traverse
R14
T17 KT5 6 5 4 Z Y X

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
2.2.4 Signals from/to handheld unit (HHU)
Signals from handheld unit (keys)

(input display)
IB n + 0 Reserved
IB n + 1 Reserved
IB n + 2
T9 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1
IB n + 3
T16 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T9
IB n + 4
T24 T23 T22 T21
IB n + 5 Acknowl- Keyswitch Rapid traverse/feed override switch

edgement
Digital E D C B A
display

Signals to handheld unit (LEDs)

(Output display, LEDs)
QB n + 0 always 1
New data Line

for selection
QB n + 1 selected
line
QB n + 2
L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1
QB n + 3
L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9
HHU digital display
QB n + 4 1st character (right) of the selected line
QB n + 5 2nd character of the selected line
QB ...
QB n + 18 15th character of the selected line
QB n + 19 16th character (left) of the selected line
Note
The parameterization is described in the Installation and Start-Up Guide and
in the Description of Functions P3 sl ”Basic PLC program”.
References: /BH/, ”Operator Components Manual”

2.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HT6)
Signals from machine control panel simulation

Interface HT6→PLC
IB n + 0 Function key block

REF TEACH AUTO MDA JOG QUIT RESET WCS/MCS

FCT15 FCT14 BigFct FCT12 FCT11 INC REPOS
IB n + 2 JOG keys positive direction

If 1: Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
Ax1-Ax6=
Ax7-Ax12
IB n + 3 JOG keys negative direction

Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
IB n + 4 Shift keys
Signal Diagno Service System Param Correct Progr. Mach.
IB n + 5 Shift keys
BF16 BF15 BF14 BF13 BF12 Step Modify Insert
IB n + 6 Start key block

Res. HT 6 VAL+ VAL- SF2 SF1 START STOP
IB n + 7
E D C B A

Signals to machine control panel simulation

Interface PLC→HT6

QB n + 0 Function key block
QB n + 2 Axes 7–12 JOG keys positive direction
selected
QB n + 2
QB n + 3 JOG keys negative direction
For WCS: Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
No MCS
Ax4 to Ax6
QB n + 4 Shift keys
QB n + 5 Shift keys
QB n + 6 Start key block
VAL+ VAL- SF2 SF1 START STOP
QB n + 7
2.2.6 PLC messages (DB 2)
DB2 Signals for PLC messages (PLC→HMI), /P3/

Channel 1
0 510007 510006 510005 510004 510003 510002 510001 510000
Feed disable (alarm no.: 510000–510015)
1 510015 510014 510013 510012 510011 510010 510009 510008
2 Feed and read-in disable byte1 (alarm no.: 510100–510131)
3 Feed and read-in disable byte 2 (alarm no.: 510108–510115)
6 Read-in disable byte 1 (alarm no.: 510200–510207)

10 NC Start disable byte 1 (alarm no.: 510300–510307)
12 Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 1 (alarm no.: 511100–511107)
Channel 2
18 520007 520006 520005 520004 520003 520002 520001 520000
Feed disable (alarm no.: 520000-520015)
19 520015 520014 520013 520012 520011 520010 520009 520008
20-23 Feed and read-in disable byte 1-4 (alarm no.: 520100–520131)
24-27 Read-in disable byte 1-4 (alarm no.: 520200–520231)
28-29 NC Start disable byte 1-2 (alarm no.: 520300–520315)
30-31 Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 1-2 (alarm no.: 521100-521115)
36-143 As from channel 3, please refer to the following table
Channel areas in DB2
Area Address Signal number

Channel 1, see above DBX 0.0 - DBX 11.7 510.000 - 510.231
Channel 1, geo axes DBX 12.0 - DBX 17.7 511.100 - 511.315
Channel 3 DBX 36.0 - DBX 47.7 530.000 - 530.231
Channel 4 DBX 54.0 - DBX 65.7 540.000 - 540.231
Channel 5 DBX 72.0 - DBX 83.7 550.000 - 550.231
Channel 6 DBX 90.0 - DBX 101.7 560.000 - 560.231
Channel 7 DBX 108.0 - DBX 119.7 570.000 - 570.231
Channel 8 DBX 126.0 - DBX 137.7 580.000 - 580.231
Channel 9, channel 10 not
implemented

Axis areas in DB2
Axis/spindle
144 600107 600106 600105 600104 600103 600102 600101 600100
Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600100-600015) for axis/spindle 1
145 600115 600114 600113 600112 600111 600110 600109 600108
146-147 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600200-600215) for axis/spindle 2
Axes 19 -31 not implemented
User areas
User area 0 Bytes 1 - 8
180 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 700002 700001 700000
... User area 0 (alarm no.: 700000-700063)
187 700063 700062 700061 700060 700059 700058 700057 700056
188-195 User area 1 Bytes 1 - 8 (alarm no.: 700100-700163)
...

Note
In DB2, the assignment is made between message/alarm number, text and

area identifier. All alarm or message bits are automatically transferred to the
user interface (channel, axis/spindle) through appropriate parameter settings.
If these parameter settings are not made, the bit transfer must be
programmed in the user program. The user interface can be further
influenced after the block for the error/operational messages has been called.
Only signals of the channels and axes declared in the NC machine data can
be transferred and texts displayed.
The user must acknowledge all error messages generated. Operational
messages are displayed only for as long as the relevant condition prevails.
The number of user areas can be parameterized via FB 1.
DB2/DB3 must be deleted after changing the configuration (FB1: MsgUser).
Definition of error and operational messages /P3/

Byte no. of DB2 / Error message EM or operational message OM
7 / EM 6 / EM 5 / OM 4 / OM 3 / EM 2 / EM 1 / OM 0 / EM
15 / OM 14 / EM 13 / OM 12 / EM 11 / OM 10 / EM 9 / OM 8 / OM
23 / OM 22 / OM 21 / EM 20 / EM 19 / OM 18 / EM 17 / OM 16 / EM
31 / OM 30 / EM 29 / OM 28 / EM 27 / OM 26 / OM 25 / EM 24 / EM
35 / OM 34 / EM 33 / OM 32 / EM
151 / OM 150 / EM 149 / OM 148 / EM 147 / OM 146 / EM 145 / OM 144 / EM
187 / OM 186 / OM 185 / OM 184 / OM 183 / EM 182 / EM 181 / EM 180 / EM
Example The alarms numbered from 510200 to 510207 can be generated via DB2,
DBB6 (read-in disable channel 1). These alarms are defined as error messages
as standard.

2.2.7 Signals to NC (DB 10)
On-board input and output signals from NCK

DB10 Signals to NC (PLC→NC)
DBB 0 Disabling of digital NCK inputs /A2/
Digital inputs without hardware #) On-board inputs §)

Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1
DBB 1 Setting of digital NCK inputs from PLC

DBB2, 3
unas-
signed
DBB 4 Disabling of digital NCK outputs /A2/
Digital outputs without hardware #) On-board outputs §)
Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1
DBB 5 Overwrite screenform of digital NCK /A2/ outputs

DBB 6 Setting value of digital NCK outputs from PLC /A2/

DBB 7 Input screenform of digital NCK outputs /A2/

st
DBB 8-29 Machine axis number table for FC 19, 24, 25, 26 (1 MCP)
st
DBB 30 Upper limit of machine axis numbers for FC 19, 24 (1 MCP)
With 0, the max. number of machine axis numbers applies
nd
nd

Note
#) Bits 4-7 of the digital input and NCK outputs can be processed by the PLC
even though there are no hardware I/Os available for this. Therefore, these
bits can be used in addition to the information exchange between NCK and
PLC.
§) On the 840D, the digital inputs and outputs 1 to 4 of the NCK are physically
on-board. On the FM-NC, there are no hardware I/Os for bit 0 to bit 3. These
can be processed by the PLC according to #).
General signals to NCK (DB10)

DBB 56 Keyswitch /A2/ Acknowl. EMER-

EMER- GENCY
GENCY STOP /N2/
STOP /N2/
Position 3 Position 2 Position 1 Position 0
DBB 57 PC INC inputs

shutdown in mode
Only 840Di group area
evaluated active
DBB
58 - 59
2.2.8 Signals from/to NCK/HMI (DB 10)
On-board NCK inputs and outputs (DB 10)
DB10 Signals from (NCK -> PLC)

DBB 60 Actual value of the digital ON-BOARD inputs of the
NCK
On-board inputs §)
Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1
DBB 61-63
DBB 64 Setpoint for the digital outputs of the NCK without Setpoint for the digital on-board outputs of the NCK
hardware
DBB 65-67 Unassigned
DBB 68 Handwheel 1 moved

DBB 71 Modification counter inch/metric system of units
st
DBB 72 Status of the actual value display indicated (1 MCP)
HT6 Machine/ Valid

Work display
nd
HT6 Machine/ Valid

Work display
st
DBB 74-79 Machine axis numbers of the displayed axes (1 MCP)
MCP1AxisFromHMI
HT6
nd
MCP2AxisFromHMI
HT6
DBB 86 Reserved
DBB 88 Reserved
Note
#) Although no associated hardware I/Os exist, the PLC can process bits 4-7
of the digital inputs and NCK outputs. Consequently, these bits can also be
used to transfer information between the NCK and the PLC.
§) The digital inputs and outputs 1 to 4 of the NCK exist as on-board

hardware for the 840D. No hardware I/Os are available for bits 0-3 of the FM-
NC. In accordance with #), these can be processed by the PLC.
Selection/status signals from HMI (DB 10)
DB 10 Signals from NC (NCK→PLC)

DBB 90
ePS to
PLC
DBB 91
PLC to
ePS
DBB 92 free
DBB 93 free
DBB 94 free

DBB 95 free
DBB 96 free
DBB 97 Channel number for handwheel 1 /H1/

HMI--> PLC
D C B A

HMI--> PLC
D C B A

HMI--> PLC
D C B A
DBB 100 Axis number for handwheel 1 /H1/

HMI--> PLC
Machine Handwheel Contour E D C B A

axis selected handwheel

HMI--> PLC


HMI--> PLC

DBB 103 HMI- HMI AT box HMI HMI Remote

battery tempera- ready fan HD diagnosis
HMI--> PLC
alarm active
ture limit monitoring monitoring /FBFE/

General signals from NCK (DB 10)

DBB 104 NCK CPU 1

st
OB1 HHU MCP 2 MCP 1
ready /A2/ cycle ready ready ready
DBB 105 Too-

lmanage-
ment
command
cancellatio
n
DBB 106 EMERGEN

-CY STOP
active /N2/
DBB 107 Inch NCU-link Probe actuated /M4/

system active
Probe 2 Probe 1
DBB 108 NC ready Drive ready Drives in HMI-CPU HMI CPU HMI2 CPU
/A2/ /FBA/ cyclic Ready Ready ready
(HMI to (HMI to
operation OPI) MPI) E_HMI2
/A2/ /A2/
Ready
DBB 109 NCK Air temp. Heat sink PC NCK

battery alarm temp. operating alarm
alarm /A2/ alarm present
/A2/ NCU 573 system /A2/
fault
DBB 110 Software cams minus /N3/

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
DBB 114 Software cams plus /N3/

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24

External digital inputs of the NCK (DB10)

DB10 Signals to NC (PLC -> NCK)

DBB 122 Disable the external digital NCK inputs
DBB 123 Values from the PLC for the external digital NCK inputs




External digital outputs of the NCK (DB10)


DBB 130 Disable the external digital NCK outputs
DBB 131 Overwrite screenform for the external digital NCK outputs
DBB 132 Value from the PLC for the external digital NCK outputs
DBB 133 Default screenform for the external digital NCK outputs




Analog inputs of the NCK (external) (DB10)

DBB 146 Disable the analog NCK inputs
DBB 147 Specified analog value for NCK from PLC

DBW 148 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 1 of NCK
DBB Unassigned
164,165

Analog outputs of the NCK (external) (DB10)
DB10 Signals to NCK (PLC -> NCK)

DBB 166 Overwrite screenform for the analog NCK outputs
DBB 167 Default screenform for the analog NCK outputs

DBB 168 Disable the analog NCK outputs

DBB 169 RESERVED
DBW 170 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 1 of NCK
Note
Concerning NCK CPU Ready (DBX 104.7):
This signal is the sign-of-life monitoring function for the NC. It must be
included in the safety circuit of the machine.
Concerning HMI CPU1 READY (DBX 108.3 and DBX 108.2):
If the HMI is connected to the operator panel interface (X 101), bit 3 is set
(default). When connecting to the PG MPI interface (X 122), bit 2 is set.

External digital input and output signals of the NCK (DB 10)
DB 10 Signals from NCK (NCK→PLC), /A2/

DBB 186 Actual value of external digital NCK inputs




DBB 190 NCK setpoint for external digital NCK outputs





Analog input and output signals of the NCK (DB 10)
DB 10 Signals from NCK (NCK→PLC), /A2/

DBW 194 Actual value for analog input 1 of the NCK
DBW 210 Setpoint for analog output 1 of the NCK

2.2.9 Signals from/to mode group (DB 11)
Mode group-specific signals (DB 11)

DB 11 Signals to mode group 1 (PLC→NCK) /K1/
DBB 0 Mode Mode Mode Mode Operating mode

group reset group stop group stop change
Axes plus disable
spindle
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC
DBB 1 Single block Machine function
Type A Type B REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB 2 Machine function

var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
DBB 3
Note
about machine function: machine function defined centrally when signal
"INC inputs in mode group area active" (DB10.DBX57.0) is set.
DB 11 Signals from mode group 1 (NCK→PLC) /K1/

DBB 4 Strobe mode

HMI--> PLC
JOG MDA AUTOM.
DBB 5 Strobe machine function

HMI--> PLC
REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB 6 All NCK Mode Mode Active operating mode

channels in internal Group group
JOG active reseted
reset state /K1/ /K1/ ready JOG MDA AUTOM.
DBB 7 Active machine function
REF REPOS TEACH IN




Axes plus disable
spindle
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC

DBB 23 Unassigned
Note

DBB 24 Strobe mode

HMI--> PLC
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC

HMI--> PLC
REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB 26 All NCK Mode Mode Active operating mode

channels in internal group group
JOG active
reset state reseted ready JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC
DBB 27 Active machine function
REF REPOS TEACH IN

DBB 28 Machine functions

Note
The other mode groups (mode group 3 to mode group 10) are also located in
DB 11 with the following initial bytes:
Mode group 3: DBB 40 Mode group 7: DBB 120
2.2.10 Signals for Safety SPL (safe programmable logic) (DB 18)
Parameterization section
References: /FBSI/, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
DB 18 Signals for Safety SPL (PLC → PLC)

DBB 0 not relevant for solution line
DBB ... not relevant for solution line
DBW 34 not relevant for solution line
DBB 36 Stop E SPL

READY
DBB 37
Data area / error
DB 18 Signals for Safety SPL (PLC ←→ NCK)

Data area for SPL inputs/outputs
SPL_DATA.INSEP [1..32]
DBD 38
DBD 42
SPL_DATA.OUTSEP [1..32]
DBD 46
DBD 50

Data area for user SPL

SPL_DATA.INSIP [1..32]
DBD 54
DBD 58
SPL_DATA.OUTSIP [1..32]
DBD 62
DBD 66

SPL_DATA.MARKERSIP [1..32]
DBD 70
DBD 74
Difference in level between NCK and PLC for diagnostics

SPL_DELTA.INSEP [1..32]
DBD 78
DBD 82
SPL_DELTA.OUTSEP [1..32]
DBD 86
DBD 90
SPL_DELTA.INSIP [1..32]
DBD 94
DBD 98
SPL_DELTA.OUTSIP [1..32]
DBD 102
DBD 106
SPL_DELTA.MARKERSIP [1..32]
DBD 110
DBD 114
DBD 118 CMDSI
DBD 119 xxxxxxxx
DBD 120 Error number

0 = no error
1 - 320 = Signal number starting from SPL_DATA.INSEP [1]
DBD 124 Level indicator of cross-checking
(diagnostics option: how many SPL signals currently differ in level)

Supplementary data areas


Data area for single-channel inputs/outputs
from NCK PLCSIOUT [1 .. 8]
DBB 128
DBB 129
DBB 130
DBB 131
to NCK PLCSIIN [1.. 8]
DBB 132
to NCK PLCSIIN [9 .. 16]
DBB 133
DBB 134
DBB 135
SPL status
DBB 136
PROFIsafe module(s) for
th th th th th st
DBB 138 8 input 7 input 6 input 5 input 4 input 3rd input 2nd input 1 input
byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
DBB 139
th th th th th st
DBB 140 8 output 7 output 6 output 5 output 4 output 3rd output 2nd output 1 output
DBB 141
reserved
DBB 142
to
DBB 188

2.2.11 Signals from/to operator panel (DB 19)
DB 19 Signals to operator panel (PLC→HMI)

DBB 0 Actual Back up HMI Adv Clear Clear Key Screen Screen
value in travel shutdown recall cancel disable darkening bright
WCS recorder alarms alarms /A2/ /A2/ /A2/
(for OEM
0=MCS HMI Adv HMI Adv
users)
/A2/
DBB 1 Reserved
DBW 2
DBW 4
DBB 6 Analog spindle 1, capacity in percent
DBB 8 Channel number of machine control panel to HMI
DBB 9 Reserved for selection Automatc OEM2 OEM1

tool
measure-
ment
DBB 10 PLC Hardkeys (Values 1 ... 255, Default: 0 )
DBB 11 Reserved for hardkey function expansions
DBB 12
DBB 13 Load part Res. Disable

Select program Unload Teach
transfer
/A2/ /A2/ /A2/
DBB 14 0=act. FS RS-232 act. FS: Index of file to be transferred in the standard list.
1=pas. FS RS-232 pass. FS: Number of the control file for user file names.
DBB 15 RS-232 act. FS: Index that specifies the axis, channel or tool no.
RS-232 pass. FS: Index of the file to be transferred in the user list
DBB 16 1=pas FS Part program handling: Number of the control file for user file names.
DBB 17
Part program handling: Index of the file to be transferred in the user list
DBB 18
DBB 19 Reserved (signal counter), HMI --> PLC

DB 19 Signals from operator panel (HMI → PLC)

DBB 20 MCS/WCS Simulation Language Recall Cancel Cancel key Screen is
Change- active 2 switched alarm alarm actuated dark
over /A2/ cleared cleared /A2/
/A2/ HMI Emb. /A2/
HMI Adv HMI Adv
/A2/ /A2/
DBB 21 Active HMI operating area
DBB 22 Displayed channel number from the HMI /A2/
DBB 23
DBW 24 actual mask number from JobShop
DBB 26 Part program handling status /A2/

Select Load Unload Active Error OK Error
DBB 27 Error program handling /A2/
DBW 28 Mask number for "Extend user interface" /IAM/, BE1
DBB 30 Control bits PLC --> HMI
Exit mask Request

mask
DBB 31 Control bits PLC --> HMI

Inactive bit Error, Not Mask Mask Mask Mask
possible to exited active requested request
request accepted
mask
DBB 32 FunctionSelectionNo. from PLC
PLC>HMI Busy Strobe

function function
DBB 33 Parameter 1 for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 32)
PLC>HMI
PLC>HMI

PLC>HMI
DBB 36 Error code for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 32)
HMI>PLC
HMI>PLC
HMI>PLC
HMI>PLC
DBB40-47 used internally

DBB 48 PLC-Busy HMI-Strobe FunctionSelectionNo. from HMI
function function
HMI>PLC
DBB 49 Error code for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB48)
PLC>HMI
Interface 2nd HMI
DBB Assignment as for DBB 0 to DBB 49

50-99
Switchover interface to HMI
Knocking interface (HMI announces itself to NCU)
DBW 100 ONL_REQUEST /B3/

Online request from HMI
HMI writes its client identification as online request
(bit 8-15: bus type, bit 0-7: HMI bus address)
DBW 102 ONL_CONFIRM /B3/

Acknowledgment from PLC to online request
PLC writes HMI client identification as acknowledgment (bus type, HMI bus address;
as with DBW 100).
DBW 104 PAR_CLIENT_IDENT /B3/
HMI writes its client identification (bus type, HMI bus address; as with DBW 100).
DBB 106 PAR_HMI_TYP /B3/

Type of HMI as per NETNAMES.INI: Main / subordinate operator panel / server /...
DBB 107 PAR_MSTT_ADR /B3/

HMI writes address of MCP to be activated; 255, when no MCP activated
DBB 108 PAR_STATUS /B3/

PLC writes online enable for HMI.

DBB 109 PAR_Z_INFO /B3/

PLC writes additional info about status
DBW 110 M_TO_N_ALIVE

Sign of life from PLC to HMI through M to N block
DBB 112 reserved Bustype MCP
DBB 118 TCU index

st
1 online interface
DBB 119 TCU index

nd
2 online interface
Online interface HMI 1 (user)

DBW 120 MMC1_CLIENT_IDENT /B3/
PLC writes PAR_CLIENT_IDENT to MMCx_CLIENT_IDENT when HMI goes online.
DBB 122 MMC1_TYP /B3/

PLC writes PAR_MMC_TYP to MMCx_TYP when HMI goes online.
DBB 123 MMC1_MSTT_ADR /B3/

PLC writes PAR_MSTT_ADR to MMCx_MSTT_ADR when HMI goes online.
DBB 124 MMC1_STATUS /B3/

Connection status, HMI and PLC alternately write their requests/acknowledgments
DBB 125 MMC1_Z_INFO /B3/

Additional info connection status (pos./neg. acknowledgment, error messages...)
DBB 126 res. TCU1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1
SHIFT_ CHANGE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ MSTT_ SHIFT
LOCK
DENIED CHANGED PERM REQ SHIFT_ LOCK
/B3/ /B3/ /B3/ /B3/ LOCK /B3/
/B3/
DBB Reserved Bustype MCP
127
DBB Reserved Transline (Transline DB number)
128

Online Interface HMI 2 (user)

PLC writes PAR_CLIENT_IDENT to MMCx_CLIENT_IDENT when HMI goes online.

PLC writes PAR_MMC_TYP to MMCx_TYP when HMI goes online.

PLC writes PAR_MSTT_ADR to MMCx_MSTT_ADR when HMI goes online.

Connection status, MMC and PLC alternately write their requests/acknowledgments

DBB 136 res. TCU2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_
SHIFT_ CHANGE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ MSTT_ SHIFT_
LOCK
DENIED CHANGED PERM REQ SHIFT_ LOCK
/B3/ /B3/ /B3/ /B3/ LOCK /B3/
/B3/
DBB Reserved Bustype MCP
137
DBB Reserved Transline (Transline DB number)
138
DBB Code carrier input parameters

Optional package SINTDC on HMI-Advanced required
140-197
DBB Code carrier return parameters
198-249
DBB Commands
250-255
DBB Commands for Paramtm.exe
256-267
DBW Traffic light status
Optional package TPM on HMI Advanced required
268
DBW Counter[1 ... 32]
270 to
394

2.2.12 PLC machine data (DB 20)
DB 20 PLC machine data (PLC→operator)

DBW 0 INT values
DBW
DBW INT values
DBB Bit arrays
DBB
DBB Bit arrays
DBD REAL values
DBD
DBD REAL values
Note
The initial and end addresses of the PLC machine data areas depend on the
respective length indications of the partial areas. In general, the integer
values start with the data byte 0. The upper limit is determined by the
corresponding length indication. In general, the following bit arrays (2-decade
hexadecimal numbers on input) start with the following even address. The
real values follow directly the bit arrays and also start with an even address.

2.2.13 Signals from/to NCK channel (DB 21–30)
DB Signals to NCK channel (PLC→NCK)

21 - 30
DBB 0 Activate Activate Activate Activate

dry run M01 single DRF /H1/
feedrate /K1/ block /K1/
/V1/
DBB 1 Activate PLC action CLC CLC stop Time Synchron- Enable Activate
program complete override /TE1/ monitoring ized action protection referencing
test /K1/ /TE1/ act. (tool OFF zones /R1/
/K1/ manage- /A3/
/FBSY/
ment)
DBB 2 Skip block /K1/

/7 /6 /5 /4 /3 /2 /1 /0
DBB 3 Nibbling and punching /N4/

Manual Stroke Stroke not Stroke Manual Stroke
release of delayed operating suppres- stroke enable /N4/
stroke 2 /N4/ /N4/ sion /N4/ enable /N4/
DBB 4 Feedrate override /V1/

H G F E D C B A
DBB 5 Rapid traverse override /V1/

H G F E D C B A
DBB 6 Feedrate Rapid Program Delete Delete Read-in Feed

override traverse level abort subroutine distance- disable disable
active /V1/ override /K1/ no. of to-go /K1/ /V1/
active /V1/ passes /A2/
DBB 7 Reset Suppress NC Stop NC Stop NC Stop to NC Start NC Start

/K1/ Start Lock axes plus /K1/ block limit /K1/ disable
spindle /K1/ /K1/
/K1/
DBB 8 Activate machine-related protection area /A3/

Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1
DBB 9 Activate machine-related protection area /A3/

Area 10 Area 9
DBB 10 Activate channel-specific protection area /A3/

Activate channel-specific protection area /A3/
DBB 11 Area 10 Area 9

Note
on Feedrate override active (DBX6.7)
even if feedrate override is not active (= 100%), the setting 0% is effective.
on Feedrate override (DBB 4)
either 31 positions (Gray code) with 31 MD for % evaluation or 0-200% corresponding
to the dual value in byte (201–255 ⇒ max. 200%).
on Rapid traverse override (DBB 5)
on Activate single block (DBX0.4)
select variant via ”Write variable”.
on Delete distance-to-go (DBX6.2)
effects only path axes and not positioning axes
Control signals to geometry axes
DBB 12 Geometry axis 1

Traversing keys /H1/ Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel /H1/
traverse key disable /V1/
override /H1/
/H1/
+ - 3 2 1
DBB 13 Geometry axis 1 machine function /H1/

Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
DBB 14 OEM signals geometry axis 1

override /H1/
/H1/
+ - 3 2 1


override /H1/
/H1/
+ - 3 2 1


Note
about machine function: machine function only defined when signal "INC
inputs in mode group area active" (DB10.DBX57.0) is not set.
Operating signals from HMI/status signals from NC channel
DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC,

21-30 HMI→PLC, PLC→NCK)
DBB 24 Dry run M01 Select DRF

feedrate selected NCK- selected
HMI--> PLC
selected /K1/ related /H1/
/V1/ M01
DBB 25 Program REPOS Feedrate REPOSPATHMODE

test MODE override for
HMI--> PLC
selected EDGE rapid
/K1/ traverse 2 1 0
selected
/V1/
DBB 26 Skip block selected /K1/
HMI--> PLC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DBB 27 Skip block Skip block
selected selected
HMI--> PLC
/K1/ /K1/
DBB 28 OEM channel signals
PLC→NCK
DBB 29 Do not Switch off Switch off Activate Activate Activate Activate Activate
fixed feed fixed feed fixed feed fixed feed
PLC→NCK disable wear workpiece PTP
4 3 2 1
tool monitoring counter motion /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/,
/V1/ /V1/ /V1/ /V1/

DBB 30 Activate contour handwheel

PLC→NCK
No tool Activate Neg. Simulation Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel
change NCK- direction contour 3 2 1
commands related simulation handwheel
M01 contour on
handwheel
/H2/
DBB 31 REPOSPATHMODE
PLC→NCK
Skip block Skip block REPOS 2 1 0
active /9 active /8 MODE
EDGE
DBB 32 Last action M00/M01 Approach Action Execution
NCK--> PLC block active block block from external
active /K1/ /K1/ active /K1/ active /K1/ source
active
DBB 33 Program Transforma M02/M30 Block Handwheel Revolutio- Orientable Referencing
NCK--> PLC test active tion active active search override nal toolholder active
/K1/ /K1/M1 /K1/ active active feedrate active /R1/
/K1/ /H1/ active /V1/
DBB 34 OEM channel signals feedback
NCK--> PLC
DBB 35 Channel status /K1/ Program status /K1/

NCK--> PLC
Reset Interrupted Active Aborted Interrupted Stopped Waiting Running
DBB 36 NCK alarm Channel- Channel Interrupt All axes All axes
NCK--> PLC with specific ready processing stationary requiring
processing NCK alarm for active /B1/ reference
stop present operation /K1/ points are
present /A2/ referenced
/A2/ /R1/
DBB 37 Stop Read-in CLC CLC CLC Contour handwheel active
NCK--> PLC
at block enable is stopped stopped active Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel
end with ignored upper limit lower limit /TE1/ 3 2 1
SBL is sup- /TE1/ /TE1/ /H1/ /H1/ /H1/
pressed
NCK--> PLC
Acknowl. Stroke
manual enable
stroke active /N4/
enable /N4/
DBB 39 Protection
NCK--> PLC zones not
guaranteed

Note
on Feedrate override for rapid traverse selected (DBX25.3)
Depending on this signal, the basic PLC program copies the feedrate override
onto the rapid traverse override on the channel-specific interface.
On Program test selected (DBX25.7)
”Program test selected” means axis disable for all channel axes and spindles.
Status signals of geometry axes

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)
21 - 30

Traverse command /H1/ Travel requests Handwheel active /H1/
plus minus plus minus 3 2 1
DBB 41 Geometry axis 1 active machine function /H1/

DBB 44
HMI--> PLC


DBB 50
HMI--> PLC



DBB 56
HMI--> PLC
DBB 57
Change signals on auxiliary function transfer from NC channel
DB
21 - 30 Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)

DBB 58 M fct. 5 M fct. 4 M fct. 3 M fct. 2 M fct. 1
change change change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/
not not not not not
decoded decoded decoded decoded decoded
DBB 60 S fct. 3 S fct. 2 S fct. 1 S fct. 3 S fct. 2 S fct. 1
quick quick quick change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/
DBB 61 T fct 3 T fct. 2 T fct. 1 T fct. 3 T fct. 2 T fct. 1
quick quick quick change/H2/ change/H2/ change
/H2/
DBB 62 D fct. 3 D fct. 2 D fct. 1 D fct. 3 D fct. 2 D fct. 1
/H2/
DBB 63 DL fct. DL fct.
quick change
DBB 64 H fct. 3 H fct. 2 H fct. 1 H fct. 3 H fct. 2 H fct. 1
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/
DBB 65 F fct. 6 F fct. 5 F fct. 4 F fct. 3 F fct. 2 F fct. 1
change change change change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/
quick quick quick quick quick
quick quick quick quick quick quick
Note
For 10-decade T numbers, only the T fct. 1 change signal is available. For
5-decade D numbers, only the D fct. 1 change signal is available.

Transferred M/S functions
DB

DBW 68 Extended address M function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBD 70
M function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBD 76 M function 2 (binary) /H2/
DBW 98 Extended address S function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBD 100 S function 1 (REAL format) /H2/
Note
M functions are programmed in the part program in the INTEGER format
(8 decades plus sign).
”REAL format” means: 24 bit mantissa and 8 bit exponent.

Transferred T/D/DL functions

21 - 30
DBW 116 Extended address T function 1 (16 bit Int)
DBW 118 T function 1 (binary) /H2/

For 8-decade T nos., T function 1 (32 bit DINT) is used in DBD 118 (see note)
DBD 118
DBW 122 T function 2 (Int)
DBB 128
DBB 129 D function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBW 130 For 5-decade D nos., D function 1 (16 bit DINT) is used in DBD 130 (see note)
Extended address D function 2 (8 bit Int)
DBB 130
DBB 131 D function 2 (8 bit Int)
DBB 132 Extended address D function 3 (8 bit Int)
DBW 134 Extended address DL function (16 bit Int)
DBD 136 DL function (REAL)
Note
With active tool management, programmed T functions are not output to the
PLC.
8-decade T nos. are only available as T function 1
Programmed D functions with names (e.g. D=CUTEDGE_1) cannot be
output in ASCII format to the PLC.
5-decade D nos. are only available as D function 1
The REAL format corresponds to floating point representation in STEP 7
(24 bit mantissa and 8 bit exponent). This floating point format supplies a
maximum of 7 valid places.

Transferred H/F functions
DB

DBW 140 Extended address H function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBD 142 H function 1 (REAL or Dint) /H2/
DBW 158 Extended address F function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBD 160 F function 1 (REAL format) /H2/
Note
F functions are programmed in the part program in the REAL format.

The extended address of the F function contains an identifier with the
following meaning:
0 = path feed,
1-31 = machine axis number for feed with positioning axes.
The H function data type is dependent on MD 22110: AUXFU_H_TYPE_INT.

Decoded M signals (M0–M99)

21 - 30
DBB 194 Dynamic M functions

M07 M06 M05 * M04 * M03 * M02 M01 M00
DBB 195 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08

M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

M39 M38 M37 M36 M35 M34 M33 M32

M47 M46 M45 M44 M43 M42 M41 M40

M55 M54 M53 M52 M51 M50 M49 M48

M63 M62 M61 M60 M59 M58 M57 M56

M71 M70 * M69 M68 M67 M66 M65 M64

M79 M78 M77 M76 M75 M74 M73 M72

M87 M86 M85 M84 M83 M82 M81 M80

M95 M94 M93 M92 M91 M90 M89 M88

M99 M98 M97 M96
DBB 207
Note
M functions marked with * are not decoded in this bit array if a spindle is
configured in the channel. In this case, these M functions are offered as
extended M functions in DB21-30.DBB68 ff. and in the relevant axis DB
DB31-61.DBB86 ff.
Dynamic M functions (M00 to M99) are decoded by the basic PLC program.
The PLC user must use dynamic M functions in order to generate static M
functions.

Active G functions
21 - 30
DBB 208 Number of active G function of G function group 1 (binary) /K1/
...
DBB 270 Number of active G function of G function group n-1 (binary) /K1/
DBB 271 Number of active G function of G function group n (binary) /K1/
Note
The active G functions of the groups are updated each time a G function or a
mnemonic identifier (e.g. SPLINE) is programmed.
G functions within a G group are output as binary value, starting with 1.
A G function with the value 0 means that no G function is active for this G
group.

Signals for protection areas from NC channel

21 - 30
DBB 272 Machine-related protection area preactivated /A3/
Area 10 Area 9
DBB 274 Channel-specific protection area preactivated /A3/
Area 10 Area 9
DBB 276 Machine-related protection area violated /A3/

Area 10 Area 9
DBB 278 Channel-related protection area violated /A3/


Area 10 Area 9

Instruction-controlled signals to NC channel

DB Signals to NCK channel (NCK→PLC)
21 - 30
DBB 280 Synch. Reserved

action
disable
request
DBB 281 Synch.

action
disabled
DBW 282 Reserved
DBW 284 Reserved
DBW 286 Reserved
DBW 288 Reserved
DBW 290 Reserved
DBW 292 Reserved
DBW 294 Reserved
DBW 296 Reserved
DBW 298 Reserved
DBB 300 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/
No. 8 No. 7 No. 6 No. 5 No. 4 No. 3 No. 2 No. 1
Note
The request signals are set by the user and reset by the basic program after
transmission of the corresponding data.

Instruction-controlled signals from NC channel
DB
DBB 308 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 8 Nr. 7 Nr. 6 Nr. 5 Nr. 4 Nr. 3 Nr. 2 Nr.1

Nr. 16 Nr. 15 Nr. 14 Nr. 13 Nr. 12 Nr. 11 Nr.10 Nr.9



Nr. 40 Nr. 39 Nr. 38 Nr. 37 Nr. 36 Nr. 35 Nr. 34 Nr. 33



Cyclic Signals interface NCK Æ PLC
DBB 316 Active G functions

G0 PATH G00 geo.
DBB 317
Tool PTP Travel Workpiece External
missing motion request setpoint language
active drive test reached mode
active
DBB 318
Overstore Dry-run Associated Stop TOFF TOFF Search ASUP
active feedrate M01 delayed movement active active stopped
active /V1/ active /H2/ active /K1/ /K1/
DBB 319
No tool Stop-delay- Repos Delay FTS Repos Repos Repos REPOS
change range not DEFERRA Path Mode Path Mode Path Mode MODE
command activated L Chan Ackn 2 Ackn 1 Ackn 0 EDGE
active ACKN

Signals to orientation axes

21 - 30
DBB 320 Traversing keys Orientation axis 1
+ − Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel

traverse key disable
− − (bit value coding)
override
DBB 321 Orientation axis 1

DBB 322 OEM signals orientation axis 1

+ − Rapid Traversing Feed Activate handwheel

traverse key
stop (bit value coding)
override
disable


key
traverse stop (bit value coding)
disable
override

Signals from orientation axes

21 - 30
Travel command Travel request Handwheel active
plus minus plus minus (bit value coding)

Active machine function

(bit value coding)
plus minus plus minus




Tool management functions from NC channel

21 - 30
Modification signals tool management functions
DBB 344 Last Transfer to Tool limit Tool pre-

replace- new value warning
ment tool replace- reached limit
of tool ment tool reached
group
DBB
345-347
Transferred tool management functions
DBD 348 T number for tool prewarning limit (DInt)
DBD 352 T number for tool limit value (DInt)
DBD 356 T number of new replacement tool (DInt)
DBD 360 T number of last replacement tool (DInt)

Signals from/to NC channel

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC, PLC →NCK)
21 - 30
CH_CYCLES_SIG_IN (Bit 0 – 7 )
DBB 364
DBB 365
CH_CYCLES_SIG_OUT (Bit 0 – 7 )
DBB 366
DBB 367
CH_OEM_TECHNO_SIG_IN (DBB368 - 371)
DBB 368
DBB 369
DBB 370
DBB 371
DBB 372 CH_OEM_TECHNO_SIG_OUT (DBB372 - 375)
DBB 373
DBB 374
DBB 375
DBB 376 ProgEventDisplay
DBB 377
DBB 378
DBB 379
DBB 380
DBB 381
DBB 382
DBB 383

2.2.14 Signals from/to axis/spindle (PLC→NCK) (DB 31–DB 61)
DB Signals to axis/spindle (PLC→NCK)

31 -61

Axis and
spindle H G F E D C B A
DBB 1 Override Position Position Follow-up Axis/spindle Sensor fixed Acknowl. Drive test
active measuring measuring mode /A2/ disable stop fixed stop movement
Axis and
/V1/ system 2 system 1 /A2/ /F1/ reached enable
spindle /A2/ /A2/ /F1/)
DBB 2 Reference point value /R1/ Clamping Delete Controller Cam

in progress distance-to- enable activation
Axis and
/A3/ go/ spindle /A2/ /N3/
spindle reset
/A2, S1/
4 3 2 1
DBB 3 Program Velocity/ Activate Activate Activate Activate Enable Accept

test axis/ spindle fixed feed fixed feed fixed feed fixed feed travel to external ZO
Axis and
spindle speed fixed stop /K2/
spindle release limitation 4 3 2 1 /F1/
/A3/ /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/,
/V1/ /V1/ /V1/ /V1/
DBB 4 Traversing keys /H1/ Rapid Traversing Feed Activate handwheel /H1/
Axis and traverse key disable stop/spindle
spindle override /H1/ stop /A2/
/H1/
plus minus 3 2 1
DBB 5 Machine function /H1/

Axis and
spindle Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
DBB 6 OEM axis signals

Axis and
spindle
DBB 7
DBB 8 Request Activation Allocate NC axis to channel

PLC signal with /K5/
axis/spindle change of
this byte
/K5/ /K5/ D C B A
Note
DBX8.4: is automatically reset after assignment.

DB Continuation: Signals to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK)

31-61
DBB 9 Lock Control parameter block /A2/
parameter
set
definition
from NC
/A2/
C B A
DBB 10 REPOS
DELAY
DBB 11 Start brake

test
DBB 12 Delay Modulo 2nd software limit switch Hardware limit switch
reference limit /A3/ /A3/
Axis
point enabled
approach
/R1/
DBB 13
Axis
DBB 14
Axis
DBB 15
Axis
DBB 16 Delete No n- Resyn- Resyn- Gear has Actual gear stage /S1/
S value monitoring chronize chronize changed
Spindle
/S1/ when spindle 1 spindle 2 over /S1/
changing /S1/ /S1/
gear /S1/
C B A
DBB 17 Invert Resyn- Resyn- Feedrate

M3/M4 chronize chronize override f.
Spindle
/S1/ spindle at spindle at spindle
pos. 2 /S1/ pos. 1 /S1/ valid /S1/
DBB 18 Setpoint rot. direct. /S1/ Oscillating Oscillation

speed via PLC
Spindle
/S1/ /S1/
CCW CW
DBB 19 Spindle override /V1/

Spindle
H G F E D C B A


31-61
DBB 20 Not used reserved Release Not used Not used Reserved ramp Not used
brake Yaskawa generator
Drive
quick stop
/A2/
1)
DBB 21 Pulse n controller Motor Motor selection /A2/ Drive parameter set selection
enable integrator Selection 0 … 7 /A2/
Drive
/A2/ disable done
/A2/ /A2/
1) B A C B A
DBB 22 Selection of Safe speed Deselect Deselect

safe safe
Safety
standstill velocity and
Integr. bit value 1 bit value 0 standstill
1)
DBB 23 Activate Activate Trans- Trans- Trans-

test stop end mission of mission of mission of
Safety
position bit value 2 bit value 1 bit value 0
Integr. pair 2
DBB 24 Master/ Bit value for Torque CC_Slave Control Stepper

slave on compensa- axis Axis motor
CTRLOUT_changed:
tion
1 0 controller
Change setpoint output ON Suppress Rotation
assignment (for compile link monitoring
cycles)
DBB 25
DBB 26 Enable Enable Comp-

ESR ensation
Grinding slave axis
response control ON
overlay
DBB 27 Stop Resume

Grinding HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS
DBB 28 PLC AxStop, Stop at Change Set AXRESUM AXRESET OscillAxExt

checks stop next reversal reversal E Reversal
Oscillation
axis /P5/ reversal point /P5/ point /P5/
point
/P5/
DBB 29 Disable Start

automatic gantry
Grinding
synchroni-
synchronization
zation Gantry
DBB 30 Position Autom. Start Start Stop

spindle gear step spindle spindle spindle
(Technolog
change
y) Counter- Clockwise
clockwise
1) See note at the end of this subsection


31-61
DBB 31 Track Disable Resynchro-
synchronis synchroni- nize
(Technolog
m zation
y)
DBB 32 Deselect Deselect Deselect Deselect

external external external external
Safety
stop E stop D stop C stop A
Integr. 1)
DBB 33 Select override
Safety Bit value 3 Bit value 2 Bit value 1 Bit value 0

Integr. 1)
DBB 34
DBB ...
DBB 56 Spindle Spindle Seperate

inside speed feed drive
clamping display as C axis
engaged
DBB 57
DBB 58 Internal data for CF 18
DBB 59
Note
The IS ”Delete distance-to-go” (DBX2.2) is effective only for position axes on

an axis-specific basis; the IS ”Delete distance-to-go” (DB21-30, DB6.2) acts
on a channel-specific basis. The IS ”Spindle reset” (DXB2.2) acts on a
spindle-specific basis.

DB Signals from axis/spindle (NCK→PLC)

31 -61
DBB 60 Position reached /B1/ References/ References/ Encoder Encoder NCU_Link Spindle
Axis and with exact with exact synchro- synchro- limit limit Axis active /no axis
spindle stop fine stop nizes nizes frequency frequency /S1/
/B3/
coarse 2 /R1/ 1 /R1/ exceeded exceeded
2 /A3/ 1 /A3/
DBB 61 Current Speed Position Axis/spindle Follow-up Axis ready Axial alarm Travel
controller controller controller stationary mode request
Axis and /B3/
active /A2/ active /A2/ active /A2/ (n < nmin) active /A2/ /F1/
spindle /A2/
DBB 62 Axis Force fixed Fixed stop Activate Measure- Revolutio- Handwheel Software
container stop limited reached travel to ment active nal overlay cams
rotation /F1/ /F1/ fixed stop feedrate active /H1/ active /N3/
/M5/
active /F1/ active
DBB 63 Stop Axis/ Axis stop PLC- AXRESET

spindle active controlled DONE
HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS
disable /P2/ axis /P2/
active active active active
active /P2/
DBB 64 Traverse command /H1/ Travel request Handwheel active /H1/

Axis and
spindle plus minus plus minus 3 2 1
65 Active machine function /H1/

Axis and
DB Continuation: Signals to axis/spindle (NCK → PLC)

31-61
DBB 66 OEM axis signals (reserved)
Axis and Activate
spindle monitoring
/TE6/
DBB 67
DBB 68 NC axis/spindle in channel /K5/

PLC axis/ Neutral axis/ Axis New type D C B A
spindle spindle replacement requested by
/K5/ /K5/ possible PLC
/K5/ /K5/
DBB 69 NCU number in NCU link network Control parameter block

C B A
DBB 70 Repos Repos shift Repos shift

delay quit valid
DBB 71 Brake test

active
DBB 72 REPOS
DELAY
DBB 73

DBB 74 Modulo
limit
enabled
active
DBB 75
DBB 76 Rounding Indexing Positioning Path axis Scratch

axis in axis in axis pulse
Axis
position position /P2/ /A2/
/T1/
DBB 77
DBB 78
Axis
F function (REAL format)
for positioning axis /V1/
DBB 82 Gear Setpoint gear stage /S1/

change-
Spindle over /S1/
C B A
DBB 83 Actual Speed Spindle in Support Geometry Set speed Set speed Speed limit
rotat. monitoring setpoint area limits monitoring increased limited exceeded
Spindle
direction /W1/ range /S1/ violated /W1/ /S1/ /S1/ /S1/
CW /S8/
/S1/


31-61
DBB 84 Active spindle operating mode /S1/ Tapping CLGON SUG active Const.
without active (grinding cutting
Spindle
compen- /S8/ wheel speed
sating surface active
chuck /S1/ speed)
Control Oscillation Positioning Synchro-
mode mode mode nous mode
DBB 85 Spindle in
Spindle position
DBB 86 M function (binary) for spindle /S1/

Spindle
DBD 88
Spindle
S function (floating-point) for spindle
/S1/
DBB 92 Not used reserved Motor Not used Not used Not used HLGSS Not used
brake active
Drive
released /A2/
1)
DBB 93 Enable n controller Drive Active motor /A2/ Active drive parameter set 0 … 7
Drive pulses integrator ready /A2/
/A2/ disabled /A2/
/A2/
1) B A C B A
DBB 94 reserved nact = nset |nact| < nx |nact| < Md < Mdx Ramp-up Temperature prewarning
Drive /A2/ /A2/ nmin /A2/ /A2/ complete /A2/
/A2/
1) Heat sink Motor
DBB 95 Limitation Speed Fall short Generator Fall short UDC-link <
Drive of power threshold of min. active of retract alarm
1) section I2T star/delta generator voltage threshold
voltage /A2/
DBB 96 Master/ Bit value for Master/ Master/ Master/ Axis (Stepper
slave active CTRLOUT_changed Slave Slave Slave control motor)
/TE3/ Compen- coarse fine active error
sation rotation
controller monitoring
activ /S6/
1 0
Change setpoint output
assignment (for compile
cycles)
DBB 97 Offset after Activate Activate Axis is

turn-on mirroring link slave axis
point /TE6/
/TE6/ /TE6/ /TE6/


31-61
DBB 98 Emergenc Accel. Speed Overlaid Actual Synchronism /S3/
Synchro- y retraction warning warning motion value
nous spindle active threshold threshold /S3/ coupling
reached reached /S3/
coarse fine
DBB 99 Emergenc Max. acce- Max. Synchro- Axis acce- Slave Master
Synchro- y retraction leration speed nization lerating spindle spindle
nous spindle enabled reached reached running active active
/S3/ /S3/
DBB 100 Oscillation Oscillation Spark-out Error in Oscillation OscillAxExt
Grinding active /P5/ motion active /P5/ oscillation cannot Reversal
active /P5/ /P5/ start /P5/ active
DBB 101 Gantry Gantry Gantry Gantry Gantry Gantry cut-
Gantry axis /G1/ leading grouping is synchroni- warning off limit
axis synchro- zation run limit exceeded
/G1/ nous ready to start exceeded /G1/
/G1/ /G1/ /G1/
DBB
102,103
DBB 104 Active infeed axis /P5/

Grinding
Axis 8 Axis 7 Axis 6 Axis 5 Axis 4 Axis 3 Axis 2 Axis 1

Axis 16 Axis 9
Axis 24 Axis 17

Axis 31 Axis 30 Axis 25
DBB 108 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated / /

1) Axis safely Status Safe
referenced pulses operational
deleted stop / safe
speed active

DB Continuation: Signals from axis/spindle (NCK → PLC)

31-61
DBB 109 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
Actual position > cam position
1) SC 4- SC 4+ SC 3- SC 3+ SC 2- SC 2+ SC 1- SC 1+

1) n < nx Safe velocity Safe velocity Safe zero
active bit active bit speed
value 1 value 0 active
DBB 111 Reserved for SINUMERIK Safety Integrated / /

1) Stop E Stop D Stop C Stop A/B

-114
Note
This note refers to the signal bytes marked with 1) in column 1 in the above
table.
These signal bytes are directly transferred to the interface independently of
any configured link communication.

2.2.15 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (DB 71)

DB 71 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (NCK→PLC)
DBB 0 Interface (I) active

I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB 1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
DBB 2,3
DBB n res. res. res. NC Position at Reload Unload Load

program loading
positions point
magazine
DBB
n+2 Assigned channel (8 bit Int)
DBB
n+3 Tool management no. (8 bit Int)
DBD
n+4 Unassigned parameter 1 (D word)
DBD
DBD
n + 12 Unassigned parameter 3 (D word)
DBW
n + 16 Identification for loading/unloading station (Int), (fixed value 9999)
DBW
n + 18 No. of loading station (Int)
DBW
n + 20 Magazine no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning (Int)
DBW
n + 22 Location no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning (Int)
DBW
n + 24 Magazine no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning (Int)
DBW
n + 26 Location no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning (Int)
DBW
n + 28 Reserved
Initial addresses of the loading/unloading stations:

Loading/unloading station 1: n= 4 Loading/unloading station 3: n= 64
Load interface 1 is responsible for spindle loading and reloading of tools, for relocating tools and for positioning at any
location (e.g. buffer).
References: /FBW/, ”Description of Functions Tool Management”

2.2.16 Interface for spindle as change position (DB 72)
DB 72 Signals from spindle (NCK→PLC)


I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB 1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
DBB 2,3
DBB n
res. Replace Replace OldT in T0 Prepare Perform Compul-
manual manual buffer no. change change sory
tool tool. (n-42) (initiate: change
M06)
DBB Unassigned
n+1
DBB
DBB
DBD
DBD
DBD
DBW Buffer identification (Int), (fixed value 9998)
(corresponds to ”Target position for new tool”)
n + 16
DBW Relative location (target) in the buffer (Int)
n + 18
DBW Magazine no. (source) for new tool (Int)
n + 20
DBW Location no. (source) for new tool (Int)
n + 22
DBW Magazine no. (target) for old tool (Int)
n + 24
DBW Location no. (target) for old tool (Int)
n + 26
DBW Tool new: location type (Int)
n + 28
DBW Tool new: size left (Int)
n + 30
DBW Tool new: size right (Int)
n + 32

DBW Tool new: size top (Int)

n + 34
DBW Tool new: size bottom (Int)
n + 36
DBW Tool status for tool new
n + 38
Tool was in Tool fixed Tool being Prewarning Tool Tool Tool Active tool
use location changed limit measured disabled enabled
coded reached
Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
Master tool to be to be ignore ID for tools
loaded unloaded disabled in buffer
DBW Tool new: T no. (Int)

n + 40
DBW If DBX (n+0.4) = 1, then buffer location of old tool is entered here.
n + 42
DBW Original magazine of new tool
n + 44
DBW Original location of new tool
n + 46
Initial addresses of the buffers:
Spindle 1: n= 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
References: /FBW/, ”Description of Functions, Tool Management”

2.2.17 Interface for circular magazine (DB 73)
DB73 Signals from circular magazine (NCK→PLC)


I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB 1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
DBB 2,3
DBB n
res. res. res. res. T0 res. Perform Obligatory
change change
(initiation:
T no.)
DBB Unassigned
n+1
DBB Assigned channel (8 bit Int)
n+2
DBB Tool management no. (8 bit Int)
n+3
DBD Unassigned parameter 1 (D word)
n+4
n+8
n + 12
DBW Reserved
n + 16
DBW Reserved
n + 18
DBW Circular magazine no. (Int)
n + 20
DBW Location no. for new tool (Int)
n + 22
DBW Reserved
n + 24
DBW Location no. for old tool (Int)
n + 26
n + 28


n + 30
n + 32
n + 34
n + 36
n + 38
coded reached

n + 40
DBW Original location of new tool in this circular magazine
n + 42
Initial addresses of the circular magazines: circular magazine 1: n = 4
2: n = 48
2.2.18 Signals to and from the machine control panel and HHU (840Di
with MCI2 only) (DB 77)
DB77 Signals to and from the machine control panel and HHU
DBB 0 to Input signals from MCP1 to PLC, MPI Bus (GD communication)
DBB 7
DBB 8 to Output signals from MCP1 to PLC, MPI Bus (GD communication)
DBB 15
DBD 16 Status send MCP1, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBD 20 Status receive MCP1, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB 24 Input signals from MCP2 to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
to
DBB 31
DBB 32 Output signals from MCP2 to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
to
DBB 39

DBB 48 to Input signals from HHU to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB 53
DBB 60 Output signals from PLC to HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)
to
DBB 79
DBD 80 Status Send HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBD 84 Status Receive HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)
FB1- parameter:
MCPNum :=1, //correct number of MCPs
MCP1In :=P#DB77.DBX0.0,
MCP1Out := P#DB77.DBX8.0,
MCP1StatSend := P#DB77.DBX16.0,
MCP1StatRec := P#DB77.DBX20.0,
MCPSDB210 := TRUE,
BHG: :=1; //handheld unit interface:
//0 - no HHU
//1 – HHU to MPI
//2 – HHU to OPI
BHGIn :=P#DB77.DBX48.0, //transmitted data of handheld unit
BHGOut: :=P#DB77.DBX60.0, //received data of handheld unit
BHGStatSend: :=P#DB77.DBX80.0, // status DW for transmitting handheld unit
BHGStatRec: :=P#DB77.DBX84.0, // status DW for receiving HHU

Für Notizen

07.05 3 Interface Signals
3
3 Interface Signals power line

3.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HPU)................................ 3-388
3.2.6 PLC messages (DB 2) ............................................................................ 3-389
3.2.7 Signals to NC (DB 10) ............................................................................ 3-393
3.2.8 Signals from/to NCK/MMC (DB 10) ........................................................ 3-398
3.2.19 Signals to/from ManualTurn, ShopMill, ShopTurn (DB 82) .................... 3-447

3 Interface Signals 07.05

Please find the descriptin of Data modules (DB) of the PLC application interface
in chapter 5.3.

General In the following list of interface signals, a reference to relevant documentation is

provided for every signal.
This reference specifies the section number or the short designation of the
description of functions, please refer to
References: /FB/, xx, ”yyy”
xx Short designation of individual description of functions (e.g.: /A2/)
yyy Name of description of functions (e.g.: ”Various interface signals”
or title of the guide)
Inverse signals Signals marked with a ”*” are so-called inverse signals. These signals initiate
the appropriate function when a 0 signal appears rather than a 1 signal (e.g.
MCP, byte n+2.0: *NC STOP).
• In STEP7, DBB means data module byte

Legend
• In STEP7, DBW means data module word (16 bits)
• In STEP7, DBD means data module double word (32 bits)

3.2.1 Signals from/to machine control panel, M version


IB n + 2 Key- Key- Spindle *Spindle Feed *Feed NC Start *NC Stop

switch switch start stop start stop
position 0 position 2
IB n + 3 Key- Feedrate override

switch
position 1
block
IB n + 4 Direction keys Keyswitch Direction keys

position 3
+ - Rapid x 4th axis 7th axis R10
R15 R13 traverse R1 R4 R7
R14
Y Z 5th axis Traverse R11 R9 8th axis 6th axis
R2 R3 R5 command R8 R6
MCS/WCS
R12

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8



QB n + 1 Feed *Feed NC Start *NC Stop Machine function

start stop
QB n + 2 Axis selection Single Spindle *Spindle

block start stop
Direction X 4th axis 7th axis R10
key R1 R4 R7
-
R13
Z 5th axis Travel R11 R9 8th axis 6th axis Direction
R3 R5 command R8 R6 key
MCS/WCS +
R12 R15
QB n + 4 Unassigned customer keys Y

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 R2

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
Note
With the SINUMERIK 840D, the machine control panel is assigned to the
input/output area by GP parameters; as a standard, initial address 0 is
specified for the input and output areas.
With FM-NC, the initial address is set via the SDB 210. For the supplied SDB
210, initial address 120 is specified. If another initial address is desired, this
must be specified via the STEP 7 Package Communication Configuration.
Configuration must be set on the machine control panel.

3.2.2 Signals from/to machine control panel, T version


IB n + 2 Keyswitch Keyswitch Spindle *Spindle Feed start *Feed stop NC Start *NC Stop
position 0 position 2 start stop

position 1
block
IB n + 4 Keyswitch Direction keys

position 3
R15 R13 R14 +Y -Z -C R10
R1 R4 R7
IB n + 5 Direction keys
+X +C Rapid Travel -Y -X +Z
R2 R3 traverse command R11 R9 R8 R6
override MCS/WCS
R5 R12

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8


QB n + 1 Feed start *Feed stop NC Start *NC Stop Machine function

QB n + 2 Direction keys Single Spindle *Spindle

block start stop
+Y -Z -C
R13 R1 R4 R7 R10
QB n + 3 Direction keys
Travel -Y -X +Z
R3 R5 command R11 R9 R8 R6 R15
MCS/WCS
QB n + 4 Unassigned customer keys Direction

key
+X

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 R2

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
3.2.3 Signals from/to slimline machine control panel
Signals from slimline machine control panel

(keys and switches)

*NC Stop SP - SP 100% SP + SINGLEB JOG MDA AUTOM.
IB n + 1 Spindle Keyswitch Machine function

NC Start SP right *SP Stop SP left SS 3 REF. REPOS Teach in
IB n + 2 Feedrate Keyswitch Machine functions

START *STOP var. INC SS 0 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

RESET SS 2 SS 1 E D C B A
IB n + 4 Direction keys Optional customer keys

traverse
R14
T17 KT5 6 5 4 Z Y X

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

Signals to slimline machine control panel

(LEDs)
QB n + 0 Spindle speed override Operating mode

NC Stop SP - SP 100 % SP + SINGLEB JOG MDA AUTOM.
QB n + 1 Spindle Machine function

NC Start SP right SP Stop SP left Unassigned REF. REPOS Teach in
QB n + 2 Feedrate Machine functions

START STOP var. INC Unassigned 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
QB n + 3 Unassigned
Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned
QB n + 4 Direction keys Optional customer keys

traverse
R14
T17 KT5 6 5 4 Z Y X

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
3.2.4 Signals from/to handheld unit (HHU)
Signals from handheld unit (keys)

(input display)
IB n + 0 Reserved
IB n + 1 Reserved
IB n + 2
T9 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1
IB n + 3
T16 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T9
IB n + 4
T24 T23 T22 T21
IB n + 5 Acknowl- Keyswitch Rapid traverse/feed override switch

edgement
Digital E D C B A
display

Signals to handheld unit (LEDs)

(Output display, LEDs)
QB n + 0 always 1
New data Line

for selection
QB n + 1 selected
line
QB n + 2
L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1
QB n + 3
L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9
HHU digital display
QB n + 4 1st character (right) of the selected line
QB n + 5 2nd character of the selected line
QB ...
QB n + 18 15th character of the selected line
QB n + 19 16th character (left) of the selected line
Note
With the SINUMERIK 840D, the handheld unit is connected to the OPI or
MCP interface of the PLC.
The initial addresses of the input/output areas and the activation must be set
via basic program parameter FB1. With the SINUMERIK 810D and FM-NC,
the handheld unit is connected to the MPI interface of the PLC.
The initial addresses of the input/output areas as well as the number of bytes
to be transferred must be specified via the STEP 7 Package Communication
Configuration.

Configuration must be set on the handheld unit.
The parameterization is described in the Installation and Start-Up Guide and

in the Description of Functions P3 ”Basic PLC program”.
References: /BH/, ”Operator Components Manual”

3.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HPU)
Signals from machine control panel simulation

Interface HPU→PLC


IB n + 2 JOG keys positive direction

If 1: Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
Ax1-Ax6=
Ax7-Ax12
IB n + 3 JOG keys negative direction

IB n + 4 Shift keys
IB n + 5 Shift keys
IB n + 6 Start key block

Res. HT 6 VAL+ VAL- SF2 SF1 START STOP
IB n + 7

Signals to machine control panel simulation

Interface PLC→HPU

QB n + 2 Axes 7–12 JOG keys positive direction
selected
QB n + 2
QB n + 3 JOG keys negative direction
For WCS: Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
No MCS
Ax4 to Ax6
QB n + 4 Shift keys
QB n + 5 Shift keys
QB n + 6 Start key block
VAL+ VAL- SF2 SF1 START STOP
QB n + 7
3.2.6 PLC messages (DB 2)
DB2 Signals for PLC messages (PLC→MMC), /P3/

Channel 1
0 510007 510006 510005 510004 510003 510002 510001 510000
Feed disable (alarm no.: 510000–510015)
1 510015 510014 510013 510012 510011 510010 510009 510008
2 Feed and read-in disable byte1 (alarm no.: 510100–510131)

Channel 2
18 520007 520006 520005 520004 520003 520002 520001 520000
Feed disable (alarm no.: 520000-520015)
19 520015 520014 520013 520012 520011 520010 520009 520008
20-23 Feed and read-in disable byte 1-4 (alarm no.: 520100–520131)
24-27 Read-in disable byte 1-4 (alarm no.: 520200–520231)
28-29 NC Start disable byte 1-2 (alarm no.: 520300–520315)
36-143 As from channel 3, please refer to the following table
Channel areas in DB2
Area Address Signal number

Channel 3 DBX 36.0 - DBX 47.7 530.000 - 530.231
Channel 4 DBX 54.0 - DBX 65.7 540.000 - 540.231
Channel 5 DBX 72.0 - DBX 83.7 550.000 - 550.231
Channel 6 DBX 90.0 - DBX 101.7 560.000 - 560.231
Channel 7 DBX 108.0 - DBX 119.7 570.000 - 570.231
Channel 8 DBX 126.0 - DBX 137.7 580.000 - 580.231
Channel 9, channel 10 in
SW 5 not implemented

Axis areas in DB2
Axis/spindle
144 600107 600106 600105 600104 600103 600102 600101 600100
Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600100-600015) for axis/spindle 1
145 600115 600114 600113 600112 600111 600110 600109 600108
Axes 19 -31 not implemented
User areas
User area 0 Bytes 1 - 8
180 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 700002 700001 700000
... User area 0 (alarm no.: 700000-700063)
187 700063 700062 700061 700060 700059 700058 700057 700056
...

Note
In DB2, the assignment is made between message/alarm number, text and

area identifier. All alarm or message bits are automatically transferred to the
user interface (channel, axis/spindle) through appropriate parameter settings.
If these parameter settings are not made, the bit transfer must be
programmed in the user program. The user interface can be further
influenced after the block for the error/operational messages has been called.
Only signals of the channels and axes declared in the NC machine data can
be transferred and texts displayed.
The user must acknowledge all error messages generated. Operational
messages are displayed only for as long as the relevant condition prevails.
The number of user areas can be parameterized via FB 1.
DB2/DB3 must be deleted after changing the configuration (FB1: MsgUser).
Definition of error and operational messages /P3/

Byte no. of DB2 / Error message EM or operational message OM
7 / EM 6 / EM 5 / OM 4 / OM 3 / EM 2 / EM 1 / OM 0 / EM
15 / OM 14 / EM 13 / OM 12 / EM 11 / OM 10 / EM 9 / OM 8 / OM
23 / OM 22 / OM 21 / EM 20 / EM 19 / OM 18 / EM 17 / OM 16 / EM
31 / OM 30 / EM 29 / OM 28 / EM 27 / OM 26 / OM 25 / EM 24 / EM
35 / OM 34 / EM 33 / OM 32 / EM
Example The alarms numbered from 510200 to 510207 can be generated via DB2,
DBB6 (read-in disable channel 1). These alarms are defined as error messages
as standard.

3.2.7 Signals to NC (DB 10)
On-board input and output signals from NCK

DBB 0 Disabling of digital NCK inputs /A2/ (SW 2 and higher)

DBB 1 Setting of digital NCK inputs from PLC (SW 2 and higher)

DBB2, 3
unas-
signed
DBB 4 Disabling of digital NCK outputs /A2/ (SW 2 and higher)
DBB 5 Overwrite screenform of digital NCK /A2/ outputs (SW 2 and higher)

DBB 6 Setting value of digital NCK outputs from PLC /A2/ (SW 2 and higher)

DBB 7 Input screenform of digital NCK outputs /A2/ (SW 2 and higher)

st
st
from SW 6
nd
from SW 6
nd
from SW 6

Note
#) Bits 4-7 of the digital input and NCK outputs can be processed by the PLC
even though there are no hardware I/Os available for this. Therefore, these
bits can be used in addition to the information exchange between NCK and
PLC.
§) On the 840D, the digital inputs and outputs 1 to 4 of the NCK are physically
on-board. On the FM-NC, there are no hardware I/Os for bit 0 to bit 3. These
can be processed by the PLC according to #).
The external I/O signals from the NCK have been shifted to the range starting
with DBB122.
General signals to NCK (DB10)

DBB 56 Keyswitch /A2/ Acknowl. EMER-

EMER- GENCY
GENCY STOP /N2/
STOP /N2/
Position 3 Position 2 Position 1 Position 0
DBB 57 PC INC inputs

shutdown in mode
Only 840Di group area
evaluated active
DBB
58 - 59
External digital inputs of the NCK (DB10)


DBB 122 Disable the external digital NCK inputs (SW 2 and higher)
DBB 123 Values from the PLC for the external digital NCK inputs (SW 2 and higher)

External digital outputs of the NCK (DB10)


DBB 130 Disable the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
DBB 131 Overwrite screenform for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
DBB 132 Value from the PLC for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
DBB 133 Default screenform for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)

Analog inputs of the NCK (external) (DB10)

DBB 146 Disable the analog NCK inputs
DBB 147 Specified analog value for NCK from PLC

DBB Unassigned
164,165

Analog outputs of the NCK (external) (DB10)
DB10 Signals to NCK (PLC -> NCK)

DBB 166 Overwrite screenform for the analog NCK outputs
DBB 167 Default screenform for the analog NCK outputs

DBB 168 Disable the analog NCK outputs

DBB 169 RESERVED

3.2.8 Signals from/to NCK/MMC (DB 10)
On-board NCK inputs and outputs (DB 10)
DB10 Signals from (NCK -> PLC)

DBB 60 Actual value of the digital ON-BOARD inputs of the
NCK (SW 2 and higher)
On-board inputs §)
Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1
DBB 61-63
DBB 64 Setpoint for the digital outputs of the NCK without Setpoint for the digital on-board outputs of the NCK
hardware
DBB 65-67 Unassigned
DBB 71 Modification counter inch/metric system of units
st
HT6 from Machine/ Valid

SW 6.1.51 Work display
nd
HT6 from Machine/ Valid

SW 6.1.51 Work display
st
MCP1AxisFromHMI
HT6 from
SW 6.1.51
nd
MCP2AxisFromHMI
HT6 from
SW 6.1.51
DBB 86 Reserved
DBB 88 Reserved

Note
#) Although no associated hardware I/Os exist, the PLC can process bits 4-7
of the digital inputs and NCK outputs. Consequently, these bits can also be
used to transfer information between the NCK and the PLC.
§) The digital inputs and outputs 1 to 4 of the NCK exist as on-board

hardware for the 840D. No hardware I/Os are available for bits 0-3 of the FM-
NC. In accordance with #), these can be processed by the PLC.
Selection/status signals from MMC (DB 10)

DBB 90
DBB 91
DBB 92 free
DBB 93 free
DBB 94 free
DBB 95 free
DBB 96 free

(SW 2 and higher)
MMC--> PLC
D C B A

(SW 2 and higher)
MMC--> PLC
D C B A

(SW 4.1 and higher)
MMC--> PLC
D C B A
DBB 100 Axis number for handwheel 1 /H1/ (SW 2 and

higher)
MMC--> PLC

DBB 101 Axis number for handwheel 2 /H1/ (SW 2 and

higher)
MMC--> PLC

DBB 102 Axis number for handwheel 3 /H1/ (SW 4.1 and
higher)

MMC--> PLC

DBB 103 MMC- MMC AT box Remote

101/102 tempera- ready diagnosis
MMC--> PLC
battery active
alarm ture limit /FBFE/

General signals from NCK (DB 10)

DBB 104 NCK CPU HHU MCP 2 MCP 1

ready /A2/ ready ready ready
DBB 105 Unassigned
DBB 106 EMERGEN

-CY STOP
active /N2/
DBB 107 Inch NCU-link Probe actuated /M4/

system active
Probe 2 Probe 1
DBB 108 NC ready Drive ready Drives in MMC-CPU MMC CPU MMC2
/A2/ /FBA/ cyclic Ready Ready CPU ready
(MMC to (MMC to
operation OPI) MPI) E_MMC2
/A2/ /A2/
Ready
DBB 109 NCK Air temp. Heat sink PC NCK

battery alarm temp. operating alarm
alarm /A2/ alarm present
/A2/ NCU 573 system /A2/
fault
DBB 110 Software cams minus (SW 2 and higher) /N3/

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DBB 111 Software cams minus (SW 2 and higher) /N3/

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
DBB 112 Software cams minus (SW 4.1 and higher) /N3/
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
DBB 113 Software cams minus (SW 4.1 and higher) /N3/
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
DBB 114 Software cams plus (SW 2 and higher) /N3/

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DBB 115 Software cams plus (SW 2 and higher) /N3/

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
DBB 116 Software cams plus (SW 4.1 and higher) /N3/
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
DBB 117 Software cams plus (SW 4.1 and higher) /N3/
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24

Note
Concerning NCK CPU Ready (DBX 104.7):
This signal is the sign-of-life monitoring function for the NC. It must be
included in the safety circuit of the machine.
Concerning MMC CPU1 READY (DBX 108.3 and DBX 108.2):
If the MMC is connected to the operator panel interface (X 101), bit 3 is set
(default). When connecting to the PG MPI interface (X 122), bit 2 is set.
External digital input and output signals of the NCK (DB 10)
DB 10 Signals from NCK (NCK→PLC), /A2/ (SW2 and higher)










Analog input and output signals of the NCK (DB 10)
DB 10 Signals from NCK (NCK→PLC), /A2/ (SW2 and higher)


3.2.9 Signals from/to mode group (DB 11)
Mode group-specific signals (DB 11)


Axes plus disable
spindle
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC

DBB 3
Note

DBB 4 Strobe mode

MMC--> PLC
JOG MDA AUTOM.

MMC--> PLC
REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB 6 All Mode Active operating mode

channels in group
reset state ready JOG MDA AUTOM.
DBB 7 Digitizing Active machine function
REF REPOS TEACH IN



Axes plus disable
spindle
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC

DBB 23 Unassigned
Note

DBB 24 Strobe mode

MMC--> PLC
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC

MMC--> PLC
REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB 26 All Mode Active operating mode

channels in group
reset state ready JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC
DBB 27 Digitizing Active machine function

/FBD/
(SW 2 and REF REPOS TEACH IN
higher)
DBB 28 Machine functions

Note
The other mode groups (mode group 3 to mode group 10) are also located in
DB 11 with the following initial bytes:
3.2.10 Signals for Safety SPL (safe programmable logic) (DB 18)
Parameterization section
References: /FBSI/, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
DB 18 Signals for Safety SPL (PLC → PLC)

DBB 0 INSEP valid (valid bit)
8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st
input byte input byte input byte input byte input byte input byte input byte input byte
DBB 1
DBB 2 OUTSEP valid (valid bit)

8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st
output byte output byte output byte output byte output byte output byte output byte output byte
DBB 3
DBW 4 INSEP_ADDR (address 1st input byte)
DBW 6 INSEP_ADDR (address 2nd input byte)
DBW 8 INSEP_ADDR (address 3rd input byte)
DBW 10 INSEP_ADDR (address 4th input byte)

DBW 20 OUTSEP_ADDR (address 1st output byte)
DBW 22 OUTSEP_ADDR (address 2nd output byte)
DBW 24 OUTSEP_ADDR (address 3rd output byte)
DBW 26 OUTSEP_ADDR (address 4th output byte)
DBB 36 Stop E SPL

READY
DBB 37
Data area / error

Data area for SPL inputs/outputs
DBD 38
DBD 42
DBD 46
DBD 50
Data area for user SPL
DBD 54
DBD 58
DBD 62
DBD 66


DBD 70
DBD 74
Difference in level between NCK and PLC for diagnostics

DBD 78
DBD 82
DBD 86
DBD 90
DBD 94
DBD 98
DBD 102
DBD 106
DBD 110
DBD 114
DBD 118 CMDSI
DBD 119 xxxxxxxx
DBD 120 Error number

0 = no error
1 - 320 = Signal number starting from SPL_DATA.INSEP [1]
DBD 124 Level indicator of cross-checking
(diagnostics option: how many SPL signals currently differ in level)

Supplementary data areas


Data area for single-channel inputs/outputs
$A_PLCSIOUT [1 .. 8]
DBB 128
DBB 129
DBB 130
DBB 131
$A_PLCSIIN [1.. 8]
DBB 132
$A_PLCSIIN [9 .. 16]
DBB 133
$A_PLCSIIN [17 .. 24]
DBB 134
$A_ PLCSIIN [25 .. 32]
DBB 135
SPL status
DBB 136
th th th th th st
DBB 138 8 input 7 input 6 input 5 input 4 input 3rd input 2nd input 1 input
DBB 139
th th th th th st
DBB 140 8 output 7 output 6 output 5 output 4 output 3rd output 2nd output 1 output
DBB 141
Teststop data
Number of axes per TeststopBlock 1 (NoOfAxisPerBlock[1])
DBB 142
to
DBB 149
Number of axes per TeststopBlock 8 (NoOfAxisPerBlock[8])
Pointer onto axis table 1 (BlockPointer[1])
DBB 150
to
DBB 157
Pointer onto axis table 8 (BlockPointer[8])
st
Safety axis table (AxisTable[1]) 1 axis
DBB 158
to
DBB 188
st
Safety axis table (AxisTable[31]) 31 axis

3.2.11 Signals from/to operator panel (DB 19)
DB 19 Signals to operator panel (PLC→MMC)

DBB 0 Actual Back up MMC Clear Clear Key Screen Screen

value in travel shutdown recall cancel disable darkening bright
WCS recorder alarms alarms /A2/ /A2/ /A2/
(for OEM
0=MCS
users)
/A2/
DBB 1 Reserved
DBW 2 Higraph first error display
DBW 4 Higraph first error display
DBB 8 Channel number of machine control panel to MMC
DBB 9 Reserved for selection Automatc OEM2 OEM1

tool
measure-
ment
DBB 10 PLC Hardkeys (Values 1 ... 255, Default: 0 )
DBB 11 Reserved for hardkey function expansions
DBB 12 RS-232 On RS-232 Off RS-232 RS-232 COM1 COM2 Res. Res.
External Stop
/A2/ /A2/ /A2/ /A2/
/A2/ /A2/
DBB 13 Load part Res. Disable

Select program Unload Teach
transfer
/A2/ /A2/ /A2/
DBB 14 0=act. FS RS-232 act. FS: Index of file to be transferred in the standard list.
1=pas. FS RS-232 pass. FS: Number of the control file for user file names.
DBB 15 RS-232 act. FS: Index that specifies the axis, channel or tool no.
RS-232 pass. FS: Index of the file to be transferred in the user list
DBB 16 1=pas FS Part program handling: Number of the control file for user file names.
DBB 17
Part program handling: Index of the file to be transferred in the user list
DBB 18 TO comp.
DBB 19 Reserved (signal counter)

DB 19 Signals from operator panel (MMC → PLC)

DBB 20 MCS/WCS Simulation Language Recall Cancel Cancel key Screen is
Change- active 2 switched alarm alarm actuated dark
over /A2/ HMI Emb. cleared cleared /A2/
/A2/ /A2/
MMC 103 MMC 103
/A2/ /A2/
DBB 21 Active MMC operating area
DBB 22 Displayed channel number from the MMC /A2/
DBB 23 Counter Main

spindle spindle
internal internal
voltage voltage
DBB 24 RS-232 status from PLC

RS-232 On RS-232 Off RS-232 RS-232 Com1 Com2 OK Error
External Stop active /A2/ active /A2/
/A2/ /A2/ /A2/ /A2/
/A2/ /A2/
DBB 25 Error RS-232 /A2/
DBB 26 Part program handling status /A2/

Select Load Unload Active Error OK Error
MMC 5.3
and higher;
6.1
DBB 27 Error program handling /A2/
DBW 28 Mask number for "Extend user interface" /IAM/, BE1
DBB 30 Control bits PLC --> MMC
Exit mask Request

mask
DBB 31 Control bits PLC --> MMC

Inactive bit Error, Not Mask Mask Mask Mask
possible to exited active requested request
request accepted
mask
DBB 32 FunctionSelectionNo. from PLC
PLC>MMC Busy Strobe

function function
PLC>MMC
PLC>MMC

PLC>MMC
DBB 36 Error code for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 32)
MMC>PLC
MMC>PLC
MMC>PLC
MMC>PLC
DBB40-47 used internally

DBB 48 PLC-Busy HMI-Strobe FunctionSelectionNo. from MMC
function function
MMC>PLC
DBB 49 Error code for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB48)
PLC>MMC
Interface 2nd MMC
DBB Assignment as for DBB 0 to DBB 49

50-99
Switchover interface to MMC
Knocking interface (MMC announces itself to NCU)
DBW 100 ONL_REQUEST /B3/

Online request from MMC
MMC writes its client identification as online request
(bit 8-15: bus type, bit 0-7: MMC bus address)
DBW 102 ONL_CONFIRM /B3/

Acknowledgment from PLC to online request
PLC writes MMC client identification as acknowledgment (bus type, MMC bus address;
as with DBW 100).
DBW 104 PAR_CLIENT_IDENT /B3/
MMC writes its client identification (bus type, MMC bus address; as with DBW 100).
DBB 106 PAR_MMC_TYP /B3/

Type of MMC as per NETNAMES.INI: Main / subordinate operator panel / server /...
DBB 107 PAR_MSTT_ADR /B3/

MMC writes address of MCP to be activated; 255, when no MCP activated
DBB 108 PAR_STATUS /B3/

PLC writes online enable for MMC.

DBB 109 PAR_Z_INFO /B3/

PLC writes additional info about status
DBB 110 M_TO_N_ALIVE

Sign of life from PLC to MMC through M to N block
Online interface MMC 1 (user)

PLC writes PAR_CLIENT_IDENT to MMCx_CLIENT_IDENT when MMC goes online.

PLC writes PAR_MMC_TYP to MMCx_TYP when MMC goes online.

PLC writes PAR_MSTT_ADR to MMCx_MSTT_ADR when MMC goes online.


DBB 126 MMC1 MMC1 MMC1 MMC1 MMC1 MMC1
ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE MCP SHIFT
DENIED CHANGED PERM REQ SHIFT LOCK
/B3/ /B3/ /B3/ /B3/ LOCK /B3/
/B3/
DBB Reserved
127-129

Online Interface MMC 2 (user)

PLC writes PAR_CLIENT_IDENT to MMCx_CLIENT_IDENT when MMC goes online.

PLC writes PAR_MMC_TYP to MMCx_TYP when MMC goes online.

PLC writes PAR_MSTT_ADR to MMCx_MSTT_ADR when MMC goes online.


DBB 136 MMC2 MMC2 MMC2 MMC2 MMC2 MMC2

ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE MCP SHIFT
DENIED CHANGED PERM REQ SHIFT LOCK
/B3/ /B3/ /B3/ /B3/ LOCK /B3/
/B3/
DBB Reserved
137-139
DBB Code carrier input parameters

140-197
DBB Code carrier return parameters
198-249
DBB Commands
250-255
DBB Commands for Paramtm.exe
256-267
DBW Traffic light status
268
DBW Counter[1 ... 32]
270 to
394

3.2.12 PLC machine data (DB 20)
DB 20 PLC machine data (PLC→operator)

DBW 0 INT values
DBW
DBW INT values
DBB Bit arrays
DBB
DBB Bit arrays
DBD REAL values
DBD
DBD REAL values
Note
The initial and end addresses of the PLC machine data areas depend on the
respective length indications of the partial areas. In general, the integer
values start with the data byte 0. The upper limit is determined by the
corresponding length indication. In general, the following bit arrays (2-decade
hexadecimal numbers on input) start with the following even address. The
real values follow directly the bit arrays and also start with an even address.

3.2.13 Signals from/to NCK channel (DB 21–30)

21 - 30
DBB 0 Activate Activate Activate Activate

dry run M01 single DRF /H1/
feedrate /K1/ block /K1/
/V1/
DBB 1 Activate PLC action CLC CLC stop Time Synchron- Enable Activate
program complete override /TE1/ monitoring ized action protection referencing
test /K1/ /TE1/ act. (tool OFF zones /R1/
/K1/ manage- /A3/
/FBSY/
ment)
DBB 2 Skip block /K1/

/7 /6 /5 /4 /3 /2 /1 /0

Manual Stroke Stroke not Stroke Manual Stroke
release of delayed operating suppres- stroke enable /N4/
stroke 2 /N4/ /N4/ sion /N4/ enable /N4/

H G F E D C B A
DBB 5 Rapid traverse override /V1/

H G F E D C B A
DBB 6 Feedrate Rapid Program Delete Delete Read-in Feed

override traverse level abort subroutine distance- disable disable
active /V1/ override /K1/ no. of to-go /K1/ /V1/
active /V1/ passes /A2/
DBB 7 Reset NC Stop NC Stop NC Stop to NC Start NC Start

/K1/ axes plus /K1/ block limit /K1/ disable
spindle /K1/ /K1/
/K1/
DBB 8 Activate machine-related protection area /A3/ (SW 2 and higher)

DBB 9 Activate machine-related protection area /A3/ (SW 2 and higher)

Area 10 Area 9
DBB 10 Activate channel-specific protection area /A3/ (SW 2 and higher)

Activate channel-specific protection area /A3/ (SW 2 and higher)
DBB 11 Area 10 Area 9

Note
on Feedrate override active (DBX6.7)
even if feedrate override is not active (= 100%), the setting 0% is effective.
on Feedrate override (DBB 4)
on Rapid traverse override (DBB 5)
on Activate single block (DBX0.4)
select variant via ”Write variable”.
on Delete distance-to-go (DBX6.2)
effects only path axes and not positioning axes
Control signals to geometry axes

override /H1/
/H1/
+ - 3 2 1


override /H1/
/H1/
+ - 3 2 1


override /H1/
/H1/
+ - 3 2 1


Note
about machine function: machine function only defined when signal "INC
inputs in mode group area active" (DB10.DBX57.0) is not set.
Operating signals from MMC/status signals from NC channel
DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC,

21-30 MMC→PLC, PLC→NCK)
DBB 24 Dry run M01 Select DRF

feedrate selected NCK- selected
MMC--> PLC
selected /K1/ related /H1/
/V1/ M01
DBB 25 Program REPOS Feedrate REPOSPATHMODE

test MODE override for
MMC--> PLC
selected EDGE rapid
/K1/ traverse 2 1 0
selected
/V1/
DBB 26 Skip block selected /K1/ (SW 2 and higher)
MMC--> PLC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DBB 27 Skip block Skip block
selected selected
MMC--> PLC
/K1/ /K1/
(SW 2 and (SW 2 and
higher) higher)
DBB 28 OEM channel signals
PLC→NCK
DBB 29 Do not Switch off Switch off Activate Activate Activate Activate Activate
fixed feed fixed feed fixed feed fixed feed
PLC→NCK disable wear workpiece PTP
4 3 2 1
tool monitoring counter motion /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/,
/V1/ /V1/ /V1/ /V1/
(SW 4 and (SW 4 and (SW 4 and (SW 4 and
higher) higher) higher) higher)

DBB 30 Activate contour handwheel

PLC→NCK
No tool Activate Neg. Simulation Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel
change NCK- direction contour 3 2 1
commands related simulation handwheel
M01 contour on
handwheel
/H2/
DBB 31 REPOSPATHMODE
PLC→NCK
Skip block Skip block REPOS 2 1 0
active /9 active /8 MODE
EDGE
DBB 32 Last action M00/M01 Approach Action Execution
NCK--> PLC block active block block from external
active /K1/ /K1/ active /K1/ active /K1/ source
active
DBB 33 Program Transforma M02/M30 Block Handwheel Revolutio- Orientable Referencing
NCK--> PLC test active tion active active search override nal toolholder active
/K1/ /K1/M1 /K1/ active active (SW 2 feedrate active /R1/
/K1/ and higher) active /V1/
/H1/
DBB 34 OEM channel signals feedback
NCK--> PLC
DBB 35 Channel status /K1/ Program status /K1/

NCK--> PLC
Reset Interrupted Active Aborted Interrupted Stopped Waiting Running
DBB 36 NCK alarm Channel- Channel Interrupt All axes All axes
NCK--> PLC with specific ready processing stationary requiring
processing NCK alarm for active /B1/ reference
stop present operation /K1/ points are
present /A2/ in SW 4 referenced
/A2/ and higher /R1/
DBB 37 Stop Read-in CLC CLC CLC Contour handwheel active
NCK--> PLC
at block enable is stopped stopped active Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel
end with ignored upper limit lower limit /TE1/ 3 2 1
SBL is sup- /TE1/ /TE1/ /H1/ /H1/ /H1/
pressed
NCK--> PLC
Acknowl. Stroke
manual enable
stroke active /N4/
enable /N4/
DBB 39 Protection
NCK--> PLC zones not
guaranteed

Note
on Feedrate override for rapid traverse selected (DBX25.3)
Depending on this signal, the basic PLC program copies the feedrate override
onto the rapid traverse override on the channel-specific interface.
On Program test selected (DBX25.7)
”Program test selected” means axis disable for all channel axes and spindles.
Status signals of geometry axes

21 - 30


DBB 44
MMC--> PLC


DBB 50
MMC--> PLC



DBB 56
MMC-->
PLC
DBB 57
Change signals on auxiliary function transfer from NC channel
DB

change change change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/
not not not not not
decoded decoded decoded decoded decoded
DBB 60 S fct. 3 S fct. 2 S fct. 1 S fct. 3 S fct. 2 S fct. 1
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/
DBB 61 T fct 3 T fct. 2 T fct. 1 T fct. 3 T fct. 2 T fct. 1
(SW 2 and (SW 2 and /H2/
higher) higher)
DBB 62 D fct. 3 D fct. 2 D fct. 1 D fct. 3 D fct. 2 D fct. 1
(SW 2 and (SW 2 and /H2/
higher) higher)
DBB 63 DL fct. DL fct.
quick change
DBB 64 H fct. 3 H fct. 2 H fct. 1 H fct. 3 H fct. 2 H fct. 1
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/
change change change change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/
quick quick quick quick quick
quick quick quick quick quick quick
Note
For 10-decade T numbers, only the T fct. 1 change signal is available. For
5-decade D numbers, only the D fct. 1 change signal is available.

Transferred M/S functions
DB

DBD 70
M function 1 (binary) /H2/
Note
M functions are programmed in the part program in the INTEGER format
(8 decades plus sign).
”REAL format” means: 24 bit mantissa and 8 bit exponent.

Transferred T/D/DL functions

21 - 30
DBW 118 T function 1 (binary) /H2/

For 8-decade T nos., T function 1 (32 bit DINT) is used in DBD 118 (see note)
DBD 118
DBB 128
DBB 129 D function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBW 130 For 5-decade D nos., D function 1 (16 bit DINT) is used in DBD 130 (see note)
Extended address D function 2 (8 bit Int)
DBB 130
DBB 132 Extended address D function 3 (8 bit Int)
DBW 134 Extended address DL function (16 bit Int)
DBD 136 DL function (REAL)
Note
With active tool management, programmed T functions are not output to the
PLC.
8-decade T nos. are only available as T function 1
Programmed D functions with names (e.g. D=CUTEDGE_1) cannot be
output in ASCII format to the PLC.
5-decade D nos. are only available as D function 1
The REAL format corresponds to floating point representation in STEP 7
(24 bit mantissa and 8 bit exponent). This floating point format supplies a
maximum of 7 valid places.

Transferred H/F functions
DB

Note
F functions are programmed in the part program in the REAL format.

The extended address of the F function contains an identifier with the
following meaning:
0 = path feed,
1-31 = machine axis number for feed with positioning axes.
The H function data type is dependent on MD 22110: AUXFU_H_TYPE_INT.

Decoded M signals (M0–M99)

21 - 30
DBB 194 Dynamic M functions

M07 M06 M05 * M04 * M03 * M02 M01 M00

M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08

M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

M39 M38 M37 M36 M35 M34 M33 M32

M47 M46 M45 M44 M43 M42 M41 M40

M55 M54 M53 M52 M51 M50 M49 M48

M63 M62 M61 M60 M59 M58 M57 M56

M71 M70 * M69 M68 M67 M66 M65 M64

M79 M78 M77 M76 M75 M74 M73 M72

M87 M86 M85 M84 M83 M82 M81 M80

M95 M94 M93 M92 M91 M90 M89 M88

M99 M98 M97 M96
DBB 207
Note
M functions marked with * are not decoded in this bit array if a spindle is
configured in the channel. In this case, these M functions are offered as
extended M functions in DB21-30.DBB68 ff. and in the relevant axis DB
DB31-61.DBB86 ff.
Dynamic M functions (M00 to M99) are decoded by the basic PLC program.
The PLC user must use dynamic M functions in order to generate static M
functions.

Active G functions
21 - 30
...
DBB 270 Number of active G function of G function group n-1 (binary) /K1/
DBB 271 Number of active G function of G function group n (binary) /K1/
Note
The active G functions of the groups are updated each time a G function or a
mnemonic identifier (e.g. SPLINE) is programmed.
G functions within a G group are output as binary value, starting with 1.
A G function with the value 0 means that no G function is active for this G
group.

Signals for protection areas from NC channel
DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC) (SW 2 and higher)

21 - 30
Area 10 Area 9
Area 10 Area 9

Area 10 Area 9


Area 10 Area 9

Instruction-controlled signals to NC channel

DB Signals to NCK channel (NCK→PLC) (SW 4 and higher)
21 - 30
DBB 280 Synch. Reserved

action
disable
request
DBB 281 Synch.

action
disabled
DBW 282 Reserved
DBW 284 Reserved
DBW 286 Reserved
DBW 288 Reserved
DBW 290 Reserved
DBW 292 Reserved
DBW 294 Reserved
DBW 296 Reserved
DBW 298 Reserved
Note
The request signals are set by the user and reset by the basic program after
transmission of the corresponding data.

Instruction-controlled signals from NC channel
DB
21 - 30 Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC) (SW 4 and higher)





Nr. 40 Nr. 39 Nr. 38 Nr. 37 Nr. 36 Nr. 35 Nr. 34 Nr. 33



Cyclic Signals interface NCK Æ PLC
DBB 316 Active G functions

G0 PATH G00 geo.
DBB 317
Tool PTP Travel Workpiece External
missing motion request setpoint language
active drive test reached mode
active
DBB 318
Overstore Dry-run Associated Stop TOFF TOFF Search ASUP
active feedrate M01 delayed movement active active stopped
active /V1/ active /H2/ active /K1/ /K1/
DBB 319
No tool Stop-delay- Repos Delay FTS Repos Repos Repos REPOS
change range not DEFERRA Path Mode Path Mode Path Mode MODE
command activated L Chan Ackn 2 Ackn 1 Ackn 0 EDGE
active ACKN

Signals to orientation axes

21 - 30
+ − Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel

traverse key disable
− − (bit value coding)
override



traverse key
stop (bit value coding)
override
disable


key
traverse stop (bit value coding)
disable
override

Signals from orientation axes

21 - 30


(bit value coding)




Tool management functions from NC channel

21 - 30
Modification signals tool management functions
DBB 344 Last Transfer to Tool limit Tool pre-

replace- new value warning
ment tool replace- reached limit
of tool ment tool reached
group
DBB
345-347
Transferred tool management functions
DBD 348 T number for tool prewarning limit (DInt)
DBD 352 T number for tool limit value (DInt)
DBD 356 T number of new replacement tool (DInt)
DBD 360 T number of last replacement tool (DInt)

Signals from/to NC channel

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC, PLC →NCK)
21 - 30
DBB 364
DBB 365
DBB 366
DBB 367
CH_OEM_TECHNO_SIG_IN (DBB368 - 371)
DBB 368
DBB 369
DBB 370
DBB 371
DBB 372 CH_OEM_TECHNO_SIG_OUT (DBB372 - 375)
DBB 373
DBB 374
DBB 375
DBB 376 ProgEventDisplay
DBB 377
DBB 378
DBB 379
DBB 380
DBB 381
DBB 382
DBB 383

3.2.14 Signals from/to axis/spindle (PLC→NCK) (DB 31–DB 61)
DB Signals to axis/spindle (PLC→NCK)

31 -61

Axis and
spindle H G F E D C B A
DBB 1 Override Position Position Follow-up Axis/spindle Sensor fixed Acknowl. Drive test
active measuring measuring mode /A2/ disable stop fixed stop movement
Axis and
/V1/ system 2 system 1 /A2/ /F1/ reached enable
spindle /A2/ /A2/ (SW 2 and /F1/ (SW 2
higher) and higher))
DBB 2 Reference point value /R1/ Clamping Delete Controller Cam

in progress distance-to- enable activation
Axis and
/A3/ go/ spindle /A2/ /N3/
spindle reset (SW 2 and
/A2, S1/ higher)
4 3 2 1
DBB 3 Program Velocity/ Activate Activate Activate Activate Enable Accept

test axis/ spindle fixed feed fixed feed fixed feed fixed feed travel to external ZO
Axis and
spindle speed fixed stop /K2/ (SW 2
spindle release limitation 4 3 2 1 /F1/ SW 2 and higher)
/A3/ /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/, and higher)
/V1/ (SW 4 /V1/ (SW 4 /V1/ (SW 4 /V1/ (SW 4
and higher) and higher) and higher) and higher)
DBB 4 Traversing keys /H1/ Rapid Traversing Feed Activate handwheel /H1/
Axis and traverse key disable stop/spindle
spindle override /H1/ stop /A2/
/H1/
plus minus 3 2 1
DBB 5 Machine function /H1/

Axis and
DBB 6 OEM axis signals

Axis and
spindle
DBB 7
DBB 8 Request Activation Allocate NC axis to channel

PLC signal with /K5/
axis/spindle change of
this byte
/K5/ /K5/ D C B A
Note
DBX8.4: is automatically reset after assignment (SW 3.7, 4.2 and higher). For
previous SW versions, the activation signal must be applied until the
assignment is made (DBB68).


31-61
DBB 9 Lock Control parameter block (SW4 and
parameter higher) /A2/
set
definition
from NC
/A2/
C B A
DBB 10 REPOS
DELAY
DBB 11 Start brake

test
DBB 12 Delay Modulo 2nd software limit switch Hardware limit switch
reference limit /A3/ /A3/
Axis
point enabled
approach
/R1/
DBB 13
Axis
DBB 14
Axis
DBB 15
Axis
DBB 16 Delete No n- Resyn- Resyn- Gear has Actual gear stage /S1/
S value monitoring chronize chronize changed
Spindle
/S1/ when spindle 1 spindle 2 over /S1/
changing /S1/ /S1/
gear /S1/
C B A
DBB 17 Invert Resyn- Resyn- Feedrate

M3/M4 chronize chronize override f.
Spindle
/S1/ spindle at spindle at spindle
pos. 2 /S1/ pos. 1 /S1/ valid /S1/
DBB 18 Setpoint rot. direct. /S1/ Oscillating Oscillation

speed via PLC
Spindle
/S1/ /S1/
CCW CW
DBB 19 Spindle override /V1/

Spindle
H G F E D C B A


31-61
DBB 20 Speed Torque Ramp- Runup
setpoint limit 2 function change-
611D
smoothing /A2/ generator over U/f
/A2/ interface mode
/A2/ /DE1/
1)
DBB 21 Pulse n controller Selecting Motor selection /A2/ Drive parameter set selection /A2/
enable integrator motor
611D
/A2/ disable /A2/
/A2/
1) B A C B A
DBB 22 Selection of Safe speed Deselect Deselect

safe safe
Safety
standstill velocity and
Integr. bit value 1 bit value 0 standstill
1)
DBB 23 Activate Activate Trans- Trans- Trans-

test stop end mission of mission of mission of
Safety
position bit value 2 bit value 1 bit value 0
Integr. pair 2
DBB 24 Master/ Bit value for Torque CC_Slave Control Stepper

slave on compensa- axis Axis motor
CTRLOUT_changed:
tion
1 0 controller
Change setpoint output ON Suppress Rotation
assignment (for compile link monitoring
cycles)
DBB 25
DBB 26 Enable Enable Comp-

ESR ensation
Grinding slave axis
response control ON
overlay
DBB 27 Stop Resume

Grinding HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS
DBB 28 PLC AxStop, Stop at Change Set AXRESUM AXRESET

checks stop next reversal reversal E
Oscillation
axis /P5/ reversal point /P5/ point /P5/
(SW 2 and point (SW 2 and (SW 2 and
higher) /P5/ (SW 2 higher) higher)
and higher)
DBB 29 Disable Start

automatic gantry
Grinding
synchroni-
synchronization
zation Gantry
DBB 30 Position Autom. Start Start Stop

spindle gear step spindle spindle spindle
(Technolog
change
y) Counter- Clockwise
clockwise


31-61
DBB 31 Track Disable Resynchro-
synchronis synchroni- nize
(Technolog
m zation
y)
DBB 32 Deselect Deselect Deselect Deselect

external external external external
Safety
stop E stop D stop C stop A
Integr. 1)
DBB 33 Select override
Safety Bit value 3 Bit value 2 Bit value 1 Bit value 0

Integr. 1)
DBB 34
DBB ...
DBB 59
Note
The IS ”Delete distance-to-go” (DBX2.2) is effective only for position axes on

an axis-specific basis; the IS ”Delete distance-to-go” (DB21-30, DB6.2) acts
on a channel-specific basis. The IS ”Spindle reset” (DXB2.2) acts on a
spindle-specific basis.
DB Signals from axis/spindle (NCK→PLC)

31 -61
DBB 60 Position reached /B1/ References/ References/ Encoder Encoder NCU_Link Spindle
Axis and with exact with exact synchro- synchro- limit limit Axis active /no axis
spindle stop fine stop nizes nizes frequency frequency /S1/
/B3/
coarse 2 /R1/ 1 /R1/ exceeded exceeded
2 /A3/ 1 /A3/
DBB 61 Current Speed Position Axis/spindle Follow-up Axis ready Axial alarm Travel
controller controller controller stationary mode request
Axis and /B3/
active /A2/ active /A2/ active /A2/ (n < nmin) active /A2/ /F1/
spindle /A2/
DBB 62 Axis Force fixed Fixed stop Activate Measure- Revolutio- Handwheel Software
container stop limited reached travel to ment active nal overlay cams
rotation /F1/ (SW /F1/ fixed stop feedrate active /H1/ active /N3/
/M5/
active 5.2) (SW 2 and /F1/ (SW 2 active (SW 2 and (SW 2 and
higher) and higher) higher) higher)
DBB 63 Stop Axis/ Axis stop PLC- AXRESET

spindle active controlled DONE
HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS
disable /P2/ axis /P2/
active /P2/
DBB 64 Traverse command /H1/ Travel request Handwheel active /H1/

Axis and
spindle plus minus plus minus 3 2 1
65 Active machine function /H1/

Axis and


31-61
DBB 66 OEM axis signals (reserved)
Axis and Activate
spindle monitoring
/TE6/
DBB 67
DBB 68 NC axis/spindle in channel /K5/

PLC axis/ Neutral axis/ Axis New type D C B A
spindle spindle replacement requested by
/K5/ /K5/ possible PLC
/K5/ /K5/
DBB 69 NCU number in NCU link network Control parameter block

C B A
DBB 70 Repos Repos shift Repos shift

delay quit valid
DBB 71 Brake test

active
DBB 72 REPOS
DELAY
DBB 73
DBB 74 Modulo
limit
enabled
active
DBB 75
DBB 76 Rounding Indexing Positioning Path axis Scratch

axis in axis in axis pulse
Axis
position position /P2/ /A2/
/T1/
DBB 77
DBB 78
Axis
F function (REAL format)
for positioning axis /V1/
DBB 82 Gear Setpoint gear stage /S1/

change-
Spindle over /S1/
C B A
DBB 83 Actual Speed Spindle in Support Geometry Set speed Set speed Speed limit
rotat. monitoring setpoint area limits monitoring increased limited exceeded
Spindle
direction /W1/ range /S1/ violated /W1/ /S1/ /S1/ /S1/
CW (SW 2 and /S8/ (SW 2 and
/S1/ higher) (SW 2 and higher)
higher)


31-61
DBB 84 Active spindle operating mode /S1/ Tapping CLGON SUG active Const.
without active (grinding cutting
Spindle
compen- /S8/ wheel speed
sating (SW 2 and surface active
chuck /S1/ higher) speed)
Control Oscillation Positioning Synchro-
mode mode mode nous mode
DBB 85 Spindle in
Spindle position
DBB 86 M function (binary) for spindle /S1/

Spindle
DBD 88
Spindle
S function (floating-point) for spindle
/S1/
DBB 92 RLI Speed Torque HLGSS Set-up

setpoint limit 2 active mode
611D active
smoothing active /A2/ /A2/ active /A2/
active /A2/
1)
DBB 93 Enable n controller Drive Active Active drive parameter set /A2/
611D pulses integrator ready motor /A2/
/A2/ disabled /A2/
/A2/
1) B A C B A
DBB 94 Variable nact = nset |nact| < nx |nact| < Md < Mdx Ramp-up Temperature prewarning
611D signaling /A2/ /A2/ nmin /A2/ /A2/ complete /A2/
fct. /A2/ /A2/
1) Heat sink Motor
DBB 95 Limitation UDC-link <
611D of power alarm
1) section I2T threshold
/A2/
DBB 96 Master/ Bit value for Master/ Master/ Master/ Axis (Stepper
slave active CTRLOUT_changed Slave Slave Slave control motor)
/TE3/ Compen- coarse fine active error
sation rotation
controller monitoring
activ /S6/
1 0
Change setpoint output
assignment (for compile
cycles)
DBB 97 Offset after Activate Activate Axis is

turn-on mirroring link slave axis
point /TE6/
/TE6/ /TE6/ /TE6/


31-61
DBB 98 Emergenc Accel. Speed Overlaid Actual Synchronism (SW 2 and
Synchro- y retraction warning warning motion value higher) /S3/
nous spindle active threshold threshold /S3/ (SW2 coupling
reached reached and higher) /S3/ (SW2
and higher)
coarse fine
DBB 99 Emergenc Max. acce- Max. Synchro- Axis acce- Slave Master
Synchro- y retraction leration speed nization lerating spindle spindle
nous spindle enabled reached reached running active active
(SW 2 and (SW 2 and
higher) higher)
/S3/ /S3/
DBB 100 Oscillation Oscillation Spark-out Error in Oscillation
Grinding active /P5/ motion active /P5/ oscillation cannot
(SW 2 and active /P5/ /P5/ start /P5/
higher)
DBB 101 Gantry Gantry Gantry Gantry Gantry Gantry cut-
Gantry axis /G1/ leading grouping is synchroni- warning off limit
(SW 2 and axis synchro- zation run limit exceeded
higher) /G1/ nous ready to start exceeded /G1/
/G1/ /G1/ /G1/
DBB
102,103

Grinding
(SW2 and
higher) Axis 8 Axis 7 Axis 6 Axis 5 Axis 4 Axis 3 Axis 2 Axis 1

Axis 16 Axis 9
Axis 24 Axis 17

Axis 31 Axis 30 Axis 25
DBB 108 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated / /

1) Axis safely Status Safe
referenced pulses operational
deleted stop / safe
speed active

DB Continuation: Signals from axis/spindle (NCK → PLC)
31-61
Actual position > cam position
1) SC 4- SC 4+ SC 3- SC 3+ SC 2- SC 2+ SC 1- SC 1+

1) n < nx Safe velocity Safe velocity Safe zero
active bit active bit speed

value 1 value 0 active

1) Stop E Stop D Stop C Stop A/B
Note
This note is refers to the signal bytes marked with 1) in column 1 in the above
table.
These signal bytes are directly transferred to the interface independently of
any configured link communication.

3.2.15 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (DB 71)

DB 71 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (NCK→PLC)

I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB 1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
DBB 2,3
DBB n res. res. res. NC Position at Reload Unload Load

program loading
positions point
magazine
DBB
DBB
DBD
DBD
DBD
DBW
n + 16 Identification for loading/unloading station (Int), (fixed value 9999)
DBW
n + 18 No. of loading station (Int)
DBW
n + 20 Magazine no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning (Int)
DBW
n + 22 Location no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning (Int)
DBW
n + 24 Magazine no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning (Int)
DBW
n + 26 Location no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning (Int)
DBW
n + 28 Reserved
Initial addresses of the loading/unloading stations:

Load interface 1 is responsible for spindle loading and reloading of tools, for relocating tools and for positioning at any
location (e.g. buffer).
References: /FBW/, ”Description of Functions Tool Management”

3.2.16 Interface for spindle as change position (DB 72)
DB 72 Signals from spindle (NCK→PLC)


I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB 1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
DBB 2,3
DBB n
res. Replace Replace OldT in T0 Prepare Perform Compul-
manual manual buffer no. change change sory
tool tool. (n-42) (initiate: change
M06)
DBB Unassigned
n+1
DBB
DBB
DBD
DBD
DBD
DBW Buffer identification (Int), (fixed value 9998)
(corresponds to ”Target position for new tool”)
n + 16
DBW Relative location (target) in the buffer (Int)
n + 18
DBW Magazine no. (source) for new tool (Int)
n + 20
DBW Location no. (source) for new tool (Int)
n + 22
DBW Magazine no. (target) for old tool (Int)
n + 24
DBW Location no. (target) for old tool (Int)
n + 26
n + 28
n + 30
n + 32

n + 34
n + 36
n + 38
coded reached

n + 40
DBW If DBX (n+0.4) = 1, then buffer location of old tool is entered here.
n + 42
DBW Original magazine of new tool (SW 6.4 and higher)
n + 44
DBW Original location of new tool (SW 6.4 and higher)
n + 46
Initial addresses of the buffers:
Spindle 1: n= 4
Spindle 2: n = 52

3.2.17 Interface for circular magazine (DB 73)
DB73 Signals from circular magazine (NCK→PLC)


I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB 1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
DBB 2,3
DBB n
res. res. res. res. T0 res. Perform Obligatory
change change
(initiation:
T no.)
DBB Unassigned
n+1
DBB Assigned channel (8 bit Int)
n+2
DBB Tool management no. (8 bit Int)
n+3
n+4
n+8
n + 12
DBW Reserved
n + 16
DBW Reserved
n + 18
DBW Circular magazine no. (Int)
n + 20
DBW Location no. for new tool (Int)
n + 22
DBW Reserved
n + 24
DBW Location no. for old tool (Int)
n + 26
n + 28


n + 30
n + 32
n + 34
n + 36
n + 38
coded reached

n + 40
DBW Original location of new tool in this circular magazine (SW 6.3 and higher)
n + 42
Initial addresses of the circular magazines: circular magazine 1: n = 4
2: n = 48
3.2.18 Signals to and from the machine control panel and HHU (840Di
with MCI2 only) (DB 77)
DBB 0 to Input signals from MCP1 to PLC, MPI Bus (GD communication)
DBB 7
DBB 8 to Output signals from MCP1 to PLC, MPI Bus (GD communication)
DBB 15
DBB 24 Input signals from MCP2 to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
to
DBB 31
DBB 32 Output signals from MCP2 to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
to
DBB 39

DBB 48 to Input signals from HHU to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB 53
DBB 60 Output signals from PLC to HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)
to
DBB 79
DBD 80 Status Send HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBD 84 Status Receive HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)
FB1- parameter:
MCPNum :=1, //correct number of MCPs
MCPSDB210 := TRUE,
BHG: :=1; //handheld unit interface:
//0 - no HHU
//1 – HHU to MPI
//2 – HHU to OPI
BHGIn :=P#DB77.DBX48.0, //transmitted data of handheld unit
BHGOut: :=P#DB77.DBX60.0, //received data of handheld unit
BHGStatSend: :=P#DB77.DBX80.0, // status DW for transmitting handheld unit
BHGStatRec: :=P#DB77.DBX84.0, // status DW for receiving HHU
3.2.19 Signals to/from ManualTurn, ShopMill, ShopTurn (DB 82)
A list of the signals of DB 82 can be found in:

References: /FBMA/, Description of Functions ManualTurn
/FBSP/, Description of Functions ShopMill
/FBT/, Description of Functions ShopTurn
of Functions ShopTurn

Für Notizen

07.05 4 PLC-Blocks
4.1 Overview of organization blocks
4 PLC-Blocks
4
4.1 Overview of organization blocks ................................................................... 4-450
4.2 Overview of function blocks .......................................................................... 4-451
4.3 Assignment of data blocks ............................................................................ 4-453
4.4 Assigned timers............................................................................................. 4-454

4 PLC-Blocks 07.05
Table Overview of organization blocks (OBs)
OB no. Designation Meaning Kit

1 ZYKLUS Cyclic processing GP
40 ALARM Process alarms GP
100 NEUSTART Beginning of restart GP

07.05 4 PLC-Blocks
4.2 Overview of function blocks
Table Overview of function blocks (FCs)
FC no. Designation Meaning Kit

0 - Reserved for Siemens
2 GP_HP Basic program, cyclic part GP
3 GP_PRAL Basic program, alarm-controlled part GP
5 GP_DIAG Basic program, diagnostic alarm (FM-NC) GP
7 TM_REV Transfer block for tool change with circular GP
magazine
8 TM_TRANS Transfer block for tool management GP
9 ASUP Asynchronous subprograms GP
10 AL_MSG Alarms/messages GP
12 AUXFU Call interface for user auxiliary functions GP
13 BHG_DISP Display control for handheld unit GP
15 POS_AX Positioning axis GP
16 PART_AX Indexing axis GP
17 Y-D switchover GP
18 SpinCtrl Spindle control from PLC GP
19 MCP_IFM Distribution of machine control panel and MMC GP
signals to interface (milling machine)
21 Transfer data exchange PLC-NCK GP
22 TM_DIR Selection of direction GP
24 MCP_IFM2 Transfer of MCP signals to interface GP
25 MCP_IFT Distribution of machine control panel and MMC GP
signals to interface
26 HPU_MCP Distribution of HPU signals to interface
30 - 35 Assigned if ManualTurn, ShopMill or ShopTurn
are installed
36 - 127 User assignable with FM-NC, 810DE
36 - 255 User assignable with 810D, 840DE, 840D

4 PLC-Blocks 07.05
Table Overview of function blocks (FBs)
FB no. Designation Meaning Kit

0 - 29 Reserved for Siemens
1 RUN_UP Basic program, booting GP
2 GET Read NC variables GP
3 PUT Write NC variables GP
4 PI_SERV PI services GP
5 GETGUD Read GUD variable GP
7 PI_SERV2 General PI services GP
29 Diagnostics for signal recorder and data trigger GP
36 - 127 User assignable with FM-NC, 810DE
36 - 255 User assignable with 810D, 840DE, 840D

07.05 4 PLC-Blocks
4.3 Assignment of data blocks
4.3 Assignment of data blocks
Note
Only so many DBs are created as are necessary according to NC-MD.
Table Fehler! Formatvorlage nicht definiert.-1 Overview of data blocks
DB no. Designation Meaning Kit

1 Reserved for Siemens GP
2-4 PLC MSG PLC messages GP
5-8 Basic program
9 NC COMPILE Interface for NC compile cycles GP
10 NC Central NC interface GP
INTERFACE
11 BAG 1 Mode group interface GP
12 Computer link and transport system
13-14 Reserved (Hymnos, basic program)
15 Basic program
16 PI service definitions
17 Version code
18 SPL interface (Safety Integrated)
19 MMC interface
20 PLC machine data
21 - 30 CHANNEL 1 NC channel interface GP
31 - 61 AXIS 1,... Reserved for interface axis/spindle no. 1 to 31 GP
62 - 70 User assignable
71 - 74 User tool management GP
75 - 76 M group decoding GP
77 Tool management buffer
78 - 80 Reserved for Siemens
81 - 89 Assigned if ManualTurn, ShopMill or ShopTurn
are installed
(81)90 - User assignable FM-NC, 810DE, see below
127
(81)90 - User assignable 810D, 840DE, 840D, see
399 below
Note
Data blocks of inactivated channels, axes/spindles, C programming, tool
management can be assigned by the user.

4 PLC-Blocks 07.05
4.4 Assigned timers
4.4 Assigned timers
Timer no. Meaning

1-9 Reserved
10 - 127 User assignable

07.05 A Appendix
A Appendix
A
References
You will find a list that is updated monthly of the documentation available in
each language in the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol
Follow the menu items → “Support” → “Technical documentation” → “Overview

of publications” or “DOConWEB”.

SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D SIMODRIVE 611 digital/Sinamics Lists (LIS2) - 07.05 Edition A-455
A Appendix 07.05
Notes

A-456 SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D SIMODRIVE 611 digital/Sinamics Lists (LIS2) - 07.05 Edition
07.05 I Index
I Index
I
I.1 Index
$ A
$$/C/SGA/actToolBasePos with diameter conv. a0-coeff. nth polynominal for synchonous action
................................................................... 1-197 ...................................................................1-116
$$actToolBasePosBasic with diameter conv. ..... a1-coeff. nth polynominal for synchonous action
................................................................... 1-197 ...................................................................1-116
$$actToolBasPosBN with diameter conv. .. 1-198 a2-coeff. nth polynominal for synchonous action
$$traceProtocolLock is inactive.................. 1-306 ...................................................................1-116
a3-coeff. nth polynominal for synchonous action
...................................................................1-116
/ AA_OFF_LIMIT ..........................................1-279
aaAccLimA .................................................1-112
/Nck/Nck/ActApplication............................. 1-307 aaActIndexAxPosNo .........................1-79, 1-171
/Nck/Nck/ActBag ........................................ 1-307 aaAlarmStat.......................................1-79, 1-171
/Nck/Nck/Channel ...................................... 1-307 aaBcsOffset.......................................1-79, 1-171
/Nck/Nck/CoordSystem.............................. 1-307 aaCoupAct.........................................1-79, 1-171
aaCoupOffs .......................................1-79, 1-171
aaCurr ...............................................1-79, 1-171
1 aaDelt .........................................................1-195
aaDtbb...............................................1-80, 1-172
1st measuring point.................................... 1-114 aaDtbw .......................................................1-195
aaDteb...............................................1-80, 1-172
aaDtepb.............................................1-80, 1-172
2 aaDtepw .....................................................1-195
aaDtew .......................................................1-195
2nd measuring point .................................. 1-114 aaEgActive .................................................1-112
2nd torque limit ................................. 1-88, 1-180 aaEgAx.......................................................1-112
aaEgDenom ...............................................1-112
aaEgNumera ..............................................1-112
3 aaEgNumLa ...............................................1-113
aaEgSyn.....................................................1-113
aaEgSynFa.................................................1-113
3rd measuring point ................................... 1-114
aaEgType ...................................................1-113
aaEsrEnable......................................1-80, 1-172
4 aaEsrStat...........................................1-80, 1-172
aaEsrTrigger......................................1-80, 1-172
aaIbCorr .....................................................1-195
4th measuring point ................................... 1-114 aaIbnCorr ..........................................1-80, 1-172
aaIenCorr ..........................................1-81, 1-173
aaIwCorr.....................................................1-195
6 aaJerkCount ......................................1-81, 1-173
aaJerkLimA ................................................1-113
611D / enable high-speed inputs/outputs... 1-274 aaJerkTime........................................1-81, 1-173
611D support ............................................... 1-31 aaJerkTotal........................................1-81, 1-173
aaLeadP ............................................1-81, 1-173

SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D SIMODRIVE 611 digital/Sinamics Lists (LIS2) - 07.05 Edition I-457
I Index 07.05
aaLeadPTurn .................................... 1-81, 1-173 aaVc ..................................................1-85, 1-177

aaLeadSp ......................................... 1-81, 1-173 aaVeloLimA ................................................1-115
aaLeadSv.......................................... 1-81, 1-173 Abscissa arc centre of 10th contour element.......
aaLeadTyp ........................................ 1-81, 1-173 ............................................................1-38, 1-45
aaLeadV ........................................... 1-81, 1-173 Abscissa arc centre of 1st contour element.1-37,
aaLoad.............................................. 1-82, 1-174 .....................................................................1-44
aaMaslState ...................................... 1-82, 1-174 Abscissa arc centre of 2nd contour element1-37,
aaMeasP1Valid.......................................... 1-113 .....................................................................1-44
aaMeasP2Valid.......................................... 1-113 Abscissa arc centre of 3rd contour element 1-37,
aaMeasP3Valid.......................................... 1-114 .....................................................................1-44
aaMeasP4Valid.......................................... 1-114 Abscissa arc centre of 4th contour element.1-37,
aaMeasPoint1 ............................................ 1-114 .....................................................................1-44
aaMeasPoint2 ............................................ 1-114 Abscissa arc centre of 5th contour element.1-37,
aaMeasPoint3 ............................................ 1-114 .....................................................................1-44
aaMeasPoint4 ............................................ 1-114 Abscissa arc centre of 6th contour element.1-37,
aaMeasSetangle ........................................ 1-114 .....................................................................1-44
aaMeasSetpoint ......................................... 1-114 Abscissa arc centre of 7th contour element.1-37,
aaMeasSpValid.......................................... 1-114 .....................................................................1-44
aaMm................................................ 1-82, 1-174 Abscissa arc centre of 8th contour element.1-37,
aaMm1.............................................. 1-82, 1-174 .....................................................................1-45
aaMm2.............................................. 1-82, 1-174 Abscissa arc centre of 9th contour element.1-38,
aaMm3.............................................. 1-82, 1-174 .....................................................................1-45
aaMm4.............................................. 1-82, 1-174 Abscissa end point of 10th contour element 1-39,
aaMw ......................................................... 1-196 .....................................................................1-47
aaMw1 ....................................................... 1-196 Abscissa end point of 1st contour element ..1-39,
aaMw2 ....................................................... 1-196 .....................................................................1-46
aaMw3 ....................................................... 1-196 Abscissa end point of 2nd contour element.1-39,
aaMw4 ....................................................... 1-196 .....................................................................1-46
aaOff ................................................. 1-82, 1-174 Abscissa end point of 3rd contour element..1-39,
aaOffLimit ......................................... 1-82, 1-174 .....................................................................1-46
aaOffVal............................................ 1-83, 1-175 Abscissa end point of 4th contour element..1-39,
aaOscillBreakPos1............................ 1-83, 1-175 .....................................................................1-46
aaOscillBreakPos2............................ 1-83, 1-175 Abscissa end point of 5th contour element..1-39,
aaOscillReversePos1........................ 1-83, 1-175 .....................................................................1-46
aaOscillReversePos2........................ 1-83, 1-175 Abscissa end point of 6th contour element..1-39,
aaOvr ................................................ 1-83, 1-175 .....................................................................1-46
aaPlcOvr ........................................... 1-83, 1-175 Abscissa end point of 7th contour element..1-39,
aaPolfa.............................................. 1-83, 1-175 .....................................................................1-46
aaPolfaValid...................................... 1-83, 1-175 Abscissa end point of 8th contour element..1-39,
aaPower............................................ 1-83, 1-175 .....................................................................1-46
aaSnglAxStat .................................... 1-84, 1-176 Abscissa end point of 9th contour element...1-46
aaSoftendn ....................................... 1-84, 1-176 Absicssa end point of 9th contour element...1-39
aaSoftendp ....................................... 1-84, 1-176 Absolute axis index ... 1-92, 1-101, 1-104, 1-184,
aaStat ............................................... 1-84, 1-176 ............................................ 1-200, 1-202, 1-207
aaSync.............................................. 1-84, 1-176 absoluteBlockBufferName ..........................1-146
aaTOff........................................................ 1-196 absoluteBlockBufferPreview.......................1-146
aaTOffLimit ................................................ 1-196 absoluteBlockCounter ................................1-146
aaTOffPrepDiff ........................................... 1-196 acAlarmStat................................................1-115
aaTOffVal................................................... 1-197 acAxCtSwA ................................................1-115
aaTorque .......................................... 1-84, 1-176 Access meas. result trigger event 1 in MCS........
aaTotalOvr ........................................ 1-84, 1-176 ...................................................................1-174
aaTravelCount .................................. 1-84, 1-176 Access meas. result trigger event 1 in WCS .......
aaTravelCountHS ............................. 1-85, 1-177 ...................................................................1-196
aaTravelDist...................................... 1-85, 1-177 Access meas. result trigger event 2 in MCS........
aaTravelDistHS................................. 1-85, 1-177 ...................................................................1-174
aaTravelTime .................................... 1-85, 1-177 Access meas. result trigger event 2 in WCS .......
aaTravelTimeHS ............................... 1-85, 1-177 ...................................................................1-196
aaTyp................................................ 1-85, 1-177 Access meas. result trigger event 3 in MCS........
aaVactB ............................................ 1-85, 1-177 ...................................................................1-174
aaVactM............................................ 1-85, 1-177 Access meas. result trigger event 3 in WCS .......
aaVactW .................................................... 1-197 ...................................................................1-196

I-458 SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D SIMODRIVE 611 digital/Sinamics Lists (LIS2) - 07.05 Edition
07.05 I Index
Access meas. result trigger event 4 in MCS ....... acMeasScaleunit ........................................1-119

................................................................... 1-174 acMeasSema .............................................1-119
Access meas. result trigger event 4 in WCS ....... acMeasSetCoord........................................1-119
................................................................... 1-196 acMeasTNumber........................................1-119
Access to data double word ......................... 1-53 acMeasToolLength .....................................1-119
Access to meas. result 1 in MCS ................. 1-82 acMeasToolMask .......................................1-119
Access to meas. result 2 in MCS ................. 1-82 acMeasType...............................................1-120
Access to meas. result 3 in MCS ................. 1-82 acMeasUifr .................................................1-120
Access to meas. result 4 in MCS ................. 1-82 acMeasValid...............................................1-120
accessLevel ................................................. 1-24 acMeasWpAngle ........................................1-120
accIndex ...................................................... 1-52 acMeasWpSetangle ...................................1-120
acConstCutS.............1-100, 1-103, 1-201, 1-206 acOvr..........................................................1-121
acDelt......................................................... 1-115 acParam .....................................................1-282
acDtbb ....................................................... 1-115 acPathn ......................................................1-121
acDtbw....................................................... 1-115 acPlcOvr.....................................................1-121
acDteb ....................................................... 1-115 acPltbb .......................................................1-121
acDtepb ..................................................... 1-115 acPlteb .......................................................1-121
acDtepw..................................................... 1-115 acProg ........................................................1-121
acDtew....................................................... 1-116 acPRTimeA ................................................1-121
acEsrTrigger .............................................. 1-116 acPRTimeM................................................1-121
acFct0 ........................................................ 1-116 acPtpSup....................................................1-121
acFct1 ........................................................ 1-116 acRetpoint ..................................................1-197
acFct2 ........................................................ 1-116 acSMode .................. 1-100, 1-103, 1-201, 1-206
acFct3 ........................................................ 1-116 acStat .........................................................1-122
acFctll ........................................................ 1-116 acSynaMem ...............................................1-122
acFctul ....................................................... 1-116 Act tool base position .................................1-169
acFifoN ...................................................... 1-282 actBlock......................................................1-146
acIpoBuf..................................................... 1-298 actBlockA ...................................................1-146
acIwStat ..................................................... 1-116 actBlockI.....................................................1-146
acIwTu ....................................................... 1-117 actCouppPosOffset ...........................1-86, 1-178
acJogCoord ............................................... 1-117 actCycleTimeBrut ............................1-285, 1-298
Ackn. by MMC for NCK-preparation command ... actCycleTimeNet .............................1-285, 1-298
..................................................................... 1-34 actDistToGoEns .........................................1-197
Acknowl. from MMC for command from NCK to actDLNumber .............................................1-122
MMC ............................................................ 1-34 actDNumber ...............................................1-122
Acknowledgement counter variable ........... 1-126 actDNumberFanuc .....................................1-122
Acknowledgement criteria for an alarm1-71, 1-75 actDNumberS.............................................1-122
Acknowledgement criteria of an alarm ......... 1-73 actDuploNumber ........................................1-122
ackSafeMeasPos .............................. 1-86, 1-178 actFeedRate.......................... 1-86, 1-178, 1-197
acMarker .................................................... 1-282 actFeedRateIpo..........................................1-122
acMarkerL .................................................. 1-282 actFrameIndex ...........................................1-123
acMea ........................................................ 1-117 actGearStage ........... 1-100, 1-103, 1-201, 1-206
acMeasActPlane ........................................ 1-117 actHNumberFanuc .....................................1-123
acMeasChbfr.............................................. 1-117 acThreadPitch ............................................1-123
acMeasChsfr.............................................. 1-117 acThreadPitchAct .......................................1-123
acMeasCornerAngle .................................. 1-117 acThreadPitchInc .......................................1-123
acMeasCornerSetangle ............................. 1-117 acTime........................................................1-123
acMeasDiameter........................................ 1-117 acTimec......................................................1-123
acMeasDirApproach .................................. 1-118 acTimer ......................................................1-123
acMeasDNumber ....................................... 1-118 actIncrVal .............................. 1-77, 1-169, 1-192
acMeasFineTrans ...................................... 1-118 actIndexAxPosNo ..............................1-86, 1-178
acMeasFrameSelect .................................. 1-118 actInvocCount ............................................1-151
acMeasInput .............................................. 1-118 actIpoType..................................................1-124
acMeasLatch.............................................. 1-118 actIpoTypeS ...............................................1-124
acMeasNcbfr.............................................. 1-118 Activation of ESR .................. 1-80, 1-116, 1-172
acMeasP1Coord ........................................ 1-118 Activation of punching and nibbling functions......
acMeasP2Coord ........................................ 1-118 .....................................................................1-36
acMeasP3Coord ........................................ 1-119 Active channel machine function ................1-132
acMeasP4Coord ........................................ 1-119 Active channel-independent basic frames ....1-55
acMeasPframe........................................... 1-119 Active channel-specific basic frames..........1-128
acMeasResults .......................................... 1-119 Active encoder...................................1-91, 1-183

I Index 07.05
Active G function........................................ 1-162 Actual lead value velocity ..................1-81, 1-173

Active G function (current language).......... 1-162 Actual motor wiring ............................1-88, 1-180
Active G function (ISO Dialect) .................. 1-162 Actual position difference between 2 encoders ...
Active G-function for block search ............. 1-163 ..........................................................1-93, 1-185
Active G-function for block search in binary1-162 Actual position value in relation to WOS frame ...
Active G-function of the correponding group....... ...................................................................1-198
................................................................... 1-162 Actual tool base position.............................1-197
Active immediately after referencing ... 1-41, 1-48 Actual value assignment.............................1-276
Active INC weighting of the axis....... 1-77, 1-169, Actual value encoder 1 ......................1-99, 1-191
................................................................... 1-192 Actual value encoder 2 ......................1-99, 1-191
Active interpolation mode........................... 1-124 Actual value in basic coordinate system.....1-197
Active interpolation mode search run......... 1-124 Actual value of axis specific feedrate .........1-178
Active mode ............................................... 1-110 Actual value of axis-specific feedrate 1-86, 1-197
Active no. of the master tool holder............ 1-124 Actual value of position, encoder 1....1-93, 1-185
Active T-number......................................... 1-159 Actual value of position, encoder 2....1-93, 1-185
Active tool length 1..................................... 1-125 Actual value of rotary speed . 1-86, 1-178, 1-211,
Active tool length 2..................................... 1-125 ...................................................................1-214
Active tool length 3..................................... 1-125 Actual value of smoothened current ...........1-214
Active tool radius........................................ 1-126 Actual value of subroutine call counter ......1-151,
Active toolholder ........................................ 1-135 ...................................................................1-153
Active total offset........................................ 1-122 Actual value of subroutine call counter. ......1-156
Active total offset for block search ............. 1-134 Actual value of the axis/spindle current in A 1-79,
Active transformation ................................. 1-126 ...................................................................1-171
actLineNumber........................................... 1-147 Actual value of the interpolation feedrate ...1-122
actMasterToolHolderNo ............................. 1-124 Actual value of the resolution ............1-86, 1-178
actOriToolLength1 ..................................... 1-124 Actual value of the smoothened current .....1-211
actOriToolLength2 ..................................... 1-124 Actual version Dpr ......................................1-294
actOriToolLength3 ..................................... 1-124 actualCurrent...................................1-211, 1-214
acTotalOvr ................................................. 1-124 actualSpeed ....................................1-211, 1-214
actParts...................................................... 1-125 actValResol .......................................1-86, 1-178
actProgPos ................................................ 1-192 acVactB ......................................................1-126
actProgPosBKS ......................................... 1-197 acVactw......................................................1-126
actPunchRate ............................................ 1-164 acVc ...........................................................1-126
acTrafo....................................................... 1-125 adaptData...................................................1-250
acTrafoParSet............................................ 1-125 Adapter data...............................................1-250
actSpeed...................1-100, 1-103, 1-201, 1-206 Adapter number..........................................1-219
actSpeedRel ..................................... 1-86, 1-178 adaptNo......................................................1-219
actTNumber ............................................... 1-125 aDbb.............................................................1-52
actTNumberLong ....................................... 1-125 aDbd.............................................................1-52
actTNumberS............................................. 1-125 aDbr..............................................................1-52
actToolBasePos..................... 1-77, 1-169, 1-192 aDbw ............................................................1-52
actToolBasePosBasic ................................ 1-197 Add. correction value for path feed or axial feed
actToolBasePosBasicDiam........................ 1-197 ..........................................................1-85, 1-177
actToolBasePosDiam ................................ 1-197 Add. path feed correction for synchronous
actToolBasPosBN...................................... 1-197 actions ........................................................1-126
actToolBasPosBNDiam ............................. 1-198 Added for alignment only............................1-199
actToolBasPosEN...................................... 1-198 Additional info on travel to fixed stop .1-92, 1-184
actToolBasPosENitc .................................. 1-198 aDlb ..............................................................1-52
actToolBasPosENjmp ................................ 1-198 aDld ..............................................................1-53
actToolEdgeCenterPos .............................. 1-192 aDlr...............................................................1-53
actToolEdgeCenterPosEns........................ 1-198 aDlw .............................................................1-53
actToolIdent ............................................... 1-125 aInco.............................................................1-53
actToolLength1 .......................................... 1-125 Alarm number (actual alarm) ..... 1-72, 1-74, 1-76
actToolLength2 .......................................... 1-125 alarmNo..................................... 1-71, 1-73, 1-75
actToolLength3 .......................................... 1-125 aLinkTransRate ..........................................1-126
actToolRadius ............................................ 1-126 All axes referenced.....................................1-126
actToolWide ............................................... 1-225 All channels of mode group in Reset ..........1-110
actTransform.............................................. 1-126 allAxesRefActive ........................................1-126
Actual gear stage of spindle 1-100, 1-103, 1-201, allAxesStopped ..........................................1-126
................................................................... 1-206 amSetupState....................................1-86, 1-178
Actual lead value position ................. 1-81, 1-173 analogInpVal ................................................1-53

07.05 I Index
analogOutpVal ............................................. 1-53 Axial distance from beginning of block in the

anAxCtAS .................................................... 1-53 WCS ...........................................................1-195
anAxCtSwA.................................................. 1-53 Axial distance to the end of block in the WCS .....
anAxEsrTrigger ............................................ 1-53 ...................................................................1-195
Angle of rotation alpha1 (in degrees) ......... 1-254 Axial jerk override
Angle of rotation alpha2 (in degrees) ......... 1-254 run in.......................................................1-133
Angle of rotation for block search edge position Axial jerk override main run ........................1-113
................................................................... 1-136 Axial offsets of an axis.......................1-79, 1-171
Angle of rotation for edge position ............. 1-136 Axial override for synchronous actions ........1-83,
Angles of axes for toolholders.................... 1-135 ...................................................................1-175
Angular difference between toolholder axes ....... Axial velocity overr. main run......................1-115
................................................................... 1-135 Axial velocity override
anTimer........................................................ 1-54 run in.......................................................1-133
aPbbIn ......................................................... 1-54 Axis active .........................................1-86, 1-178
aPbbOut....................................................... 1-54 Axis active flag ...........................................1-198
aPbdIn ......................................................... 1-54 Axis container rotation ..................................1-53
aPbdOut....................................................... 1-54 Axis distance from beginning of the block in BCS
aPbrIn .......................................................... 1-54 ..........................................................1-80, 1-172
aPbrOut ....................................................... 1-54 Axis distance to the end of the block in the BCS
aPbwIn......................................................... 1-54 ..........................................................1-80, 1-172
aPbwOut ...................................................... 1-55 Axis dist-to-go of infeed during oscill. in BCS ......
Approach direction ..................................... 1-118 ..........................................................1-80, 1-172
Arc center in relation to WOS frame .......... 1-148 Axis exists .........................................1-87, 1-179
Arc radius in relation to WOS frame........... 1-148 Axis has been referenced..................1-95, 1-187
area............................................................ 1-301 Axis identifier of 1st rotary axis...................1-255
asciiMode................................................... 1-304 Axis identifier of 2nd rotary axis..................1-255
Assignment [axis]....................................... 1-292 Axis info is available ...................................1-286
Assignment [bus] ....................................... 1-292 Axis is being referenced ....................1-94, 1-186
Assignment [client]..................................... 1-292 Axis name.............................. 1-77, 1-169, 1-193
Assignment [master] .................................. 1-292 Axis name 1................................................1-257
Assignment [slave]..................................... 1-292 Axis name 2................................................1-257
Assignment of each channel to mode group 1-24 Axis specification................... 1-97, 1-189, 1-200
Associated M01 selected ........................... 1-143 Axis state.........................................1-170, 1-193
aTcAckC .................................................... 1-126 Axis status ............................... 1-77, 1-84, 1-176
aTcCmdC................................................... 1-126 Axis type................................ 1-99, 1-190, 1-200
aTcFct........................................................ 1-127 Axis type according to $AA_TYP.......1-85, 1-177
aTcLfn........................................................ 1-127 Axis types for all machine axes ....................1-24
aTcLfo........................................................ 1-127 Axis veloc. in basic coordinates.........1-85, 1-177
aTcLmyn .................................................... 1-127 Axis veloc. in machine coordinates ...1-85, 1-177
aTcLtn........................................................ 1-127 Axis veloc. in workpiece coordinates ..........1-197
aTcLto........................................................ 1-127 Axis velocity actual value load side in the MCS...
aTcMfn....................................................... 1-127 ..........................................................1-99, 1-191
aTcMfo....................................................... 1-127 axisActiveInChan................... 1-86, 1-178, 1-198
aTcMmyn ................................................... 1-127 axisActivInNcu..............................................1-55
aTcMtn....................................................... 1-127 axisFeedRateUnit .................. 1-87, 1-179, 1-198
aTcMto....................................................... 1-127 axisType .......................................................1-24
aTcStatus................................................... 1-128
aTcThno..................................................... 1-128
aTcTno....................................................... 1-128 B
Automatic block division............................. 1-164
automCutSegment ..................................... 1-164 badMemFfs ..................................................1-55
Available memory DRAM file system no. 1 .. 1-57 Base position of the active tool...................1-197
Available memory DRAM file system no. 2 .. 1-57 Base position of the active tool rel. to workpiece
Available memory SRAM file system ........... 1-57 ...................................................................1-198
axComp ............................................ 1-86, 1-178 Basic system clock cycle ............................1-274
Axes in exact stop...................................... 1-126 basicLengthUnit............................................1-24
Axial acceleration overr. main run.............. 1-112 basisFrameMask ...............................1-55, 1-128
Axial acceleration override Baud rate on DP bus (bit/s) ........................1-287
run in ...................................................... 1-133 BCS setpoint value including override
Axial dist.-to-go for infeed during oscill. in WCS components................................................1-195
................................................................... 1-195 block ...........................................................1-147

I Index 07.05
Block label ................................................. 1-151 chanStatus .................................................1-130

Block no. of curr. block, if syn. act. is active1-158 Characteristics of total offsets in NCK ..........1-25
Block no. where the syn. act. is programmed ..... cIn ..............................................................1-130
........................................................ 1-158, 1-161 circleCenter ................................................1-147
Block number .................................. 1-147, 1-151 circleCenterS..............................................1-147
Block overview circlePlane..................................................1-147
function blocks........................................ 4-451 circlePlaneS ...............................................1-147
Block search active .................................... 1-132 circleRadius................................................1-147
Block search waits for partner channel ...... 1-136 circleRadius for block search......................1-148
blockLabel.................................................. 1-151 circleRadiusS .............................................1-148
blockNoStr ...................................... 1-147, 1-151 circleTurn....................................................1-148
blockNoStrAct ................................. 1-158, 1-161 circleTurnS .................................................1-148
blockNoStrProg............................... 1-158, 1-161 cl1PoImage .....................................1-211, 1-214
blockType .................................................. 1-128 cl1ResImage ...................................1-211, 1-214
blockTypeInfo............................................. 1-129 clearInfo..................................... 1-71, 1-73, 1-75
Boot. stat. proc. f. DP Master ..................... 1-289 Client information is available.....................1-289
Broadcast bus address of slave ................. 1-290 Client status incl. output release.................1-290
Bus address of slave.................................. 1-293 Cmd tool base position ...............................1-169
Bus configuration data are available .......... 1-287 cmdAngPos .............. 1-100, 1-103, 1-201, 1-206
Bus number of the slave ............................ 1-290 cmdConstCutSpeed . 1-101, 1-103, 1-201, 1-206
Bytes read to the Fifo file ........................... 1-305 cmdContrPos.....................................1-87, 1-179
Bytes transferred to PCMCIA card............. 1-296 cmdCouppPosOffset .........................1-87, 1-179
Bytes written to the Fifo file ........................ 1-305 cmdDwellTime............................................1-130
BZS setpoint value (C) incl. override cmdFeedRate........................ 1-87, 1-179, 1-198
components ............................................... 1-172 cmdFeedRateIpo........................................1-130
BZS setpoint value (N) incl. override cmdGearStage ......... 1-101, 1-103, 1-202, 1-206
components ................................................. 1-80 cmdGwps ................. 1-101, 1-104, 1-202, 1-207
cmdInvocCount ..........................................1-151
cmdProgPos...............................................1-192
C cmdSpeed ................ 1-101, 1-104, 1-202, 1-207
cmdSpeedRel....................................1-87, 1-179
Calculation resolution for angular position . 1-274 cmdToolBasePos .................. 1-77, 1-169, 1-193
Calculation resolution for linear positions... 1-274 cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleCenterEns.........1-148
Cart. PTP travel is supported ..................... 1-121 cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleCenterEnsS ......1-148
Center of the circle..................................... 1-147 cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleRadiusEns ........1-148
Center point of a cutting edge .................... 1-192 cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleRadiusEnsS......1-148
Center point of cutting edge distance-to-go 1-194 cmdToolEdgeCenterPos ............................1-193
Center point of the cutting edge REPOS ... 1-194 cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEnsS....................1-198
Chaining 1 of the magazine to following cmdTrafoParSetS.......................................1-130
magazine ................................................... 1-231 cmdTrafoS..................................................1-130
Chaining 2 of the magazine to previous CNC system language..................................1-24
magazine ................................................... 1-231 Code number of the active transformation..1-125
Chaining rule.............................................. 1-225 col...............................................................1-301
chanAlarm.................................................. 1-129 Command counter variable ........................1-126
chanAssignment .......................................... 1-24 Command for magazine execution ..1-227, 1-230
chanAxisNoGap ..................... 1-87, 1-130, 1-179 Command from NCK to MMC.......................1-34
Change counter of the tool data in a channel ..... Command from NCK-preparation to the MMC ....
................................................................... 1-140 .....................................................................1-34
changeAxConfCounter............................... 1-130 Command number......................................1-127
Channel basic frame screen form .............. 1-117 Command parameter 1 of the magazine ....1-230
Channel name................................... 1-33, 1-111 Command parameter 2 of the magazine ....1-230
Channel number of axis .................... 1-87, 1-179 Command state of the magazine................1-227
Channel number of spindle . 1-100, 1-103, 1-201, Command status ........................................1-128
................................................................... 1-206 Command status of the magazine ..............1-230
Channel status (1=active) .......................... 1-130 Command word SPL-KDV............................1-67
Channel status according to $AC_STAT ... 1-122 Compensation parameters for SUG ...........1-226
channelName............................................... 1-33 Compensation value upper limit $AA_OFF
channelNo.................1-100, 1-103, 1-201, 1-206 with clear .................................................1-279
Channel-specific setting for tool management .... Comperator input NC....................................1-53
..................................................................... 1-33 completeDocAcxChangeCnt ........................1-55
chanNoAxisIsActive .......................... 1-87, 1-179 completeDotAcxChangeCnt .........................1-55

07.05 I Index
completeDpcAcxChangeCnt ........................ 1-56 Counter indicating that a new LUD ACC is

compressAbility.......................................... 1-285 available .....................................................1-132
Compressed data transfer ......................... 1-285 cOut............................................................1-131
Configurable messages .................... 1-90, 1-182 CRC diagnostic parameter .........................1-214
Confirmation of SI actual position ..... 1-86, 1-178 CRC errors on the drive bus..............1-90, 1-182
conntectPar................................................ 1-225 crcErrorCount ..................................1-211, 1-214
Constant cutting speed of the master spindle ..... CRC-parameter for diagnosis.....................1-211
..................................1-101, 1-103, 1-201, 1-206 Cumulative value of superimposition in the tool
Container actual address ............................. 1-53 di ................................................................1-197
Contour deviation.............................. 1-99, 1-190 Curr. safety actual value difference NCK - drive
Contour type of 10th contour element. 1-42, 1-49 ..........................................................1-96, 1-188
Contour type of 1st contour element ... 1-41, 1-48 Curr. safety speed difference NCK - drive ...1-96,
Contour type of 2nd contour element.. 1-41, 1-48 ...................................................................1-188
Contour type of 3rd contour element... 1-41, 1-48 Curr. stat. of DP M bus - DP M contr. .........1-288
Contour type of 4th contour element... 1-41, 1-48 Current access time to bus.........................1-288
Contour type of 5th contour element... 1-41, 1-49 Current application .....................................1-307
Contour type of 6th contour element... 1-42, 1-49 Current block (DISPLOF active) .................1-146
Contour type of 7th contour element... 1-42, 1-49 Current block (DISPLOF inactive) ..............1-146
Contour type of 8th contour element... 1-42, 1-49 Current channel..........................................1-307
Contour type of 9th contour element... 1-42, 1-49 Current const. cutting rate .. 1-100, 1-103, 1-201,
contrConfirmActive............................ 1-87, 1-179 ...................................................................1-206
contrMode ......................................... 1-88, 1-180 Current coupling state of the slave spindle..1-79,
Control mode of drive........................ 1-88, 1-180 ...................................................................1-171
Controller enable............................... 1-87, 1-179 Current gross cycle time.............................1-298
Controller mode servo....................... 1-88, 1-180 Current indexing position...................1-79, 1-171
Coordinate system ..................................... 1-307 Current indexing position number......1-86, 1-178
Coordinate system manual travel............... 1-117 Current interpreter block.............................1-146
Coordinate system of the 1st measuring point .... Current lead.....................................1-123, 1-139
................................................................... 1-118 Current lead change ...................................1-123
Coordinate system of the 2nd measuring point... Current lead during search run...................1-139
................................................................... 1-118 Current location ...............................1-220, 1-238
Coordinate system of the 3rd measuring point.... Current magazine ............................1-219, 1-238
................................................................... 1-119 Current magazine position..........................1-230
Coordinate system of the 4th measuring point.... Current master value .........................1-81, 1-173
................................................................... 1-119 Current module name for step editor ..........1-149
Coordinate system of the set point............. 1-119 Current net cycle time.................................1-298
Corner cutting angle................................... 1-117 Current operating mode MMC ....................1-307
corr. to actTNumber for block search without Current physical unit.....................................1-77
calc. ........................................................... 1-125 Current physical unit of axis .......................1-193
Corr. to circleCenter for block search with calc. .. Current physical unit of the axis position ....1-169
................................................................... 1-147 Current position of channel axes ................1-117
corrBlActive................................................ 1-130 Current position of machine........................1-116
Corresp. to actNumber for block search with Current reverse position 1 for oscill. in the BCS
calc. ........................................................... 1-122 ..........................................................1-83, 1-175
corresponds to $$actToolBasPosEN Mode=0 .... Current reverse position 2 for oscill. in the BCS
................................................................... 1-198 ..........................................................1-83, 1-175
corresponds to $$actToolBasPosEN Mode=1 .... Current speed limitation for spindle 1-102, 1-104,
................................................................... 1-198 ........................................................1-203, 1-208
Corresponds to circleCenterWos ............... 1-148 Current state reached during the boot process ...
Corresponds to circleRadiusWos............... 1-148 ..........................................................1-90, 1-182
countActivated ........................................... 1-304 Current status of the master-slave coupling ........
Counter for motion synchronous actions 32 bit ... ..........................................................1-82, 1-174
................................................................... 1-282 Current stroke number................................1-165
Counter for NC start signal ........................ 1-133 Current tool holder data..............................1-141
Counter for NC-start key ............................ 1-132 Current width of the grinding wheel ............1-225
Counter for rejected NC starts ................... 1-137 cuttEdgeNo.................................................1-252
Counter incremented with each call of EXTCALL cuttEdgeParam................................1-217, 1-268
..................................................................... 1-58 cuttingTime.................................................1-298
Counter indicating changes of axes Cycles between bus access errors type 1 ..1-288
configuration .............................................. 1-130 Cycles between bus access errors type 2 ..1-288
cycleTime ...................................................1-299

I Index 07.05
cycServRestricted ...................................... 1-131 Distance to the end of the block in the WCS .......
...................................................................1-116
Distance-to-go in the SZS ..........................1-197
D Distance-to-go of infeed during oscill. in the BCS
...................................................................1-115
Dadr ........................................................... 1-158 distPerDriveRevol..............................1-88, 1-180
data................................................. 1-222, 1-223 Disturbing torque/max. torque (motor end)..........
Data byte from/to the PLC ........................... 1-52 ..........................................................1-99, 1-191
Data byte in link area ................................... 1-52 DNo ............................................................1-252
Data double word (32 bits) from/to the PLC. 1-52 D-number ........................................1-158, 1-252
Data exchange time in [s,s,userdef]........... 1-287 Double value of the auxiliary function .........1-168
Data for measurement ............................... 1-118 DP cycle time in [s,s,userdef] .....................1-287
Data logging format.................................... 1-304 DP system configuration data are valid ......1-294
Data version.................................... 1-213, 1-215 dp611USpecAccChangeCnt.......................1-285
Data word (16 bits) from/to the PLC............. 1-52 dp611USpecAccKey...................................1-285
Data word in link area .................................. 1-53 dp611USpecAccMask ................................1-286
dataListIndex.............................................. 1-305 dp611USpecAccPath .................................1-286
dataProtok ................................................. 1-305 DPA/DPM available ....................................1-294
dataUploaded............................................. 1-305 dpAxisCfgMachAxisNr................................1-286
DC-link voltage........................................... 1-215 dpAxisCfgNumAxes....................................1-286
delayFSt..................................................... 1-131 dpAxisCfgValid ...........................................1-286
Des. status of DP M bus - HOST req. ........ 1-289 dpAxisStateCtrlout......................................1-286
Desired parameter set of the drive.... 1-89, 1-181 dpAxisStateEnc1 ........................................1-286
Desired torque value in Nm .............. 1-84, 1-176 dpAxisStateEnc2 ........................................1-286
Desired value of axis-specific feedrate ...... 1-198 dpAxisStateLifeCntErrCtrlout......................1-287
Desired value of axis-specific feedrate, ..... 1-179 dpAxisStateLifeCntErrEnc1 ........................1-287
Desired value of position after fine interpolation dpAxisStateLifeCntErrEnc2 ........................1-287
.......................................................... 1-87, 1-179 dpBusCfgBaudrate .....................................1-287
Desired value of rotary speed .................... 1-211 dpBusCfgCycleTime...................................1-287
Desired value of rotary speed. ................... 1-179 dpBusCfgDataExTime ................................1-287
Desired value of the interpolation feedrate 1-130 dpBusCfgNumBuses ..................................1-287
desiredSpeed.................................. 1-211, 1-214 dpBusCfgValid............................................1-287
diagnoseDataFfs.......................................... 1-56 dpBusStateAccessDurationAct...................1-288
Diameter .................................................... 1-117 dpBusStateAccessDurationMax .................1-288
diamonInfo ................................................. 1-199 dpBusStateAccessDurationMin ..................1-288
Difference value main run to run in of dpBusStateAccessErrCnt1 .........................1-288
$AA_TOFF[ ].............................................. 1-196 dpBusStateAccessErrCnt2 .........................1-288
Digital drive type .......................................... 1-56 dpBusStateAvgCycleBetweenErr1 .............1-288
digitInpVal .................................................... 1-56 dpBusStateAvgCycleBetweenErr2 .............1-288
digitOutpVal ................................................. 1-56 dpBusStateCycleCnt ..................................1-288
Dimension of the magazine ....................... 1-230 dpBusStateDpmAction ...............................1-288
Direct encoder used................................... 1-212 dpBusStateDpmActual ...............................1-288
direction ..................................................... 1-131 dpBusStateDpmCtrl....................................1-289
Display of active alarms .................... 1-79, 1-171 dpBusStateDpmError .................................1-289
Display of active axis ................................... 1-55 dpBusStateDpmPrjCnt ...............................1-289
Display of existing axes. ............................ 1-130 dpBusStateDpmRequest ............................1-289
Display state for block display.................... 1-151 dpBusStateNumActiveSlaves.....................1-289
Display traversing blocks ........................... 1-143 dpClientCfgId..............................................1-289
displayAxis ............................. 1-88, 1-180, 1-199 dpClientCfgNumClnt...................................1-289
displayState ............................................... 1-151 dpClientCfgValid.........................................1-289
Dist.-to-go of infeed during oscill. in the WCS..... dpClientStateComm ...................................1-290
................................................................... 1-115 dpSlaveCfgAssignBus ................................1-290
Distance from beginning of the block in the BCS dpSlaveCfgBusAddr ...................................1-290
................................................................... 1-115 dpSlaveCfgInputTime .................................1-290
Distance from the beginning of block in the WCS dpSlaveCfgMasterAppCycTime .................1-290
................................................................... 1-115 dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves...............................1-290
Distance per revolution ..................... 1-88, 1-180 dpSlaveCfgOutputTime ..............................1-290
Distance to change position ....................... 1-235 dpSlaveCfgValid.........................................1-291
Distance to the end of the block in the BCS........ dpSlaveIdentNo..........................................1-291
................................................................... 1-115 dpSlaveIdentNoEx......................................1-291
dpSlaveStateComm ...................................1-291

07.05 I Index
dpSlaveStateIncCnt ................................... 1-291 driveSetupMode ................................1-91, 1-183

dpSlaveStateSync...................................... 1-291 driveSpeedSmoothing .......................1-91, 1-183
dpSlotCfgAssignAxis.................................. 1-292 driveType......................................................1-56
dpSlotCfgAssignBus .................................. 1-292 driveTypeChangeCnt....................................1-57
dpSlotCfgAssignClient ............................... 1-292 Dry run feedrate ..............................1-145, 1-278
dpSlotCfgAssignMaster ............................. 1-292 dummy........................................................1-199
dpSlotCfgAssignSlave ............................... 1-292 Duplo number...................... 1-219, 1-237, 1-252
dpSlotCfgIoType ........................................ 1-292 Duplo number of active tool........................1-122
dpSlotCfgLength ........................................ 1-292 Duplo number of programmed tool)............1-134
dpSlotCfgLogBaseAddress ........................ 1-293 duploNo ...........................................1-219, 1-252
dpSlotCfgNumSlots.................................... 1-293 Dval ............................................................1-158
dpSlotCfgSlaveAddress ............................. 1-293 Dwell time unit ............................................1-140
dpSlotCfgSlotNr ......................................... 1-293 Dynamic parameters for synchronous actions.....
dpSlotCfgValid ........................................... 1-293 ...................................................................1-282
dpSlotStateComm...................................... 1-293
dpSlotStateRecvTelegram ......................... 1-293
dpSlotStateSendTelegram ......................... 1-294 E
dpSlotStateTelegramType ......................... 1-294
DpSync ...................................................... 1-291 Eadr............................................................1-158
dpSysCfgAvailable..................................... 1-294 Edge number..............................................1-252
dpSysCfgNumMaster................................. 1-294 Edge offset value (edgeData).....................1-218
dpSysCfgValid ........................................... 1-294 Edge offset value parameter (cuttEdgeParam) ...
dpSysCfgVersionDpm................................ 1-294 ...................................................................1-217
dpSysCfgVersionDpr ................................. 1-294 edgeData............................. 1-218, 1-224, 1-268
dpSysCfgVersionDprEx ............................. 1-294 edgeECData....................................1-261, 1-262
dpSysCfgVersionHost................................ 1-294 edgeSCData....................................1-265, 1-266
dpSysStateDpmInit .................................... 1-295 effComp1...........................................1-91, 1-183
DRF active ................................................. 1-143 effComp2...........................................1-91, 1-183
DRF value .................................................. 1-199 EG axis number master axis ......................1-112
DRFActive.................................................. 1-143 EG block change criterion ..........................1-133
drfVal ......................................................... 1-199 EG denominator link factor .........................1-112
Drive assignment (driveIndex) .......... 1-89, 1-181 EG link active .............................................1-112
Drive assignment (logDriveNo) ......... 1-93, 1-185 EG link type ................................................1-113
Drive error code for alarm 300911 .. 1-213, 1-215 EG number of master axes.........................1-113
Drive load in % (611D only) .............. 1-82, 1-174 EG numerator link factor.............................1-112
Drive power in W (611D only) ........... 1-83, 1-175 EG synchronism deviation..........................1-142
Drive ready ....................................... 1-90, 1-182 EG synchronous position of master axis ....1-113
Drive switched on.............................. 1-90, 1-182 EG synchronous position of slave axis .......1-113
Drive type................................................... 1-274 Empty location search strategy during tool
drive2ndTorqueLimit ......................... 1-88, 1-180 change........................................................1-231
driveActMotorSwitch ......................... 1-88, 1-180 Enable inverter impulse .....................1-89, 1-181
driveActParamSet ............................. 1-88, 1-180 encChoice .........................................1-91, 1-183
driveClass1Alarm.............................. 1-88, 1-180 Encoder master value........................1-99, 1-191
driveContrMode ................................ 1-88, 1-180 encTypeDirect .................................1-212, 1-214
driveCoolerTempWarn...................... 1-89, 1-181 encTypeMotor .................................1-212, 1-215
driveDesMotorSwitch ........................ 1-89, 1-181 errCodeSetNrGen ......................................1-295
driveDesParamSet............................ 1-89, 1-181 errCodeSetNrPi ..........................................1-295
driveFastStop.................................... 1-89, 1-181 Error code set for communication errors ....1-295
driveFreqMode.................................. 1-89, 1-181 Error code set P1 for comm. errors ............1-295
driveImpulseEnabled ........................ 1-89, 1-181 Error on status transitions...........................1-289
driveIndex ......................................... 1-89, 1-181 Error SPL-KDV .............................................1-67
driveIntegDisable .............................. 1-89, 1-181 ESR alarm status .......................................1-115
driveLinkVoltageOk........................... 1-89, 1-181 ESR axis enable................................1-80, 1-172
driveLoad ..................1-101, 1-104, 1-202, 1-207 ESR axis status .................................1-80, 1-172
driveMotorTempWarn ....................... 1-90, 1-182 ESR start signal............................................1-53
driveNumCrcErrors ........................... 1-90, 1-182 Estimation of program runtime - downtime .1-121
driveParked....................................... 1-90, 1-182 Estimation of program runtime - machining time
drivePowerOn ................................... 1-90, 1-182 ...................................................................1-121
driveProgMessages .......................... 1-90, 1-182 Eval ............................................................1-158
driveReady........................................ 1-90, 1-182 Event state .................................................1-305
driveRunLevel ................................... 1-90, 1-182 eventActive.................................................1-305

I Index 07.05
eventActiveStatus ...................................... 1-305 Fine offset l3 Z............................................1-259

Existing TO edge parameters ...................... 1-25 Fine offset l4 X ...........................................1-259
Expected Dpr version from DPR_SS_VERSION Fine offset l4 Y ...........................................1-259
................................................................... 1-294 Fine offset l4 Z............................................1-259
Extended ID no. of the slave ...................... 1-291 Fine offset of offset of rotary axis v1...........1-259
extension ................................................... 1-168 Fine offset of offset of rotary axis v2...........1-259
Extension of the auxiliary function.............. 1-168 Fine offset with frames ....... 1-107, 1-108, 1-166,
External execution ..................................... 1-152 ...................................................................1-205
External NCK input of SI prog. log. from NCK Firmware date .................................1-212, 1-215
peri............................................................... 1-64 Firmware version .............................1-212, 1-215
External NCK output of SI prog. log. to NCK per. firmwareDate ...................................1-212, 1-215
..................................................................... 1-65 firmwareVersion ..............................1-212, 1-215
External PLC input of SI prog. log. from PLC Flag for acceptance test phase .........1-95, 1-187
peri............................................................... 1-64 Flag for acceptance test status..........1-96, 1-187
External PLC output of the SI progr. logic.... 1-65 Flag for NCK-side acceptance test phase ...........
externCncSystem......................................... 1-24 ..........................................................1-95, 1-187
extProgActive............................................. 1-131 Flag for NCK-side SE acceptance test .......1-187
extProgBufferName ................................... 1-152 Flag for NCK-side SE acceptance test. ........1-95
extProgFlag ............................................... 1-152 Flag variable for synchronous actions ........1-282
extraCuttEdgeParams.................................. 1-25 focStat ...............................................1-91, 1-183
extUnit.................................... 1-77, 1-169, 1-193 Following error...................................1-92, 1-184
For active tech.cycle
block no. of current action.......................1-161
F forward ............................................1-153, 1-155
Frame selection..........................................1-118
fctGenState ....................................... 1-91, 1-183 Free memory for synchronous actions .......1-122
Feed disable .............................................. 1-143 Free memory in bytes...................................1-57
Feed forward control factor torque .... 1-93, 1-185 Free SRAM in bytes .....................................1-57
Feed forward control factor velocity .. 1-93, 1-185 freeDirectorys ...............................................1-57
Feed forward control mode ............... 1-93, 1-185 freeFiles........................................................1-57
Feedrate override................... 1-91, 1-183, 1-199 freeMem .......................................................1-57
feedRateIpoOvr.......................................... 1-131 freeMemDram ..............................................1-57
feedRateIpoUnit ......................................... 1-131 freeMemDram2PassF ..................................1-57
feedRateOvr........................... 1-91, 1-183, 1-199 freeMemDramPassF ....................................1-57
feedStopActive........................................... 1-143 freeMemFfs ..................................................1-57
FFS diagnostic data ..................................... 1-56 freeMemSramPassF.....................................1-57
FFS free memory ......................................... 1-57 freeProtokolFiles ..........................................1-57
FFS memory defect ..................................... 1-55 Function........................................................1-51
FFS net size................................................. 1-58 fxsInfo................................................1-92, 1-184
FFS total size ............................................... 1-69 fxsStat ...............................................1-92, 1-184
FFS used memory ....................................... 1-70
FIFO buffer for execution from external source 1-
152 G
FIFO variable for synchronous actions ...... 1-282
Fill level of the IPO buffer (integer value in %) ... G00
................................................................... 1-299 Path axes traverse as pos. axes.............1-132
Fill-level display SPL-KDV ........................... 1-67 G0Mode......................................................1-132
fillText1 ...................................... 1-72, 1-74, 1-76 General result value ...................................1-306
fillText2 ...................................... 1-72, 1-74, 1-76 geoAxisNr...................................................1-200
fillText3 ...................................... 1-72, 1-74, 1-76 Geometry or auxiliary axis ..........................1-193
fillText4 ...................................... 1-72, 1-74, 1-76 Global basic frame screen form..................1-118
findBlActive ................................................ 1-132 Global basic unit ...........................................1-24
Fine offset ....................................... 1-118, 1-167 Global uplaoad starting point for ACC entries .....
Fine offset l1 X ........................................... 1-258 .....................................................................1-52
Fine offset l1 Y ........................................... 1-258 GroupID........................................................1-51
Fine offset l1 Z ........................................... 1-258 Gruppe ..............................................1-51, 1-109
Fine offset l2 X ........................................... 1-258 Gruppe_NUM ....................................1-51, 1-109
Fine offset l2 Y ........................................... 1-258 gwpsActive ............... 1-101, 1-104, 1-202, 1-207
Fine offset l2 Z ........................................... 1-258
Fine offset l3 X ........................................... 1-259
Fine offset l3 Y ........................................... 1-259

07.05 I Index
H Index of data list .........................................1-305

Index of the active set frame ......................1-123
Hadr ........................................................... 1-159 Indexing number................................1-94, 1-186
handwheelAss........................ 1-92, 1-184, 1-200 Indic. for operating progr. of DP M .............1-288
Heatsink temperature monitoring ...... 1-89, 1-181 Indirect encoder used .................................1-212
Host SW version ........................................ 1-294 Info about available ACC contents .............1-285
Hval............................................................ 1-159 Information on block type ...........................1-129
hwMLFB....................................................... 1-57 Instruction group.........................................1-109
hwProductSerialNr ....................................... 1-58 Instruction group (Function)..........................1-51
hwProductSerialNrL ..................................... 1-58 Instruction group (Gruppe) ...........................1-51
Integrator disable...............................1-89, 1-181
Interface for spindle as change position ....2-373,
I ...................................................................3-443
Internal NCK input of SI progr. logic .............1-65
internal NCK output of the SI progr. logic .....1-66
I/F mode............................................ 1-89, 1-181
Internal PLC input of SI progr. logic..............1-65
I/O identifier ............................................... 1-292
Internal PLC output of SI progr. logic ...........1-66
id ..................................................... 1-159, 1-161
Internal T number .......................................1-253
ID of the synchronous action .......... 1-159, 1-161
Interpolation feedrate, override...................1-131
Ident number of the slave .......................... 1-291
Interpolation feedrate, units ........................1-131
Identification client NCK/PLC/3RD............. 1-289
invocCount ......................................1-153, 1-156
Identifier ..................................................... 1-257
ipoBlocksOnly.............................................1-143
Identifier for geometry/auxiliary axis........... 1-199
ipoBufLevel.................................................1-299
Identifier of active tool ................................ 1-125
isDriveUsed .......................................1-92, 1-184
Identifier of the magazine..... 1-227, 1-229, 1-230
Identifier programmed tool ......................... 1-134
Identifies splitted blocks ............................. 1-137 J
Image of external NCK inputs of SI progr. logic ..
..................................................................... 1-64
Image of int. NCK inputs of SI progr. logic ... 1-65 JOG at revolutional feedrate.......................1-277
Image of int. NCK outputs of the SI progr. logic .. Jog mode....................................................1-277
..................................................................... 1-66 JOG velocity for G94 ..................................1-277
Image of int. PLC inputs of the SI progr. logic..... JOG velocity for G95 ..................................1-277
..................................................................... 1-65 JOG velocity for master spindle..................1-277
Image of int. PLC outputs of the SI progr. logic ..
..................................................................... 1-66
Image of the external NCK outputs of SI prog.
K
log. ............................................................... 1-65
Image of the external PLC inputs of SI progr. kindOfSumcorr .............................................1-25
log. ............................................................... 1-65 Kinematic type............................................1-255
Image of the external PLC outputs of SI prog. kVFactor ............................................1-92, 1-184
log. ............................................................... 1-65
Image of the PLC flag-variable for SI prog. logic
..................................................................... 1-66 L
Image of the ZK1PO register. .................... 1-211
Image of the ZK1RES register ................... 1-211 lag .....................................................1-92, 1-184
Impulse enable for drive.................... 1-92, 1-184 Last assigned T-number for tool management ....
impulseEnable .................................. 1-92, 1-184 ...................................................................1-237
IN data byte ................................................. 1-54 Last programmed block number......1-149, 1-152
IN data double word..................................... 1-54 lastBlockNoStr.................................1-149, 1-152
IN data word................................................. 1-54 Latched probe position in the MCS ...1-82, 1-174
IN Real data ................................................. 1-54 Latched probe position retransformed in the
Incarnation counter .................................... 1-291 WCS ...........................................................1-196
inclAngle .................................................... 1-225 Length in number of bytes ..........................1-292
Inclination angle of inclined grinding wheel 1-225 Length of FFS.............................................1-296
Incorrect block occurred............................. 1-130 Length of the path between punches .........1-164
Increment Hirth tooth system 1st axis ........ 1-256 Level of access rights ...................................1-24
Increment Hirth tooth system 2nd axis....... 1-256 Level of IPO buffer .....................................1-298
index ....1-92, 1-101, 1-104, 1-184, 1-200, 1-202, licenseStatus ................................................1-58
................................................................... 1-207 Licensing status............................................1-58
Index act. G function (current language) .... 1-162 Limit for axial correction $AA_OFF reached.......
Index of active G function (ISO Dialect) ..... 1-162 ..........................................................1-82, 1-174

I Index 07.05
Limitation of protection zone applicate 1-42, 1-49 Type .............................................................1-62

Limiting value achieved via $AA_TOFF[ ] .. 1-196 Unit ..............................................................1-62
Line enabled for modification .......... 1-149, 1-152 Status of start triggering............................1-61
Line number of current NC instruction Trigger mask integer 16-bit .......................1-62
(start 1) ...................................................... 1-147 Trigger mask integer 32-bit .......................1-62
Link transfer rate ........................................ 1-126 Trigger value integer 16-bit .......................1-63
Link voltage................................................ 1-212 Trigger value integer 32-bit .......................1-63
linkVoltage ...................................... 1-212, 1-215 Trigger value real 32-bit ............................1-63
linShift 1-106, 1-107, 1-108, 1-166, 1-167, 1-205, Trigger value real 64-bit ............................1-63
........................................................ 1-209, 1-210 Trigger variable
linShiftFine .....1-107, 1-108, 1-166, 1-167, 1-205 Area..............................................................1-63
load ................................................. 1-212, 1-215 Col ...............................................................1-63
Load...............1-101, 1-104, 1-202, 1-207, 1-212 Row..............................................................1-63
Location ..................................................... 1-252 Type .............................................................1-64
Location number of the new tool ................ 1-127 Unit ..............................................................1-64
Location-dependent setup offset................ 1-261 Triggering method.....................................1-63
Location-dependent wear offset................. 1-265 Triggering status .......................................1-62
Log Type of start triggering ..............................1-61
Automatic Configuration Save .................. 1-59 User status................................................1-69
Config. File Save/Load Error Status ......... 1-60 Logical drive number ..................................1-274
Configuration File Control......................... 1-60 Long value of the auxiliary function ............1-168
Configuration File Name........................... 1-60 Lower limit nth polynominal for synchronous
Load trace session during NCK start-up... 1-59 action..........................................................1-116
Session descr. loaded at NCK start-up .... 1-59 Lower limit of protection zone, applicate......1-40,
Log file name ............................................. 1-306 .....................................................................1-48
Log. ludAccCounter............................................1-132
Start value integer 16 bit .......................... 1-61
Log. basic address of slot .......................... 1-293
logDriveNo ........................................ 1-93, 1-185 M
Logging
Access rights of the session ..................... 1-64 M01 selected ..............................................1-143
Active users............................................ 1-135 machFunc...................................................1-132
Comments on session.............................. 1-64 Machine axis !!CAUTION NCU LINK!!........1-286
Connection of the session ........................ 1-64 Machine axis has control over the drive ......1-92,
Delay after trigger..................................... 1-62 ...................................................................1-184
Delay of start trigger ................................. 1-60 Machine axis identifier .......................1-88, 1-180
Disable of a user ...................................... 1-69 Machine axis name ....................................1-275
End actions............................................... 1-69 Madr ...........................................................1-159
Last user run time..................................... 1-60 magActPlace ..............................................1-230
Max. no. of files ........................................ 1-69 Magazine....................................................1-252
Max. user run time.................................... 1-60 Magazine location data...............................1-234
Name of the session................................. 1-64 Magazine location hierarchy.......................1-236
No. OEM data lists ................................... 1-59 Magazine location type...............................1-220
No. of files created ................................... 1-70 Magazine location user data for a tool magazine
No. std. data lists...................................... 1-59 ...................................................................1-248
Number of comparisons ........................... 1-62 Magazine of the new tool............................1-127
Number of start comparisons ................... 1-60 Magazine user data for a tool magazine.....1-247
OEM event types.................................... 1-133 magBLMag .................................................1-227
Priority of the session ............................... 1-64 magCBCmd................................................1-227
Remaining number of comparisons.......... 1-62 magCBCmdState .......................................1-227
Remaining number of start comparisons.. 1-61 magCBIdent ...............................................1-227
res. no. free files....................................... 1-57 magCMCmdPar1........................................1-227
Standard event types ............................. 1-133 magCMCmdPar2........................................1-227
Start screen form integer 16 bit ................ 1-60 magCmd.....................................................1-230
Start screen form integer 32 bit ................ 1-60 magCmdPar1 .............................................1-230
Start value integer 32 bit .......................... 1-61 magCmdPar2 .............................................1-230
Start value real 32 bit ............................... 1-61 magCmdState ............................................1-230
Start value real 64 bit ............................... 1-61 magDim ......................................................1-230
Start variable magIdent ....................................................1-230
Col................................................................1-61 magKind .....................................................1-231
Row..............................................................1-62 magLink1....................................................1-231

07.05 I Index
magLink2 ................................................... 1-231 Maximum rotary speed of the grinding wheel ......
magLocSearchStrat ................................... 1-231 ...................................................................1-225
magNo ....................................................... 1-231 Maximum spindle speed at G26 .................1-279
magNrPlaces ............................................. 1-231 Maximum value D number............................1-25
magRPlaces............................................... 1-227 maxNetFileLengthTooSmall .......................1-305
magSearch ................................................ 1-228 maxNumAdapter ..........................................1-26
magState ................................................... 1-231 maxnumAlarms ............................................1-26
magToolSearchStrat .................................. 1-231 maxnumChannels ........................................1-26
magVIdent ................................................. 1-229 maxnumContainer ........................................1-26
magVNo..................................................... 1-229 maxnumContainerSlots ................................1-26
magVPlaces............................................... 1-228 maxnumCuttEdges_Tool ..............................1-26
magWearCompoundNo ............................. 1-232 maxnumDrives .............................................1-26
magZWMag ............................................... 1-228 maxnumEdgeSC ..........................................1-26
markActiveList............................................ 1-132 maxnumEventTypes.....................................1-26
maskToolManagement ....................... 1-25, 1-33 maxnumGlobMachAxes ...............................1-26
Master tool holder for cutting edge selection ...... maxNumSumcorr .........................................1-27
................................................................... 1-134 maxnumTraceProtData ................................1-27
Max. no of data per data list for trace protocol. ... maxnumTraceProtDataList...........................1-27
..................................................................... 1-27 maxRotSpeed.............................................1-225
Max. No. avail. tool adapt. data sets ............ 1-26 maxTipSpeed .............................................1-225
Max. no. of data per data list for trace protocol ... MDB_JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD.....
..................................................................... 1-27 ...................................................................1-277
Max. no. of event types for trace protocolling ..... MDB_JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE ....................1-277
..................................................................... 1-26 MDB_WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE .......1-279
Max. number edges per tool ........................ 1-26 MDB_WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE .........1-279
Max. number of directories which may be MDBA_DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE........................1-274
created......................................................... 1-68 MDCA_CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR .............1-276
Max. number of files which may be created . 1-68 MDCA_CTRLOUT_TYPE...........................1-276
Max. number total offsets per edge.............. 1-26 MDCA_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR........................1-274
Max. safety speed difference NCK - drive... 1-97, MDCA_DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE ...............1-274
................................................................... 1-188 MDCA_DRIVE_TYPE.................................1-274
maxCuttingEdgeNo...................................... 1-25 MDCA_ENC_MODULE_NR.......................1-276
maxCycleTimeBrut.......................... 1-295, 1-299 MDCA_ENC_TYPE ....................................1-276
maxCycleTimeNet........................... 1-295, 1-299 MDD_DRY_RUN_FEED ............................1-278
maxElementsFastFifoUsed ........................ 1-305 MDD_INT_INCR_PER_DEG......................1-274
maxFileLength ........................................... 1-305 MDD_INT_INCR_PER_MM .......................1-274
maxGrossFileLengthUsed ......................... 1-305 MDD_JOG_REV_SET_VELO ....................1-277
Maximum number of magazine locations.... 1-30 MDD_JOG_SET_VELO .............................1-277
Maximum access time to bus..................... 1-288 MDD_JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO ................1-277
Maximum Fifo buffer fill level reached........ 1-305 MDD_JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE....................1-277
Maximum gross cycle time......................... 1-299 MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_0.....................1-37, 1-44
Maximum length of log file ......................... 1-305 MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_1.....................1-37, 1-44
Maximum log file size................................. 1-305 MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_2.....................1-37, 1-44
Maximum net cycle time ............................ 1-299 MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_3.....................1-37, 1-44
Maximum number of available channels...... 1-26 MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_4.....................1-37, 1-44
Maximum number of available drives........... 1-26 MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_5.....................1-37, 1-44
Maximum number of available machine axes ..... MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_6.....................1-37, 1-44
..................................................................... 1-26 MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_7.....................1-37, 1-45
Maximum number of axis containers ........... 1-26 MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_8.....................1-38, 1-45
Maximum number of files per directory ........ 1-59 MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_9.....................1-38, 1-45
Maximum number of handwheels ................ 1-30 MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_0....................1-38, 1-45
Maximum number of magazines .................. 1-30 MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_1....................1-38, 1-45
Maximum number of protection zones ......... 1-35 MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_2....................1-38, 1-45
Maximum number of slots per axis container1-26 MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_3....................1-38, 1-45
Maximum number of subdirectories per directory MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_4....................1-38, 1-45
..................................................................... 1-59 MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_5....................1-38, 1-45
Maximum peripheral speed of the grinding wheel MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_6....................1-38, 1-45
................................................................... 1-225 MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_7....................1-38, 1-45
Maximum position of 1st rotary axis........... 1-257 MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_8....................1-38, 1-46
Maximum position of 2nd rotary axis.......... 1-257 MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_9....................1-39, 1-46
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_0 ....................1-39, 1-46

I Index 07.05
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_1.................... 1-39, 1-46 Memory used DRAM file system no. 1 .........1-70
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_2.................... 1-39, 1-46 Memory used DRAM file system no. 2 .........1-70
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_3.................... 1-39, 1-46 Memory used in SRAM file system...............1-70
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_4.................... 1-39, 1-46 Message frame type ...................................1-294
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_5.................... 1-39, 1-46 Message from the part program .................1-149
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_6.................... 1-39, 1-46 Message ZK1 drive alarm..................1-88, 1-180
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_7.................... 1-39, 1-46 minCycleTimeBrut ...........................1-295, 1-299
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_8.................... 1-39, 1-46 minCycleTimeNet ............................1-296, 1-299
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_9.................... 1-39, 1-47 Minimum access time to bus ......................1-288
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_0................... 1-40, 1-47 Minimum diameter of the grinding wheel ....1-225
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_1................... 1-40, 1-47 minimum gross cycle time ..........................1-299
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_2................... 1-40, 1-47 Minimum net cycle time ..............................1-299
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_3................... 1-40, 1-47 Minimum position of 1st rotary axis ............1-256
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_4................... 1-40, 1-47 Minimum position of 2nd rotary axis ...........1-256
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_5................... 1-40, 1-47 Minimum spindle speed at G25 ..................1-279
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_6................... 1-40, 1-47 Minimum width of the grinding wheel .........1-226
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_7................... 1-40, 1-47 minToolDia .................................................1-225
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_8................... 1-40, 1-47 minToolWide ..............................................1-226
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_9................... 1-40, 1-47 mirrorImgActive ....... 1-106, 1-107, 1-108, 1-166,
MDD_PA_MINUS_LIM ....................... 1-40, 1-48 ............................................ 1-167, 1-205, 1-209
MDD_PA_PLUS_LIM.......................... 1-41, 1-48 Mirroring .....................................................1-167
MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26................ 1-279 Mirroring enabled in a settable frame ........1-107,
MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS .............. 1-279 ............................................ 1-108, 1-166, 1-205
MDD_SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 ................. 1-279 Mirroring enabled in an active frame .........1-106,
MDD_SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME............. 1-274 ...................................................................1-209
MDD_THREAD_START_ANGLE .............. 1-278 MLFB of the NCU module ............................1-57
MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS ........... 1-279 mmcCmd ......................................................1-34
MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS ............. 1-280 mmcCmdPrep ..............................................1-34
MDL_POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO .... mmcCmdPrepCounter..................................1-58
................................................................... 1-275 mmcCmdQuit ...............................................1-34
MDLA_DRIVE_INVERTER_CODE............ 1-275 mmcCmdQuitPrep ........................................1-34
MDS_CHAN_NAME .................................. 1-111 Mode according to $AC_SMODE...1-100, 1-103,
MDSA_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB . 1-275 ........................................................1-201, 1-206
MDU_PA_ACTIV_IMMED .................. 1-41, 1-48 Mode group ready ......................................1-110
MDU_PA_CONT_NUM....................... 1-41, 1-48 modeSpindleToolRevolver ...........................1-27
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_0.................... 1-41, 1-48 modeWearGroup........................................1-228
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_1.................... 1-41, 1-48 Modification counter for $$driveType ...........1-57
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_2.................... 1-41, 1-48 Modification counter for ACC information ...1-285
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_3.................... 1-41, 1-48 Modification counter for dimension system...1-67
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_4.................... 1-41, 1-49 Modification counter for magazine data......1-140
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_5.................... 1-42, 1-49 Modification counter for new CP configs. ...1-289
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_6.................... 1-42, 1-49 Modification counter for stop run ................1-139
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_7.................... 1-42, 1-49 Modification counter for tool offsets ............1-140
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_8.................... 1-42, 1-49 Modification counter for upload buffer ........1-146
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_9.................... 1-42, 1-49 Module identifier .........................................1-274
MDU_PA_LIM_3DIM .......................... 1-42, 1-49 Monitoring data per tool edge.....................1-222
MDU_PA_ORI..................................... 1-42, 1-50 motEnd .......................................................1-200
MDU_PA_TW ..................................... 1-43, 1-50 Motion end criterion for single-axis interpolation
measFctState.................................... 1-93, 1-185 ...................................................................1-200
measPos1 ......................................... 1-93, 1-185 Motor temperature ...........................1-212, 1-215
measPos2 ......................................... 1-93, 1-185 Motor temperature warning ...............1-90, 1-182
measPosDev..................................... 1-93, 1-185 Motor wiring selection (star/delta)......1-89, 1-181
measUnit........................................... 1-93, 1-185 motorTemperature...........................1-212, 1-215
Measurement results ................................. 1-119 msg.............................................................1-149
Measurement setpoint angle...................... 1-114 multiPlace...................................................1-235
Measurement setpoint position .................. 1-114 Mval............................................................1-159
Measurement type ..................................... 1-120
Measuring circuit type of direct measuring
system ....................................................... 1-214
Measuring circuit type of indirect measuring
syste .......................................................... 1-215

07.05 I Index
N row ..........................................................1-301
type .........................................................1-301
name....1-77, 1-101, 1-104, 1-169, 1-193, 1-202, unit ..........................................................1-301
................................................................... 1-207 numActAxes .................................................1-34
Name of physical spindle. ............... 1-101, 1-202 numActDEdges ..........................................1-252
namePhys .................1-101, 1-104, 1-202, 1-207 numActMags ..............................................1-229
NC in stop state ......................................... 1-138 numAlarms ...................................................1-59
ncFkt .......................................................... 1-162 numAnalogInp ..............................................1-28
ncFktAct..................................................... 1-162 numAnalogOutp ...........................................1-28
ncFktBin..................................................... 1-162 numAuxAxes ................................................1-34
ncFktBinAct................................................ 1-162 numBAGs .....................................................1-28
ncFktBinFanuc ........................................... 1-162 numBasisFrames ................................1-28, 1-34
ncFktBinS .................................................. 1-162 Number NC instruction groups (ISO Dialect) 1-30
ncFktFanuc ................................................ 1-162 Number of active auxiliary functions( H-
ncFktS........................................................ 1-163 functions)....................................................1-159
NCK alarm pending.................................... 1-129 Number of active channels ...........................1-28
NCK compiler switch.................................. 1-296 Number of active drives................................1-29
NCK flag for the SI programmable logic....... 1-66 Number of active E-function .......................1-158
NCK logbook................................................ 1-27 Number of active machine axes ...................1-30
NCK sign-of-life............................................ 1-58 Number of active S-functions .....................1-159
NCK timer .................................................... 1-54 Number of active tool..................................1-125
NCK timer variable for the SI programmable Number of active tool edge.........................1-122
logic ............................................................. 1-67 Number of active wear group .....................1-232
NCK type ..................................................... 1-27 Number of assigned handwheel .......1-92, 1-184,
NCK version................................................. 1-28 ...................................................................1-200
nckAliveAndWell .......................................... 1-58 Number of auxiliary axes ..............................1-34
nckCompileSwitches.................................. 1-296 Number of available mode groups................1-28
nckLogbookSeekPos ................................... 1-27 Number of available tool carriers................1-135
nckType ....................................................... 1-27 Number of axes in channel...........................1-34
nckVersion ................................................... 1-28 Number of axis containers............................1-28
NCSC system time....................................... 1-68 Number of axis entries................................1-286
ncStartCounter........................................... 1-132 Number of basic frames in channel ..............1-34
ncStartSignalCounter................................. 1-133 Number of bus access errors type 1...........1-288
NCU link active ............................................ 1-58 Number of bus access errors type 2...........1-288
NCU power class ......................................... 1-28 Number of bus cycles .................................1-288
ncuLinkActive............................................... 1-58 Number of bytes log file undersized ...........1-305
ncuPerformanceClass.................................. 1-28 Number of channel-independent basic frames ....
nettoMemFfs ................................................ 1-58 .....................................................................1-28
No of par. of the mag. user data f tool mag. Number of channel-independent user frames .....
place ............................................................ 1-30 .....................................................................1-31
No of par. of the mag. user data for a tool mag. Number of channel-specific R parameters ...1-35
..................................................................... 1-30 Number of clients .......................................1-289
No. of active tool for flat D-no. max 8 digits 1-125 Number of configured slaves......................1-290
No. of multiple assignments of a magazine Number of current transformer data record 1-125
location ........................................................ 1-31 Number of cutting edges .................1-219, 1-237
No. of P elements of a cutting edge in module Number of D numbers in module................1-252
TUE.............................................................. 1-29 Number of data in the list............................1-301
No. of param. in the user monitoring data.... 1-29 Number of defined locations for the control block
No. prog. transformation data record block ...................................................................1-228
search ........................................................ 1-130 Number of directories that can be created....1-57
No. progr. tool for flat D-no. with max. 8 digits .... Number of DP buses ..................................1-287
................................................................... 1-134 Number of entries Fifo buffer undersized ...1-306
No. total offset params per total offset set ... 1-31 Number of events to be skipped.................1-306
No.of directories that have already been created Number of Fanuc-G functions ....................1-109
..................................................................... 1-69 Number of files that can be created..............1-57
Non-licensed options ................................... 1-70 Number of files that have already been created
Normalized path parameter ....................... 1-121 .....................................................................1-69
nrDuplo ...................................................... 1-237 Number of G functions (GroupID).................1-51
nth data in list Number of G functions (Gruppe_NUM) ........1-51
area ........................................................ 1-301 Number of geometry axes ............................1-35
col........................................................... 1-301 Number of highest channel axis. ..................1-35

I Index 07.05
Number of HW analog inputs ....................... 1-28 Number of workpieces machined in current run ..
Number of HW analog output ...................... 1-53 ...................................................................1-125
Number of HW analog outputs..................... 1-28 numChannels ...............................................1-28
Number of HW digital inputs ........................ 1-29 numContainer...............................................1-28
Number of HW digital outputs ...................... 1-29 numContainerSlots .......................................1-28
Number of internal buffer magazine........... 1-228 numContourInProtArea.................................1-34
Number of log. spindles ............................... 1-35 numCuttEdgeParams ...................................1-29
Number of M function for tool change .......... 1-32 numCuttEdgeParams_tao ............................1-29
Number of magazines................................ 1-229 numCuttEdgeParams_tas ............................1-29
Number of masters .................................... 1-294 numCuttEdgeParams_ts ..............................1-29
Number of NC instruction groups................. 1-29 numCuttEdgeParams_tu ..............................1-29
Number of occurrences of event ................ 1-304 numCuttEdgeParams_tus ............................1-29
Number of orientation axes in channel......... 1-35 numCuttEdges.................................1-219, 1-237
Number of P elements of a cutting edge...... 1-29 numData.....................................................1-301
Number of P elements of a tool.................... 1-31 numDigitInp ..................................................1-29
Number of P elements of a tool edge in module numDigitOutp ...............................................1-29
TS ................................................................ 1-29 numDrives ....................................................1-29
Number of parameter set .................. 1-93, 1-185 numElementsFastFifoTooSmall .................1-306
Number of parameters in $$toolHolderData 1-31 numFilesPerDir.............................................1-59
Number of parameters of a multiple assignment numGCodeGroups .......................................1-29
..................................................................... 1-31 numGCodeGroupsFanuc .............................1-30
Number of parameters per adapter.............. 1-31 numGeoAxes................................................1-35
Number of parameters per magazine location .... numGlobMachAxes ......................................1-30
..................................................................... 1-30 numHandWheels..........................................1-30
Number of pending general alarms.............. 1-59 numMachAxes..............................................1-35
Number of polygon elements / protection zone... numMagLocParams_tap ..............................1-30
..................................................................... 1-34 numMagLocParams_u .................................1-30
Number of programmed tool ...................... 1-134 numMagParams_tam ...................................1-30
Number of real locations in the magazine.. 1-231 numMagParams_u .......................................1-30
Number of Siemens applic. cutting edge data .... numMagPlaceParams ..................................1-30
..................................................................... 1-29 numMagPlacesMax ......................................1-30
Number of Siemens applic. magazine location numMagsMax...............................................1-30
data.............................................................. 1-30 numOriAxes..................................................1-35
Number of Siemens applic. monitoring data 1-29 numParams_Adapt.......................................1-31
Number of Siemens application magazine data numParams_SC ...........................................1-31
..................................................................... 1-30 numPlaceMulti..............................................1-31
Number of Siemens application tool data .... 1-31 numPlaceMultiParams..................................1-31
Number of slaves connected to bus........... 1-289 numProtArea ................................................1-35
Number of slots.......................................... 1-293 numRParams ...............................................1-35
Number of slots per axis container............... 1-28 numSpindles.................................................1-35
Number of special workpieces (user-defined) ..... numSpindlesLog...........................................1-35
................................................................... 1-137 numStrokes ................................................1-164
Number of spindles ...................................... 1-35 numSubDirsPerDir .......................................1-59
Number of strokes...................................... 1-164 numSynAct ......................................1-159, 1-161
Number of synchronous actions...... 1-159, 1-161 numToBaust .................................................1-31
Number of T area......................................... 1-36 numToolEdges .............................................1-35
Number of T areas ....................................... 1-31 numToolHolderParams.................................1-31
Number of the active M-function ................ 1-159 numToolHolders .........................................1-133
Number of the actual drive parameter set... 1-88, numToolParams_tad ....................................1-31
................................................................... 1-180 numToolParams_tu ......................................1-31
Number of the geometry axis ..................... 1-200 numTools....................................................1-237
Number of the internal load magazine ....... 1-227 numTraceProtocDataList..............................1-59
Number of the magazine................. 1-229, 1-231 numTraceProtocEventType........................1-133
Number of the preselected T-function........ 1-159 numTraceProtocOemDataList ......................1-59
Number of tool edges................................... 1-35 numTraceProtocOemEventType ................1-133
Number of tool holders in the TOA of the numUserFrames..................................1-31, 1-35
channel ...................................................... 1-133
Number of toolholder ................................. 1-128
Number of tools in the area TO.................. 1-237 O
Number of user frames ................................ 1-35
Number of valid contour elements ...... 1-41, 1-48 Odinate arc centre of 3rd contour element ...1-45

07.05 I Index
Odinate end point of 3rd contour element .... 1-47 Oscillation interrupt position 2 ...........1-83, 1-175
OEM text for logging buffer .......................... 1-35 Other counter for _N_COMPLETE_DOC_ACX...
oemProtText ................................................ 1-35 .....................................................................1-55
Offset Hirth tooth system 1st axis .............. 1-256 Other counter for _N_COMPLETE_DOT_ACX ...
Offset Hirth tooth system 2nd axis ............. 1-256 .....................................................................1-55
Offset memory number length (Fanuc) ...... 1-123 Other counter for _N_COMPLETE_DPC_ACX ...
Offset memory number radius (ISO Dialect)) ...... .....................................................................1-56
................................................................... 1-122 OUT data byte ..............................................1-54
Offset normal ............................................. 1-134 OUT data double word .................................1-54
Offset of 1st rotary axis in degrees ............ 1-256 OUT data word .............................................1-55
Offset of 2nd rotary axis in degrees ........... 1-256 OUT Real data .............................................1-54
Offset to leading axis/spindle, actual value 1-86, Overall total jerk of an axis .........................1-173
................................................................... 1-178 Overall total of jerk of an axis .......................1-81
Operating mode .............................. 1-212, 1-215 Owner magazine location of the tool ..........1-220
operatingMode ................................ 1-212, 1-215 Owner magazine of the tool........................1-220
operatingTime ............................................ 1-300
opMode..........1-102, 1-104, 1-110, 1-202, 1-207
optAssStopActive....................................... 1-143 P
optStopActive............................................. 1-143
Ordinal number of an alarm ....... 1-71, 1-73, 1-75 paAccLimA .................................................1-133
Ordinate arc centre of 10th contour element....... paJerkLimA ................................................1-133
............................................................ 1-39, 1-46 Parameter 1 of the alarm........... 1-72, 1-74, 1-76
Ordinate arc centre of 1st contour element . 1-38, Parameter 2 of the alarm........... 1-72, 1-74, 1-76
..................................................................... 1-45 Parameter 3 of the alarm........... 1-72, 1-74, 1-76
Ordinate arc centre of 2nd contour element 1-38, Parameter 4 of the alarm........... 1-72, 1-74, 1-76
..................................................................... 1-45 Parameterizing data for module TAD .........1-239
Ordinate arc centre of 3rd contour element . 1-38 Parameterizing data for module TAO .........1-239
Ordinate arc centre of 4th contour element. 1-38, Parameterizing data for module TAS .........1-239
..................................................................... 1-45 Parameterizing data for module TD............1-240
Ordinate arc centre of 5th contour element. 1-38, Parameterizing data for module TO ...........1-240
..................................................................... 1-45 Parameterizing data for module TS............1-240
Ordinate arc centre of 6th contour element. 1-38, Parameterizing data for module TU............1-241
..................................................................... 1-45 Parameterizing data for module TUE .........1-241
Ordinate arc centre of 7th contour element. 1-38, Parameterizing data for module TUS .........1-241
..................................................................... 1-45 Parameterizing mask for module TAD........1-242
Ordinate arc centre of 8th contour element. 1-38, Parameterizing mask for module TAO........1-242
..................................................................... 1-45 Parameterizing mask for module TAS ........1-243
Ordinate arc centre of 9th contour element. 1-38, Parameterizing mask for module TD ..........1-243
..................................................................... 1-46 Parameterizing mask for module TO ..........1-244
Ordinate end point of 10th contour element 1-40, Parameterizing mask for module TS ..........1-244
..................................................................... 1-47 Parameterizing mask for module TU ..........1-245
Ordinate end point of 1st contour element .. 1-40, Parameterizing mask for module TUE........1-245
..................................................................... 1-47 Parameterizing mask for module TUS........1-246
Ordinate end point of 2nd contour element . 1-40, Parameterizing the module TD (identifier) ..1-240
..................................................................... 1-47 paramNrCCV..............................................1-226
Ordinate end point of 4th contour element .. 1-40, paramSetNo ......................................1-93, 1-185
..................................................................... 1-47 parDataTAD ...............................................1-239
Ordinate end point of 5th contour element .. 1-40, parDataTAO ...............................................1-239
..................................................................... 1-47 parDataTAS................................................1-239
Ordinate end point of 6th contour element .. 1-40, parDataTD..................................................1-240
..................................................................... 1-47 parDataTO..................................................1-240
Ordinate end point of 7th contour element .. 1-40, parDataToolIdentTD ...................................1-240
..................................................................... 1-47 parDataTS ..................................................1-240
Ordinate end point of 8th contour element .. 1-40, parDataTU..................................................1-241
..................................................................... 1-47 parDataTUE ...............................................1-241
Ordinate end point of 9th contour element .. 1-40, parDataTUS ...............................................1-241
..................................................................... 1-47 Parking axis.......................................1-90, 1-182
Ordinate of end point of 3rd contour element...... parMasksTAD.............................................1-242
..................................................................... 1-40 parMasksTAO ............................................1-242
Orientation reference system ..................... 1-136 parMasksTAS.............................................1-243
Oscillation interrupt position 1 ........... 1-83, 1-175 parMasksTD ...............................................1-243

I Index 07.05
parMasksTO .............................................. 1-244 Processing block for the start trigger ..........1-306
parMasksTS............................................... 1-244 Processing block for the stop trigger ..........1-306
parMasksTU............................................... 1-245 Profibus actual value message frame ..........1-70
parMasksTUE ............................................ 1-245 Prog. spindle mode .........................1-203, 1-207
parMasksTUS ............................................ 1-246 Prog. spindle mode block search ....1-203, 1-208
Part of $$absoluteBlockBufferName .......... 1-146 Prog. transformation block search..............1-130
partDistance............................................... 1-164 progDistToGo .............................................1-193
Partner channel NCU, block search waits.. 1-137 progDLNumberS ........................................1-134
Path for ACC files in the NCK file system .. 1-286 progDuploNumber ......................................1-134
Path from beginning of the block in the BCS ...... progIndexAxPosNo ...........................1-94, 1-186
................................................................... 1-121 progName................. 1-149, 1-152, 1-153, 1-156
Path override for synchronous actions....... 1-121 progProtText.................................................1-36
Path to the end of the block in the BCS ..... 1-121 Program execution from external active .....1-131
Path veloc. in basic coordinate system ...... 1-126 Program is waiting for _N_F_MODE ..........1-134
Path velocity in the WCS ........................... 1-126 Program name.......... 1-149, 1-152, 1-153, 1-156
paVeloLimA ............................................... 1-133 Program status ...........................................1-134
pblVersion ....................................... 1-213, 1-215 Program status according to $AC_PROG ..1-121
pcmciaDataShotAct ................................... 1-296 Program test...............................................1-143
pcmciaDataShotSum ................................. 1-296 Programmable frame..................................1-119
pcmciaFfsLength........................................ 1-296 Programmed circular passes......................1-148
pcmciaShotStatus ...................................... 1-296 Programmed circular passes search ..........1-148
pcmciaStartFfsOffset ................................. 1-296 Programmed dwell time..............................1-130
pcmciaStartShotOffset ............................... 1-296 Programmed lead .......................................1-123
pEgBc ........................................................ 1-133 Programmed position for block search .......1-198
Physical spindle name .................... 1-104, 1-207 Programmed position, actual value ............1-192
PIN for licensing........................................... 1-68 Programmed position, desired value ..........1-192
placeData................................................... 1-234 Programmed position, distance-to-go.........1-193
placeType .................................................. 1-236 Programmed position, REPOS...................1-193
Plane assignment of protection zone .. 1-42, 1-50 Programmed SUG desired value....1-101, 1-104,
Plane setting .............................................. 1-117 ........................................................1-202, 1-207
PLC messages (DB2) ..................... 2-319, 3-389 progREPOS................................................1-193
PLC override for motion-synchronous actions .... progStatus ..................................................1-134
.......................................................... 1-83, 1-175 progTestActive ...........................................1-143
PLC override for synchronized actions ...... 1-121 progTNumber .............................................1-134
plcStartReason ............................... 1-153, 1-156 progTNumberLong .....................................1-134
pMthSDC ................................................... 1-134 progToolIdent .............................................1-134
pOffn .......................................................... 1-134 progWaitForEditUnlock...............................1-134
Pos. offset of the synchr. spindle desired value .. protAreaCounter.........................................1-135
.......................................................... 1-79, 1-171 protCnfgAutoLoad ........................................1-59
Position as diameter or radius ................... 1-199 protCnfgAutoLoadFile...................................1-59
Position component X ................................ 1-257 protCnfgAutoSave ........................................1-59
Position component Y ................................ 1-258 protCnfgCtl ...................................................1-60
Position component Z ................................ 1-258 protCnfgFilename.........................................1-60
Position control cycle factor ....................... 1-275 protCnfgStat .................................................1-60
position control gain factor ................ 1-92, 1-184 Protection zone modification counter .........1-135
Position controller difference............. 1-98, 1-190 protocLastValNetIpoCycle ............................1-60
Position of the cutting edge center point. ... 1-193 protocMaxValNetIpoCycle ............................1-60
Position of tool base, desired value ........... 1-193 protocolFilename........................................1-306
Position offset from synchronous actions.... 1-82, protocStrtMaskInt16 .....................................1-60
................................................................... 1-174 protocStrtMaskInt32 .....................................1-60
Position offset referring to leading axis/spindle ... protocStrtMatchCount...................................1-60
.......................................................... 1-87, 1-179 protocStrtNumEvDelay .................................1-60
Power section code of drive module .......... 1-275 protocStrtRemMatchCount ...........................1-61
poweronTime ............................................. 1-297 protocStrtState .............................................1-61
preContrFactTorque.......................... 1-93, 1-185 protocStrtType..............................................1-61
preContrFactVel................................ 1-93, 1-185 protocStrtValueInt16.....................................1-61
preContrMode ................................... 1-93, 1-185 protocStrtValueInt32.....................................1-61
PRESET ........................................... 1-94, 1-186 protocStrtValueReal32 .................................1-61
Preset state....................................... 1-94, 1-186 protocStrtValueReal64 .................................1-61
PRESETActive.................................. 1-94, 1-186 protocStrtVarCol...........................................1-61
PRESETVal ...................................... 1-94, 1-186 protocStrtVarRow .........................................1-62

07.05 I Index
protocStrtVarType........................................ 1-62 Rapid traverse override ..............................1-136

protocStrtVarUnit ......................................... 1-62 readyActive.................................................1-110
protocTrigMaskInt16 .................................... 1-62 Real data ......................................................1-53
protocTrigMaskInt32 .................................... 1-62 Real data (32 bits) from/to the PLC ..............1-52
protocTrigMatchCount ................................. 1-62 Received message frame...........................1-293
protocTrigNumEvDelay................................ 1-62 Reference point cam .........................1-94, 1-186
protocTrigRemMatchCount .......................... 1-62 Referenced spindle number .......................1-226
protocTrigState ............................................ 1-62 References .................................................0-455
protocTrigType............................................. 1-63 refPtBusy...........................................1-94, 1-186
protocTrigValueInt16.................................... 1-63 refPtCamNo.......................................1-94, 1-186
protocTrigValueInt32.................................... 1-63 refPtStatus.........................................1-95, 1-187
protocTrigValueReal32 ................................ 1-63 remainDwellTime........................................1-136
protocTrigValueReal64 ................................ 1-63 Remaining dwell time .................................1-136
protocTrigVarArea........................................ 1-63 Representation of active tool ........................1-27
protocTrigVarCol.......................................... 1-63 reqParts......................................................1-136
protocTrigVarRow ........................................ 1-63 Requested gear stage ........ 1-101, 1-103, 1-202,
protocTrigVarType ....................................... 1-64 ...................................................................1-206
protocTrigVarUnit......................................... 1-64 resetActive..................................................1-110
protocUserActive........................................ 1-135 Restricted cyclic variable service................1-131
protSessAccR .............................................. 1-64 Result
protSessComm ............................................ 1-64 number of tools found .............................1-246
protSessConn .............................................. 1-64 T-numbers of the tools found ..................1-246
protSessName ............................................. 1-64 resultNrOfTools ..........................................1-246
protSessPrior ............................................... 1-64 resultPar1 ...................................................1-306
pSMode .......................................... 1-203, 1-207 resultToolNr................................................1-246
pSModeS ........................................ 1-203, 1-208 Retraction of the single axis is programmed........
pTc............................................................. 1-135 ...................................................................1-175
pTcAng ...................................................... 1-135 Retraction of the single axis programmed ....1-83
pTcDiff ....................................................... 1-135 Retraction position of the single axis .1-83, 1-175
pTcNum ..................................................... 1-135 Return point on the contour for repositioning.......
pTcSol........................................................ 1-135 ...................................................................1-197
pTcStat ...................................................... 1-135 Return value 2 for command MagCBCmd..1-227
pTCutMod .................................................. 1-136 Return variable 1 for the command MagCBCmd
pTCutModS................................................ 1-136 ...................................................................1-227
pToolO ....................................................... 1-136 rotation 1-106, 1-107, 1-166, 1-167, 1-205, 1-209
punchActive ............................................... 1-164 Rotation ......................................................1-167
punchDelayActive ...................................... 1-164 Rotation of a settable frame 1-107, 1-166, 1-205
punchDelayTime ........................................ 1-164 Rotation of an active frame..............1-106, 1-209
Punching delay time................................... 1-164 rotSys .........................................................1-136
Punching or nibbling active ........................ 1-164 ROV rapid traverse override.......................1-143
Punching with delay active......................... 1-164 row .............................................................1-301
punchNibActivation ...................................... 1-36 rpa ..............................................................1-281
Runtime of selected NC program ...............1-299
Q
S
qecLrnIsOn ....................................... 1-94, 1-186
Quadrant error compensation learning active ..... Sadr............................................................1-159
.......................................................... 1-94, 1-186 Safe actual position of axis................1-97, 1-189
Safe actual position of the drive ........1-97, 1-189
Safe input signals of the axis.............1-96, 1-188
R Safe input signals of the drive ...........1-96, 1-188
Safe input signals of the drive part 2 .1-97, 1-188
R ................................................................ 1-281 Safe input signals part 2 ....................1-96, 1-188
R parameter (from SW 3.3)........................ 1-281 Safe limit of actual speed ..................1-96, 1-188
R parameter (up to SW 3.2)....................... 1-281 Safe limit of desired speed ................1-96, 1-188
Radius of the circle (only effective for G02/G03) Safe operation active.........................1-96, 1-188
................................................................... 1-147 Safe output signals of the axis...........1-97, 1-189
Ramp-function generator rapid stop.. 1-89, 1-181 Safe output signals of the drive .........1-97, 1-189
rapFeedRateOvr ........................................ 1-136 Safe output signals of the drive part 2 .........1-97,
rapFeedRateOvrActive .............................. 1-143 ...................................................................1-189

I Index 07.05
Safe output signals part 2 ................. 1-97, 1-189 scalingSystemCounter..................................1-67

safeAcceptCheckPhase.................... 1-95, 1-187 Screenform
safeAcceptTestMode ........................ 1-95, 1-187 ACC files available..................................1-286
safeAcceptTestPhase ....................... 1-95, 1-187 Screenform for system frames .....................1-36
safeAcceptTestSE ............................ 1-95, 1-187 Search direction ..............................1-153, 1-155
safeAcceptTestState......................... 1-96, 1-187 Search pointer ..................... 1-152, 1-154, 1-156
safeActPosDiff .................................. 1-96, 1-188 Search string ...................................1-153, 1-156
safeActVeloDiff ................................. 1-96, 1-188 Search type .....................................1-154, 1-156
safeActVeloLimit ............................... 1-96, 1-188 searchString ....................................1-153, 1-156
safeDesVeloLimit .............................. 1-96, 1-188 searchType......................................1-154, 1-156
safeExtInpValNckBit .................................... 1-64 seekOffset ........................... 1-152, 1-154, 1-156
safeExtInpValNckWord ................................ 1-64 seekw ..............................................1-149, 1-152
safeExtInpValPlcBit...................................... 1-64 SEMA data accessible..................................1-68
safeExtInpValPlcWord ................................. 1-65 semaDataAvailable ......................................1-68
safeExtOutpValNckBit.................................. 1-65 seruproMasterChanNo ...............................1-136
safeExtOutpValNckWord ............................. 1-65 seruproMasterNcuNo .................................1-137
safeExtOutpValPlcBit................................... 1-65 Servo data 32-bit ........................................1-284
safeExtOutpValPlcWord .............................. 1-65 Servo data 64-bit ........................................1-284
safeFctEnable ................................... 1-96, 1-188 servoDataFl32 ............................................1-284
safeInputSig ...................................... 1-96, 1-188 servoDataFl64 ............................................1-284
safeInputSig2 .................................... 1-96, 1-188 Set of blocks from the current operation.....1-147
safeInputSigDrive.............................. 1-96, 1-188 Setpoint assignment ...................................1-276
safeInputSigDrive2............................ 1-97, 1-188 Setpoint cutting angle .................................1-117
safeIntInpValNckBit...................................... 1-65 Setpoint of axis-specific feedrate,.................1-87
safeIntInpValNckWord ................................. 1-65 Setpoint workpiece position angle ..............1-120
safeIntInpValPlcBit....................................... 1-65 Settable data management frame ..............1-120
safeIntInpValPlcWord .................................. 1-65 Settable value for INC_VAR .. 1-78, 1-170, 1-194
safeIntOutpValNckBit................................... 1-66 Settings for NCK tool management ..............1-25
safeIntOutpValNckWord .............................. 1-66 Set-up mode......................................1-91, 1-183
safeIntOutpValPlcBit .................................... 1-66 setupTime...................................................1-297
safeIntOutpValPlcWord................................ 1-66 SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by
safeMarkerNck............................................. 1-66 Reset .................................................1-95, 1-187
safeMarkerPlc .............................................. 1-66 siemData ............................. 1-269, 1-270, 1-273
safeMaxVeloDiff................................ 1-97, 1-188 siemEdgeData............................................1-271
safeMeasPos .................................... 1-97, 1-189 Siemens appl. tool cutting edge parameter 1-271
safeMeasPosDrive............................ 1-97, 1-189 Siemens application magazine data 1-270, 1-272
safeOutputSig ................................... 1-97, 1-189 Siemens application monitoring data..........1-273
safeOutputSig2 ................................. 1-97, 1-189 Siemens application tool parameter ...........1-269
safeOutputSigDrive........................... 1-97, 1-189 siemPlaceData ...........................................1-272
safeOutputSigDrive2......................... 1-97, 1-189 Signal from cycle to PLC ............................1-131
safePlcIn ...................................................... 1-66 Signal from PLC to cycle ............................1-130
safePlcOut ................................................... 1-66 Signals to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK)........2-363,
safeSplStatus............................................... 1-67 ...................................................................3-434
safeStopFDiagnosis........................ 1-213, 1-215 Signals to/from NCK channel (DB 21 -28) .2-345,
safeStopOtherAxis ............................ 1-97, 1-189 ...................................................................3-416
safeTimerNck............................................... 1-67 Sign-of-life error counter encoder 1 ............1-287
safeXcmpCmd ............................................. 1-67 Sign-of-life error counter encoder 2 ............1-287
safeXcmpLevel ............................................ 1-67 Sign-of-life error counter output..................1-287
safeXcmpState............................................. 1-67 simo611dSupport .........................................1-31
Save axial measuring point 1 ..................... 1-113 Simulated lead value - position..........1-81, 1-173
Save axial measuring point 2 ..................... 1-113 Simulated leading value velocity .......1-81, 1-173
Save axial measuring point 3 ..................... 1-114 Single axis status ..............................1-84, 1-176
Save axial measuring point 4 ..................... 1-114 Single block ................................................1-144
Save axial setpoint..................................... 1-114 Single block mode ......................................1-144
Save measuring point ................................ 1-118 Single block read in quasi-stop state..........1-149
scaleFact ......1-106, 1-107, 1-108, 1-166, 1-167, Single channel SI signal from NCK to PLC...1-66
........................................................ 1-205, 1-209 Single channel SI signal from PLC to NCK...1-66
Scaling factor ............................................. 1-167 singleBlock .................................................1-149
Scaling factor of a settable frame... 1-107, 1-108, singleBlockActive .......................................1-144
........................................................ 1-166, 1-205 singleBlockType .........................................1-144
Scaling factor of an active frame..... 1-106, 1-209 Size downwards in half locations................1-220

07.05 I Index
Size of DRAM file system no. 1.................... 1-69 Spindle type.............. 1-102, 1-105, 1-203, 1-208
Size of DRAM file system no. 2.................... 1-69 spindleType .............. 1-102, 1-105, 1-203, 1-208
Size of NCK alarm buffer ............................. 1-26 spinNoDress...............................................1-226
Size of SRAM file system............................. 1-69 SPL booting status .......................................1-67
Size to the left in half locations................... 1-220 splitBlock ....................................................1-137
Size to the right in half locations ................ 1-221 Start offset FFS ..........................................1-296
Size upwards in half locations.................... 1-221 Start offset of curr. PCMCIA access ...........1-296
skip ............................................................ 1-306 Starting angle for thread .............................1-278
Skip level /0 ............................................... 1-144 startLockState ............................................1-137
Skip level /1 ............................................... 1-144 startRejectCounter .....................................1-137
Skip level /2 ............................................... 1-144 startTriggerLock .........................................1-306
Skip level /3 ............................................... 1-144 Startup synchronization status ...................1-295
Skip level /4 ............................................... 1-144 State ...........................................................1-305
Skip level /5 ............................................... 1-144 State after travelling to fixed stop ......1-92, 1-184
Skip level /6 ............................................... 1-145 State of spindle rotation...... 1-102, 1-105, 1-204,
Skip level /7 ............................................... 1-145 ...................................................................1-208
Skip level /8 ............................................... 1-145 State of the binary inputs.................1-213, 1-215
Skip level /9 ............................................... 1-145 State of the DC link voltage ...............1-89, 1-181
skipLevel0Active ........................................ 1-144 State of the function generator ..........1-91, 1-183
skipLevel1Active ........................................ 1-144 State of the magazine.................................1-231
skipLevel2Active ........................................ 1-144 State of the probing function..............1-93, 1-185
skipLevel3Active ........................................ 1-144 State of trace channel 1.....................1-98, 1-190
skipLevel7Active ........................................ 1-145 State var. PI Service auto. set-up of asyn. motor
skipLevel8Active ........................................ 1-145 ..........................................................1-86, 1-178
skipLevel9Active ........................................ 1-145 status... 1-77, 1-102, 1-105, 1-154, 1-156, 1-168,
Slave active on bus or not (LED green) ..... 1-291 ................................. 1-170, 1-193, 1-203, 1-208
Slave data are available............................. 1-291 Status access to PCMCIA card ..................1-296
Slot information is available ....................... 1-293 Status array for the wait marker .................1-132
Slot number within the slave ...................... 1-293 Status encoder 1 driver ..............................1-286
Smoothing the desired value of the rotary speed Status encoder 2 driver ..............................1-286
.......................................................... 1-91, 1-183 Status information torque limitation ...1-99, 1-191
Software end position, negative direction ... 1-84, Status of axis container ..............................1-115
................................................................... 1-176 Status of block SPARPI..............................1-154
Software end position, positive direction..... 1-84, Status of ForceControl function .........1-91, 1-183
................................................................... 1-176 Status of output drivers...............................1-286
Source location number new tool............... 1-127 Status of power enable......................1-99, 1-191
Source location number old tool................. 1-127 Status of slots.............................................1-293
Source magazine new tool......................... 1-127 Status of the auxiliary function....................1-168
Source magazine old tool .......................... 1-127 Status of the global start disable ................1-137
Source of the lead value ................... 1-81, 1-173 Status slave axis with lead value coupling...1-84,
spec ....................................... 1-97, 1-189, 1-200 ...................................................................1-176
Specification of channel for SERUPRO .... 1-153, stepEditorFormName .................................1-149
................................................................... 1-156 Stop in curr.progr.area is effect.after a delay.......
specParts ................................................... 1-137 ...................................................................1-131
Speed setpoint ............................................. 1-87 Stop on another axis .........................1-97, 1-189
Speed, setpoint .......................................... 1-214 Stop run active ...........................................1-139
speedLimit ................1-102, 1-104, 1-203, 1-208 stopCond ....................................................1-138
speedOvr ..................1-102, 1-104, 1-203, 1-208 stopCondPar ..............................................1-139
Spindle mode ............1-102, 1-104, 1-202, 1-207 stopRunActive ............................................1-139
Spindle name ............1-101, 1-104, 1-202, 1-207 stopRunCounter .........................................1-139
Spindle override ........1-102, 1-104, 1-203, 1-208 stopTriggerLock..........................................1-306
Spindle position.........1-100, 1-103, 1-201, 1-206 Stored axial dist.-to-go in WCS after DELDTG....
Spindle speed limitation ............................. 1-279 ...................................................................1-195
Spindle speed, actual value 1-100, 1-103, 1-201, Stored distance-to-go of the path in the WCS .....
................................................................... 1-206 ...................................................................1-115
Spindle speed, desired value ......... 1-101, 1-104, Strategy wear group ...................................1-228
........................................................ 1-202, 1-207 strokeNr......................................................1-165
Spindle state .............1-102, 1-105, 1-203, 1-208 Strokes per minute .....................................1-164

I Index 07.05
Subroutine call counter, desired value ....... 1-151 tcCarr24......................................................1-256

subSpec................................. 1-98, 1-189, 1-200 tcCarr25......................................................1-256
Subspecification................................ 1-98, 1-189 tcCarr26......................................................1-256
Subspecification for indexing axis .............. 1-200 tcCarr27......................................................1-256
subType ..................................................... 1-193 tcCarr28......................................................1-256
SUG programming active.... 1-101, 1-104, 1-202, tcCarr29......................................................1-256
................................................................... 1-207 tcCarr3........................................................1-256
Sum of compensation values ............ 1-86, 1-178 tcCarr30......................................................1-256
Sum of current gross runtime..................... 1-285 tcCarr31......................................................1-256
Sum of current net runtime ........................ 1-285 tcCarr32......................................................1-257
Sum of maximum gross runtime ................ 1-295 tcCarr33......................................................1-257
Sum of maximum net runtime .................... 1-295 tcCarr34......................................................1-257
Sum of minimum gross runtime ................. 1-295 tcCarr35......................................................1-257
Sum of minimum net runtimes ................... 1-296 tcCarr36......................................................1-257
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 1 .. tcCarr37......................................................1-257
.......................................................... 1-91, 1-183 tcCarr38......................................................1-257
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 2 tcCarr39......................................................1-258
.......................................................... 1-91, 1-183 tcCarr4........................................................1-258
Supplement to stopCond ........................... 1-139 tcCarr40......................................................1-258
suppProgFunc............................................ 1-139 tcCarr41......................................................1-258
Suppression of language commands......... 1-139 tcCarr42......................................................1-258
suppressProtLock ...................................... 1-306 tcCarr43......................................................1-258
Sval............................................................ 1-159 tcCarr44......................................................1-258
swLicensePIN .............................................. 1-68 tcCarr45......................................................1-258
Synchronous run difference with sign ........ 1-142 tcCarr46......................................................1-258
System frame bit screen form .................... 1-117 tcCarr5........................................................1-258
systemFrameMask....................................... 1-36 tcCarr55......................................................1-259
sysTimeBCD ................................................ 1-68 tcCarr56......................................................1-259
sysTimeNCSC ............................................. 1-68 tcCarr57......................................................1-259
sysTimeSinceStartup ................................... 1-68 tcCarr58......................................................1-259
SZS setpoint value (C) incl. override tcCarr59......................................................1-259
components ............................................... 1-173 tcCarr6........................................................1-259
SZS setpoint value (N) incl. override tcCarr60......................................................1-259
components ................................................. 1-81 tcCarr64......................................................1-259
tcCarr65......................................................1-259
tcCarr7........................................................1-259
T tcCarr8........................................................1-259
tcCarr9........................................................1-260
T number ................................................... 1-128 terminalState ...................................1-213, 1-215
T_mapc [s,s,userdef] ................................. 1-290 Text for logging buffer...................................1-36
Tadr ........................................................... 1-159 textIndex.................................... 1-72, 1-74, 1-76
Target location number new tool................ 1-127 T-function value..........................................1-160
Target location number old tool.................. 1-127 threadPitch .................................................1-139
Target magazine new tool.......................... 1-127 threadPitchS...............................................1-139
Target magazine old tool ........................... 1-127 Ti [s,s,userdef]............................................1-290
tcCarr1 ....................................................... 1-254 Time .............................................................1-68
tcCarr10 ..................................................... 1-254 Time after a block change in IPO cycles ....1-140
tcCarr11 ..................................................... 1-254 Time after a block change in seconds ........1-140
tcCarr12 ..................................................... 1-254 Time base...................................................1-306
tcCarr13 ..................................................... 1-254 Time from begin. of block in interpolation cycles
tcCarr14 ..................................................... 1-254 ...................................................................1-123
tcCarr15 ..................................................... 1-254 Time from the beginning of the block in seconds
tcCarr16 ..................................................... 1-255 ...................................................................1-123
tcCarr17 ..................................................... 1-255 Time since default boot ..............................1-297
tcCarr18 ..................................................... 1-255 Time since NCK ramp-up .............................1-68
tcCarr19 ..................................................... 1-255 Time since normal boot ..............................1-297
tcCarr2 ....................................................... 1-255 Time stamp................................ 1-72, 1-74, 1-76
tcCarr20 ..................................................... 1-255 Time variable in seconds............................1-123
tcCarr21 ..................................................... 1-255 timeBCD .................................... 1-72, 1-74, 1-76
tcCarr22 ..................................................... 1-255 timeOrRevolDwell.......................................1-140
tcCarr23 ..................................................... 1-255 timePeriod ..................................................1-306

07.05 I Index
timeS.......................................................... 1-140 Total travel path of an axis ................1-85, 1-177

timeSC ....................................................... 1-140 Total travel path of an axis at high speed ....1-85,
T-number ................................................... 1-238 ...................................................................1-177
TnumWZV.................................................. 1-237 Total traverse processes of an axis ...1-84, 1-176
To [s,s,userdef] .......................................... 1-290 Total traverse processes of an axis at high
toNo ............................................................. 1-36 speed.................................................1-85, 1-177
Tool base distance-to-go ....... 1-78, 1-170, 1-193 Total traverse processes of an axis with jerk.......
Tool base position............................. 1-77, 1-192 ..........................................................1-81, 1-173
Tool base position setpoint .......................... 1-77 Total traverse time of an axis ............1-85, 1-177
Tool base REPOS.................. 1-78, 1-170, 1-194 Total traverse time of an axis at high speed ........
Tool carrier status ...................................... 1-135 ..........................................................1-85, 1-177
Tool edge number...................................... 1-118 Total traverse time of an axis with jerk ........1-81,
Tool identifier ....................... 1-219, 1-238, 1-252 ...................................................................1-173
Tool information for MMC .......................... 1-219 Total user memory in bytes ..........................1-68
Tool length ................................................. 1-119 Total value of overlaid motion............1-83, 1-175
Tool number............................................... 1-119 totalDirectorys ..............................................1-68
Tool operating time ( in seconds ).............. 1-298 totalFiles .......................................................1-68
Tool orientation .......................................... 1-136 totalMem.......................................................1-68
Tool search strategy during tool change .... 1-231 totalMemDram..............................................1-68
Tool setting ................................................ 1-119 totalMemDram2PassF..................................1-69
Tool state ................................................... 1-221 totalMemDramPassF....................................1-69
toolBaseDistToGo.................. 1-78, 1-170, 1-193 totalMemFfs..................................................1-69
toolBaseREPOS .................... 1-78, 1-170, 1-194 totalMemSramPassF ....................................1-69
toolChangeMfunc......................................... 1-32 totalParts ....................................................1-141
toolCounter ................................................ 1-140 totalProtokolFiles ..........................................1-69
toolCounterC.............................................. 1-140 Touch probe has switched..........................1-117
toolCounterM ............................................. 1-140 TPreSelAdr.................................................1-159
toolEdgeCenterDistToGo........................... 1-194 TPreSelVal .................................................1-159
toolEdgeCenterREPOS ............................. 1-194 traceProtocolActive ......................................1-69
Toolholder name ........................................ 1-257 traceProtocolLock.........................................1-69
Toolholder number of solutions.................. 1-135 traceState1 ........................................1-98, 1-190
toolHolderData ........................................... 1-141 traceState2 ........................................1-98, 1-190
toolIdent ............................... 1-219, 1-238, 1-252 traceState3 ........................................1-98, 1-190
toolInfo ....................................................... 1-219 traceState4 ........................................1-98, 1-190
toolInMag ............................. 1-219, 1-238, 1-252 traceStopAction ............................................1-69
toolInPlace ........................... 1-220, 1-238, 1-252 trackErrContr .....................................1-98, 1-190
toolMon ...................................................... 1-220 trackErrDiff ........................................1-99, 1-190
toolMyMag ................................................. 1-220 transfActive.................................................1-141
toolMyPlace ............................................... 1-220 Transformation active .................................1-141
toolNo ............................................. 1-238, 1-253 Transformed edge offset value (cuttEdgeParam)
toolplace_spec ........................................... 1-220 ...................................................................1-268
toolSearch.................................................. 1-220 Transformed edge offset value (edgeData) 1-268
toolsize_down ............................................ 1-220 Transformed location-dependent setup offset .....
toolsize_left ................................................ 1-220 ...................................................................1-262
toolsize_right.............................................. 1-221 Transformed location-dependent wear offset ......
toolsize_upper............................................ 1-221 ...................................................................1-266
toolState..................................................... 1-221 Translation..................................................1-167
torqLimit ............................................ 1-98, 1-189 Translation of a settable frame .......1-107, 1-108,
Torque limitation value...................... 1-98, 1-189 ........................................................1-166, 1-205
Total axial override f. motion-synchronous Translation of an active frame .........1-106, 1-209
actions ....................................................... 1-176 Translation of an external frame.................1-210
total DRAM in bytes ..................................... 1-68 Translation reference system .....................1-142
Total length in bytes PCMCIA card ............ 1-296 Transmitted message frame.......................1-294
Total number of real magazine locations ... 1-227 transSys .....................................................1-142
Total number total offsets in NCK ................ 1-27 Traversing direction ....................................1-131
Total of all machined workpieces ............... 1-141 trialRunActive .............................................1-145
Total override for motion-synchronous actions ... turnState................... 1-102, 1-105, 1-204, 1-208
..................................................................... 1-84 Tval.............................................................1-160
Total path override for synchronized actions ...... type ................. 1-99, 1-168, 1-190, 1-200, 1-301
................................................................... 1-124 Type and state of the synchronous action .1-160,
Total runtime NC programs........................ 1-300 ...................................................................1-161

I Index 07.05
Type of actual value sensing ..................... 1-276 Value of HW analog input.............................1-53

Type of D-number programming .................. 1-32 Value of HW digital input ..............................1-56
Type of setpoint output .............................. 1-276 Value of HW digital output ............................1-56
Type of the active block in the interpolator. 1-128 Value of the current D-number ...................1-158
Type of the auxiliary function ..................... 1-168 Value of the E-function ...............................1-158
Type of the magazine ................................ 1-231 Value of the H-function ...............................1-159
Type of tool monitoring .............................. 1-220 Value of the M-function...............................1-159
Type of tool search .................................... 1-228 Value of the preselected T-function ............1-159
Type of tool search for replacement tools .. 1-220 Value of the S-function. ..............................1-159
typeOfCuttingEdge....................................... 1-32 Value of tthe superimposition in the tool directio
typStatus ......................................... 1-160, 1-161 ...................................................................1-196
valueDo ......................................................1-168
valueLo.......................................................1-168
U Variable incremental value for JOG mode..1-277
varIncrVal .............................. 1-78, 1-170, 1-194
Unique hardware number of the NCU.......... 1-58 vaTorqueAtLimit ................................1-99, 1-191
Unique hardware number of the NCU (long) 1-58 vaVactm ............................................1-99, 1-191
unit ............................................................. 1-301 Vector circular plane block search..............1-147
Unit for service values of the drives .. 1-93, 1-185 Vector of circular plane...............................1-147
Unit of axial feedrate .................................. 1-198 Version of DP Master software...................1-294
Unit of measurement.................................. 1-119
Unit of the axis-specific feedrate ....... 1-87, 1-179
Upload buffer for display blocks ................. 1-146 W
Upper boundary of protection zone, applicate ....
..................................................................... 1-48 WCS setpoint value including override
Upper limit nth polynominal for synchronous components................................................1-195
action ......................................................... 1-116 Without function..........................................1-156
Upper limit of protection zone, applicate ...... 1-41 Working area limitation active in the negative dir
Used DRAM in bytes.................................... 1-70 ...................................................................1-279
Used memory in bytes ................................. 1-70 Working area limitation active in the positive dir
usedDirectorys ............................................. 1-69 ...................................................................1-279
usedFiles ..................................................... 1-69 Working area limitation in the negative direction
usedMem ..................................................... 1-70 ...................................................................1-279
usedMemDram ............................................ 1-70 Working area limitation in the positive direction...
usedMemDram2PassF ................................ 1-70 ...................................................................1-280
usedMemDramPassF .................................. 1-70 workPandProgName .......................1-149, 1-152
usedMemFfs ................................................ 1-70 Workpiece and program name ........1-149, 1-152
usedMemSramPassF .................................. 1-70 Workpiece measurement semaphore.........1-119
usedOptionsNotLicensed............................. 1-70 Workpiece name ...... 1-150, 1-152, 1-154, 1-157
usedProtokolFiles ........................................ 1-70 Workpiece name abbreviated.........1-149, 1-152,
User data for monitoring a cutting edge ..... 1-249 ........................................................1-154, 1-156
User unit table.............................................. 1-32 Workpiece or tool-related protection zone ...1-43,
userData ......................................... 1-247, 1-249 .....................................................................1-50
User-defined cutting edge parameter......... 1-224 Workpiece position angle ...........................1-120
User-defined tool parameters..................... 1-223 Workpiece requirement ..............................1-136
userPlaceData ........................................... 1-248 workPName.............. 1-149, 1-152, 1-154, 1-156
userScale ..................................................... 1-32 workPNameLong...... 1-150, 1-152, 1-154, 1-157
Utilization ................................................... 1-215
X
V
x component of offset vector l1...................1-254
vaDistTorque..................................... 1-99, 1-191 x component of offset vector l2...................1-258
vaDpActTel .................................................. 1-70 x component of offset vector l3...................1-254
vaDpe ............................................... 1-99, 1-191 x component of offset vector l4...................1-255
vaEgSyncDiff ............................................. 1-142 x component of rotary axis v1.....................1-259
vaEgSyncDiffS ........................................... 1-142 x component of rotary axis v2.....................1-254
vaIm .................................................. 1-99, 1-191 X component of tool in WCS ......................1-124
vaIm1 ................................................ 1-99, 1-191
vaIm2 ................................................ 1-99, 1-191
Validity bits................................................. 1-120

07.05 I Index
Y Z
y component of offset vector l1 .................. 1-255 z component of offset vector l1...................1-256

y component of rotary axis v1 .................... 1-259 z component of rotary axis v1.....................1-260
y component of rotary axis v2 .................... 1-254 z component of rotary axis v2.....................1-254
Y component of tool in WCS ...................... 1-124 Z component of tool in WCS.......................1-124
ZK1PO register image ................................1-214
ZK1RES register image..............................1-214

I Index 07.05
Notes

Suggestions
Siemens AG Corrections
For Publication/Manual:
A&D MC BMS
P. O. Box 3180 SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/840Di/810D
SIMODRIVE 611 digital/Sinamics
D-91050 Erlangen Lists
Federal Republic of Germany

Tel. +49 180 / 5050 – 222 [Hotline] Manufacturer/Service documentation
Fax +49 9131 / 98 – 63315[Documentation]
E-Mail: mailto:motioncontrol.docu@siemens.com
From Lists (2nd Book)
Name: Order No.: 6FC5 397-3CP10-0BA0
07.05 Edition
Company/Dept.
Should you come across any printing errors
Address: when reading this publication, please notify us
____________ on this sheet. Suggestions for improvements
are also welcome.
Telephone: __________ /
Telefax: ________ /
Suggestions and/or corrections

Overview of documentation SINUMERIK 840D sl (07/2005)
General Documentation
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINAMICS

840D sl S120
Brochure Catalog NC 61 *) Catalog

D21.2 Servo Control *)
User Documentation
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

840D sl 840D sl 840D sl 840D sl 840D sl
840D 840D 840D 840D
840Di 840Di 840Di 840Di
810D 810D 810D 810D
Operator’s Guide Operator’s Guide Program. Guide Program. Guide Diagnostics–

– HMI Embedded *) – HMI Advanced *) – Fundamentals *) – Cycles Guide *)
– ShopMill – Short Guide – Advance *) – Measuring cycles
– ShopTurn – Short Guide
– Lists System Variable
– ISO Turning/Milling
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

840D sl 840D sl 840D sl 840D sl
840D
840Di
810D
Manual Manual Installation & Lists *)

NCU *) Operator– Start–up Guide CNC *) – Part 1
Components *) – Part 1 NCK, PLC, drive – Part 2
– Part 2 HMI
– Part 3 ShopMill
– Part 4 ShopTurn
– Part 5 Basesoftware
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINAMICS SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

840D sl 840D sl S120 840D sl 840D sl
840D 840D 840D
840Di 840Di 840Di
810D 810D 810D
Description of Description of Description of Description of EMV Guidelines

Functions Functions Fuctions Functions
– Basic Machine *) _ Synchronized Drive Function Safety Integrated
– Extended Functions Actions
– Spacial Functions – ISO–Dialects
Electronic Documentation
SINUMERIK
SINAMICS
Motoren
DOCONCD *)
DOCONWEB
*) These Documents are a minimum requirement
Overview of documentation SINUMERIK 840D/840D/810D (07/2005)
General Documentation
Safety
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK Integrated
840D
840Di
810D
Brochure Catalog NC 60 *) Safety Integrated

Application Manual
Anwender–Dokumentation
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

840D 840D sl 840D sl 840D sl 840D sl 840Di
840Di 840D 840D 840D 840D
810D 840Di 840Di 840Di 840Di
810D 810D 810D 810D
Operator’s Guide Operator’s Guide Program. Guide Program. Guide Diagnostics– Systemoverview
– HMI Embedded *) – HMI Advanced *) – Fundamentals *) – Cycles guide *)
– ShopMill – Short Guide – Advance*) – Measuring Cycles
– ShopTurn – Short Guide
– HT6 – Lists System Variable
– ISO Turning/Milling
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

840D 840D 840Di 840D sl
840Di 840Di 840D
810D 810D 840Di
810D
Configuring (HW) *) Manual Installation & Description of Installation & Lists *)

– 840D Operator– Start–up Guide *) Functions Start–up Guide – Part 1
– 810D Components *) – 840D – ShopMill – Part 2
– 810D – ShopTurn
– HMI
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK
840D sl 840D 840D 840D 840D 840D
840D 840Di 840Di 810D 810D
840Di 810D 810D
810D
Description of Description of Description of Description of Configuring Kit MCIS

Functions Functions Functions Functions – Operator – Computer Link
– Basic Machine *) – Linear motor – Remote Safety Integrated Interface OP030 – Tool Data Information
– Extended Functions – Tool Mgmt. Diagnosis – HMI Embedded System
– Special Functions – Hydraulics – @Event – NC Data Mgmt.
– Synchronized Modules – NC Data Transfer
Actions – Analog Modules – Tool Data
– ISO–Dialects Communication
– EMV–Guidelines
Electronic Documentation
SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
Motoren
DOCONCD *)
DOCONWEB
*) This documents are a minimum requirement

LIS2 - 0705 - en 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LIS2 - 0705 - en 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LIS2 - 0705 - en 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lists 07/2005 Edition

SINUMERIK 840D sl/840D/810D/840Di

SINUMERIK 840D sl/ Interface Signals pl 3

Controls Software version

Status codes in the "Remarks" column.

A .... New documentation.

Edition Order No. Remarks

07.05 6FC5 397-3CP10-0BA0 A

Other functions not described in this documentation might be

We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005. Subject to change without prior notice.

Order No. 6FC5 397-3CP10-0BA0 Siemens-Aktiengesellschaft.

The table of contents refers to the present Volume 2.

The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in three parts:

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005

Trademarks IBM® is a registered trademark of the International Business Corporation. MS-

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005

1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................... 1-16

1.2 System data .................................................................................................. 1-24

1.3 State data of system ..................................................................................... 1-52

1.4 State data of channel .................................................................................... 1-111

1.5 State data of axes ......................................................................................... 1-169

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005

1.6 State data of drives ....................................................................................... 1-211

1.7 Tool and magazine data ............................................................................... 1-216

1.8 Machine and setting data .............................................................................. 1-274

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005

1.8.5 Area A, Mod. SE: Axis-specific setting data .............................................. 1-279

1.9 Parameters.................................................................................................... 1-281

1.10 Servo ........................................................................................................... 1-283

1.11 Diagnosis data ............................................................................................ 1-285

1.12 HMI / MMC State data................................................................................. 1-307

2 Interface Signals solution line ................................................................................. 2-309

2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface.......................................... 2-311

3 Interface Signals power line..................................................................................... 3-379

3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface.......................................... 3-381

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005

3.2.7 Signals to NC (DB 10) ............................................................................ 3-393

4 PLC-Blocks ................................................................................................................ 4-449

4.1 Overview of organization blocks ................................................................... 4-450

4.2 Overview of function blocks .......................................................................... 4-451

4.3 Assignment of data blocks ............................................................................ 4-453

4.4 Assigned timers............................................................................................. 4-454

I Index ............................................................................................................................ I-457

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005

1.2 System data .................................................................................................. 1-24

1.3 State data of system ..................................................................................... 1-52

1.4 State data of channel .................................................................................... 1-111

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005

1.4.12 Area C, Mod. FB: Channel-specific base frames..................................... 1-166

1.5 State data of axes ......................................................................................... 1-169

1.6 State data of drives ....................................................................................... 1-211

1.7 Tool and magazine data ............................................................................... 1-216

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005

1.8 Machine and setting data .............................................................................. 1-274

1.9 Parameters.................................................................................................... 1-281

1.10 Servo ........................................................................................................... 1-283